Aspen Capital Cost Estimator Users Guide PDF

Aspen Capital Cost Estimator
User’s Guide
Version Number: V8.0
December 2012
Copyright (c) 2001-2012 by Aspen Technology, Inc.All rights reserved.
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator, the aspen leaf logo and Plantelligence and Enterprise Optimization are trademarks or
registered trademarks of Aspen Technology, Inc., Burlington, MA.
All other brand and product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies.
This document is intended as a guide to using AspenTech's software. This documentation contains AspenTech
proprietary and confidential information and may not be disclosed, used, or copied without the prior consent of
AspenTech or as set forth in the applicable license agreement. Users are solely responsible for the proper use of
the software and the application of the results obtained.
Although AspenTech has tested the software and reviewed the documentation, the sole warranty for the software
may be found in the applicable license agreement between AspenTech and the user. ASPENTECH MAKES NO
WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, WITH RESPECT TO THIS DOCUMENTATION,
ITS QUALITY, PERFORMANCE, MERCHANTABILITY, OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
Aspen Technology, Inc.

200 Wheeler Road
Burlington, MA 01803-5501
USA
Phone: 781 221-6400
Toll Free: 888 996-7100
URL: http://www.aspentech.com
Contents
Contents..................................................................................................................3
Introducing Aspen Capital Cost Estimator .............................................................13

Main Features ................................................................................................ 13
Detailed EPC Estimates ......................................................................... 13
CPM Schedules .................................................................................... 13
Information Tracking ............................................................................ 14
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator Project Workflow .................................................. 14
The Guide ..................................................................................................... 14
Organization ........................................................................................ 14
Related Documentation ................................................................................... 15
Installation Notes ................................................................................. 15
Known Issues and Workarounds............................................................. 15
New Features in Aspen Economic Evaluation V8.0 .................................... 16
Icarus Reference .................................................................................. 16
Piping and Instrumentation Drawings ..................................................... 16
Technical Support .......................................................................................... 16
1 Getting Started...................................................................................................17
Starting Aspen Capital Cost Estimator............................................................... 17
Starting a Project Scenario .................................................................... 20
Creating a New Project Scenario ............................................................ 20
Importing a Project Scenario ................................................................. 24
Opening an Existing Project Scenario ................................................................ 26
Palette Shortcut ................................................................................... 27
Working with Templates.................................................................................. 28
Adding a Template ............................................................................... 28
Creating a Project by Importing a Template............................................. 28
Understanding the Icarus Interface .................................................................. 29
Project Explorer ................................................................................... 30
Main Window ....................................................................................... 32
Palette ................................................................................................ 35
Customizing the Icarus Interface............................................................ 41
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator Toolbar...................................................... 43
Run Menu............................................................................................ 45
View Menu .......................................................................................... 46
Tools Menu.......................................................................................... 46
Window Menu ...................................................................................... 47
Contents 3
Help Menu ........................................................................................... 48
Working with Project Scenarios ........................................................................ 48
Saving Project Scenarios ....................................................................... 48
Deleting Project Scenarios ..................................................................... 49
Salvaging Project Scenarios................................................................... 50
Unlocking Project Scenarios................................................................... 51
Copying Project Directories.............................................................................. 52
Preferences ................................................................................................... 52
General............................................................................................... 53
Forms ................................................................................................. 54
Spreadsheet Views ............................................................................... 55
Backup ............................................................................................... 55
Process ............................................................................................... 56
Locations ............................................................................................ 56
Logging............................................................................................... 57
Unit Costs ........................................................................................... 58
Start Page ........................................................................................... 59
Logging............................................................................................... 62
Schedule ............................................................................................. 62
Importing and Exporting Spreadsheets ............................................................. 62
Accessing the Spreadsheet Import/Export Feature ................................... 62
Exporting Spreadsheets ........................................................................ 64
Importing Spreadsheets ........................................................................ 66
Spreadsheet Structure .......................................................................... 67
Features Common to All Worksheets....................................................... 68
Features for Specific Worksheets............................................................ 70
Instructions for Working with Spreadsheets ............................................. 70
Fixing Spreadsheet Errors ..................................................................... 71
Using Custom User Attributes with Spreadsheet Data Exporting ................. 71
2 Defining the Project Basis ..................................................................................73

Project Properties........................................................................................... 74
General Project Data ...................................................................................... 75
Basis for Capital Costs .................................................................................... 76
Input Units of Measure Customization ..................................................... 77
Electrical Specs .................................................................................... 80
Output (Reports) Units of Measure Customization .................................... 82
Design Basis ........................................................................................ 83
Contingency and Miscellaneous Project Costs......................................... 111
Escalation ......................................................................................... 112
Engineering Workforce ........................................................................ 114
Construction Workforce....................................................................... 120
Code of Accounts ............................................................................... 128
Overriding Code of Accounts at the Component Level ............................. 133
Choosing between the Icarus Code of Accounts and User Code of Accounts at
the Component Level .......................................................................... 135
Indexing ........................................................................................... 135
Equipment Rental............................................................................... 142
Systems............................................................................................ 144
Contracts .......................................................................................... 151
Importing old Standard basis files .................................................................. 160
Merging Projects .......................................................................................... 161
4 Contents
Merging Areas Into Projects........................................................................... 161
Customer External Files ................................................................................ 162
Project Execution Schedule Settings ............................................................... 163
Adjusting Schedule and Barcharts ........................................................ 164
Setting Delivery Times for Equipment Classes........................................ 165
Scheduling Individual Project Components ............................................ 166
Adding Bar Chart Items....................................................................... 167
IPS Project Schedule Settings ........................................................................ 168
Using Aspen Icarus Project Scheduling Features in the Aspen Capital Cost
Estimator Environment ....................................................................... 168
Schedule Appearance Adjustments ....................................................... 169
Schedule Adjustments by Duration ....................................................... 173
Schedule Adjustments by Activity and Logic .......................................... 178
Primavera Information ........................................................................ 188
Process Design............................................................................................. 190
Simulator Type and Simulator File Name ............................................... 190
Simulator Units of Measure Mapping Specs............................................ 190
Project Component Map Specifications .................................................. 193
Default Simulator Mapping Specs ......................................................... 194
Design Criteria................................................................................... 199
Utility Specifications ........................................................................... 212
Investment Analysis ..................................................................................... 216
Investment Parameters....................................................................... 216
Operating Unit Costs........................................................................... 221
Raw Material Specifications ................................................................. 222
Product Specifications ......................................................................... 225
Developing Streams ..................................................................................... 228
Viewing or Modifying an Existing Stream ............................................... 229
Mixture Specs Dialog Box .................................................................... 232
Estimation of Utility Usage and Resulting Costs in Aspen Capital Cost
Estimator .......................................................................................... 233
Stream Connectivity ........................................................................... 234
Creating A New Stream....................................................................... 234
Deleting a Stream .............................................................................. 237
Specification Libraries ................................................................................... 238
Customizing Specification Libraries ....................................................... 238
Customizing Steel Costs Using an External File ...................................... 243
Selecting Specification File for Use in a Project....................................... 248
Changing File Directory Location .......................................................... 248
Instrument Field Hook-Up Customization......................................................... 249
Using the Plot Plan Layout Tool ...................................................................... 252
Workflow for Plot Plan Layout Tool: ...................................................... 253
3 Loading and Mapping Simulation Data .............................................................257

Overview..................................................................................................... 257
Preparing Simulation Reports......................................................................... 257
AspenPlus Report Generation............................................................... 258
AspenPlus – Aspen Process Economic Analyzer Simulator link .................. 261
ChemCAD Report Generation ............................................................... 262
HYSIM Report Generation.................................................................... 263
HYSYS – Aspen Process Economic Analyzer Simulator link ....................... 265
SimSci’s PRO/II with PROVISION Report Generation ............................... 266
Contents 5
Loading Simulation Data ............................................................................... 268
Viewing Data Derived from Simulator ................................................... 270
Working with Block Flow Diagrams ................................................................. 271
Displaying the Block Flow Diagram ....................................................... 271
The Drag & Find Feature ..................................................................... 272
Accessing Commands in the Block Flow Diagram.................................... 273
Zooming ........................................................................................... 273
BlockFlow Diagram View Menu ............................................................. 275
Mapping Simulator Items to Icarus Project Components.................................... 276
Component Status.............................................................................. 281
Deleting Mappings.............................................................................. 281
Tower Configurations .................................................................................... 282
Sizing Selection ........................................................................................... 292
Project Sizing Selection................................................................................. 292
Specifying Additional Components .................................................................. 294
Working with Process Flow Diagrams .............................................................. 294
Editing the Layout .............................................................................. 295
Process Flow Diagram View Menu ......................................................... 295
Setting Grid Properties........................................................................ 298
Editing Connectivity............................................................................ 298
Adding a Stream ................................................................................ 300
Drawing a Disconnected Stream........................................................... 302
Working with Streams......................................................................... 303
4 Defining Report Groups, Areas, and Project Components .................................305

Adding a Report Group.................................................................................. 305
Adding an Area ............................................................................................ 306
Copying a Report Area over another Report Area ............................................. 307
Defining Area Specifications........................................................................... 308
Method 1: Defining area specifications using Project View ....................... 308
Method 2: Defining area specifications using Spreadsheet View................ 310
Adding and Defining Pipeline Areas................................................................. 311
Adding a Project Component.......................................................................... 312
Method 1: Dragging a Component from the Palette ................................ 312
Method 2: Using the Pop-up Menu........................................................ 313
Entering Component Specifications................................................................. 315
Defining Installation Bulks ............................................................................. 317
Mat’l/Man-hours Adjustments .............................................................. 318
Mat’l/Man-hours Additions ................................................................... 322
Pipe – General Specs .......................................................................... 322
Pipe – Item Details ............................................................................. 323
Duct ................................................................................................. 325
Civil.................................................................................................. 325
Steel ................................................................................................ 325
Instrumentation ................................................................................. 326
Electrical ........................................................................................... 329
Insulation.......................................................................................... 329
Paint................................................................................................. 329
Quoted Cost Items ............................................................................. 329
Importing Areas and Components .................................................................. 330
Importing an Entire Scenario ......................................................................... 331
Copying Components .................................................................................... 332
6 Contents
Cut and Paste .................................................................................... 332
Drag and Drop ................................................................................... 332
Modifying Components.................................................................................. 332
Copying Areas ............................................................................................. 333
Deleting Components.................................................................................... 334
Re-numbering Components ................................................................. 334
Deleting Areas ............................................................................................. 335
Re-numbering Areas ........................................................................... 335
Using the Custom Model Tool......................................................................... 335
Creating a Template ........................................................................... 339
Running the Custom Model Tool at Project-Level for Batch Update............ 340
5 Sizing Project Components...............................................................................343

Overview..................................................................................................... 343
Sizing for Project Components Mapped from Simulator Items .................. 343
Interactive Sizing Expert ..................................................................... 344
Sizing for Project Components Not Mapped from Simulator Items ............ 345
Resizing Project Components ............................................................... 345
Creating Streams to Connect to Equipment Items ............................................ 346
Using the Interactive Sizing Form................................................................... 349
Utility Resources ................................................................................ 352
Global Sizing Selection.................................................................................. 356
Sizing Areas ................................................................................................ 358
Sizing Requirements, Calculations, and Defaults .............................................. 360
Air Coolers ........................................................................................ 360
Agitated Tanks................................................................................... 362
Compressors ..................................................................................... 363
Crushers ........................................................................................... 364
Crystallizers....................................................................................... 365
Dryers .............................................................................................. 365
Dust Collectors .................................................................................. 366
Filters ............................................................................................... 367
Heat Exchangers ................................................................................ 367
Pumps .............................................................................................. 370
Screens ............................................................................................ 372
Towers.............................................................................................. 373
Vessels ............................................................................................. 385
6 Piping and Instrumentation Models .................................................................393

Overview..................................................................................................... 393
Using the P&ID Editor ................................................................................... 393
Features of P&IDs .............................................................................. 393
P&ID Modes....................................................................................... 393
P&ID Layout and Structure .................................................................. 394
The Aspen Capital Cost Estimator PID Layout: Radpfs Interface ............... 396
Working with Ports ............................................................................. 399
Editing P&IDs .................................................................................... 401
Adding Instrumentation Loops ............................................................. 404
Efficient PID Creation.......................................................................... 409
Cosmetic Tips .................................................................................... 410
Custom Equipment Symbols ................................................................ 413
Modifying a system equipment symbol.................................................. 414
Contents 7
Importing an equipment symbol........................................................... 414
Creating an equipment symbol from scratch .......................................... 415
Line sizing Tutorial ............................................................................. 416
Using Custom P&ID’s in Aspen Capital Cost Estimator ............................. 420
Working with Non-Graphic P&ID Data ............................................................. 425
Saving Component Information as Non-Graphical P&ID........................... 425
Creating Non-Graphical P&ID Libraries Outside a Project ......................... 425
Importing External P&ID Data........................................................................ 426
Interconnecting Volumetric P&ID Lines............................................................ 431
Open a Aspen Capital Cost Estimator project ......................................... 431
Run Interconnect Piping Lines .............................................................. 431
Connecting Piping Lines ...................................................................... 432
Disconnecting Piping Lines................................................................... 433
Renaming a Line Tag .......................................................................... 434
Saving All Connections and (optionally) Updating the Project ................... 435
Getting the Connected Line List Report ................................................. 435
Mapping Streams to Piping Lines .................................................................... 436
Importing 3D Piping and Structure Data Using the SmartPlant 3D–Aspen Icarus
Interface ..................................................................................................... 436
Overview........................................................................................... 437
Step 1: Exporting Data from SmartPlant 3D .......................................... 437
Step 2: Importing the data to Aspen Icarus ........................................... 439
Step 3: Loading the Data .................................................................... 444
Adding or Updating Codes to this Interface............................................ 444
Known Issues .................................................................................... 446
7 Developing and Using Cost Libraries ................................................................447

Overview..................................................................................................... 447
Equipment Model Library (EML)............................................................ 447
Unit Cost Library (UCL) ....................................................................... 448
Developing and Using an Equipment Model Library (EML) .................................. 448
Creating an EML................................................................................. 448
Adding an Item to an EML ................................................................... 450
Adding an EML Item as a Project Component ......................................... 451
Developing and Using a Unit Cost Library (UCL) ............................................... 454
Creating a Unit Cost Library................................................................. 455
Adding an Item to a UCL ..................................................................... 456
Adding a UCL Item to a Project ............................................................ 458
Creating an Assembly of UCL Items ...................................................... 461
Working with Cost Libraries ........................................................................... 465
Copying a Library Item ....................................................................... 465
Deleting a Library Item ....................................................................... 465
Escalating Library Costs ...................................................................... 465
Importing a Cost Library ..................................................................... 466
Duplicating a Cost Library ................................................................... 467
Deleting a Cost Library ....................................................................... 468
8 Changing Plant Capacity and Location..............................................................469

Changing Plant Capacity................................................................................ 469
Analyzer Scale-Up Module (ASM) ................................................................... 471
How ASM Works................................................................................. 471
Scale-Up Rule Set .............................................................................. 471
8 Contents
Scale-Up for Configuration Analysis ...................................................... 472
Analyzer Relocation Module (ARM) ................................................................. 473
Relocation Terminology ....................................................................... 473
Workflow........................................................................................... 473
How the Analyzer Plant Relocation Module (ARM) Works ......................... 474
Relocating the Project ......................................................................... 476
ARM Knowledge Base.......................................................................... 477
ARM Notes: ....................................................................................... 486
9 Aspen Utility Modules .......................................................................................487

Introduction ................................................................................................ 487
Analyzer Utility Modules (AUM) – Design and Scope Generators for Utility
Systems............................................................................................ 487
AUM_CW: Cooling Water Utility Selection, Sizing, and Design Module ....... 488
AUM_Air: Instrument and Plant Air Utility Selection, Sizing, and Design
Module.............................................................................................. 488
Analyzer Utility Module (AUM) Cooling Water (AUM_Water) ............................... 489
Introduction to Analyzer Utility Module (AUM) Cooling Water ................... 489
1. Overview ...................................................................................... 491
2. Working with the Cooling Water Model ............................................. 492
3. Working with the Cooling Water Model Worksheets ............................ 498
4. Basis for the Cooling Water Design Model ......................................... 506
Notes to Analyzer Utility Model (AUM) Users:......................................... 516
AUM_Air...................................................................................................... 517
Utility Design and Scope Generator for Instrument and Plant Air .............. 517
Overview..................................................................................................... 517
Project areas and their project components ........................................... 517
Benefits: ........................................................................................... 518
How AUM_Air Works ........................................................................... 518
General AUM_Air Workflow ............................................................................ 518
Using AUM_Air ............................................................................................. 519
Accessing AUM_Air ............................................................................. 519
The Initial Design ............................................................................... 521
Modifying Air – Instrument, Plant Data ................................................. 522
Guide for the Air Utility Model (AUM) .............................................................. 525
SPECS Organization Chart ................................................................... 526
About this SPECS Book ....................................................................... 526
About an Air Plant Unit........................................................................ 527
About Distribution Piping for an APU ..................................................... 528
Schematic ......................................................................................... 529
Configuration of Air Utility Project Components ................................................ 529
Project Components ........................................................................... 530
An “Air Plant Unit” - APU ..................................................................... 530
Schematic of an Air Plant Unit.............................................................. 531
General Layout .................................................................................. 532
Multiple Air Plant Units for Multiple Areas .............................................. 532
Compressor Redundancy: Multiple, Stand-by, Start-up ........................... 533
Design Considerations .................................................................................. 533
Units of Measure ................................................................................ 533
Air Utility Area ................................................................................... 534
Air Utility Project Components ............................................................. 534
Instrument Air (IA) Requirements: Air Flow Rate ................................... 534
Contents 9
Plant Air (PA) Requirements: Air Flow Rate............................................ 535
Compressor Model Selection Method..................................................... 535
Interactive Specs ......................................................................................... 539
User Preferences ................................................................................ 539
Equipment Redundancy....................................................................... 540
Equipment Configurations ................................................................... 540
Basis for Design: Preferences - 1......................................................... 541
Configuration Layout Method and Distribution ........................................ 543
Example layout – group of areas served by APU “A” ............................... 544
Circuit Preferences: Configuration of APUs............................................ 544
Sample Layouts: One APU .................................................................. 545
Sample Layouts: Multiple APUs ........................................................... 545
Design Methods ........................................................................................... 545
Basis for Sizing Air Distribution Piping................................................... 545
Sample AUM_Air Worksheets ......................................................................... 547
List of AUM_Air Worksheets ................................................................. 547
Welcome Worksheet ........................................................................... 548
Control Center Worksheet ................................................................... 548
Guide Worksheet................................................................................ 549
Status Worksheet............................................................................... 554
Preferences Worksheet ....................................................................... 556
Configuration Part 1: Assignment of Plant Air to Areas Not Requiring
Instrument Air ................................................................................... 558
Configuration Part 2: Assignment of Areas to an APU.............................. 558
Report – Equipment Component Stats .................................................. 559
Report – Pipe Stats............................................................................. 561
10 Evaluating the Project ....................................................................................563

Running a Project Evaluation ......................................................................... 563
Reviewing Results in Icarus Editor .................................................................. 565
Accessing .......................................................................................... 565
Printing a Single Section ..................................................................... 566
Icarus Editor Toolbar .......................................................................... 566
Report Sections.................................................................................. 567
Project Schedule ................................................................................ 570
Reviewing Results in Aspen Icarus Reporter..................................................... 574
Accessing Aspen Icarus Reporter.......................................................... 574
Aspen Icarus Reporter Menu Bar ............................................................... 577
Which Report Mode? ........................................................................... 578
Standard Reports ............................................................................... 578
HTML Reports .................................................................................... 588
Management Reports .......................................................................... 589
Excel Reports..................................................................................... 593
Update on Demand Reports ................................................................. 597
Data Trending.................................................................................... 598
Importing Data into Aspen Icarus Reporter............................................ 601
Creating a User Database.................................................................... 602
Splitting Very Large CCP Reports.......................................................... 603
Reviewing Investment Analysis ...................................................................... 604
Viewing Investment Analysis ............................................................... 605
Equipment Summary .......................................................................... 605
Project Summary ............................................................................... 606
10 Contents
Cashflow ........................................................................................... 613
Executive Summary............................................................................ 618
Using the Reporting Assistant .............................................................. 620
Item Evaluation ........................................................................................... 624
11 Introducing IPS..............................................................................................629
12 Getting Started With IPS ................................................................................631

Installing Icarus Project Scheduler (IPS) ......................................................... 631
Installation Steps and Sequence .......................................................... 631
System Requirements for the Integration .............................................. 638
Primavera Enterprise Client and Server ................................................. 638
Starting Icarus Project Scheduler ................................................................... 638
Primavera Addendum ................................................................................... 640
Prerequisites for Primavera P6 V8.2...................................................... 641
Installation Steps and Sequence .......................................................... 641
13 IPS Project Schedule Settings ........................................................................651

IPS Project Schedule Settings ........................................................................ 651
Schedule Appearance Adjustments ....................................................... 652
Schedule Adjustments by Duration ....................................................... 656
Schedule Adjustments by Activity and Logic .......................................... 661
Primavera Information ........................................................................ 672
IPS Appendix A: Engineering and Procurement Activity Numbers .......................675

Numbering Convention ................................................................................. 675
Appendix B: Site Development and Construction Activity Numbers.....................699

Numbering Conventions ................................................................................ 699
List of Activity Numbers ................................................................................ 700
Appendix C: Equipment Class Definitions ............................................................705
Appendix D: Equipment Codes.............................................................................707
Appendix E: Tutorial ............................................................................................711
Index ..................................................................................................................717
Contents 11
12 Contents
Introducing Aspen Capital
Cost Estimator
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator, formerly known as Aspen Kbase, is a fully

integrated, design, estimating, and scheduling system designed to help you
evaluate the capital cost of process plants worldwide.
Main Features
Detailed EPC Estimates
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator uses the equipment models contained in the
Icarus Evaluation Engine (IEE) – a knowledge base of design, cost, and
scheduling data, methods, and models – to generate preliminary equipment
designs and simulate vendor-costing procedures to develop detailed
Engineering-Procurement-Construction (EPC) estimates. Volumetric models
generate a costed, quantity takeoff for the bulk materials without using
factors or user input. The volumetric models also produce the quantities of
pipe, valves, concrete, steel, and instruments identified by the associated
equipment or area. Components of each line of pipe and instrument loop are
quantified and costed, enabling you to view and adjust construction tasks.
The Aspen Capital Cost Estimator Work Item Models produce the required
man-hours by craft and task needed to install Aspen Capital Cost
Estimator-generated bulks, as well as the equipment Aspen Capital Cost
Estimator designed, by simulating detailed design construction tasks. Finally,
the Engineering Models in Aspen Capital Cost Estimator produce man-hours
by discipline and engineering work product.
CPM Schedules
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator has a built-in activity network generator to
automatically prepare Critical Path Method (CPM) schedules. The EPC
estimate and the planning schedule are in tune with one another, each having
been prepared from the same project scope.
Introducing Aspen Capital Cost Estimator 13

Information Tracking
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator provides tree diagrams that allow you to view,
track and revise information such as power distribution, process control
networks, tiered contracts, areas and their equipment specs, and installation
procedures.
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator

Project Workflow
Before using Aspen Capital Cost Estimator, it may be helpful to review the
recommended project workflow:
Note: Early in the life of a project, when limited mechanical design detail is
available, you need only enter a rough outline of scope to produce the initial
estimate of cost and schedule. As more information becomes available, the
details of the project can be entered and new reports can be generated and
analyzed.
1 Create project scenario and define properties like country base, units of
measure, and currency.
2 Define design basis (general mechanical design rules), wage rates and
productivities, code of account definition and allocation, material and
man-hour indexing, equipment rental, and project execution schedule
settings.
3 Define the Power Distribution system (if desired).
4 Define the Process Control system (if desired) and link to areas and
substations.
5 Add contractors and redefine responsibilities (if desired) and link to areas
and substations.
6 Run an item evaluation to produce direct costs for an individual
component or run a project evaluation to produce design and cost results
needed to prepare project reports.
7 View and/or print reports.
The Guide
Organization
This guide contains the following:
Introducing Aspen Capital Cost Estimator an overview of Aspen Capital
Cost Estimator and the user's guide, as well as a list of related documentation
and information on technical support.
14 Introducing Aspen Capital Cost Estimator

Chapter 1  Getting Started  instructions on how to start Aspen Capital Cost
Estimator, open a project, enter project specifications, and work with the
Icarus Interface.
Chapter 2  Defining the Project Basis  instructions on defining
specifications: units of measure, standard basis, component map, design
criteria, investment analysis, raw material, product, operating unit costs, and
utility.
Chapter 3  Loading and Mapping Simulation Data  instructions on
preparing different kinds of simulator reports for use in Aspen Capital Cost
Estimator, loading simulator data, mapping simulator models to Icarus project
components, adding additional components to simulator models, and viewing
and defining simulator models in Block Flow Diagram (BFD) and Process Flow
Diagram (PFD) view.
Chapter 4  Defining Areas, Report Groups, and Project Components 
instructions on how to define areas and report groups and then populate them
with project components, which are the pieces of the process plant that, when
linked together, complete a process.
Chapter 5  Sizing Project Components  instructions on sizing project
components.
Chapter 6 – Piping and Instrumentation Models  instructions on accessing
the P&ID Editor and creating and selecting custom P&ID’s.
Chapter 7 – Developing and Using Cost Libraries  instructions on developing
cost libraries and adding library items as project components.
Chapter 8 – Changing Plant Capacity and Location  instructions on using the
plant scale-up and relocation modules available if you are licensed to use
Aspen Decision Analyzer.
Chapter 9 - Analyzer Utility Modules – instructions on using Analyzer Utility
Modules for cooling water and air.
Chapter 10  Evaluating the Project  instructions on running a project and
item evaluations and reviewing capital costs, operating costs, and investment
analysis reports.
Related Documentation
In addition to this document, a number of other documents are provided to
help users learn and use Aspen Capital Cost Estimator. The documentation set
consists of the following:
Installation Notes
Aspen Engineering Suite V8.0 Installation Guide
Known Issues and Workarounds

Aspen Economic Evaluation V8.0 Release Notes
Introducing Aspen Capital Cost Estimator 15

New Features in Aspen Economic
Evaluation V8.0
Aspen Economic Evaluation V8.0 Release Notes
Icarus Reference
Aspen Icarus Reference Guide, for Icarus Evaluation Engine (IEE)
Piping and Instrumentation Drawings

Piping and Instrumentation Drawings, 3rd edition
Technical Support
AspenTech customers with a valid license and software maintenance
agreement can register to access the online AspenTech Support Center at:
http://support.aspentech.com
H H
This Web support site lets you:

 Access current product documentation
 Search for tech tips, solutions and frequently asked questions (FAQs)
 Search for and download application examples
 Search for and download service packs and product updates
 Submit and track technical issues
 Send suggestions
 Report product defects
 Review lists of known deficiencies and defects
Registered users can also subscribe to our Technical Support e-Bulletins.
These e-Bulletins are used to alert users to important technical support
information such as:
 Technical advisories
 Product updates and releases
Customer support is also available by phone, fax, and email. The most up-to-
date contact information is available at the AspenTech Support Center
at http://support.aspentech.com.
H H
16 Introducing Aspen Capital Cost Estimator

1 Getting Started
Starting Aspen Capital Cost

Estimator
After completing the installation, you can start Aspen Capital Cost Estimator.
To start Aspen Capital Cost Estimator:

1 Click the Windows Start button.
2 Point to Programs | AspenTech.
3 Point to Economic Evaluation 8.0; then click Aspen Capital Cost

Estimator.
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator starts.
1 Getting Started 17
The Start page appears:
You can now open an existing project or begin a new one. In either case:
 the Main window appears on the left
 the Palette appears in the upper right
 the Properties window appears in the lower right
Note: You can change the position of the Main Window, Palette, and
Properties Window, as explained under Customizing the Interface
Arrangement on page 41.
X X
18 1 Getting Started
If you are also licensed to use Aspen Process Economic Analyzer, Aspen
Capital Cost Estimator displays at startup the Options dialog box, in which
you can choose to use Aspen Process Economic Analyzer in the Aspen Capital
Cost Estimator environment.
If you are licensed to use Aspen Icarus Project Scheduler (IPS), you can also
select to use IPS with any of these options.
Your selection makes certain features of the selected product available in

Aspen Capital Cost Estimator.
Starting a Project Scenario
Note: Viewing the sample project scenario provided with Aspen Capital Cost
Estimator before creating a new one allows you to familiarize yourself with
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator without having to fill out specifications. To open
the sample project, follow the instructions under “Opening an Existing Project
Scenario” on page 26. X X
Creating a New Project Scenario

To create a new project scenario:
1 Do one of the following:
 On the File menu, click New.
-or-
 Click on the toolbar.

The Create New Project dialog box appears.
Note: Under Preferences, you can create scenarios in project directories

other than the default one provided by Aspen Capital Cost Estimator. See
page 56 for instructions on adding project directories.
X X
3 Either select an existing project in which to start a new scenario, or enter

a new Project Name. Long filenames are accepted, including spaces.
However, punctuation marks, such as question marks (?), exclamation
points (!), tildes (~), and asterisks (*), are not allowed.
4 Enter the Scenario Name.
This is the name of the scenario within the project. As with the Project Name,
long filenames are accepted, including spaces, while punctuation marks, such
as question marks (?), exclamation points (!), tildes (~), and asterisks (*) are
not allowed.
If you do not enter a Scenario Name, Aspen Capital Cost Estimator uses
“BaseCase” as the default.
5 Click OK.
The Project Properties dialog box appears.
6 Enter a Project Description. The description can be up to 500 characters in

length and can be comprised of letters, numbers, and punctuation. You
can enter or revise the description later on the Project Properties form
accessed from the Project Basis view (see page 74).
X X
In the Units of Measure section, you can keep the default basis of Inch-Pound
(IP) or select Metric. The Units of Measure selection cannot be changed after
creating the project scenario.
7 If desired, enter more details about the project scenario in the Remarks
field. Remarks can be up to 6,000 characters in length and can be
comprised of letters, numbers, and punctuation. You can enter and revise
remarks later on the Project Properties form accessed from the Project
Basis view (see page 74).
X X
8 Click OK.
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator displays the Input Units of Measure
Specifications dialog box, which lets you customize the units of measure that
appear on specification forms.
For example, if you want to use CM/H (centimeters per hour) instead of M/H
(meters per hour) to specify conveyor belt speed in your metric-basis project,
do the following:
A Select Velocity and Flow Rate and click Modify.
B On the Velocity and Flow Rate Units form, type CM/H as the new
unit name for M/H. Then type the conversion factor between the two
units in the Conversion field. In this example, the conversion factor
between the two units is 100 because:
100 CM/H = 1 M/H.
C Click OK to accept the modifications and return to the previous dialog

box.
9 When finished modifying input units of measure, click Close.
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator displays the General Project Data form.
Most specifications on this form can be entered later by selecting General

Project Data in the Project Basis view (see page 75). However, country
X X
base, currency description and symbol, and allowing pipeline areas can only
be selected at this time.
Selecting Country Base and Currency

The default country base is US and the default currency is Dollars (USD).
Changing the country base to UK, EU, JP, or ME automatically changes the
currency to Pounds (PS), Euros, K-Yen (KY), or Saudi Riyals (SAR),
respectively. You can, however, enter a currency different than that of the
country base. Just be sure to also enter a currency conversion rate, which is
the number of currency units per one country base currency unit.
Allowing Pipeline Areas

2 If this is to be a pipeline project, select P in the Allow Pipeline Areas
box.
In a pipeline project, items marked with a double asterisk in Project Explorer’s
Project Basis view (see page 73) are not applicable.
X X
A pipeline project has no multiple contractors.

A pipeline project has both main (process) and pipeline areas. Process
equipment can be defined in the main (process) area(s), but not in the
pipeline areas.
Suppressing Default Equipment/Area/Project Bulks

3 If you want to suppress equipment volumetric model bulks and most of
the system developed area and project bulks, click the M option in the
Suppress Default Equipment/Area/Project field on the General
Project Data dialog box.
If you select the M option:
• Engineering and Construction (crew mixes, craft names) Workforces,
Power Distribution, Process control, Panel Board, Contracts, and
Project Execution Schedule is ignored.
• All area design basis options to develop estimate and reports are
ignored.
• Only Interactive Reports (for example, Reporter) are available. No
standard Aspen Capital Cost Estimator evaluation report (CCP) is
developed.
4 Click OK when finished entering General Project Data.
The Main Window now displays Project Explorer and the List view. See
“Understanding the Icarus Interface” on page 28 for instructions on working
X X
with these and other features now available on the interface.
Importing a Project Scenario

Aspen Capital Cost Estimator provides an Import feature so that you can
import Analyzer 2.0B, Icarus 2000 9.0, Aspen Process Economic Analyzer
5.0/5.1, IPM 5.0, or Questimate 14.0 project scenarios into Aspen Capital
Cost Estimator.
To import a project scenario:

 On the File menu, click New.
-or-
 On the toolbar, click .
The Create New Project dialog box appears.
Note: You can create scenarios in project directories other than the default
one provided by Aspen Capital Cost Estimator. See “Preferences,” particularly
the “Locations” subsection on page 56, for instructions.
X X
2 Either select an existing project in which to start a new scenario, or enter

a new Project Name. Long filenames are accepted, including spaces.
However, punctuation marks, such as question marks (?), exclamation
points (!), tildes (~), and asterisks (*), are not allowed.
3 Enter the Scenario Name.
Again, long filenames are accepted, including spaces, while punctuation
marks, such as question marks (?), exclamation points (!), tildes (~), and
asterisks (*) are not allowed.
After making an entry in the Scenario Name field, the Import button
becomes active.
4 Click Import.
The Select Import Type dialog box appears.
5 Select the project type you wish to import and click OK.
The Browse for Folder dialog box appears.
2 Select the project scenario folder and click OK.

The project scenario’s settings are imported into the new project scenario.
Opening an Existing Project

Scenario
To open an existing project scenario:
 On the File menu, click Open.
-or-
 On the toolbar, click .

The Open Existing Project dialog box appears.
In the pictured dialog box, the project named Expansion_P6 has been
expanded on the tree structure to show the scenario named Expansion_P6.
The tree structure on the left side of the dialog box displays the projects in
the default project folder:
...\AspenTech\Economic Evaluation V8.0\Data\Archives_Aspen Capital Cost

Estimator
Clicking + next to a project expands the view to display the scenarios under
that project.
3 Select a scenario and click OK.
The project scenario opens. The Main window now displays Project Explorer
and the List view. See “Understanding the Icarus Interface” on page 28 for
X X
instructions on working with these and other features now available on the
interface.
Palette Shortcut
You can also open a project from the Palette, which appears to the right of
the Main Window in the default interface arrangement (it can also be floated
in the Main Window or dragged onto the Main Window and re-sized, as shown
below).
1 In the Projects tab view, right-click on a scenario.
2 On the menu that appears, click Open.
This opens the selected scenario.
Working with Templates

Adding a Template
To add a new template:
1 Click File | New Template.
The Create New Template dialog box appears.
2 On the Create New Template dialog box type the Scenario name.
3 Click OK.
4 On the Project Properties dialog box, enter:
o the project description
o the units of measure (IP or Metric)
o any (optional) remarks
5 Click OK.
The project is created. Note that the Title Bar indicates Templates (name
you entered for the scenario).
Creating a Project by Importing a Template

You can create a new project based on an existing template.
To do this:
1 Launch the Aspen Economic Evaluation application.
2 Click File | New.
3 On the Create New Project dialog box that appears, specify the project
and scenario name.
4 Click the Template button on the right of the dialog box.
The Import Template dialog box appears showing all available templates.
5 Click the template you want to import; then click OK.
The Project Properties dialog box appears, on which you can continue to
enter information for the new project.
Note: When opening a project from a template, or opening a template itself,

not all of the buttons on the Aspen Capital Cost Estimator Toolbar are
available.
Understanding the Icarus

Interface
The Icarus interface lets you see multiple windows and documents. You can
customize the interface arrangement. The following is the default interface
arrangement, with a specifications form open in the Main Window.
The Icarus interface includes the following features:

This feature Does this
Title Bar Displays the project file name and current Main Window
view.
Menu Bar Displays menu options.
Toolbar Allows access to Aspen Capital Cost Estimator
functions. See page 43. X X
Main Window Provides workspace for all Aspen Capital Cost Estimator
documents, List view, specification forms, and other
views. See page 32.
X X
Project Explorer Organizes project items in tree format. See page 30.
X X
Palette Allows access to libraries, projects, components, and

templates. See page 35. X X
Status Bar Displays Aspen Capital Cost Estimator system status.

Properties Window Describes the field selected on specifications form. See
page 39.
X X
Project Explorer
Project Explorer is a graphical representation of the project. It has three
views: Project Basis view, Process view, and Project view. Each view
organizes items in a tree format. Switch views by selecting the appropriate
tab at the bottom of Project Explorer. (Stretching the width of the Project
Explorer displays the full names on the tabs.) The different views are
described on page 30. X X
To expand a tree level:

 Click the PLUS SIGN (+) next to the condensed level.
To condense a tree level:

 Click the MINUS SIGN ( -) next to the expanded level.
Project Explorer Views

Project Basis View displays project basis specifications. Double-click on a
specification to view and/or modify it. A red arrow on an icon in this view
indicates that you can right click on the icon for options.
Level Icon Description
2 Specifications folder
3 Specification
Process View displays simulator data information. In this view, simulator

items can be mapped to Icarus project components. Mapped items can then
be sized, modified, and/or deleted.
Note: Simulation data can only be used in Aspen Capital Cost Estimator if
you are licensed to use Icarus Process Evaluator (Aspen Process Economic
Analyzer) or Analyzer.
As in a process simulator, such as AspenPlus or HYSYS, blocks represent
different operations within the process. A block is sometimes referred to as a
unit operation.
2 Main Project, containing a group of simulator areas
3 Process simulator area
4 Unmapped simulator block (yellow)
Mapped simulator block (green)
Project View displays project data information. In this view, you can size,
modify and/or delete mapped items. In addition, new areas and Icarus project
components can be defined.
1 Main Project, containing the default Main Area and any user-added
areas
2 Report Group, displayed only if Show Report Group in Aspen
Capital Cost Estimator is selected in Preferences (see page 54
X X
for instructions)
3 Area
4 Project component
Main Window
The Main Window is located to the right of Project Explorer by default. The
Main Window is a workspace for all Aspen Capital Cost Estimator documents,
the List view, and other views. You can adjust the relative size of each
window by clicking on the division bar and dragging it to the desired location.
Note: Here, the Main Window in Workbook Mode displays several tabs
because a component specifications form (component A1) and a project
specifications form (Escalation Specs) have been opened.
By default, the Main Window is in Workbook Mode. In this mode, tabs are
placed at the bottom of the window. These tabs represent all windows open in
the Main Window. Clicking on a tab brings the associated window to the
foreground.
Clicking Tile or Cascade on the Window menu displays all windows open in
the Main Window. Regardless of the window arrangement, the tabs are still at
the bottom of the Main Window when in Workbook Mode. Clicking the
maximize button ( ) on a window returns all windows to full tab view.
Clicking the condense button ( ) on the menu bar displays all windows open
in the Main Window as they were when last condensed.
This is how the Main Window appears when in Workbook Mode with
Cascade selected as the condensed window arrangement.
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator lets you float Project Explorer, the Palette, and
the Properties Window in the Main window. When in this state, these windows
behave just like other windows that are part of the Main Window. See
“Customizing the Icarus Interface” on page 41 for details.
X X
You can turn off Workbook Mode by unmarking Workbook Mode on the
View menu. When Workbook Mode is off, no tabs are displayed; to bring a
window to the front, you must click on the desired window or select the
desired window from the Window menu.
List View
The List view in the Main Window displays details on items selected in Project
Explorer. For example, when you click on an area in Project Explorer’s Project
view, the List view displays a list of all components in the area. This is
referred to as the “area-level” list (shown below), in which the components
are displayed in rows with component details in columns. When you click on a
component in Project Explorer’s Project view, the List provides information
only on the selected component, with component details listed in rows. This is
referred to as the “component-level” list.
Note: In the interface arrangement pictured here, the Palette and the
Properties Window have been hidden to make room for the Main Window.
Press alt+1 to hide or display the Palette and press alt+2 to hide or display
the Properties Window. Press alt+0 to hide or display Project Explorer.
Filtering Mechanism
You can limit area-level lists to a single category of component. To do so,
click the drop-down arrow on the toolbar and click on a category.
For example, if you click ? Incomplete Items the list will only include
components that still have specifications that need to be entered in order for
the component to be included in an evaluation.
Column Settings
You can select which columns appear on the area-level list and in which
order.
To change column settings on the area-level list:

1 Right-click on any of the column headings.
A pop-up menu lists all of the columns. Columns currently displayed are
checked.
2 To simply hide/unhide a column, you can click it on the menu.

2 To change the order, click Settings on the menu.
The Settings dialog box appears.
3 To move a column to the right on the List View, click Move Down. To
move a column to the left, click Move Up. The Reset button returns to
columns to the default setting (shown above).
4 Click OK to save the settings.
When you restart Aspen Capital Cost Estimator, all columns will be displayed
in the default order unless Save Window States is selected in Preferences (by
default, Save Window States is selected). See “Saving Window States” on
page 42 for more information.
X X
Palette
The Palette contains elements that you can apply to the project scenario. If
you think of Project Explorer as a picture of the project scenario, you might
think of the Palette’s contents as the pigments and dyes used to first sketch
out and then color in that picture.
For example, if you wish to import areas or components from another
scenario into your current scenario, you can double-click on the scenario in
the Palette to get a listing of its areas and components and then drag the
area/component to the Project Explorer’s Project View. (See “Importing
Project Components” on page 330.)
X X
Likewise, the Palette’s Libraries view contains libraries of Project Basis

specification files that, in Project Explorer’s Project Basis view, you can select
to use. From the Palette, you can develop the libraries by creating new files,
modifying existing files, and importing files. (See “Specification Libraries” on
page 238.)
X X
When you add a component to the project scenario, you can choose from the
components listed in the Palette’s Components view. Then, after you add the
component, it appears in Project Explorer’s Project view. (See “Adding a
Project Component” on page 310).
X X
Finally, you can use the Palette’s Templates tab to access templates, both
those supplied with Aspen Capital Cost Estimator, and any you or others may
have created.
In the default interface arrangement, the Palette appears on the right side of
the screen. Like Project Explorer, it can be displayed in a variety of ways. See
“Customizing the Icarus Interface” (page 41) for display options. To
X X
hide/display the Palette, press ALT+1 or used the checked command on the
View menu.
As indicated previously, the Palette has four views: Projects, Libraries,
Components, and Templates. The Components view, shown below, has a
scrollable split window that displays details on equipment items. The division
bar can be adjusted to hide or expand the details section.
Note: The Palette pictured in this section has been dragged onto the Main
Window and re-sized.
In addition to letting you import the contents of other scenarios, the Projects
view provides options for opening scenarios, viewing scenario properties, and
deleting scenarios. Right-click on a project scenario to access the pop-up
menu of options. The Projects view displays all projects in the default project
folder and any other active project folders. (See “Preferences,” particularly
the “Locations” subsection on page 56, for instructions.)
X X
Properties Window
When you select a field on a specifications form, the Properties Window
provides a description of the field. The description often includes minimum,
maximum, and default values.
Here, the Properties window (docked on the right side of the screen)
displays information on the Item Description field, which is selected on the
specifications form.
Click on the Properties window to freeze and unfreeze the content. When
the content is frozen, you can move to another field while retaining the
description of the original field in the Properties Window.
Like the Palette and Project Explorer, the Properties Window can be
displayed in a variety of ways. See “Customizing the Icarus Interface” on
page 41 for display options.
X X
To hide/display the Properties window, press ALT+2 or use the checked

command on the View menu.
Templates Tab
Use the Templates tab to access templates. Shown below are the ten
templates included in Aspen Capital Cost Estimator. If you had created
custom templates, they would appear on this list.
Customizing the Icarus Interface

In the default interface arrangement, Project Explorer docks to the left edge
and the Palette and the Properties Window share the right. When docked,
windows remain attached to an edge and all other windows are sized to fit in
the remaining space available.
Right-clicking on a border of any of these three windows accesses a pop-up
menu from which you can select Allow Docking. When Allow Docking is
marked, the window can be docked to any edge.
Note: When Float In Main Window is selected on the pop-up menu, the
Allow Docking option is inactive.
To dock to a different edge:

1 Click the border that contains the Close button ( ) and hold down the
left mouse button.
A bounding outline will appear as you drag the window.
2 Drag the outline to the desired edge and release the left mouse button.
Here, Project Explorer is docked to the top of the screen.
When multiple windows are docked to the same edge, you can use the
division bar to adjust the relative sizes. You can also use the
Contract/Expand ( / ) buttons to either switch from one window to the
other or split the side.
Undocking by Dragging onto Main Window

One way to undock the window is by dragging it onto the Main Window. Its
size can then be adjusted.
Float In Main Window Option

You can at any time select Float In Main Window on the pop-up menu. In
this state, the window behaves like the List view or a specifications form, with
a tab at the bottom of the Main Window.
Saving Window States

If you are using the default Preferences, Aspen Capital Cost Estimator saves
the interface arrangement. This way, when you open Aspen Capital Cost
Estimator the arrangement is the same as you left it.
You can also set the Preferences so that Aspen Capital Cost Estimator opens
displaying the default arrangement. See the section on the General tab view
of the Preference dialog box (page 53) for more information.
X X
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator Toolbar
By default, the toolbar is docked under the menu bar. However, you can float
the toolbar by clicking on a blank area of the toolbar and dragging it. You can
also dock the toolbar to the bottom of the screen or vertically to the edge of
the Project Explorer, Main Window, or the Palette. To do so, drag the toolbar
over any one of these areas until an outline of the toolbar appears. Release
the mouse button when the outline appears in the desired area.
The following toolbar buttons are available in Aspen Capital Cost Estimator:
Click to
this
Create a new project scenario. See “Creating a New Project Scenario” on

page 20. X X
Open an existing project scenario. See “Opening an Existing Project

Scenario” on page 26.
X X
Save the current project. See “Saving a Project Scenario” on page 48.
X X
Print.
Run project evaluation. See “Running a Project Evaluation” on page 563 for
X X
instructions.
Load Capital Costs and other reports. See “Reviewing Reports in Aspen
Icarus Reporter,” page 574, for instructions.
X X
Go back. Navigate back through previously viewed links.
Go forward. Navigate forward through previously viewed links.
Other buttons that appear on the toolbar are always inactive in Aspen Capital
Cost Estimator. They are for use in other Icarus programs.
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator Menu Bar
Click to
this
New Start a new project scenario. Details on page 20. X X
New Start a new template

Template
Open Open an existing project scenario. Details on page 26.
X X
Open Open an existing template.

Template
Close Close the current project scenario.
Save Save the current project scenario. Details on page 48. X X
Save As Save the current project scenario as a different file. Details on page 48. X X
Import Access instructions for importing areas and components. Details on

page 330.
X X
Import Import Pipe Runs and Fitting Spreadsheets.

SP 3D
Import Import PID Drawings.
PID
Drawing
Export to Save the current project scenario as an SPECS (*.ic2) project file.
SPECS
file
Print Print the form or report currently active in the Main Window.
Print Preview how form or report will appear printed.
Preview
Print View and modify printer name and properties, paper size and source, and
Setup orientation
Page Define page specifications.
Setup
Exit Close Aspen Capital Cost Estimator.
Run Menu
Click this to
Load Data Translate the specified process simulator report file into Aspen Process
Economic Analyzer. See page 268 for details.
Map Items Convert each simulator block (that is, model or unit operation) into one
or more Icarus project components. See page 276 for details.
Evaluate Run a project evaluation. See page 563 for details.
X X
Project
Decision (Only active if you are using Aspen Decision Analyzer in the Aspen
Analyzer Capital Cost Estimator environment.) Accesses options for changing
plant capacity and location. See Chapter 8.
Utility Model Select a utility.
Scan for Scan for potential errors in the project evaluation.
Errors
Basic Access Aspen Basic Engineering.
Engineering
Link
Interconnect To connect piping lines between equipment.
Piping Lines
Re-number Re-number project components or project areas so that the numbering
contains no gaps. Details on page 334.
X X
Merge Merge projects and/or areas.
View Menu
Use this to
Toolbar View or hide the toolbar. See page 43 for description of the toolbar.
X X
Status Bar View or hide the status bar. See page 28 for description of the status
X X
bar.
Project View or hide Project Explorer. See page 30 for a description of Project
X X
Explorer Explorer.
Palette View or hide the Palette. See page 35 for description of the Palette.
X X
Properties View or hide the Properties Window. See page 39 for a description of X X
Window the Properties Window.

Workbook Turn Workbook Mode on and off. See page 32 for an explanation of X X
Mode Workbook Mode.

Capital Specify which report to view.
Costs View
Spreadsheet Specify which spreadsheet view to display. Areas, components, and so
View on.
Error Display error messages.
Messages
Tools Menu
Use this to
Report Access ICEdit program.

Editor
External Import information from a simulator.
Simulation
Import Tool
Manpower Launch MPE.
Productivity
Expert
(MPE)
Options Access Options sub-menu. See below.
Options Sub-menu
Use this to
View Access Excel spreadsheets.

Spreadsheets
in Excel
Reporting Access the Reporting Assistant feature that lets you create your own
Assistant customized report spreadsheets, combining information from all other
Icarus generated spreadsheets.
Custom See the Application Programming Interface (API) and Object
Tasks Definitions guide available from the Help Documentation menu.
Custom Tasks are only available in ACCE and APEA.
Preferences Access Preferences. See page 53 for details.
X X
Window Menu
Use this to
Cascade View the Main Window contents in Cascade mode. See page 32. X X
Tile View the Main Window contents in Tile mode. See page 32. X X
Arrange Return all minimized windows to the bottom of the Main Window.
# XXX View opened window in the Main Window.
Help Menu
Use this to
Contents Access Aspen Icarus Help.

What’s New Access What’s New for this release.
Show Cost Display the cost basis for this release.
Basis
Documentation Access Docs.pdf, which links to pdf’s of all Aspen Icarus
documentation. You must have Acrobat Reader to access this file.
Training Access Aspen Capital Cost Estimator training information on the web.
Product Access support.aspentech.com.
Support on the
Web
About Access program information, version number, and copyright
information.
Working with Project Scenarios

This section explains how to save, delete, salvage, and unlock project
scenarios.
Saving Project Scenarios

To save a project scenario:
 Click on the toolbar or click Save on the File menu.

Aspen Capital Cost Estimator saves any changes.
To save the scenario with a new name:

1 Click Save As on the File menu.
Note: Save As is useful when studying alternatives.
Note: You can save scenarios to project directories other than the default one
provided by Aspen Capital Cost Estimator. See Preferences, particularly the
Locations subsection on page 56, for instructions.
X X
2 Specify a Project Name and Scenario Name and click OK.

Aspen Capital Cost Estimator saves the scenario as specified.
Deleting Project Scenarios

You should delete project scenarios when they are no longer needed. Deleting
old scenarios opens free disk space and makes working with scenarios easier.
To delete a project or scenario:

1 To delete a project scenario, right-click on the scenario within the project
directory and click Delete on the pop-up menu.
A dialog box asks you to confirm deletion.
Note: You can select in Preferences not to have this prompt appear (see
page 53).
X X
2 Click Yes to delete the project scenario.

-or-
Click No to retain the project scenario.
Salvaging Project Scenarios

If you exit Aspen Capital Cost Estimator abnormally without being able to
save the current project scenario, you can salvage the project scenario from
cached project information.
To salvage a project scenario:

1 Restart Aspen Capital Cost Estimator. A window appears asking if you
wish to save the cached information found in storage.
2 Click Yes. Aspen Capital Cost Estimator displays the Salvage Project As
dialog box.
3 Specify a project and scenario name.
You cannot overwrite the scenario being salvaged; you must specify a project
and scenario name different from that of the original scenario.
4 Click OK.
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator creates the new scenario. Except in name, this
project scenario will be identical to the scenario that was open when Aspen
Capital Cost Estimator was abnormally exited. After creating the new
scenario, Aspen Capital Cost Estimator asks if you wish to open it.
Unlocking Project Scenarios

If Aspen Capital Cost Estimator crashes while you have a project scenario
open, Aspen Capital Cost Estimator remembers that you have the project
scenario checked out. When you re-open Aspen Capital Cost Estimator, you
will have to unlock the project scenario before opening it.
Anyone trying to open a locked project is denied access and provided with a
message that states the time the project scenario was checked out, the user
name of the person who checked it out, and the computer on which it was
checked out.
A project can only be unlocked by the user who checked it out or by an

administrator.
To unlock a project scenario:
1 Right-click the project scenario in the Palette.
2 On the menu that appears, click Unlock.
You can now open the project scenario as you normally would.
Copying Project Directories

Within a project directory, Aspen Capital Cost Estimator creates an
independent folder for each project and also creates, within a project folder,
an independent folder for each project scenario. This makes it easy to move
project scenario files from one computer to another on the same network.
Simply copy and paste the folder in Windows Explorer.
You can also copy an entire project directory with multiple project and project
scenario folders. Doing so creates an identical set of folders and files in the
new location.
See “Preferences,” particularly the “Locations” subsection on page 56, for
X X
information on adding project directories and setting a new default project

directory.
Preferences
The settings in Preferences let you specify how Aspen Capital Cost Estimator
will act each time it is used.
To access Preferences:
1 On the Tools menu, click Options; then on the sub-menu that appears,
click Preferences.
On the main menu, click Tools | Options | Preferences.
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator displays the Preference dialog box.
2 Click To do this
OK Save changes and close the Preferences.
Apply Save changes without closing Preferences.
Cancel Close Preferences without saving changes. (Clicking Apply and then
immediately clicking Cancel would have the same effect as clicking OK.)
General
In the General tab view, you can select the following:
Prompts - Select which prompts appear.

Close Project – prompt to save any changes when closing project.
Overwrite Project – prompt to confirm overwriting project that has the
same name as the one being created.
Delete Project – prompt to confirm deletion of project.
Delete Area – prompt to confirm deletion of area.
Delete Component – prompt to confirm deletion of component.
Cancel Component Edit – prompt to save changes when you click Cancel
after editing a Component Specifications form.
Delete Library – prompt to confirm deletion of a specifications library.
Delete Report Group – prompt to confirm deletion of a report group.
 Evaluation
Display results after evaluation - mark to have Aspen Capital Cost
Estimator open a detailed results report after you run an evaluation.
Scan for Errors before evaluation – mark to have Aspen Capital Cost
Estimator scan for errors before evaluation.
 Item Report
Select which type of report you wish to display when generating an Item
Report.
HTML Item Report – mark to display the HTML Item Report, like the one
shown on page 624, in the Main Window.
X X
Capital Cost Report – mark to display the Capital Cost Report in Icarus
Editor.
Reporter Report – mark to display the Single Component Summary,
exported from Aspen Icarus Reporter, in the Main Window.
 Display
Save Window States – mark to have Aspen Capital Cost Estimator save the
position of Project Explorer, the Main Window, the Palette, and the Properties
Window, as well as selected columns on the List view. Unmark to have Aspen
Capital Cost Estimator open with the default interface arrangement (shown on
page 28).
X X
Display Options Choice Dialog on Aspen Capital Cost Estimator

Startup – mark to have Aspen Capital Cost Estimator ask you at startup
whether to use Aspen Process Economic Analyzer in the Aspen Capital Cost
Estimator environment.
Show Report Group in Aspen Capital Cost Estimator – mark to display
report groups. For more information on report groups, see page 305.X X
Forms
The Forms tab view provides options related to Component Specification and
Installation Bulk forms.
Display P&I Installation Bulks in Grid – mark to have Aspen Capital Cost
Estimator display all items on the Installation Bulk specification forms for Pipe
and Instrumentation. If you unmark the checkbox, Aspen Capital Cost
Estimator lets you select, when opening the form, the items to include.
Use OK Button in Installation Bulks Form to Go to Main Component
Form – mark to have Aspen Capital Cost Estimator return you to the main
Component Specifications form when you click OK at an Installation Bulks
form. Otherwise, clicking OK simply closes the Component specifications.
Save Component When Switching to Different Installation Bulk or
Main Component Form – mark to have Aspen Capital Cost Estimator save
the Component specifications when you switch to a different form on the
Component’s Options menu.
Spreadsheet Views
The Spreadsheet Views tab lets you customize individual spreadsheet
views.
Use the Spreadsheet View field to specify the spreadsheet view you want to
customize.
When you have selected the spreadsheet view you want to customize, use the
Units of Measure group to specify what units of measure to use. You can
select both.
Use the Fields group to specify which fields will be visible on the spreadsheet
view you selected.
To make fields visible:
 Move the field(s) from the Available to the Visible pane.
To hide fields:
 Move the field(s) from the Visible to the Available pane.
Backup
The Backup/Recovery tab lets you select when backups are to be
performed. You can select both options.
Automatic Task Backup – select this check box to have Aspen Capital Cost
Estimator perform a backup before executing major tasks, such as a project
evaluation.
Timed Backup (Interval, in minutes) – select this check box to have
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator perform a backup at a specified interval. Specify
the interval in the box provided.
Timed Recovery (Interval, in minutes) - select this check box to have
Aspen Economic Evaluation write a recoverable file at the specified interval.
Specify the interval in the box provided. If an Economic Evaluation application
crashes, when you open the Aspen Economic Evaluation application that
crashed, you are prompted to recover your file and save it with a new name.
Note: After a project has crashed and been recovered (under the new name),
the original project that crashed should be deleted as it may no longer be in a
stable state.
After deleting the crashed project, you can rename the recovered project to
the previous name if you want.
You can also select to either have Aspen Capital Cost Estimator overwrite the
project backups or create unique backups.
Overwrite Project Backups – mark to have Aspen Capital Cost Estimator
overwrite the previous backup every time the program performs a backup.
Unique Project Backups – mark to have Aspen Capital Cost Estimator
retain previous backups by creating a unique backup each time. Depending
on the frequency of backups (see task and timed backup options above),
selecting Unique Project Backups could result in large amounts of disk space
being consumed by backups.
Process
The Process tab view provides options for importing from an external
project.
Import Connected Streams – mark to include connected streams when
importing an external project.
Import Installation Bulks – mark to include installation bulks when
importing an external project.
The Process tab view also provides options for unsupported simulator models
and custom models.
Map Unsupported Models To Quoted Cost Item – mark to have Aspen
Capital Cost Estimator map, by default, unsupported simulator models to
quoted cost items.
“Unsupported Models” refer to models not listed in the Project Component
Map Specifications dialog box shown on page 193. Aspen Capital Cost
X X
Estimator does not recognize them and, therefore, cannot map them to Icarus
project components. If this option is left unmarked, Aspen Capital Cost
Estimator will not map unsupported models. As a result, a unit operation
could appear disconnected in the Process Flow Diagram (PFD).
Quoted cost items are not project components, but act as place markers to
ensure that unit operations remain connected in the PFD.
Note: Marking this option will not affect the mapping of supported simulator
models. If a simulator model is listed in the Project Component Map
Specification dialog box, then the specified mapping will be used. Further, if
a simulator model is listed and has no default mapping (that is, Current Map
List section is blank), then it is assumed that the user does not want to map
such simulator models to any Icarus project components.
For example, if this option is marked, a USER unit operation in Aspen Plus can
be mapped to a quoted cost item if this option is marked. This ensures that
the unit operation remains connected in the PFD.
Activate Custom Model – mark to activate the Custom Model tool explained
on pages 335 through 341.
X X X X
Locations
In the Locations tab view, you can select:
 Project Directories
Add/remove alternate project directories and set the default project directory.
See “Adding Project Directories” on page 59 for instructions.
X X
 Other Location Specifications
To specify the location of various specification files and data:
1 Click an item in the list to display its description and location.
2 Click Browse to select a new location.
Notes:
 In some cases the description warns against changing the location.
 Make sure to create the IP and MET subfolder structure when changing
the source locations for library files that are units dependent (for example,
Basis for Capital Cost, EML, UML, Custom Piping Specs, and so on).
Logging
The Logging tab view is reserved for future releases, in which it will be used
to help clients with Technical Support issues. It is not currently activated.
Unit Costs
Start Page
Use the Start Page tab view to customize the News feed tab name and the
Start Page news channel on the Start page. You can also specify to have the
page show on startup and the interval at which to download content.
Adding Project Directories

Aspen Capital Cost Estimator comes set up with two project directories:
...\AspenTech\Economic Evaluation V8.0\Data\My Econ_Project
Projects
...\AspenTech\Economic Evaluation
V8.0\Data\Archives_Econ_Project
These directories, by default, are the sole choices of project directory when
opening or saving a new project, as well as the only directories displayed on
the Palette’s Projects view.
On the Locations tab, however, you can enter alternate project directories,
which will then appear on the Palette’s Projects view and as choices when
opening and saving projects. You can also select an alternate project directory
as the default.
To add a project directory:
1 Click Add.
The Browse for Folder dialog box appears.
2 Click the folder you want to add as an alternate directory; then click OK.
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator adds the directory to the Alternate Project
Directories list.
3 To set an alternate project directory as the default, click it; then click Set
Default.
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator displays a prompt asking you to confirm the
change. Click Yes to set the new default.
If the old default location is not on the list of alternate project directories,
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator displays another prompt asking if you wish to
add it to the list.
Note: Adding the old default directory to the alternate project directory list
lets you easily revert to it.
3 Click Yes or No.
4 Click OK to save the changes to Preferences.
Before the added project directory appears on the Create New Project
dialog box and elsewhere, you must either:
 Restart Aspen Capital Cost Estimator.
-or-
 Right-click on the current project in the Palette and click refresh on the
pop-up menu.
Changing Location Specifications

You can modify the location specification of any of the specification files.
For example, to change the location of the Standard basis file:

1 Click StandardBasisRefDir.
2 Use the Browse button below to select another location.
3 After each change, click Apply to save your change.
Note: If you are using more than one Icarus tool, remember to repeat the
above steps for other systems (Aspen Process Economic Analyzer, Aspen In-
Plant Cost Estimator, and so on.).
Caution: Before performing the steps mentioned above, copy the system
defaults (library folder structure) to the “myStd_Basis_[System]” folder.
System Defaults:
Economic Evaluation V8.0\Data\StdBasis_Aspen Capital Cost
Estimator\Ip\Default.d0*
Economic Evaluation V8.0\Data\StdBasis_Aspen Capital Cost
Estimator\Met\Default.d0*
Should Resemble:
CoABC\myStdBasis_Aspen Process Economic Analyzer\Ip\Default.d0*
CoABC\myStdBasis_Aspen Process Economic Analyzer\Met\Default.d0*
Logging
The Logging tab view is reserved for future releases, in which it will be used
to help clients with Technical Support issues. It is not currently activated.
Schedule
In the Schedule tab view, you can specify your Primavera user name.
The Schedule tab view also contains the Schedule Administrator Tool for
registering users and access rights in cases where Aspen In-Plant Cost
Estimator and the scheduling program run on a network. This tool should only
be used by a network administrator.
Importing and Exporting

Spreadsheets
The Spreadsheet Import/Export feature lets you:
 export Economic Evaluation project data to Microsoft Excel spreadsheet.
 import project data from MS Excel spreadsheet into Economic Evaluation
project.
This feature is compatible with MS Office 2007 and 2010.
The Spreadsheet Import/Export feature is available for:
 process equipment, plant bulks and installation bulk options in Economic
Evaluation
 basic Area specifications (Parent Report Group, Area title, Area type, Area
dimensions)
Accessing the Spreadsheet Import/Export

Feature
To access the Spreadsheet Import/Export feature:
 On the ACCE GUI, click File | Spreadsheet Import/Export.
This launches the Spreadsheet Import/Export dialog box.
Note: The Spreadsheet Import/Export feature is accessible only when a

project is open. This ensures units of measure customizations and currencies
for a project will be available in the spreadsheet.
Exporting Spreadsheets
You can use the Export Spreadsheet feature to:
 Create empty worksheets for each of the selected type of items from the
tree.
 Create a spreadsheet using data for existing project components in the
project.
To create empty worksheets for each of the selected type of items
from the tree:
1 On the ACCE GUI, click File | Spreadsheet Import/Export.
2 If it is not already selected, click Export Spreadsheet.
3 In the File field, specify a name and location for the spreadsheet.
4 On the Export Spreadsheet dialog box, in the Options box, click Create
empty spreadsheet.
5 If you want to have ACCE remember your component type selections for
the project, select the Remember component type selections check
box.
6 Select the components, plant bulks, installation bulks, and quoted
equipment to be included in the spreadsheet.
7 Click Create.
Note: If the Creation operation is successful, a confirmation message

appears. If there are any errors or exceptions, you are taken to the Export
Spreadsheet dialog box.
8 Click Exit to exit the Export Spreadsheet dialog box.
Note: You can export all components in the system, even components that
are not present in the project. For example, if you specified all ANSI Pumps in
a project and then decide you want to change them to API 610 pumps, you
can export the desired components with data along with components that
may not exist in the project; then delete the ANSI pumps in the spreadsheet
and add the API Pumps.
To export only the components that are in the project, use the export by area
feature (and select all areas if you want every component) which will export
only the contained components.
To export all components in the system:

4 On the Export Spreadsheet dialog box in the Options box, click Export
data from project.
5 In the Select box, click Components by Type.
6 Select the All Items check box.
7 Click Create.
8 After the spreadsheet has been successfully exported, click Exit to exit
the Import/Export feature.
To create a spreadsheet using data for existing project components in

the project:
4 On the Export Spreadsheet dialog box in the Options box, click Export
data from project.
Notes: Project data is exported only for the user selected types. For
example, if you select Process equipment | Pumps | Centrifugal | DCP
API 610, data for all pumps of the type DCP API 610 will be exported.
Installation bulks are exported only for those project components which have
a user tag number specified.
Project components that have bulks associated to them without user tag
numbers are flagged in error/warning messages.
5 If you want to have ACCE remember your component type selections for
the project, select the Remember component type selections check
box.
Note: When you click Export data from project data can be exported for:
 Selected component models
 Selected project areas. When data is exported for selected project
areas, installation bulks are also be exported for the components in
the areas.
 All components in the system.
This option is disabled when Create empty spreadsheets is selected.
6 In the Select box, select whether to export data for selected component
models or selected project areas.
7 Select the components, plant bulks, installation bulks, and quoted
equipment to be included in the spreadsheet.
Note: If you want to export all components in the system, including

components which may not be in your project, select the All Items check
box.
8 Click Create.
9 Click Exit to exit the Export Spreadsheet dialog box.
Note: If the Creation operation is successful, a confirmation message

appears. If there are any errors or exceptions, you are taken to the
Errors/Exceptions dialog box.
General Notes:
The spreadsheet will contain information about:
 Minimum/maximum/default values of input fields.
 Explanatory notes about input fields.
Input fields with min/max values will automatically have data validation in the
spreadsheet to flag incorrect input values.
Importing Spreadsheets
To import a spreadsheet:
1 On the main menu, click File | Spreadsheet Import/Export.
The Spreadsheet Import/Export dialog box appears.
2 On the Spreadsheet Import/Export dialog box, click the Import
Spreadsheet tab.
The Import Spreadsheet dialog box appears.
3 On the Import Spreadsheet dialog box, use the Browse button to
locate the spreadsheet you want to import.
4 Select the spreadsheet.
5 Click Import.
6 Click Exit to exit the Import Spreadsheet dialog box.
Note: Any errors will be displayed so you can repair them in ACCE or in the
spreadsheet.
Important: If you have a spreadsheet open, save it before click Import.
Data Pre-Check Before Spreadsheet is Imported

 Min./Max. limits are validated by data validation added to the Excel sheet
to prevent entering data outside the limits.
 Program pre-checks that user tag numbers in the worksheets are unique
to ensure correct association of installation bulks with project.
 Program pre-checks that number of pipe lines and loops for any
equipment does not exceed the system limits in ACCE.
 Errors are flagged and displayed so that you can correct them in the ACCE
project or the spreadsheet.
 Program validates that every area specified for components has the area
specified in the Area Worksheet.
 Program checks for the Project/Scenario from which the spreadsheet was
created and the Project/Scenario in which the spreadsheet is being
imported. If these are different from each other, a warning dialog pops up
to remind you that the project currencies and unit of measure may differ
and that ACCE does no conversions during the import. At this point, you
have the option to proceed with the import or cancel.
Spreadsheet Structure
 One worksheet for each type of project component (process equipment,
plant bulk, quoted cost item)
 One worksheet for each of the installation bulk options (items on the
Options drop-down)
 One worksheet for area specs (area name, report group, area type,
dimensions)
 Worksheets are created only for the items you choose in the tree-view of
the spreadsheet import/export dialog
 One Contents worksheet at the beginning to aid navigation to all the
worksheets. It contains hyperlinks to other worksheets.
Example of a AREAS worksheet:
Example of a component worksheet:
Features Common to All Worksheets

The following features are common to all Worksheets.
 One row defines a single item
 Input fields are in columns (for example, there is one column for Design
Pressure)
 Input field columns show min/max/default values and descriptive notes
for that field
 Input fields with drop-down lists in the GUI will have corresponding drop-
down list in the spreadsheet
 There is an Action column to indicate the “action” for each row of input.
The Action options for each row are:
This option does this
New creates a new item
Change If an input field for a component in the ACCE project has a value
and you use the CHANGE action to modify that value, the value is
updated. Also, if an input field for a component in the ACCE project
is blank and you assign a value in the spreadsheet, the value is
added.
If an input field has a value which you delete (that is, the cell is
blank), the value in the input field for the component in the ACCE
project is deleted.
Note: Not available on the AREAS worksheet.

Delete deletes an existing component
Note: Not available on the AREAS worksheet.

Ignore skips the item during read
Similar to the Volumetric model flag for pipe item details.
Notes:
The CHANGE and DELETE actions in the spreadsheet are designed to work
only when the data for the components existing in the project has been
exported to the spreadsheet first.
For example:
 You create components in an ACCE project from a spreadsheet,
starting with a blank spreadsheet and using NEW actions.
 If you need to perform CHANGE or DELETE actions on any of these
items, you must re-export the data from the project.
Similar to the ACCE input forms, in the Spreadsheets:
 Required fields are highlighted with red borders .
 Alternate required fields are highlighted with green/yellow borders.
Caution: The spreadsheet does not validate input fields with drop-down
lists. For example, you could type anything in the cell that contains the drop-
down list (or copy and paste in the wrong text) and if the action is set to
Change or New, the drop-down field in the ACCE GUI would be updated to
the value you specified value that might not be a valid choice on the drop-
down.
Caution: The spreadsheet application has a tree view in which you can select
process equipment types or plant bulk types for which they want
spreadsheets to be generated. In this tree view there is an option to select
Installation bulks. This option causes all the spreadsheets for the different
installation bulk options to be created. However, this option cannot be
selected on its own. It has to be accompanied by some equipment and/or
plant bulk selections. If you select this option only and click Create, an error
dialog is generated.
Features for Specific Worksheets

Project components (process equipment and plant bulks) worksheets:
 There is a column to indicate the parent area for the project equipment.
Installation bulk options worksheets:

 Each row contains one installation bulk item associated with a project
component. For example, on the Pipe – Item details worksheet, each
row of input contains one piping line associated with a project component.
 There is a User Tag column to indicate the project component associated
with the installation bulk.
Notes:
 The user tag number input is mandatory and must match user tag of a
project component that is unique
 User tag number uniqueness required only for spreadsheet
import/export. It is not enforced within the ACCE GUI.
Instructions for Working with Spreadsheets

To access the contents of the spreadsheet:
 Click the Contents worksheet or click Contents at the bottom of any
worksheet.
To add a new line of input:

 Insert a row above the LAST ROW.
To remove a line of input from the spreadsheet:

 Delete the input row completely.
On AREAS and installation bulks sheets:
To add new areas:

1 Insert a row above the LAST ROW.
2 Set the ACTION field for the new row to NEW.
3 Enter the area name and parent report group.
4 Enter other area data.
On Components sheets:
 Do not delete rows 1–10 or the LAST ROW.
 Do not delete columns A-F.
To add new items:

1 Insert a row above the LAST ROW.
2 Set the ACTION field for the new row to NEW.
3 Enter item description and parent area.
4 Enter other input data for the new item.
To modify the input fields to match your preferences:

 Delete, hide, or move whole columns past column F.
Fixing Spreadsheet Errors

If there are errors or exceptions on Import or Export, the Errors/Exceptions
dialog box appears, showing the errors and exceptions. Use this dialog box to
fix the errors; then run the Import or Export operation again.
If you have errors when exporting a spreadsheet, repair the errors in the
ACCE GUI.
If you have errors when importing a spreadsheet, repair the errors in the
spreadsheet.
Caution: The spreadsheet application has a tree view in which you can select
process equipment types or plant bulk types for which they want
spreadsheets to be generated. In this tree view there is an option to select
Installation bulks. This option causes all the spreadsheets for the different
installation bulk options to be created. However, this option cannot be
selected on its own. It has to be accompanied by some equipment and/or
plant bulk selections. If you select this option only and click Create, an error
dialog is generated.
Using Custom User Attributes with

Spreadsheet Data Exporting
Support for Custom User Attributes is the same as in ACCE and will appear in
the worksheets. However, any defined scroll lists for custom user attributes
will not appear in the exported worksheets.
When using custom user attributes as defined in UserAttributesCust.xls,
please note the following restrictions:
 Avoid the use of “special” characters (for example, ‘/’, ‘,’, ‘$’, ‘#’, etc.)
when defining the variable names in UserAttributesCust.xls (Column D
in the screenshot below). The Excel API generates an exception if such
characters are included which will prevent data from being exported into
the Excel Spreadsheet. Note: These characters can be included in the
Display Names (Column E below).
 Only numbers can be defined in the min, max columns (columns M and N
below) in UserAttributesCust.xls. Only numbers are permitted since
data validation is made on these values. Including letters in these fields
will prevent data from being exported into the Excel Spreadsheet.
 Notes can be added in the Long Description (Column P below) in
UserAttributesCust.xls. These will appear in the properties window in
the ACCE UI as well as in Excel after exporting the spreadsheet with data
(as a comment to the attribute name).
 It is recommended that Slot Type definitions (Column G below) and
Default (Column J) be consistent. Example: If the slot type is defined as
integer, it is recommended to define any defaults as integer values (not
alpha numeric values).
2 Defining the Project Basis
The Project Basis defines specifications that pertain to the overall project
scenario. These specifications influence the design and cost estimate by
defining system defaults and environmental variables.
Project Basis Specifications are accessed from the Project Basis view in
Project Explorer.
Notes:
 A red arrow on an icon indicates that you can right click on the item to
access a pop-up menu.
 In a pipeline project, specifications marked with a double asterisk (**) do
NOT apply.
2 Defining the Project Basis 73

This chapter describes the different Project Basis specifications, as well as
how to customize specification libraries.
Project Properties
Project Properties are initially specified when creating a new project.
To access project properties:

 In the main Project Basis folder, right-click Project Properties; then
click Edit.
74 2 Defining the Project Basis

You cannot edit Project Name, Scenario Name, or Units of Measure; they
can only be specified when creating a new project.
You can edit the following:
Project Description: The description entered here appears as the Project
Description on the Project Summary spreadsheet and as the Brief Description
on the Executive Summary spreadsheet. All scenarios under the project share
the project description. The description can be up to 500 characters in length
and can be comprised of letters, numbers, and punctuation.
Remarks: Any remarks entered will appear immediately after the Title Page
of evaluation reports in Icarus Editor. Remarks can be up to 6,000 characters
in length and can be comprised of letters, numbers, and punctuation.
Remarks might include, for example, the intended purpose of the estimate,
executive summary of results, or an explanation of assumptions.
General Project Data

General Project Data is initially specified when creating a project.
To access General Project Data:

1 Right-click General Project Data in the main Project Basis folder.
2 On the menu that appears, click Edit.

The Standard Basis Input File Specifications form appears.
You cannot edit Units of Measure, Country Base, Currency Symbol or

Currency Conversion Rate; these can only be specified when creating a
new project. You can, however, change the Currency Conversion Rate for
specific items within the project.
You can edit the following:
Project Title: Appears as the project title on reports in Aspen Icarus
Reporter and Icarus Editor, and also appears as the Scenario Description on
the Project Summary spreadsheet.
Estimate Class: Appears on the Title Page in Icarus Editor. Intended to
indicate the purpose of specifications (for example, budget).
Job Number: Appears on the Title Page in Icarus Editor.
Prepared By: Appears at the top of reports generated by Aspen Icarus
Reporter and on the Title Page in Icarus Editor.
Estimate Date: Appears immediately under the project title at the top of the
Title Page in Icarus Editor. Reports generated by Aspen Icarus Reporter also
include an Estimate Date; however, the Estimate Date shown in Aspen Icarus
Reporter is the date on which the project evaluation was run.
Basis for Capital Costs

The Basis for Capital Costs folder includes:
 Units of measure customization.
 General mechanical design rules for equipment, piping, civil, steel,
instrumentation, electrical, insulation, and paint.

 Contingency and miscellaneous project costs.
 Escalation indices for material and labor costs.
 Engineering workforce specifications by phase, discipline, and task.
 Construction workforce wage rates and productivities, for both the overall
project and by craft and workweek definition.
 Code of Account (COA) re-definitions, additions and allocations.
 Indexing of material costs and man-hours by COA.
 Equipment rental items, durations, and rates.
Input Units of Measure Customization

Input Units of Measure Customization lets you customize the units of measure
that appear on specification forms.
Input Units of Measure Customization can only be accessed from outside of
the project in the Palette’s Libraries view or when creating a new project. It
appears in read-only form in the Project Explorer’s Project Basis view.
To customize input units of measure:

1 With no project open, expand the Basis for Capital Costs folder in the
Palette’s Libraries view. Expand the appropriate units of measure basis
folder – Inch-Pound or Metric. Right-click on the specifications file that
will contain the customized units of measure; then click Modify.
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator displays the Basis for Capital Costs library in
Project Explorer.

2 In the Units of Measure Customization folder, right-click Input; then,
on the menu that appears, click Edit.

The Input Units of Measure Specifications dialog box appears.
3 If, for example, you want to use CM/H (centimeters per hour) instead of
M/H (meters per hour) to specify conveyor belt speed in your metric-basis
project, click Velocity and Flow Rate and then click Modify.
4 On the Velocity and Flow Rate Units form, enter CM/H as the new unit
name for M/H. Then enter the conversion factor between the two units in
the Conversion field. In this example, the conversion factor between the
two units is 100 because:
100 CM/H = 1 M/H.
5 Click OK to accept the modifications and return to the previous dialog box.
6 When finished modifying input units of measure, click Close.

Electrical Specs
Notes:
The default cable type for 34.5kV high voltage cables is changed to
ARMOR type for US/ME basis.
 The default cable type for HV, MV, LV cables is generally W-C type for a
US/ME basis project.
 34.5/33 kV HV cables cannot be W-C type since the cable diameter is
more than 6” and the maximum conduit size is limited to 6”.
 So, if you change the high voltage to 34.5/33 kV and select W-C as the
cable type, ACCE generates a warning message saying “34.5/33 KV CABLE
CANNOT BE W-C TYPE, ARMOR TYPE WILL BE USED” and the cable type is
changed to ARMOR type.
Cable drop support are neglected for 34.5/33 kV W-NC and M-NC
cables.
 Cable drop supports can either be conduit type or tray type depending
upon your selections. But when the high voltage is selected as 34.5/33kV
the engine automatically omits the cable drop supports since it is
unnecessary to design trays/conduits for cable drops for 34.5/33 kV HV
cables.
Change in calculations for the control cable lengths and number of

terminations at the electrical installation bulk level for equipments.
 Beginning with V7.3.2, the control cable lengths and number of
terminations calculations have been changed at the electrical installation
bulk level.
 Generally there are four fields which govern the control cable lengths and
their terminations.
i. Distance to substation
ii. Number of push buttons
iii. Control cable length
iv. Control cable no. of conductors

 The best practice is to fill out all the fields such as no. of push buttons,
Control cable length and control cable no. of conductors.
Examples:
Case 1: If the user specifies the ‘no. of push buttons’ field as ‘2’ and leaves
everything blank. Then the number of control conductors would be 2*4 = 8
conductors and the number of terminations would be 8*2 = 16 terminations.
The control cable run length would be:
‘Distance to substation field’ specified here or if left blank the
‘Distance between MCC and equipment’ set at the area level electrical
specifications whose default is ’25 feet’.
+
‘Distance between MCC and CC’ set in the process control tree whose
default is ‘100 feet’
So, the control cable run length will be 100+25 =125 feet.
Hence, the total control cable length will be (125+10)*8 = 1080 feet.
Case 2: If the user specifies the ‘no. of push buttons’ field as ‘3’ and specifies
the ‘control cable run length’ also as ‘100 feet’. Then the no. of conductors
would be 3*4= 12. The number of terminations would be 12*2 = 24
terminations. So, the total cable length will be (100+10)*12 = 1320 feet.
Case 3: If the user specifies the ‘no. of push buttons’ field as ‘4’ and also
specifies the ‘control cable no. of conductors’ as ‘5’. Then the no. of

terminations would be 5*2*4= 40 terminations and the total control cable
length would be ((100+25) + 10)*5*4 = 2700 feet.
Note: The control cable wire lengths change with the control cable wire
type selection made by the user. For example, Multi core cable lengths for
the above Case: 3 would be 5C, 540 feet and single core cable lengths would
be 1C, 2700 feet.
Output (Reports) Units of Measure

Customization
Output (Reports) Units of Measure Customization lets you customize the units
of measure that appear on Capital Costs and other reports.
To customize output units of measure:

1 Right-click Output (Reports) Units of Measure Customization in the
Basis for Capital Costs folder in Project Explorer’s Project Basis view, and
then click Edit on the pop-up menu.
The Output Units of Measure dialog box appears.
2 You can change the basis for all output units of measure by selecting a
different basis in the Unit of Measure Basis section; however, note that
this voids all previous customizations.
To customize only individual units, such as velocity and flow rate units, select
the unit type and click Modify. Then, for each unit you wish to change, enter
the new unit name and the conversion factor (between the old and new
units).

Note: In this example, centimeters per hour (CM/H) replaces meters per hour
(M/H). A conversion factor of 100 has been entered because 100 CM/H = 1
M/H.
For example, if you want to use CM/H (centimeters per hour) instead of
M/H (meters per hour) to specify conveyor belt speed in your metric-basis
project, enter “CM/H” as the new unit name for M/H. Then, enter the
conversion factor between the two units in the Conversion field. In this
example, the conversion factor between the two units is 100 because 100
CM/H = 1 M/H.
3 Click OK to accept the modifications and return to the previous dialog box.
When finished modifying output units of measure, click Close.
Design Basis
Design Basis defines the general mechanical design rules for the entire
project. Aspen Capital Cost Estimator uses built in, industry-standard design
procedures for the preparation of mechanical designs. The standards used
include ASME (American Standards), BS5500 (British Standards), JIS
(Japanese Standards), DIN (German Standards), or EN 13445 (European
Standards).

Design Basis influences the way Aspen Capital Cost Estimator evaluates all
components of the facility (for example, equipment and bulk items —
materials, manpower and indirects) and lets you define custom pipe
specifications and custom insulation specs.
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator uses default values if Design Basis information
is not specified. The default values depend upon the selected country base.
You can make one set of Design Basis selections and then override those
selections for a particular area. See “Defining Area Specifications” on
page 308 for instructions.
X X
Design Basis specifications are divided into the following categories:

 Equipment Specs
Equipment design specifications, including design code for pressure
vessels, size limits for shop fab equipment, maximum diameter of vessels
fabricated using pipe, maximum horizontal deflection of vessels as a
percentage of vessel height, when to apply vessel stress relief (always,
never, or when required by code), whether to use welded or seamless
tubes for heat exchangers and reboilers, percent of the rotating
equipment cost for spare parts, and which equipment to use for heavy
lifting (gin poles or cranes).
 Piping Specs
General: Design specifications for all piping.
You can change the length of pipe per fitting going to Remote Shop.
To do this:
1 In the project basis, go to Basis for Capital Costs | Design Basis |
Piping Specs | General.
2 Right-click General; then click Edit.

The General Piping Specs dialog box appears.
3 On the General Piping Specs dialog box, in the Length/fitting to

remote shop field, enter the length of pipe to be procured in the
remote shop. Default is 10 ft (3 m). Minimum is 4 ft (1.5) and
Maximum is 40 ft (12 m).
When entering the length of pipe to be procured in the remote shop:
Assume:
 Length per fitting to remote shop = L_fit
 Total length of pipe = L_total
 Number of fittings = N (including flanges generated for valves)
Then,
Length of pipe sent to remote shop = N*L_fit
IF (L_total - N*L_fit) >= L_fit

IF (L_total - N*L_fit) < L_fit, the length of pipe procured in remote shop
= L_total
Note: Pipe is procured and fabricated in remote shop when it meets the
following criteria:
 Pipe diameter is within remote shop range
 Pipe fabrication type is not FIELD
 IF fabrication type is RMT, then there are fittings specified for the
pipe to be sent to remote shop
You can specify to send pipe supports to Remote Shop.
To do this:

3 On the General Piping Specs dialog box, in the Pipe supports to

remote shop field, enter the percent of pipe supports to be sent to
remote shop. Default is 0.
Notes: If the pipe is being sent to remote shop (pipe diameter is within
remote shop range, pipe fabrication type is not FIELD, if fabrication type is
RMT), the portion of the total number of pre-fab pipe supports you specify
will be procured in remote shop.
 The rest of the pre-fab pipe supports will be procured in the field.
 The man-hours to erect all pipe supports will be booked in the field as
well.
These specifications apply to:
 Installation bulk pipe associated with project components.
 Plant bulk pipe
 Utility piping and utility stations
 Yard pipe

The same code of account (366) is used for pipe supports procured in remote
shop or field.
The subtype 951 is specified for pipe supports procured in remote shop. You
can use this subtype to create code of account exception and book the
remote-shop pipe supports to a new user-defined code of account. You can
then index the code of account as needed.
You can specify to have welded valves installed in the Remote Shop.
To do this:
3 On the General Piping Specs dialog box, in the Welded valves in

remote shop field, select Y. Default is N.

This applies only to:
 pipe less than 2 inch (50 mm) NPS with SW (socket-welded)
connection type
 pipe with 2 inch (50 mm) or more NPS and WW (Weld pipe/weld
valves) connection type
Notes: When you set the Welded valves in remote shop field to Y and
when the pipe diameter is in the remote shop pipe diameter range:
 non-flanged valves are counted as fittings to determine the length of
pipe that is sent to remote shop.
 The number of welds in remote shop is increased to account for
welding of the valves in the pipe spool. The number of field welds is
decreased appropriately.
 Valve erection man-hours are also accounted in the remote shop; line
item for valve erection in the field are not generated.
Note: For SC, SB, VC, VS and PF connection types, even when the pipe
diameter is in remote shop diameter range, the pipe is fabricated in the field.
So these connection types are not affected by the Welded valves in remote
shop field.
For DIN pipe, you can specify the pipe thickness method. You can specify to
allow pressure class (PN) input on pipe schedule fields OR to have pipe
thickness calculated per DIN EN 10220 and EN ISO 1127 standards.
To specify which DIN pipe thickness method to use:


3 On the General Piping Specs dialog box, in the DIN pipe thickness
option, specify PN or DIN EN. Default is DIN EN.
If you specify PN:
 You can specify PN numbers in the schedule field for DIN pipe. PN
numbers will be output in detailed bulks for pipe and fittings.
If you specify DIN EN:
 PN numbers are not allowed on the schedule field for DIN pipe. Instead
thicknesses are calculated according to the appropriate DIN EN standards
mentioned below.
 If PN numbers are input on the schedule fields for DIN pipe warnings are
generated and the PN number input is ignored.
 The method for calculating wall thickness is as follows:

 The dimensional standards that govern the pipe thickness in DIN
piping are:
o DIN EN 10220 for seamless and welded carbon steel pipe. (This
replaces earlier DIN 2448 and DIN 2458 standards for seamless
and welded CS pipe respectively).
o EN ISO 1127 for stainless steel pipe. (This replaces earlier DIN
2462 and DIN 2463 standards for seamless and welded SS pipe
respectively)
 For DIN pipe, thickness is calculated based on material properties, design
temperature and pressure and corrosion allowance. Then the next higher
standard thickness, based on the dimensional standards mentioned above,
is selected and reported. Pipe weight is calculated per the equations given
in the dimensional standards mentioned above.
 The standard thickness determined for pipe is also used for fittings such
as elbows, tees and reducers, and so on.
 In the detailed bulk section of the output report, thicknesses are output
instead of PN numbers for pipe and fittings.
 You can enter pressure classes in the Flange class input for DIN pipe.
These classes are used for flanges, valves and gaskets. Note: In the cost
engine, for DIN piping flange classes are not calculated based on p/t
rating tables in DIN standards (now replaced by EN 1092-1: 2007). The
rating is calculated based on ASME B16.5 and then mapped to a PN
number as follows:
Flange Class Equivalent PN
125 10
150 10
250 25
300 25
600 40
800 63
900 63
1500 100
2500 160
3000 250
You can select pipe bends in lieu of elbows and fabricated branch connections
in lieu of tees at the general and pipe spec level.
To select pipe bends in lieu of elbows:

 On the Design Basis | Piping Specs | General dialog box, use the
Bend for elbow field.
The options are B (Bend) and E (Elbow). Elbow is the default.
To select fabricated branch connections in lieu of tees:

 On the Design Basis | Piping Specs | General dialog box, use the
Branch for tee field.
The options are B (Branch) and T (Tee). Tee is the default.

Notes:
 The selection in this form applies to all the installation bulk lines
specified for that component.
 You can override these specifications by specific input for these fields
on the individual plant bulk pipe.
Material: Design specifications for specific piping material. The

information entered here lets you redefine default specifications for any
system material. For example, if you define a material and later select
that material when defining installation piping for a component, your
material specifications are used instead of the system default
specifications.
Custom: Custom piping specifications. These specifications may consist of
your company’s standard piping specifications or simply the most
commonly used specifications for pipe on the current project. You can
have up to 999 custom piping specs.
To use custom piping, you have to first select a piping spec file to open.
To do so:
1 In the Piping Specs folder, right-click Custom; then click Select on
the pop-up menu.
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator provides two custom pipe specs files to help
you get started:
 CARBONST.DAT
 DEFAULT.DAT
2 Click the file you want; then click OK.
To edit your custom pipe spec file:
1 In the Piping Specs folder, right-click Custom; then click edit on the
pop-up menu.

The External Custom Pipe Specs dialog box appears.
The External Custom Pipe Specs dialog box has three options, shown
below:
o Remarks
o Units of Measure
o Specifications
Remarks dialog box

Units of Measure dialog box

Specifications dialog box
2 On the External Custom Pipe Specs dialog box, click the dialog box
you want to modify; then click Modify.
3 When you have finished modifying your custom piping spec, on the
External Custom Pipe Specs dialog box, click Close.
(Refer to the flowcharts in Icarus Reference, Chapter 18, for information
on developing various aspects of piping.)

Note: The Make minimum schedule mandatory field is N as default.
When this field is set to Y, the inputs in the Minimum schedule fields for
each diameter range (small, medium, large) are treated as mandatory
schedules for that diameter range. Any pipe with a custom spec in which the
Make minimum schedule mandatory field is set to Y always has the
schedule specified in the minimum schedule input.
When this field is set to Y and the calculated schedule is larger than the input
on minimum schedule, you will get a warning message but the user input on
the minimum schedule will still be used as the mandatory schedule.
This option has no effect when DIN piping is selected in the Piping design
option field in Design basis | piping | general specs.
Click New on the Customer Piping Specs Manager to add a custom pipe
specification. You can have a maximum of 100 custom piping specs per
project and 600 in one file.
After creating a custom piping spec, you must export it to the library,
giving it your new name.
To export the file to the library:
1 In the Piping Specs folder, right-click Custom; then click Export to
Library on the pop-up menu.
The Duplicate Custom Piping Specs file based on PIPESPEC dialog
box appears.
2 In the File Name field, type a file name for this piping spec. You can
also add a description of the piping spec in the File Description field.
3 Click OK.
A dialog box appears confirming that you have successfully added your
newly-created piping spec to the library.
 Civil/Steel Specs
Civil and Steel design specifications, including wind data, seismic data,
comprehensive strength, concrete ready-mix costs, concrete overpour
percentage, rebar type and cost, seal slab thickness, number of formwork
reuses, concrete type (standard, higher grade, or chemical-resistant),

structure analysis type, unit cost and percent of purchased backfill when
used in place of excavated soil, excavation slope ratio, steel finish type
(painted or galvanized), grating and grating type, and steel galvanizing
cost per weight unit.
 Instrumentation Specs
Instrumentation design specifications, including instrumentation type
(electronic or pneumatic) and specifications for instrument transmission
and thermocouple transmission: control valve type, control valve
positioner, control valve position switch, temperature element type, flow
element type, instrument transmitter type, distance from component to
junction box, whether to exclude air regulators if low pressure air is
available, control valve center type (analog, digital, or none), and whether
to have a conventional 4-20 mA wired system or a digital Fieldbus system.
Unlike a 4-20 mA system in which each instrument in the field requires its
own set of wires to run to the local junction box and back to the control
center, a Fieldbus system allows multiple instruments to share one set of
cables. The Fieldbus systems are designed based on the distances
involved (cable length), number of field instruments, instrument type, and
power requirements.
If you select to use a Fieldbus system, also select, in the Connection
Type box, the type of bricks and cable termination. Select “SC” for spring
clamp connections. Select “ST” for screw terminal bricks and terminations.
Both “SC” and “ST” use standard instrument cable. Select “MP” for a
system designed with cable that is pre-cut and molded with pluggable
terminations (and bricks with pluggable terminals). “MP” does not require
installation hours to connect “pig-tail” terminations – the cables snap onto
the bricks. An “MP” implementation requires the purchase of one
pluggable device gland per instrument.
In an explosion-proof area, the Fieldbus system will consist of bricks and
power supply units that are rated for intrinsically safe applications (I.S.-
rated non-pluggable components by Hawke International). You can also, if
using a Fieldbus system, select to include Fieldbus short-circuit
protection for each “spur” in the Fieldbus segments. For 3-drop bricks, the
short-circuit protection units are purchased separately; for all bricks of
larger size, short-circuit protection is incorporated within the brick itself (if
selected).
For the Fieldbus system, you can also specify:
 Whether the fieldbus has short circuit protection (area or project
level)
 The percent of active bricks (area level only)
 Whether the fieldbus has a backup power supply (area or project
level)
You can override these project-level instrumentation specs for a particular
area when defining an area (see page 308). For example, you can select
X X
to use a Fieldbus system in the Design Basis, but then make an exception
for one area by selecting the conventional 4-20 mA wired system in the
area’s instrumentation specs.

Fieldbus short-circuit protection can be defined at the project-level or the
area-level.
Notes:
 The percent of active bricks can be specified at the area level only.
 When you specify a percent active brick value for the MP connection
type, two cost lines are generated:
o Bricks with short circuit protection
o Bricks without short circuit protection.
 For molded pluggable connection types with short circuit
protection specified as Y, the brick as a whole has short circuit
protection capability.
 For Spring clamp/screw terminal connection types with short
circuit protection specified as Y, the short circuit protection
capability is in the connection between the field devices and the bricks.
When you specify a percent active brick value for these two
connection types, the following cost lines are generated:
 Field bus screw terminal brick (for Screw terminal type)
or
 Field bus spring clamp brick (for Spring clamp type)
and
 Field bus short circuit protection (for Spring clamp/Screw
terminal type)
Effect of Selecting Backup Power Supply Required (General

Instrument Specs form):
 If you select that no backup power supply is required (the default),
the generated report appears as follows, with one Fieldbus item:
 If you select that backup power supply is required, the generated

report appears as follows, with two identical Fieldbus items:
 Electrical Specs
Electrical design specifications, including power supply frequency, class
and division or zone, whether to use 3- or 4-wire distribution system,
voltage levels, wire specifications at the different voltage levels, and cable
placement.
Communication and Alarm Systems include:
 Paging and General Alarm Systems (PAGA)
 Telephone Systems
 Closed Circuit TV Systems (CCTV)
 Area Networking (LAN)
 Radio Systems

 Access Control Systems
 Intrusion Detection Systems
 Meteorological Monitoring Systems
The estimate for each system include:
 Equipment Cabinets
 Cable Runs
 Raceways (Cable Trays)
 Junction Boxes if necessary
 Field Devices
 Monitors if necessary
 Mounting Poles if necessary
Notes:
 The minimum area for an area or a building for a Communication and
Alarm System is 400 square ft. (37 square meters).
 Telephone handsets are not included if a PAGA system requested.
 For detail specifications and defaults of Communication and Alarm
Systems, see Aspen Icarus Reference, Chapter 22, Electrical.
You can specify the Communication and Alarm Systems at the Project Level
and at the Area Level.
Project Level
Area Level

At each level, you can specify whether the estimation of that model would be
done at the project level or at the Area level or not.
At the project level and the area level, the defaults for the field “distance
equipment cabinet to field devices” are the” Distance from the equipment
cabinet to the JB” + “Distance from the JB to the field device.”
You can specify these fields at the project level Instrumentation
specifications. At the area level if left blank this field inherits the values from
the project level.
Note: When you select the high voltage as 34.5kV (US, ME) / 33kV (UK, EU,
JP) in the general electrical specifications, then all the high voltage motors in
the project should be powered at the corresponding medium voltage, because
all the motors in the system are at the most rated for 15kV (US, ME) / 11kV
(UK, EU, JP) only.
Public Address and General Alarm Defaults:
Description Defaults used by Aspentech at Project level and Area level
Public Address General Alarm

(PAGA)
PAGA - Equipment Cabinets 1 cabinet per 150 total devices
PAGA - Raceway Length 30% of the cable length (3 cables per tray)
PAGA - Raceway Width 4 inch tray with material and tray type depending on the selection
made in the LAST AREA electrical specs
PAGA - Cable Run per Item Distance from the equipment cabinet to the JB + Distance from
the JB to the field device. 100 + 50 = 150 feet
PAGA - Junction Boxes 1 each per 10 speakers and strobes combined.
PAGA - Outdoor speakers 1 per every 60 ft X 60 ft per level

PAGA - Indoor speakers 1 per every 40 ft X 40 ft per level
PAGA - Outdoor Strobes 1 per every 80 ft X 90 ft per level
PAGA - Indoor Strobes 1 per every 80 ft X 80 ft per level

PAGA - Outdoor Handsets 1 per every 120 ft X 120 ft per level
PAGA - Indoor Handsets 1 per every 20 ft X 20 ft per level. ill not be estimated if the area
has a Telephone system. (since it’s already estimated in the
Telephone system)
PAGA - Acoustic Hoods 1 per each outdoor handset
PAGA - Poles 1 pole per 2 outdoor speakers and 1 strobe

Closed Circuit Television

(CCTV)
CCTV - Equipment Cabinets 1 cabinet per project
CCTV - Raceway Length 30% of the cable length (3 cables per tray)
CCTV - Raceway Width 4 inch tray with material and tray type depending on the selection
CCTV - Cable Run per Item Distance from the equipment cabinet to the JB + Distance from
CCTV - Junction Boxes 1 JB per camera
CCTV - Cameras 1 camera per area

CCTV - Monitors 1 monitor per 4 cameras (calculated at the LAST area from the
number of total monitors)
CCTV - Poles 1 pole per camera
Telephone System
Telephone - Equipment Cabinets 1 cabinet per project
Telephone - Raceway Length 90% of the cable length (8 cables per tray)
Telephone - Raceway Width 4 inch tray with material and tray type depending on the selection
Telephone - Cable Distance from the equipment cabinet to the JB + Distance from
Telephone - Junction Boxes 0

Telephone - Outdoor Phones 1 per every 120 ft X 120 ft per level. Will not be estimated if the
area has a PAGA system. (since its already estimated in the
PAGA system)
Telephone - Indoor Phones 1 per every 20 ft X 20 ft per level.
Telephone - Video Conference 1 per administration building (ONLY 1 for the whole project).
Area Network System
(LAN/WAN)
Area Network - Equipment 1 cabinet per project
Cabinets
Area Network - Raceway Length 90% of the cable length (1 cable per tray)
Area Network - Raceway Width 4 inch tray with material and tray type depending on the selection
Area Network - Cable Distance from the equipment cabinet to the JB + Distance from
Area Network - Junction Boxes 0

Area Network - Switches 1 per building
Radio Systems
Radio Systems - Equipment 1 cabinet per project
Cabinets

Radio Systems - Raceway Length 90% of the cable length and 1 cable per tray
Radio Systems - Raceway Width 4 inch tray with material and tray type depending on the selection
Radio Systems - Cable Distance from the equipment cabinet to the JB + Distance from
Radio Systems - Plant Radios 6 radios per area

Radio Systems - Marine Radios 0
Radio Systems - Aviation Radios 0
Radio Systems - Antenna/Towers 1 per project
Access Control System
Access Control - Equipment 1 cabinet per project
Cabinets
Access Control - Raceway Length 90% of the cable length (1 cable per tray)
Access Control - Raceway Width 4 inch tray with material and tray type depending on the selection
Access Control - Cable Distance from the equipment cabinet to the JB + Distance from
Access Control - Junction Boxes 1 each per card reader/door operator
Access Control - Workstations 2 per each area

Access Control - Card Readers 2 per building
Access Control - Controllers 1 per gate
Access Control - Door/Turnstile 2 per gate
Operators
Intrusion Detection
Intrusion Detection - Equipment 1 cabinet per project
Cabinets
Intrusion Detection - Raceway None
Length
Intrusion Detection - Raceway None
Width
Intrusion Detection - Cable run per Distance from the equipment cabinet to the JB + Distance from
item the JB to the field device. 100 + 50 = 150 feet. Will be always
buried type.
Intrusion Detection - Junction 1 per each pole
Boxes
Intrusion Detection - Workstations 1 per 45 cameras
Intrusion Detection - Detectors 1 per 350 feet of fence

Intrusion Detection - Cameras 1 per 100 feet of fence
Intrusion Detection - Monitors 4 per work station
Intrusion Detection - Poles 1 per camera
Meteorological Monitoring
System
Meteorological Monitoring - 1 cabinet per project
Equipment Cabinets

Meteorological Monitoring - 90% of the cable length (1 cable per tray)
Raceway Length
Meteorological Monitoring - 4 inch tray with material and tray type depending on the selection
Raceway Width made in the LAST AREA electrical specs
Meteorological Monitoring - Cable Distance from the equipment cabinet to the JB + Distance from
Run per Station the JB to the field device. 100 + 50 = 150 feet
Meteorological Monitoring - 1 station per project

Weather Station
Structured Cabling for Buildings
Fiber optic cable length 550 meter cable/building (24 fiber armor cable)
Fiber optic cable terminations 2 terminations/building
CAT5 cable length 350 meter cable/building (25 pair OSP CAT5 armor cable)
CAT5 cable terminations 2 terminations/building
Notes:
 Icarus estimates the above mentioned devices for each area and adds
all those together after the LAST AREA and reports it with the LAST
AREA.
 Icarus estimates grounding costs for the poles.
 For buried cable Icarus estimates excavation costs.
 Cables are estimated depending upon the number of devices in the
system. Equipment cabinets, Junction boxes are not considered as
devices
 Icarus estimates 25 feet cable for each monitor, and work station.
 The comm. and alarm systems project level model is always estimated
when the report group is in the ISBL. Even though if the 8 systems are
set to Y at the project level, the report groups which are in the OSBL
does not generate any comm. and alarm systems cost. The user has to
go to the area specs. of the OSBL report group and set each of the
systems as Y. Then only the comm. and alarm systems cost would be
seen.
 All the calculations are the same except the building area should be
subtracted from the outdoor area and the outdoor items should be
calculated based on this area. If the outdoor area, open concrete
structure, open steel structure area is less than 400 sq. ft then Icarus
does not generate any outdoor items. This is also true with the
buildings, if the building area (Length*width*levels) is less than 400
sq. ft Icarus does not generate any indoor items.
 If the area is less than 400 sq. ft then the system does not generate
any CCTV system and Radio system for that area.
 There will be ONLY 1 video conference system for the whole project
 When an area has both PAGA and Telephone system as `YES'
previously we were estimating Indoor/Outdoor handsets in the PAGA
system ONLY. There is a change to this, now we will be estimating
Outdoor handsets from the PAGA system and Indoor handsets from
the Telephone system.

 The calculation for the indoor items like PAGA indoor speakers, indoor
strobes, indoor handsets, CCTV indoor handsets, Switches for Area
network system, Card readers for Access control system should be
different for the different building types. Refer to How Public Address
and General Alarm Systems apply to buildings: below for details.
 If the building area is less than 400 sq. ft then Icarus does not
estimate Switches for Area network system and Card readers for the
Access control system.
How Public Address and General Alarm Systems apply to buildings:
 Insulation Specs
Insulation design specifications, including thickness schedule, minimum
temperature for hot insulation, equipment insulation type, equipment
insulation jacket type, fire resistance rating for fireproofing on skirts,
equipment fireproofing type, whether to include fireproofing on the
outside or both sides of skirts, steel fire resistance fireproof rating, and
steel fireproofing type, coverage, and installation (field or remote shop).
You can specify a named insulation library for a project for a particular
use.
You can specify a named insulation library for an area for a particular use.
You can create, duplicate, modify and delete:
 Hot Insulation Schedule libraries
 Cold Insulation Schedule libraries
 Libraries of Insulation Equivalent Length rules
You can create any number of Hot Insulation Schedule libraries with
one insulation specification table/file. Each library has a name associated
to it. You can use 20 Hot Insulation Schedule tables in a project.
Hot Insulation Schedule files are named:
INSHOT##.DAT, where ## is the number (up to 20) of the Hot Insulation
Schedule file.

You can create any number of Cold Insulation Schedule libraries with
one insulation specification table/file. Each library has a name associated
to it. You can use ten Cold Insulation Schedule tables in a project.
Cold Insulation Schedule files are named:
INSCLD##.DAT, where ## is the number (up to 10) of the Cold
Insulation Schedule file.
You can create any number of Insulation Equivalent Length libraries
with one insulation specification table/file. Each library has a name
associated to it. You can use one Insulation Equivalent Length table in
a project.
Example File Format (one Table/File)

Example Insulation Equivalent Length Table
The Insulation Equivalent Length libraries included in Aspen In-Plant Cost

Estimator are named:
 Default
 INSSPC_BLANK
 INSSPC_IP
 INSSPC_METRIC
You can then specify in the project design basis insulation specifications
using either the internal default Hot Light, Medium, or Heavy tables or
you can specify a named insulation table to use as the default for all
areas.
You can then specify in the project design basis insulation specifications
either using the internal default Cold table or you can specify a named
insulation table to use as the default for all areas.
You can then specify for each area Hot and Cold insulation specifications
either an internal default table or you can specify a named insulation table
to use.
To create a new Insulation Thicknesses and Rules Library:

1 On the Palette’s Libraries tab, click Customer External Files.
2 On the Customer External Files dialog box, right-click Insulation
Thicknesses and Rules.
3 On the dialog box that appears, click New.
4 On the New Insulation Thicknesses and Rules dialog box that
appears, enter the name of the new library file and, optionally, a
description of the new library file.
5 Click OK.

To Modify an Insulation Thicknesses and Rules Library:
3 Right-click the library file you want to modify.
4 On the Insulation Thicknesses and Rules dialog box that appears,
enter your modifications.
5 Click Modify.
To Duplicate an Insulation Thicknesses and Rules Library:

3 Right-click the library file you want to duplicate.
click Duplicate.
The Duplicate Insulation Thicknesses and Rules dialog box appears.
5 In the File Name field, type the name of the file to be a duplicate of
the one you are basing the duplicate on.
6 Click OK.
A duplicate file is created.
To Delete an Insulation Thicknesses and Rules Library:

2 On the Customer External Files dialog box, right-click
Insulation Thicknesses and Rules.
3 Right-click the library you want to delete.
4 A warning appears asking whether you want to delete this library file.
Click Yes.
The file is deleted.

To Create a New Hot or Cold Insulation Schedule File:
2 On the Customer External Files dialog box, right-click Hot
Insulation Schedule or Cold Insulation Schedule.
3 On the menu that appears, click New.
4 On the New [Hot/Cold Insulation Schedules] dialog box that
appears, enter the name of the new file and, optionally, a description
of the new file.
5 Click OK.
To modify a Hot or Cold Insulation Schedule Library:

3 Right-click the file you want to modify.
4 On the External Insulation Specs dialog box that appears, enter
your modifications.
5 Click Modify.
To Duplicate a Hot or Cold Insulation Schedule Library:

3 Right-click the file you want to duplicate.
click Duplicate.
The Duplicate Hot/Cold Insulation Schedules file dialog box appears.
5 In the File Name field, type the name of the file to be a duplicate of
the one you are basing the duplicate on.
6 Click OK.

A duplicate file is created.
To Delete a Hot or Cold Insulation Schedule Library:

3 Right-click the file you want to delete.
4 A warning appears asking whether you want to delete this library file.
Click Yes.
The file is deleted.
To Use an Insulation Equivalent Length Rules Library in a Project:

1 On the Project Basis tab, click Basis for Capital Costs | Customer
External Files.
2 On the Customer External Files folder, click the Insulation
External Files folder.
3 On the Insulation External Files folder, right-click Insulation
Equivalent Length Rules.
The Select an Insulation Thickness and Rules File dialog box appears.
4 On the Select an Insulation Thickness and Rules File dialog box,

select the file you want to use in the project.
5 Click OK.
To Use a Hot or Cold Insulation File in a Project:

1 On the Project Basis tab, click Basis for Capital Costs | Customer
External Files.
2 On the Customer External Files folder, click the Insulation
External Files folder.
3 On the Insulation External Files folder, right-click Hot/Cold
Insulation Schedules.
4 Click Select.

The Select Hot/Cold Insulation Specification dialog box appears.
5 Select the insulation specification(s) that you want to include in the

project. You can select up to 20 Hot Insulation specifications and up to
10 Cold Insulation specifications.
6 Click OK.
The specifications you selected are available in the project.
 Paint Specs
Paint design specifications, including number of primer coats, number of
finish coats, and whether painting is performed in field shop or remote
shop.
To edit Design Basis specifications:

1 Right-click the specification category that you want to define; then click
Edit on the pop-up menu.
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator displays a specifications form for the selected
category in the Main Window.

2 Enter the Design Basis specifications for the selected category.
3 Click OK to add the specifications to the project and close the
Contingency and Miscellaneous Project

Costs
Contingency and Miscellaneous Project Costs include material contingency (as
a percentage of each contract cost) and miscellaneous special charges for
royalties, licenses, land, and so on.
To define Contingency and Miscellaneous Project Costs:

1 In the Basis for Capital Costs folder, right-click on Contingency and
Misc. Project Costs and then click Edit on the pop-up menu.
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator displays the cost specifications in the Main
Window.

2 Enter the cost specifications.
3 Click OK to add the specifications to the project and close the
Escalation
Escalation provides the ability to incorporate the effects of the constantly
changing local and world economies. The Escalation feature lets you specify
escalation indices for the following material and labor cost categories:
 General materials
 Design engineering
 Construction manpower
 Construction management
To define escalation:
1 Right-click Escalation in the Basis for Capital Costs folder; then click
Edit.
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator displays the Escalation Specs dialog box in the
Main Window.

2 In the Escalation Method field, you can choose one of two ways for
reporting escalated costs:
Click to
SPREAD Define escalation to be included in all reported

costs.
ACCUM Define escalation to be segregated from all costs
and to be accumulated (into each of the four
categories above) for summary reporting, and with
costs to be reported at a user-defined condition.
Note: The system base indices are published in Icarus Reference.

All user-entered costs (quoted cost items, quoted equipment costs, library
items, material/labor lump sum additions, project indirects, and so on) are
assumed to be valid at the user base time point. This may be a
corporate-standard time point chosen as a basis for all projects.
Three indices are used to develop escalated costs:
o System Base Indices (SBI): System-defined indices that
represent costs inherent to the particular version of the system.
o User Base Indices (UBI): User-entered indices that reference
user-entered cost values. All system-developed costs
(developed at SBI) are adjusted to UBI by multiplying the ratio
(UBI/SBI).
o Escalation Indices (EI): User-entered indices that escalate all
costs (both user-entered and system-generated) from the user
base (UBI) to some other point in time. This is done by
multiplying all costs by the ratio (EI/UBI).
3 Enter or revise your specifications.
4 Click OK to apply your specifications to the project and close the

Engineering Workforce
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator lets you define up to nine engineering
workforces. For each engineering workforce, you can specify:
 a percentage adjustment to the base (default) wage rates by engineering
phase.
 the exact wage rate of any discipline, replacing the base wage rate (as
well as any percentage adjustments to the base).
Icarus Reference, Chapter 31, lists engineering disciplines and their base
wage rates. The disciplines are grouped by phase and assigned numbers.
In addition to specifying engineering wage rates, you can specify:

 engineering hours (by phase or discipline) and
 engineering costs (either as lump sums or as percentages of total costs)
Once defined, an engineering workforce can be linked to one or more
contractors. If no workforce is specified, contractors use the default
engineering workforce.
Engineering Phase
To define an engineering workforce by phase:

1 In the Engineering Workforce sub-folder, right-click By Phase; then on
the menu that appears, click Edit.
The Engineering Phase Info dialog box appears in the Main Window.

In defining a workforce, use one item column per engineering phase. A single
item column (Item 1) is provided. Add more columns using the Add button
.
2 Specify the engineering workforce number.
3 Select an engineering phase. The choices are:
* All phases
B Basic engineering
D Detail engineering
P Procurement
H Home office construction services
F Field office supervision
S Startup, commissioning
E Engineering management
C Construction management
Phases E and C are for multi-contract projects only.
4 To replace system-calculated hours and/or costs for the selected phase,
enter engineering hours and/or engineering costs.
5 To increase or decrease wages for all disciplines under the selected phase,
enter the percentage of the base wage rate. For example, entering “200”
would double the wage rates; entering “50” would cut wage rates in half.
6 If desired, enter the payroll burden, indirects, and expenses for the
selected phase, either as lump sums or as percentages of the total
manpower cost.
If you want to define additional phases, click Add and complete the process
(steps 2 through 6).

Note: In the form pictured here, Items 1 and 2 each define a phase for
Engineering Workforce Number 1.
Item 1 defines Basic Engineering (B). It sets the manhours at five percent
over those calculated by the system (expressed as 105% of the calculated
hours). It sets wages for all disciplines under Basic Engineering at ten percent
above the base (expressed as 110% of the base wage rate).
Item 2 defines Detailed Engineering, setting the wages for all disciplines
under Detailed Engineering (D) at five percent below the base (expressed as
95% of the base wage rate).
7 Click OK to include the entered information in the project specifications

and close the specifications form.
Engineering Discipline
Defining an engineering workforce by discipline lets you replace base (default)
wage rates and/or system-calculated hours.
To define an engineering workforce by discipline:

1 In the Engineering Workforce sub-folder, right-click on By Discipline
and click Edit on the pop-up.

Aspen Capital Cost Estimator displays the Engineering Discipline Info
dialog box in the Main Window.
A single item column defines up to four disciplines under a single phase. One
item column (Item 1) is provided. Add more columns using the Add button
.
2 Enter an engineering workforce number.
3 Select an engineering phase.
4 Enter the number of an engineering discipline under the selected phase. A
list of discipline numbers and wage rates, grouped by phase, is provided
in Chapter 34 of your Icarus Reference.
5 To replace the base wage rate for this discipline, as well as any
adjustments to the base wage rate made on the Engineering Phase Info
form, enter a new discipline wage rate.
6 To replace or adjust the system-calculated hours for this discipline, either
enter discipline hours or enter a percentage adjustment.
7 Space is provided for defining up to three more disciplines under this
phase. To define beyond three additional disciplines or to define disciplines
under another phase, click Add and repeat the process (steps 2 through
7).
Note: Item 1 defines two disciplines under Basic Engineering (phase B) for
Engineering Workforce Number 1. It does the following:

Sets Engineering Workforce Number 1‘s wage rate for process engineering
(discipline number 02) performed in the Basic Engineering phase at $42.00
and increases by ten percent the system-calculated hours for this discipline.
Sets Engineering Workforce Number 1‘s wage rate for instrument design
(discipline number 04) performed in the Basic Engineering phase at $39.20.
8 When you are finished, click OK to save the specifications and close the
form.
Drawing Types and Counts

Aspen Capital Cost Estimator lets you account for additional drawings that
may need to be produced during the Basic Engineering and Detailed
Engineering phases.
To add a drawing type:

1 In the Engineering Workforce sub-folder, right-click on Drawing Types
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator displays the Drawing Type Info dialog box in
the Main window.

2 Select either Basic or Detailed as the engineering phase.
3 Enter either an existing drawing number (see Icarus Reference, Chapter
31, for drawing types and numbers) or enter a new drawing number in the
range of 91-99.
4 Enter the title of the new drawing to be used in reports.
5 If you entered a new drawing number, select a drawing class account. For
example, select P (piping account) for a piping model drawing.
6 If you entered a new drawing number, select a drawing class discipline.
For example, select 4 (model building) for a piping model drawing.
7 If you entered a new drawing number, enter the total manhours required
to produce the drawing.
8 Click OK to save specifications and close the form.
To specify quantity of a drawing type:

1 In the Engineering Workforce sub-folder, right-click on Drawing Count

Aspen Capital Cost Estimator displays the Drawing Count Info form in the
Main window.
2 Select either Basic or Detailed as the engineering phase.

3 Enter a drawing number.
4 Enter the number of the contractor to which the drawing is assigned.
5 Use the Action Code field to select whether to ADD to the calculated
number of drawings, ADD new drawings (number 91-99), or CHANGE the
calculated number of drawings.
Note: The CHANGE option is not allowed for drawing numbers 91-99.
6 Depending on whether you chose ADD or CHANGE as the Action Code,
enter the number of drawings to add to the system-calculated quantity or
the number with which to replace the system-calculated quantity. If you
selected CHANGE, you have the option to instead enter a percentage
adjustment in the Percent of Calculated Drawings field.
7 To change manhours to reflect the changed drawing count, select “A” in
the Labor Adjustment Selection field.
If you want to adjust the count of a system developed drawing and also
want to change engineering manhours to reflect the changed drawing
count, DO NOT use the Action code ADD; always use the Action code
CHANGE and Percent of calculated drawings for adjustments.
8 Click OK to save the specifications and close the form.
Construction Workforce
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator lets you define construction workforces, which
you can then link to contractors (see page 153). For each construction
X X
workforce, you can specify wage rates (globally or by craft), workweek,

productivities, overtime, and crew mixes. You can also make modifications to
craft names, which apply to all construction workforces.

If no construction workforce is defined, contractors use the default
construction workforce.
General Rates
The General Wage Rates information defines wage rates, productivities,
workweek, and overtime for all crafts in a construction workforce. To access,
right-click Wage Rates in the Construction Workforce subfolder; then click
Edit.

Aspen Capital Cost Estimator displays the General Wage Rate/Productivity
specifications form in the Main window.
In the column labeled Item 1, you can define your first construction
workforce. To define additional construction workforces, click Add.
Descriptions of the specifications follow.
Field Description
Construction Number representing the workforce being

workforce defined.
number
Number of Number of shifts used during construction. If
shifts any premium pay is involved with second and
third shift work (beyond overtime pay), such

Field Description
premium should be indicated by a properly
averaged craft rate per shift.
Productivity Specifies whether to use multi-shift
adjustment /workweek adjustments or not.
Indirects If wage rates are to be treated as
all-inclusive, the indirects may be deleted for
this workforce by specifying “-”. Selecting an
all-in rate suppresses all construction
indirects: fringes, burdens, small tools,
construction rental equipment, and so on
ALL CRAFTS
PERCENT OF
BASE
Workforce Enter B for system base.

reference base
Wage Rate Wage rates for all crafts as a percentage of
percent of reference base wage rates.
base
Productivity Productivities for all crafts as a percentage of
percent of reference base wage rates.
base
ALL CRAFTS
FIXED RATES
Wage rate all Specifies the fixed wage rate (in the project
crafts currency) for all crafts in the workforce. See
discussion in Icarus Reference.
Productivity all Specifies the fixed productivity value for all
crafts crafts in this workforce. See discussion in
Icarus Reference. If no value is specified, the
system defaults to 100%.
WORK WEEK Refer to the description of workforces in
PER SHIFT Icarus Reference for the effect of changing
the work week and number of shifts upon
productivity and job duration. The standard
workweek plus overtime must not exceed 84
hours per week per shift.
Standard work Specifies number of standard hours per week
week per man per shift.
Overtime Specifies number of overtime hours per week
per man per shift.
Overtime rate Specifies overtime pay expressed as a
percent percentage of standard pay (for example,
standard time and one half = 150%).
GENERAL
CRAFT WAGES
Helper wage UK Base only. Specifies wage rate for craft

rate help as a fixed rate to be used in all crews.
Helper wage UK Base only. Specifies the wage rate for
percent of craft help as a percent of the principal craft in
craft rate the crew. This value must be less than 100%.

Field Description
Foreman wage Specifies the wage rate for foremen as a fixed

rate rate to be used in all crews. Default: 110% of
rate of highest paid craft in crew.
Foreman wage Specifies the wage rate for foreman as a
percent of percent of the highest paid craft in crew. This
craft rate value must be greater than or equal to 100%.
Default: 110% of rate of highest paid craft in
crew.
Craft Wage Craft Rates set the wage rate and productivity
Rates individually for each craft.
Note: Right-click the red arrow to define craft
rates for a construction workforce. You can
define up to 99 separate construction
workforces.
Craft Rates
Craft Rates set the wage rate and productivity individually for each craft.
To access Craft Rates:

1 In the Construction Workforce subfolder, click Construction
Workforce | Wage Rates.
2 On the General Wage Rate/Productivity dialog box that appears, right-
click the red arrow in the Craft Wage Rates field, as shown below.

Aspen Capital Cost Estimator displays the Craft Wage Rate/Productivity
dialog box.

Use these fields to set the wage rate and productivity individually for each
craft in a workforce.
Field Description
Craft code Identifies the craft to which the following

wage rate and productivity apply.
The craft code must be an existing system
craft code.
Craft Wage rate Specifies the wage rate (in the project
currency) for this craft for standard hours.
Productivity Specifies the productivity of this craft as a
percentage of the system’s base. (See
discussion in Icarus Reference.)
To Add a Construction Workforce:

 On the General Wage Rate/Productivity dialog box, click Add.

A new construction workforce column appears to the right of the current
construction workforce.
To Delete a Construction Workforce:

1 On the General Wage Rate/Productivity dialog box, highlight one or
more columns to delete.
2 Click Delete.
3 When prompted as to whether you want to delete the column(s), click
Yes.
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator deletes the column(s) you highlighted.
Note: If you do not highlight a column and perform a delete, the right-most
column is deleted.
To Copy Craft Wage Rate/Productivity Information to an Excel

Spreadsheet:
1 On the Craft Wage Rate/Productivity Information dialog box, click
CopyAll.
2 Navigate to the Excel spreadsheet to which you want to copy the
information.
3 Click CTRL-V.
The information is pasted into the spreadsheet.
Crew Mixes
Use the Crew Mixes specifications form to allocate a percentage of
man-hours from one craft to another for the purpose of modifying crew
mixes.
To modify crew mixes:

1 in the Construction Workforce subfolder, right-click Crew Mixes.
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator displays the Wage Mixture Info form in the
Main window.
For each item, you can make up to seven different re-allocations of man-
hours. To add a new item: Click Add.

3 Enter the number of the Construction Workforce to which the modification
applies.
4 In the From Craft Code column, enter the craft code of the craft that will
lose man-hours.
Note: See Icarus Reference, Chapter 30, for craft codes.

5 In the To Craft Code column, enter the craft code of the craft that will
gain man-hours.
6 In the Craft Transfer Percent column, enter percentage of man-hours to
be re-allocated.
7 Click OK to save the modifications and close the form.
-or-
Click Cancel to close the form without saving modifications.
Craft Names
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator lets you modify the default craft names, which
are listed in Chapter 30 of Icarus Reference.
To modify craft names:

1 Right-click on Craft Names in the Construction Workforce subfolder.
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator displays the Wage Name Info form in the
Main window.
For each item, you can make up to three name changes. To add a new item,
click Add.
3 In the Craft Code column, enter the craft code of the craft you are re-
naming. Craft Codes are listed in Icarus Reference, Chapter 30.
4 In the Craft Name column, enter the craft’s new name.
5 Click OK to save the modifications and close the form.
Code of Accounts
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator contains a base set of 3-digit Code of Accounts
(COA) to which costs and man-hours are allocated. See Icarus Reference,
Chapter 34, for a detailed Icarus COA list. Aspen Capital Cost Estimator lets
you add your own COA’s and re-allocate costs from Icarus COA’s to your new
COA’s. When you completely re-define your COA’s, you must also define and
allocate all indirect COA’s.

First, you must select the COA file.
To select a COA file:

1 Right-click on Code of Accounts in the Basis for Capital Costs folder,
and then click Select on the pop-up menu.
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator provides the file named DEFAULT. After
selecting this file, you can modify it and save it as another file. You can then
have multiple COA sets from which to choose.
2 Select the file and click OK.
Adding a COA Set and Allocating Costs

The following instructions provide an example COA set for you to add. The
instructions will then show you how to allocate material and labor costs to the
new COA set.
To add a COA set:

1 Right-click Code of Accounts in the Basis for Capital Costs folder; then
click Edit on the pop-up menu.

The Code of Accounts dialog box appears.
2 Click Definitions; then click Modify.

The Code of account definition dialog box appears.
3 Click Add.
A new item (in this example, Item 501, is added at the bottom of the grid.

4 For the new item, enter an account number, select a COA group, and
enter a description (all in upper-case).
5 Repeat this step for each new COA in the set.
Example set:
COA COA Group Description
1000 EQ ALL CATEGORY A EQUIPMENT
2000 EQ ALL CATEGORY B EQUIPMENT
3000 P ALL PIPING
4000 C ALL CIVIL
5000 ST ALL STEEL
6000 I ALL INSTRUMENTATION
7000 E ALL ELECTRICAL
8000 IN ALL INSULATION
9000 PT ALL PAINT
6 When you are finished adding COA’s, click OK.
To re-allocate costs from Icarus COA’s to your new COA’s:

1 In the Code of Accounts dialog box, double-click Allocations.
The Code of account allocation dialog box appears.

2 In the Code of account allocation dialog box, enter an Icarus COA or
range of Icarus COA’s (using the From Icarus COA and To Icarus COA
fields) and then enter the new COA to which you want to allocate the
Icarus COA’s material and labor.
Entering a COA only in the Alloc to Icarus/ User Matl COA field
allocates both material and labor to the COA entered in the Material
field. You could allocate material to one COA and labor to another.
3 Click OK when you are finished making the entry, and then continue to
allocate each Icarus COA or range of Icarus COA’s to one of the new
COA’s.
Example set:
From To Material
100 199 1000
200 299 2000
300 399 3000
400 499 4000
500 599 5000
600 699 6000
700 799 7000
800 899 8000
900 999 9000
Specifying Exceptions to Account Allocations

After you have defined the account allocations, you may choose to specify
exceptions to these new allocations.
Example: We have allocated the costs of all piping — Icarus COA’s 300-399
— to COA 3000. However, we wish to allocate the material costs of 6-8 INCH

304P Pipe to a new account, COA 3201, and we wish to allocate the labor
costs of 6-8 INCH 304P Pipe to another new account, COA 3202.
To specify the exceptions in the above example:

1 First, create COA 3201, type P, with the description MATL SS PIPE 6-18
INCH and create COA 3202, type P, with the description MATL SS PIPE
6-18 INCH.
2 Identify in Icarus Reference, Chapter 34, “Code of Accounts,” which range
of Icarus COA’s to allocate to 3201 and 3202. In this case, it is COA’s 320
to 327, representing stainless steel pipe.
3 Click in a cell above which you want to add the new item, then click
Insert.
4 Enter “320” in the From Icarus COA field and “327” in the To Icarus
COA field. Enter “3201” in the Alloc to Icarus/ User matl COA field and
enter “3202” in the Alloc to Icarus/ User labor COA field.
5 In the COA exception flag field, from the drop-down select E (Allow
account exception)
6 In the Material selection field, enter “304P” as the Material.
Note: Icarus Reference, Chapter 28, “Material Selections,” provides the

symbols for stainless steel and other materials. Many stainless steels are
available. This example is limited to 304P for brevity.
7 In the Pipe diameter – lower limit field, enter “6.” In the Pipe
diameter – upper limit field, enter “18.”
8 Make sure that I (Inch-Pound) is selected in the Pipe dia. units of
measure field.
Note: COA Modifier and Subtype let you be more specific about the items you
want allocated to a new COA. They are described in Icarus Reference, Chapter
35, “Database Relations”.
9 Click OK. This moves all material costs for all 6-18 INCH 304P pipe,
fittings, and valves to COA 3201 and all labor costs for these items to COA
3202.
10 When you are finished, review the Account Allocation order to see that the
accounts are in the correct order. Then click OK to save your work and
exit the COA code of account allocation dialog box.
Overriding Code of Accounts at the

Component Level
You can override a Code of Account for a specific component.
To Override a Code of Account for a specific component:

1 In a project, on the Project View tab, right-click the component whose
Code of Account you want to change.
2 On the menu that appears, click Modify Item.

The Equipment Spec sheet appears.
3 On the Equipment Spec sheet, left-click the red arrow in the Code of
account field.
The Slot Template dialog box appears.
4 On the Slot Template dialog box, click Select.

The Equipment COA Selection dialog box appears.
5 On the Equipment COA Selection dialog box, scroll to the Equipment

and COA you want to assign to your equipment; then click Select.
The Equipment Spec sheet reappears with the COA you selected in the
Code of Account field.
Choosing between the Icarus Code of

Accounts and User Code of Accounts at the
Component Level
To specify whether an equipment unit should use the Icarus Code of
Accounts or the User Code of Accounts:
1 In a project, on the Project View tab, right-click the component whose
Code of Account you want to change.
2 On the menu that appears, click Modify Item.
The Equipment Spec sheet appears.
3 On the Equipment Spec sheet, in the Icarus/User COA Option field,
click the drop-down arrow.
4 Click the appropriate COA option.
Indexing
The Material and Man-hour specification forms in the Indexing folder let
you manipulate the material and/or man-hour costs for process equipment

and installation bulks. You can also adjust these indexes by location by using
the Location specification form.
For example, you could specify to increase the material costs associated with
a type of process equipment.
Indexing is used to tailor Aspen Capital Cost Estimator to mimic your work
methods and costs. If your equipment costs for a category are consistently
offset from Aspen Capital Cost Estimator’s values, use Indexing to correct
that.
When calibrating a new cost basis, you can update an existing Project Level
Indexing file into a new one. In this case the old and new Project Level
Indexing will not be different but will be direct replacements.
Material, Manhour, and Location indices are externalized to a single external
file. You can select an external indexing file at the project level, edit it, and
use the local file in a project.
At the area level, you can edit the indexing, but you cannot choose another
external indexing file. The evaluation engine uses indices from the external
file for project evaluation.
Adjusting Indexes
To adjust the Material or Man-hour index:

1 Right-click Material or Man-hour and click Edit.
2 To adjust the index for all equipment or for all of one of the installation
bulks, enter the index value in the box provided. For example, entering
“200” in the Equipment box will double the material costs for all items
under the equipment account group.

To adjust the index for a sub-category, click the arrow-button in the box. This
accesses a similar form listing sub-categories corresponding to the Code of
Accounts (see Icarus Reference, Chapter 34, for a complete list). Adjustments
to a sub-category over-ride adjustments to the account-group.
3 Click OK to close the form and apply changes.
To adjust by location:
1 Right-click on Location and click Edit.
2 Type the location description.

3 Type the Code of Account (COA) to indicate the start of the COA range, or
click the red arrow; then click Select by the subcategory on the COA
Subcategory Selection window.

The Equipment COA Selection dialog box appears.
4 Click Select again by the COA.

The COA is entered on the form.
5 Do the same to indicate the end of the COA range.
6 Type the amount to escalate material costs and/or the amount to escalate
man-hour costs.
7 To escalate another range, click Add.
8 Click OK to close the form and apply changes.
Editing an Index file inside a project
To edit an Index inside a project:

1 In Project Basis view, right-click Indexing.
2 Click Select.

The Indexing dialog box appears with three options (Material, Man Hour, and
Location.)
3 Click the type of index you want to edit; then click Modify.
4 Edit the index; then click OK.
Deleting an Index File

2 Click Select.
A list of the available index files appears.

3 Click the type of index you want to delete; then click OK.
The Index file is loaded.
4 In the Project Basis view, right-click Indexing.
5 Click Remove Selection.
A warning message appears telling you that the specifications file will be
deleted.
6 If you want to remove the Index file you selected, click Yes.

Adding Modified Index Files to the Library
To add a modified index file to the library:

2 Click Select.
The Indexing dialog box appears with three options (Material, Man Hour, and
Location.)
3 Click the type of index you want to edit; then click Modify.
4 Edit the index; then click OK.
6 On the menu that appears, click Export to Library.
A warning message telling you that the current COA specifications must also
be exported appears.
7 Click OK.
The Duplicate Code of Accounts file based on Indexing dialog box
appears.

8 On the Duplicate Code of Accounts file based on Indexing dialog
box, type a file name (required) and description (optional) for the new file.
9 Click OK.
A message appears indicating the new indexing file was successfully created
in the Library. The new indexing file appears in the Palette window under
Indexing.
Modifying an empty Indexing file outside the

project
1 Launch Aspen Capital Cost Estimator without any project open.
2 In Palette view, click the Libraries tab.
3 On the Libraries tab, expand the Indexing Library folder.
4 Double-click EMPTY to open the Indexing dialog box.
The Indexing dialog box appears displaying four options.
5 Right-click COA file; on the menu that appears, click Modify.

The Select a Code of Account File dialog box appears.
6 In the Code of Account Files list, click DEFAULT COA file as the
Indexing COA.

7 In the Indexing dialog box that appears, click one of the following:
o Material
o Man Hour
o Location
All indices are initialized to 100%. You can modify the indices to your
specifications.
8 When you have modified the index or indices, save the external file.
Equipment Rental
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator automatically develops rental equipment
durations and costs based on your project work items. You can adjust or
delete these items and/or add your own to more accurately reflect the
project.
Adjusting and Deleting System Items
To adjust or delete system equipment rental items:

1 In the Basis for Capital Costs folder, right-click on Equipment Rental,
then, on the menu that appears, click Edit on the pop-up menu.
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator displays the Equipment Rental

Info specifications form in the Main Window. A column for the
first rental item, labeled Item 1, is provided. If you need to
add a column, click Add.
2 Enter an item description and rental equipment number. See Icarus
Reference, Chapter 32, for a complete list of construction equipment and
associated equipment numbers.
3 Click a Rental Action Code.
Click to
ADD Add days to the rental item’s Rental Days Required.
You cannot use this option to adjust Monthly Rental
Rate.
CHANGE Replace the rental item’s Rental Days Required
and/or the Monthly Rental Rate.
DELETE Delete the rental item.
Note: To change an existing item’s rental rate, you must select CHANGE.
4 In the Rental Days Required field, depending on the action code, either
enter the number of days to add (action code is ADD) or the total number
of days (action code is CHANGE).

5 If you’ve selected the CHANGE action code, you can enter a new rate in
the Monthly Rate field or leave it blank to use the system’s default rate.
You cannot adjust an existing item’s monthly rate using the ADD action
code.
Here, the number of days required for Item 1, DUMP TRUCK, is being
changed to five, and its monthly rate is being changed to $6,500. Four
days are being added to the days required for Item 2, CRANE.
6 Click OK to save the specifications and close the specifications form.
Entering New Rental Items

Aspen Capital Cost Estimator provides empty slots in every equipment class
for user-entered equipment items. Any that you enter are added to those that
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator develops based on your project work items.
To enter a new rental item:

1 In the Basis for Capital Costs folder, right-click Equipment Rental;
then click Edit on the pop-up menu.
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator displays the equipment rental specifications
form in the Main Window. A column for the first rental item, labeled Item 1, is
provided. If you need to add a column, click Add.
2 Enter an item description. The first 20 characters will appear in the
Description column on the Equipment Rental Summary report. The
next 16 characters will appear in the size column on the Equipment
Rental Summary report.
3 Enter an equipment number. Numbers 1-20 are for the equipment class
AUTOMOTIVE. All other numbers will share the equipment class of the
equipment number before it. For example, an item assigned equipment
number 79 would be classified EARTHMOVING because that is the
equipment class of equipment number 78. Each equipment class includes
unused numbers for user-entries. Refer to Icarus Reference, Chapter 32,
for a complete list of construction equipment and associated equipment
numbers.
4 Click Add as the Rental Action Code.
5 Enter the Rental Days Required.
6 Enter the Monthly Rate.
7 Click OK to save the specifications and close the specifications form.

Systems
Use the features of the Systems tree diagrams to define, track, and revise
power distribution and process control networks.
Power Distribution
The Power Distribution tree diagram lets you define the electrical
configuration and loads in areas and process control centers.
You can specify:

 the quantity and size of transmission line(s)
 main and unit substation(s)
 the degree of redundancy
 the type and method of placement of distribution cable
The Power Distribution specifications work in conjunction with the electrical
specifications at the project and area levels.
Most users define the distribution configuration (for example, which main
substation is to feed which “downstream” unit substation) and cable
placement. Aspen Capital Cost Estimator then sizes the items to satisfy the
start-up and running electrical loads (drivers, lighting, tracing, and so on)
always heading “upstream.”
To define power distribution:

1 In the Systems subfolder, right-click Power Distribution; then click
Edit on the pop-up menu.
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator displays the Power Distribution tree in the
Main window.
New projects include one default main substation feeding a default unit
substation. The main substation is assumed to be an existing one, so no
electrical bulk quantities will be generated for it. If the electrical bulk
quantities are required in the estimate, you should change the input
parameters for this default main substation. All newly added and imported

areas, and newly added process control items, are automatically linked to the
default unit substation.
2 Use the tree diagram to define the power distribution network. A
description of the tree diagram actions follows.
Adding Power Distribution Items

Power distribution items include:
 Transmission lines
 Main substations
 Unit substations
Power distribution items are sized and cost estimated based on information
provided with the project design basis, power distribution specifications, area
specifications, and the list of equipment and bulk items requiring electrical
power.
To add a power distribution item:

1 Select an item in the tree diagram.
The added power distribution item is added to the tree diagram under the
select item.
To add Do this
Transmission line Select the “Project” item.
Main substation Select the “Project” or a transmission line item.
Unit substation Select the “Project,” a transmission line, a main substation, or a
unit substation item.
2 Right-click on the item and, depending on the item selected, click:
Add Transmission Line
–or–
Add Main Substation
–or–
Add Unit Substation
A dialog box appears in which to enter a name for the item.
3 Enter a name and click OK.

Aspen Capital Cost Estimator displays the specifications form for the new
item.

4 Enter the specifications; then click OK.
Adding Links to Areas

You can link a unit substation to an area (or multiple areas), making it the
power source for load centers in the specified area(s).
To add a link to an area:

1 Right-click the unit substation in the tree diagram; then click Link Area
on the pop-up menu.
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator displays the Link to Area dialog box.
2 Select an unlinked area and click OK.

On the tree diagram, the linked area is shown under the unit substation.
Adding Links to Control Systems

You can link a unit substation to a process control system (or multiple
systems).

To add a link to a process control system:
1 Right-click on the unit substation and click Link Control System on the
pop-up menu.
2 Select an unlinked control system and click OK.
On the tree diagram, the linked control system is shown under the unit
substation.
To unlink a control system:

 Right-click on the control system in the tree diagram; then click Unlink on
the pop-up menu.
Unlinking
The Unlink command lets you disconnect an area or process control item
from a unit substation:
To unlink an area from a process control item:

 In the tree diagram, right-click on the area you want to delete; then, on
the menu that appears, click Unlink.
Deleting Power Distribution Items

Should power distribution network specifications for the project change, or
when you want to explore alternatives, it may be necessary to delete
previously defined power distribution items (transmission lines, main
substations, unit substations).
To delete a power distribution item:

1 In the tree diagram, right-click the item you want to delete.
2 Click Delete.
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator displays a confirmation dialog box.
3 Click Yes to confirm the deletion.
Process Control

If you do not enter Process Control specifications, Aspen Capital Cost
Estimator assumes that process control is provided to all areas by a default
digital control system consisting of a digital control center reporting to an
operator center. The control and operator centers are automatically sized to
meet requirements.
You can define a process control network using the Process Control tree
diagram. The tree diagram items represent the process control network,
consisting of:
 Operator centers (digital only)
 Control centers (digital or analog)
 Programmable Logic Control (PLC) Centers
 Specialty (SPC) centers
Use the tree diagram to define the network from the top down. Reporting to
the “Project” item, you can add operator centers, control centers, or PLCs.
Control centers can report to operator centers. Digital, analog, and PLC
control centers can be mixed within the same project.
When a project estimate is run, Aspen Capital Cost Estimator sizes all process
control items and reports their sizes, ratings, and installation details at the
end of the report for the last area. Details on field instrumentation and final
control elements with their associated air supply details are reported on a
component basis. Details for area junction boxes, cable trays, and so on are
reported on an area basis.
To define process control:

1 In the Systems folder, right-click Process Control; then, on the menu
that appears, click Edit
The Process Control tree diagram appears, displaying the process control
network.
2 Use the tree diagram to define the desired process control network and its
reporting structure. A description of the tree diagram actions follows.
Adding Process Control Items

Process control items include:
 Operator centers
 Control centers
 PLC centers.
 Specialty centers

To add a process control item:
1 Select an item in the tree diagram. The new process control item will be
placed under the selected item.
To add Do this
Operator center Select the “Project” item.

Control center Select the “Project” item (for analog or digital) or
an operator center item (for digital).
PLC center Select the “Project” item or operator center.
Specialty center Select the “Project” item or operator center.
2 Right-click the item and, depending on the item being added, click one of
the following on the pop-up menu:
o Add Operator Center
o Add Control Center
o Add PLC Center
o Add SPC Center (Specialty center)
A dialog box appears in which to enter a name for the item.
3 Type the name of the item; then click OK.

The item is added to the tree diagram.
4 To edit the item’s specifications, right-click the item; then click Edit on
the pop-up menu.

5 To save the specifications, click OK.
Adding Links to Areas

You can link control centers, PLC centers, and SPC centers to areas. A center
serves instrumentation within the area(s) to which it is linked.
To add a link to an area:

1 Right-click the item in the tree diagram; then, on the menu that appears,
Link Area.
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator displays the Link to Area dialog box.
2 Click an unlinked area; then click OK.

On the tree diagram, the linked area is shown under the selected process
control item.

Unlinking
The Unlink option lets you disconnect an area from a process control item.
To unlink an area from a process control item:

1 In the tree diagram, right-click the area you want to delink.
2 On the menu that appears, click Unlink.
Deleting Process Control Items

As the specifications for the project scenario change, or when you want to
explore alternatives, it may be necessary to delete process control items
(operator centers, control centers, PLC centers, and SPC centers).
To delete a process control item:

1 In the tree diagram, right-click the item you want to delete.
2 Click Delete.
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator displays a confirmation dialog box.
3 Click Yes to confirm deletion.
Contracts
The tree diagrams in the Contracts folder let you define responsibility and
assign scope of effort to contractors for engineering, procurement, and
construction. There are two tree diagrams:
 Contractors: Use to specify each contractor’s indirect cost structure and

establish the responsibility of one contractor to another for cost reporting.
In addition, engineering and construction workforce characteristics can be
assigned to each contractor.
 Scope: Use to specify sets of contractors and assign scope of work to
each contractor in each set.
Contractors
To access the Contractors tree diagram:
 In the Contracts subfolder, right-click Contractors; then, on the menu
that appears, click Edit.

Aspen Capital Cost Estimator displays the Contractors tree diagram in the
Main window.
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator comes set up with one default contractor with
the name Owner.
From the pop-up menu accessed by right clicking on an item in the tree
diagram, you can:
 Add contractors
 Link contractors to workforces
 Edit contractor definitions
 Delete contractors
 Close the tree diagram
Descriptions of these actions follow.
Adding a Contractor
To add a contractor:
1 In the tree diagram, right-click Owner; then, on the menu that appears,
click Add Contractor.

Aspen Capital Cost Estimator displays the Add a New Contractor dialog box.
2 Type the name of the contractor; then click OK.
Adding Links to Workforces

Workforces are defined in the Project Basis view’s Engineering Workforce
folder (page 114) and the Construction Workforce folder (page 120). Once
X X X X
you have defined workforces, you can link contractors to them.
To link a contractor to a workforce:

1 Right-click on the contractor in the tree diagram and, depending on the
type of workforce you wish to add, click:
Link to Constr. Work Force
–or–
Link to Engg. Work Force
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator displays a dialog box listing workforces by
number.
2 Click the number representing the desired workforce; then click OK.
In the tree diagram, the workforce appears under the contractor.
Unlinking
The Unlink command lets you disconnect a workforce from a contractor.
To unlink a workforce from a contractor:

 Right-click on the workforce in the tree diagram and click Unlink on the
pop-up menu.

Editing Contractor Definitions
To edit a contractor definition:

1 Right-click the contractor in the tree diagram; then, on the menu that
appears, click Edit.
2 Type or revise specifications on the Contract Definition dialog box.
3 Click OK to save and close.

Deleting a Contractor
To delete a contractor:
1 Right-click the item in the tree diagram; then, on the menu that appears,
click Delete.
You are prompted to confirm deletion of the contractor from workforce link.
2 Click Yes.
Scope
Use the Scope tree diagram to specify contractor sets and assign scope of
work to each contractor in each set.
To access the Scope tree diagram:

 In the Contracts subfolder, right-click Scope; then click Edit.
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator displays the tree diagram in the Main window.
Note: All areas (whether added or imported), power distribution items, and
process control items are automatically linked to the default contract set until
otherwise specified.

Adding Contractor Sets
A contractor set (Conset) is a subset of all contractors defined in a project. A
contractor joins a Conset when it is assigned responsibility for categories of
work.
To add a Conset:
1 Right-click Project in the tree diagram; then, on the menu that appears,
click Add Conset.

Aspen Capital Cost Estimator displays the Contract Scope specifications
form.
2 Use the Scope Description field to describe the responsibilities for the
Conset (for example, All Engineering, Above Ground Mechanical,
Substations).
3 To assign a contractor to a category of work, click the drop-down arrow in
the category field and select a contractor number.
4 Click OK to apply the specifications to the project and close the

specifications form. The newly added Conset will appear in the tree
diagram.
Adding Links
The Link commands allow you to assign each contractor set responsibility for
the scope of work in a segment of the project.
To link an item to a contractor set:

1 Right-click a Conset in the tree diagram; then click one of the following
commands on the pop-up menu that appears:
To do this Click
Link a previously defined Link Area
area to the selected
contractor set.
Link a previously defined Link to Power Distribution
power distribution item to
the selected contractor
set.
Link a previously defined Link to Process Control
process control item to
the selected contractor
set.

2 A dialog box appears corresponding to the selected link command. The
following dialog box appears if you select the Link to Process Control
command.
Note: All areas, power distribution items, and process control items are
automatically linked to the default Conset until otherwise specified; therefore,
you may first have to unlink items from the default Conset in order to make
them available. See “Unlinking” on page 158 for instructions.
X X
3 Click OK to link the selected item to the Conset.

The item appears under the Conset on the tree diagram. In the tree diagram
shown below, the process control item named Monomer CTL (CTL 2) is
linked to the Conset named Substations (Conset Number 2).
Unlinking
The Unlink command lets you remove responsibility for the scope of work in
a segment of the project.
To unlink an item from a Conset:

 Right-click a linked item in the tree diagram; then, on the menu that
appears, click Unlink.
The item no longer appears under the Conset and is now available to be
linked to another Conset.
Editing Contractor Sets

The Edit command lets you assign responsibility for engineering, purchasing
materials, and installation to previously defined contractors for the selected
contractor set (Conset).
To edit a Conset:
1 Right-click a Conset in the tree diagram; then, on the menu that appears,
click Edit.

The Conset Specifications dialog box appears.
2 Select a specification.
to Select
Assign esponsibility for engineering Engineering
tasks.
Assign responsibility for purchasing Purchase
on an account-by-account basis. materials
If you select Purchase Materials,
skip to Step 6.
Define responsibility for installation of Installation
all field material on an account-by-
account basis. Construction
equipment rental appropriate for each
work item is automatically assigned
to the installation contractor.
If you select Installation, skip to
Step 6.
If you selected Engineering:

3 Click Modify to assign responsibility for engineering.
The Contract Scope Form appears.
4 Enter the specifications.
5 Click OK to apply your specifications to the project and return to the
Conset Specifications dialog box.

If you selected Purchase Materials or Installation:
6 Click Modify to assign responsibility for the selected task.
A form appears listing categories of materials to be purchased or installed
(depending upon your selection).
7 Click the arrow on a material category field to select the contractor who
will be responsible for purchasing/installing this category of material in
this Conset.
8 Click OK to apply the specifications to the project and return to the
Conset Specifications dialog box.
9 Click Close to close the dialog box.
Deleting Contractor Sets

The Delete command lets you delete previously defined contractor sets
(Consets).
Note: Consets can only be deleted if no items are linked to the contractor
set. Any linked items must first be unlinked.
To delete a Conset:
 Right-click the Conset in the tree diagram; then, on the menu that
appears, click Delete.
Importing old Standard basis

files
1 Open Aspen Capital Cost Estimator.
2 Go to the Libraries tab.
3 Click Basis for Capital Costs.
4 Right-click either Inch-Pound or Metric.
5 Click IMPORT.

The dialog that appears defaults to looking for the ICARUS 2000 specs file.
6 Browse to the specs file you want to import.
7 Click the specs file to import.
Your ICARUS 2000 template (standard basis file) is now in the new Aspen
Capital Cost Estimator system.
Merging Projects
You can create a merged project from multiple projects that have identical
project bases.
To Merge Projects:
1 Create a starting project basis for use in all sub-projects.
2 Create ‘partial’ projects to work on different parts of the project, using this
starting project basis in all projects.
3 Open a copy of one of the ‘partial’ projects (or a fresh copy of the starting
design basis). The project in the open state from which other ‘partial’
projects will be merged into is known as the target project.
4 On the main menu, click Run | Merge | Merge Project.
5 On the Select Projects to Merge dialog box, select a second project to
merge into the current (that is, the ‘target’) project.
6 Click OK.
The projects are merged.
Notes:
o If any of the projects’ bases are not identical, you receive a warning
message specifying which basis is not identical, and the merge is
aborted.
o None of the project basis data is copied and any links to project basis
definition are disconnected.
o All target project links are preserved.
o All source project links are un-linked.
o Source project RG/Areas are added at the end of the project.
Merging Areas Into Projects

You can merge areas from separate projects into a ‘target’ project. The
project from which the areas will be merged and the ‘target’ project must
have identical project bases.
To Merge Areas into a Project:

1 Open a project into which you want to merge areas from other projects.
This project is the ‘target’ project.
2 On the main menu, click Run | Merge | Merge Areas.

3 On the Select Projects to Merge dialog box, select a project to from
which to merge areas into the ‘target’ project.
4 In the source project select the area(s) to merge.
5 Click OK.
The areas from the source project are merged into your ‘target’ project.
Notes:
o If the two projects’ bases are not identical, you receive a warning
message specifying which basis is not identical, and the merge is
aborted.
o None of the project basis data is copied and any links to project basis
definition are disconnected.
o All target project links are preserved.
o All source project links are un-linked.
o Source project RG/Areas are added at the end of the project.
Customer External Files

When certain specifications, such as pipe insulation thickness, are not entered
by the user, Aspen Capital Cost Estimator refers to ASCII format files to make
the appropriate selection. These files are accessible in the Palette’s Libraries
view. There, in the Customer External Files library, these files are divided
into subfolders that correspond to the categories in Project Explorer’s
Customer External Files folder. When no project is open, you can create in the
Palette a duplicate of a default or template file, assigning it a different name
(see page 241 for instructions). You can then open the file (stored at
X X
AspenTech/Economic Evaluation V8.0/Data/Libraries, unless the

location is changed in Preferences) in any ASCII text editor and customize the
rules and specifications. (Refer to Icarus Reference when customizing files.
Chapter 23 of Icarus Reference provides instructions on how to customize an
insulation specs file.)
To use a customer external file, you must select it in Project Explorer.
Otherwise, Aspen Capital Cost Estimator uses the default file.
To select a file:
1 Right-click the category.

2 On the menu that appears, click Select.
A selection dialog box appears.
3 Click the file you want to use.

4 Click OK.
Project Execution Schedule

Settings
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator generates a CPM barchart planning schedule
based on the scope of work defined for the project. The project schedule
includes dates and durations for the following:
 Design engineering
 Procurement
 Delivery of materials and equipment
 Site development
 Construction
 Start-up and commissioning
The construction schedule is integrated with the cost estimate to provide a
basis for the schedule-dependent costs such as equipment rental
requirements, field supervision, and construction management.

Adjusting Schedule and Barcharts
To adjust schedule and barcharts:

1 In the Project Execution Schedule Settings subfolder, right-click on Adjust
Schedule and Barcharts and click Edit on the pop-up menu.
The Schedule Adjustments specifications dialog box appears in the Main
Window.
2 In the Start Engineering Phase field, select whether to start engineering

with the Detailed Engineering or Basic Engineering.
3 Specify starting dates for engineering and construction (required to
generate barchart schedule reports).
4 Specify percent adjustments to the system-generated schedule for
engineering, delivery of equipment and plant bulk items, and construction
manpower activities.
5 Specify total construction duration in weeks. Construction includes
sitework, civil, and mechanical erection.
6 Specify up to five equipment classes for which to include separate
procurement/installation activity bars (see Icarus Reference, Chapter 36,
Equipment Fabricate/Ship Items, for a list of equipment classes). See the

next subsection for instructions on setting delivery times for equipment
classes.
7 If desired, change the symbols used for printing elements of the barchart.
8 Click OK to save the schedule and barchart adjustments and close the
-or-
Click Cancel to close the form without saving changes.
Setting Delivery Times for Equipment

Classes
To set vendor fabrication and shipping times for equipment class:

1 In the Project Execution Schedule Settings subfolder, right-click on
Equipment Class Delivery Times and click Edit.
The Schedule Equipment Classes specifications form appears in the Main
Window.
2 For each equipment class, specify the number of weeks needed to

fabricate and ship equipment after vendor data approval.
-or-

Scheduling Individual Project Components
You can specify up to five project components to appear with separate
procurement and installation activity bars in the barchart. For each specified
component, you can set vendor fabrication and shipping time.
To schedule project components:

1 In the Project Execution Schedule Settings subfolder, right-click on
Equipment Item Delivery Times and click Edit.
The Schedule Equipment Items specifications form appears in the Main
window.
2 Enter the tag number of the project component for which to include a
separate activity bar in the barchart.
3 Enter the number of weeks required for the vendor to fabricate and ship
the project component.
4 Repeat this process (steps 2 and 3) to schedule up to five project
components.
-or-

Adding Bar Chart Items
You can define up to four custom-designed bars. For example, you might
define specific bars for funding approval and permits. (These bars have no
effect on the calculated construction duration.)
To add bar chart items:

1 In the Project Execution Schedule Settings subfolder, right-click on Add
Barchart Items; then click Edit.
The Schedule Bar Items specifications form appears in the Main
Window.
Note: A blank column is included for Item 1. To add an additional item, click
Add.
2 Enter a description for the activity bar being added.

3 Specify a start and finish date for the activity.
4 Select a bar position: top of barchart (T), basic engineering (B), detailed
engineering (D), procurement (P), sitework (S), construction (C), end of
barchart (E).
5 To add another bar, click Add and repeat steps 2-4. You can have a
maximum of four user-defined bars.
-or-

IPS Project Schedule Settings
Note: IPS Project Schedule Settings are only included in Aspen Capital Cost
Estimator if you are licensed to use Aspen Icarus Project Scheduler (IPS).
If you are licensed to use Aspen Icarus Project Scheduler (IPS) and you
selected at startup to use IPS in the Aspen Capital Cost Estimator
environment, the IPS Project Schedule Settings folder is included in the
Project Explorer’s Basis view.
Using these settings, you can make adjustments to the Primavera Enterprise
schedules produced by Aspen Capital Cost Estimator.
Using Aspen Icarus Project Scheduling

Features in the Aspen Capital Cost
Estimator Environment
At startup, select the Project Scheduling Features check box in the
Options dialog box. This option is not selected by default.
Note: If the Options dialog box does not appear at Startup, open
Preferences (Tools | Options | Preferences). On the General tab, select
the Display Options Choice Dialog on Aspen Capital Cost Estimator
Startup check box.
As a result of selecting to use scheduling features within Aspen Capital Cost
Estimator, an additional folder for Project Schedule Settings appears in
Project Explorer’s Project Basis view.
Note: Double-asterisks (**) indicate that the specifications do not apply to

pipeline projects.

Changes made to the IPS Project Schedule Settings will be reflected in the
scheduling reports generated for display in Primavera. The following are
descriptions of the settings.
Schedule Appearance Adjustments
Title
To enter a project schedule title to replace the system-generated

title:
1 Right-click Title; then click Edit.
2 Enter a title, up to 60 characters.
3 Click Apply.

Description Modification - Engineering
To modify an engineering activity description:

1 Right-click Engineering; then on the menu that appears, click Edit.
If you have not previously entered a description modification, there should be

one blank column (Item 1). If it has already been filled in, click Add to add a
new column in which to enter a modification.
2 Select an activity or group of activities for which the description
modification is to be made. This is done by specifying all or part of the
Activity Number.
The parts of the Activity Number are broken up into the fields under
ACTIVITY NUMBER. Activity Numbers, which are listed on pages 676 X X
through 698 in Appendix A, have 10 characters. If you want to modify a

X X
group of activities, you can enter “wildcard” asterisks in some fields. At least
one of the fields (besides the two preset fields) must contain numbers.
Note: See Appendix A for a list of Activity Numbers.

 Preset engineering field 1
The first three characters of the Activity Number are fixed and the same
for all activities. They are always “000”.
 Engineering phase
The fourth character of the Activity Number indicates the major
engineering phase:
0 – Basic engineering phase
1 – Detail engineering phase
2 – Procurement phase
To select all phases, enter an asterisk (*).
 Engineering contractor number

The fifth and sixth characters of the Activity Number indicate the
engineering contract number. For fixed project-level activities, these
characters will be “00”. The engineering contract number is determined
based on your specifications for contractors under Basis for Capital Costs
in the Project Basis (see page 151). It must be a number between 01 and
X X
98. If all engineering contractor numbers are to be selected, enter two

asterisks (**).
 Account group number
Exception: Where applicable, the seventh and ninth characters of the Activity
Number indicate the process equipment class (01-26). Equipment classes are
defined in Appendix C.
The seventh character of the Activity Number indicates the account group
number. It is derived from the first character of the Code of Accounts.
0, 1, 2 – Equipment or general
3 – Piping
4 – Civil
5 – Steelwork
6 – Instrumentation
7 – Electrical
8 – Insulation
9 – Painting
If all account groups are to be selected for modification, enter one asterisk
(*).
The eighth character of the Activity Number is fixed and the same for
all activities. It is always “0”.
 Sequence in account group number
The ninth and tenth numbers provide sequential grouping within the
major hierarchy of the first eight characters. If all numbers within a
sequence group are to be selected, enter two asterisks (**).
Note: where applicable, the seventh and ninth characters of the

Activity Number indicate the process equipment class (01-26).
Equipment classes are defined on page 705.
X X
3 In the Description and tag mod. Option field, select whether to modify
both the description and the tag (default), only the description, or only the
tag.
4 If you are modifying the activity description, enter the new description in
the Engg. activity description field (up to 32 characters).
5 If you are modifying the tag, enter the new tag in the Tag field (up to 12
characters). It will be used in place of the tag (if any) provided by the
system. The tag may be used as a continuation of the description.
6 To modify another activity description, click Add. A new column will
appear. Repeat the process for the other activity description.
7 Click Apply when done.
8 Click Cancel to close the form.

Description Modification – Construction
To modify a construction activity description:

1 Right-click Construction; then on the menu that appears, click Edit.

one blank item column (Item 1). If it has already been filled in, click Add to
add a new item column in which to enter a modification.
Activity Number.
The Activity Number is broken up into the fields under ACTIVITY
NUMBER. Construction Activity Numbers, which are listed in Appendix B,
have 10 characters. If you want to modify a group of activities, you can
enter “wildcard” asterisks in some fields. However, at least one of the
fields must contain numbers.
o Area number
The first and second characters of the Activity Number indicate the
Area number, 01 through 90, or other project-level items, such as
substations, control panel and power transmission lines, which always
use 91. If activities from all Areas are to be selected, enter two
asterisks (**).
o Identification number
The third through fifth characters contain the user-specified reference
number from the specifications form for equipment items and plant
bulks. For substations, the fourth and fifth characters contain the
substation reference number (01-99) specified by the user or, if not
specified, the System default reference number of 00. If all reference
numbers are to be selected, enter three asterisks (***).
Note: See Appendix D for the Equipment Code definitions.

o Equipment type
The sixth and seventh characters contain the Equipment Code. See
Appendix D, page 707, for Equipment Code definitions. All other
X X
activities have a fixed identifier in positions six and seven of the

activity number, as listed in Activity Numbering Conventions table on
page 700. Enter two asterisks (**) if all Equipment Type numbers are
X X
to be selected.
Note: The construction activities are listed, beginning on page 700 (in
X X
Appendix B), by the last three characters of the Activity Number. These last
three characters form the account group number and account code.
o Account group number
The eighth character, the account group number, refers to the type of
work performed in the activity. The account group number combined
with the account code (in the field below), form the three-character
code by which the construction and site development activities are
listed beginning on page 699 (Appendix B). If all account group
X X
numbers are to be selected, enter an asterisk (*).

o Account code
Enter the ninth and tenth digits of the Activity Code for the activities to
be selected for modification (that is,, excluding the first character,
which is the Account Group number, above). If all Activity Codes are to
be selected, enter two asterisks (**).
o Contractor number
The eleventh and twelfth characters are the contractor numbers. If all
contractors are to be selected, enter two asterisks (**)
tag.
the Constr. activity description field (up to 32 characters).
7 Click Apply when done.
Schedule Adjustments by Duration

The activity duration and construction crew size are interrelated, such that an
adjustment to the duration will cause an inversely proportional adjustment to
the activity crew size, and vice versa. You may specify either a duration
adjustment, a maximum crew size, a minimum crew size, or all three. If a
conflict occurs, the crew size adjustment will override the duration
adjustment.
If not adjusted, durations are calculated for each activity based on the type of
activity and associated direct construction man-hours.

Crew Size
You can adjust the system activity durations by entering minimum/maximum
crew sizes for various construction activities within each account group.
To adjust crew size:

1 Right-click Crew Size; then on the menu that appears, click Edit.
2 Specify minimum and maximum crew sizes; then click Apply.
Crafts
The Craft Adjustments form lets you modify the system-defined crafts. The
craft code and craft description may be completely replaced by a user-defined
code and description.
In addition, the maximum craft pool sizes may be modified as required.
Modifying the craft pool sizes will affect the activity durations and the overall
job durations.
To adjust a craft:
1 Right-click Crafts; then on the menu that appears, click Edit.
2 Select the craft to be adjusted by entering the System craft code. See
Icarus Reference, Chapter 30, for lists of craft codes by Country Base.
3 Enter a numeric (01-99) User craft code to substitute for the preceding
System craft code.

Note: If you specify a craft code already in use (that is,, a system craft
code or a previously added user craft code), Aspen Capital Cost Estimator
will combine all pool sizes and resource requirements for the specified
craft code and the existing code.
4 Enter a description for the craft in the User craft description field, up to
20 characters.
5 Enter the number of men in the user craft pool or enter an adjustment
relative to the system craft pool size. The system craft pool size is
calculated based on the system craft man-hours and schedule duration.
6 Enter a 4-character user craft symbol. If nothing is entered, the system
craft symbol is used.
7 To enter another adjustment, click Add. This adds another column where
you can repeat the process.
8 When done, click Apply.
Durations
You can use to the specification forms for engineering, construction, and
procurement durations to adjust the durations by percentage.
 Engineering
o Engineering Duration Adjustments
You can enter a percentage adjustment to the durations calculated by
the system for Basic Engineering, Detail Engineering, and
Procurement.
o Client Review Period
You can use the Basic engineering review period field to set the
duration of Activity 0000003013, “CLIENT APPROVAL-ESTIM&SCHED”.
Since all Detail Engineering activities are preceded, directly or
indirectly, by this activity, you may impose a delay of any duration on
the continuation of engineering activity. This effectively breaks up the
work flow to simulate, for example, budget approval delay.

 Construction
You can enter a percentage adjustment to the durations calculated by the
system for nine different construction activities. Any change in activity
duration will cause a corresponding change in activity resource (crew).
 Procurement
For each equipment group, you may enter the number of weeks needed to
fabricate and ship the equipment to the site after vendor data approval.

If you make no adjustment, Aspen Capital Cost Estimator uses the
following durations:
Equipment Group Duration
Vessels 24 weeks
Towers 36 weeks
Storage Tanks 32 weeks
Pumps 22 weeks
Compressors 50 weeks
Turbines 50 weeks
Heat Exchangers 32 weeks
Boilers 55 weeks
Furnaces 40 weeks
Air Coolers 28 weeks
Package Refrigeration 44 weeks
Generators 26 weeks
Air Dryers 24 weeks
Conveyors 28 weeks
Mills 45 weeks
Fans 16 weeks
Elevators 26 weeks
Motors 16 weeks
Dust Collectors 30 weeks
Filters 16 weeks
Centrifuges 40 weeks
Mixers 16 weeks
Cooling Towers 32 weeks
Miscellaneous 26 weeks
Equipment

Package Items 36 weeks
Packings and Linings 20 weeks
Schedule Adjustments by Activity and Logic
Logic Modification
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator provides sequencing logic, varying with the
activities present, for all engineering and construction activities, except as
follows:
 Where logical relationships cannot be predicted for system-designed
activities, such as project site development.
 Where logical relationships cannot be predicted because the activity is
user-specified.
 Where a logical chain of activities has been substantially broken by
deletion of activities.
The Logic Modification forms provide the means to either add relationships
between successor and predecessor activities not provided by the Aspen
Capital Cost Estimator logic or to modify the Aspen Capital Cost Estimator
logic by adding and deleting relationships. Separate forms are provided for
engineering and construction sections of the network. When adding
relationships, a particular relationship type may be specified. However, when
deleting relationships, all relationships between the specified activities are
deleted, regardless of relationship type.
For engineering activities, only engineering predecessors are allowed. For
construction activities, engineering and construction predecessors are
allowed.

To add or delete an engineering relationship:
1 Right-click Engineering; then click Edit to display the Logic
Modification form for engineering.
2 In the Add/delete logic option field, select + or – to indicate whether

you are adding or deleting a relationship.
3 Select a successor activity, or group of activities, for which logic
modifications are to be made. This is done by specifying all or part of the
Activity Number.
SUCCESSOR ACTIVITY. Activity Numbers, which are listed on pages 676 X X
through 698 (in Appendix A), have 10 characters. If you want to modify a
X X
group of activities, you can enter “wildcard” asterisks in some fields. At least
one of the fields (besides the two preset fields) must contain numbers.

The first three characters of the Activity Number are fixed and the
same for all activities. They are always “000”.
engineering phase:

X X

asterisks (**).
Exception: where applicable, the seventh and ninth characters of the Activity
defined in Appendix C, page 705. X X
The seventh character of the Activity Number indicates the account

group number. It is derived from the first character of the Code of
Accounts.
3 – Piping
4 – Civil
5 – Steelwork
7 – Electrical
8 – Insulation
9 – Painting
If all account groups are to be selected for modification, enter one
asterisk (*).
o Preset engineering field 2
o Sequence in account group number
Note: where applicable, the seventh and ninth characters of the Activity
Number indicate the process equipment class (01-26). Equipment classes
are defined in Appendix C, page 705. X X
4 Select an activity, or group of activities, to be added or deleted as

predecessor(s) to the specified Successor. Use the fields under

PREDESSOR – ENGG. ACTIVITY to select an activity the same way you
selected a successor activity.
5 In the Relationship type field, select the specific type of logical sequence
to use when adding relationships:
A – Finish-to-Start (default)
S – Start-to-Start
F – Finish-to-Finish
Finish-to-Start (A) and Start-to-Start (S) relationships use the
Predecessor’s work week to calculate calendar lag between activities.
Finish-to-Finish (F) relationships use the successor’s work week.
The Relationship Type field is not used by the system when deleting
relationships; all relationships between the specified activities will be
6 Enter the Lag time, in whole working days, associated with the
relationship type to be added. The default is 0 days.
7 Click Apply.
8 To add or delete another relationship, click Add and repeat the process.
To add or delete a construction relationship:
Note: Enter either an engineering or a construction predecessor, not both.

1 Right-click Construction; then on the menu that appears, click Edit.

3 Select a successor construction activity, or group of activities, for which
logic modifications are to be made. This is done by specifying all or part of
the Activity Number.
The Activity Number is broken up into the fields under SUCCESSOR
ACTIVITY. Construction Activity Numbers, which are listed in Appendix B,
o Area number

asterisks (**).
Note: See Appendix D, page 707, for the Equipment Code definitions.
X X
o Equipment type
X X

X X
to be selected.
Note: The construction activities are listed in Appendix B by the last three
characters of the Activity Number. These last three characters form the
account group number and account code.
X X

o Account code
Enter the ninth and tenth characters of the Activity Code for the
activities to be selected for modification (that is,, excluding the first
character, which is the Account Group number, above). If all Activity
Codes are to be selected, enter two asterisks (**).
o Contractor number
contractors are to be selected, enter two asterisks (**).
4 You can select either an engineering or a construction activity, or group of
activities, to be added or deleted as predecessor(s) to the specified
Successor. This is done by entering all or part of an engineering or
construction Activity Number.
5 In the Relationship type field, select the specific type of logical sequence to
use when adding relationships:

Finish-to-Finish (F) relationships use the successor’s work week. The
Relationship Type field is not used by the system when deleting
7 Click Apply.
Activity Modification
The Activity Modification forms for engineering and construction allow you to
modify the coding of activities. Activities may be combined within a common
activity number or deleted entirely.
Activities can be combined by changing an activity number to another existing
number. Specify all or part of an existing activity number, then all or part of
the other activity number that will replace it. Icarus Project Scheduler (IPS)
will sort the activities into numerical order, merging all identically numbered
activities, including the craft resources.
Activities can be deleted by selecting an activity and then entering asterisks
instead of the number of a modified activity.
To modify engineering activities:

1 Right-click Engineering; then on the menu that appears, click Edit.

2 Select a source activity by specifying all or part of the Engineering Activity
Number.
The parts of the Engineering Activity Number are broken up into the fields
under SOURCE ACTIVITY. Engineering Activity Numbers, which are listed in
Appendix A, have 10 characters. If you want to modify a group of activities,
you can enter “wildcard” asterisks in some fields. At least one of the fields
(besides the two preset fields) must contain numbers.
Note: See Appendix A for a list of Engineering Activity Numbers.

o Engineering phase
engineering phase:
o Engineering contractor number
characters will be “00”. The engineering contract number is

determined based on your specifications for contractors under Basis
for Capital Costs in the Project Basis (see page 151). It must be a
X X
number between 01 and 40. If all engineering contractor numbers are

to be selected, enter two asterisks (**).
Exception: Where applicable, the seventh and ninth characters of the

Equipment classes are defined in Appendix C, page 705. X X

Accounts.
3 – Piping
4 – Civil
5 – Steelwork
7 – Electrical
8 – Insulation
9 – Painting
asterisk (*).
are defined in Appendix C, page 705.
X X
3 In the fields under MODIFIED ACTIVITY, specify the changes that are to
be made to the source activity.
4 Click Apply.
5 To modify another activity, click Add and repeat the process.
To modify construction activities:

1 Right-click Construction; then, on the menu that appears, click Edit.

2 Select a source activity by specifying all or part of the Construction
Activity Number.
The Construction Activity Number is broken up into the fields under
ACTIVITY NUMBER. Construction Activity Numbers, which are listed in
Appendix B, have 10 characters. If you want to modify a group of
activities, you can enter “wildcard” asterisks in some fields. However, at
least one of the fields must contain numbers.
o Area number
asterisks (**).
Note: See Appendix D, page 707, for the Equipment Code definitions.
X X
o Equipment type
X X

X X
to be selected.
Note: The construction activities are listed in Appendix B by the last

three characters of the Activity Number. These last three characters
form the account group number and account code.
X X

o Account code
Enter the tenth and eleventh characters of the Activity Code for the
o Contractor number
4 Click Apply.
Primavera Information
To edit Primavera information:
1 In the Primavera information folder, right-click Project manager
information; then, on the menu that appears, click Edit.

2 You can specify the following information:
o User name
o Password
o Database name
Name of Primavera database where Aspen IPS data will be loaded (for
example, pmdb).
o Remote or local host server
Indicates mode of operation, remote server (RMT) or local machine
(LCL).
o Enterprise project structure ID
Project structure ID for Primavera Enterprise. If nothing is entered, the
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator project name will be used.
o Enterprise project structure name
Project structure name for Primavera Enterprise. If nothing is entered,
the Aspen Capital Cost Estimator project name will be used.
o Enterprise project manager name
Name of manager (OBS) responsible for Primavera Enterprise. If
nothing is entered, the Aspen Capital Cost Estimator project name will
be used.
o Enterprise project WBS name
Work Breakdown structure name for Primavera Enterprise. If nothing
is entered, the Aspen Capital Cost Estimator project name will be used.
3 Click Apply to save changes.

Process Design
Note: Process Design specifications are only included in Aspen Capital Cost
Estimator if you are licensed to use Aspen Icarus Process Evaluator (Aspen
Process Economic Analyzer) or Aspen Decision Analyzer. If you are licensed,
you can select at startup to use Aspen Process Economic Analyzer or
Analyzer in the Aspen Capital Cost Estimator environment.
The Process Design specifications are used in Aspen Capital Cost Estimator
projects that contain a simulator input. These specs allow Aspen Capital Cost
Estimator to map simulator models into Icarus project components. For
example, a distillation column model in a simulator may be mapped to a
combination of equipment such as a double diameter tower, an air-cooler (for
a condenser), a horizontal tank (for a reflux drum), a general service pump
(for a reflux pump) and a thermosiphon reboiler.
The Process Design Specifications indicate the default settings that the
system uses for mapping all models of the same class. These specs can be
customized in files and used in many projects.
Simulator Type and Simulator File Name

Simulator Type and Simulator File Name are described under Loading
Simulation Data on page 268.
X X
Simulator Units of Measure Mapping Specs

The Simulator Units of Measure Mapping Specs are used in mapping simulator
units to Aspen Capital Cost Estimator units, serving as the cross-reference. To
access, right-click on Simulator Units of Measure Mapping Specs in the
Project Basis view’s Process Design folder.
The Units of Measure Specification dialog box appears.
Note: Each simulator cross-reference UOM file contains a basis (which may
be METRIC or I-P). The basis indicates the Aspen Process Economic Analyzer
base units set to which simulator units will be converted.

The left side of the screen displays the simulation output units. The right side
of the screen displays the corresponding Aspen Capital Cost Estimator units.
The conversion factors between the two units are entered in the lower-center
section of the screen.
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator provides a set of common simulator units and
their conversions to Aspen Process Economic Analyzer units. You can modify
and/or add units to these files.
Specifying the Mapping for a Simulator Unit
To specify the mapping for a simulator unit:

1 Select the simulation unit from the Units Used list in the Simulation
Output section. In the example below, the simulation unit is CM/HR
(Centimeters/Hour).
2 Select the appropriate units category from Units Category list in the Aspen
Capital Cost Estimator section. In the example below, the units category is
Velocity.
3 Select the appropriate Aspen Capital Cost Estimator unit from Units list in
the Aspen Capital Cost Estimator section. In the example below, the
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator unit is M/H (Meters/Hour).
4 Enter the conversion factor between the two units (the simulation unit and
the Aspen Capital Cost Estimator unit) in the Conversion Factor box. In
the example below, the conversion factor between the two units is 100
because:
100 CM/HR = 1 M/H

Note: If an equivalent Aspen Process Economic Analyzer unit is not found,
select Miscellaneous as the Units Category and map the simulator unit to
Other in the Units window.
5 Click Save to save the mapping. When a unit has been mapped and
saved, a green box appears next to the simulation unit. A yellow box
indicates the unit is not mapped.
Deleting a Mapping
To delete a mapping, select the simulator unit and then click Delete.
Removing a Unit
To remove a particular unit from the simulation units list, first select the unit
and then click Remove.
Adding a Unit
To add a new unit to the list, enter the new unit symbol in the New Units to
Add box in the Simulation Output section and click Add. Changes will not
affect existing project components.
Changing Existing Components

To change existing components, you should unsize the item or unmap the
items and then re-map and re-size.
Once all of the units have been specified, click OK to store and save the
specifications.

It is critical that all simulator units of measure be mapped into Aspen Capital
Cost Estimator units. When the simulator output is loaded, Aspen Capital Cost
Estimator identifies all units of measure in the file. Any units not mapped in
the project’s current simulator cross-reference UOM specification are
automatically added to the list and you are alerted to the need to define the
mapping and re-load the file.
You must correct this in order to continue without problems. Complete the
steps above to specify the mapping for a simulator unit. Scroll through the
Units Used list for any yellow-tagged units. Map all these, save the file, and
re-load the simulator data.
Project Component Map Specifications

The Project Component Map Specifications dialog box contains a list of
models for the selected simulator and a list of the corresponding Icarus
project components to which the simulator models will map.
To access:
1 Right-click Project Component Map Specifications in the Project Basis
view’s Process Design folder.

Models that are mapped in the current file are marked with an asterisk (*). If
no asterisk is present, then that model will not generate any project
components when loaded, mapped, and sized.
3 Exclude simulator models from the mapping process by selecting the
simulator item and then clicking Delete All Mappings.
You can select a simulator item and review the mapping(s) for that item. To
change one of the mappings, select an item in the Current Map List, click
Delete One Mapping, and then create a new mapping.
To create a new mapping, click New Mapping and then select an appropriate
Icarus project component.
For simulator column models, an additional specification can be made. Since a
column may be mapped to multiple pieces of equipment, Aspen Capital Cost
Estimator requires an identification for each of these mappings. Refer to
Mapping Simulator Models in Chapter 4 for tower/column configuration
mapping identifications.
Note: You can select in Preferences to have Aspen Capital Cost Estimator
map unsupported simulator models (that is,, models not included in the list
of simulator models on the Project Component Map Specifications dialog
box) to quoted cost items. See page 56 for instructions.
X X
Default Simulator Mapping Specs

The following tables list models that are mapped to Aspen Capital Cost
Estimator project components. Models that are not supported can be mapped
to a quoted item if you mark “Map Unsupported Models To Quoted Cost Item”
in Preferences (Process tab).

AspenTech’s Aspen Plus Map Specs
Model Model Description Aspen Capital Cost Estimator

Name Default
CCD Countercurrent decanter Rotary drum filter
CFUGE Centrifuge filter Centrifuge SOLID-BOWL
COMPR Compressor/turbine Centrifugal gas compressor / Gas
turbine with combustion chamber
CRUSHER Solids crusher Jaw crusher
CYCLONE Solid-gas cyclone Cyclone Dust collector
DECANTER Liquid-liquid decanter Vertical vessel – process
DISTL Shortcut distillation rating Single-diameter trayed tower
DSTWU Shortcut distillation design Single-diameter trayed tower
ESP Electrostatic precipitator Low voltage electrical precipitator
FABFL Baghouse filter Cloth bay baghouse
FILTER Continuous rotary vacuum Rotary drum filter
FLASH2 Two-outlet flash Vertical vessel – process
FLASH3 Three-outlet flash Vertical vessel – process
FSPLIT Stream splitter
HEATER TEMA Shell and Tube Exchanger Floating head heat exchanger
HEATX TEMA Shell and Tube Exchanger Floating head heat exchanger
HYCYC Solid-liquid hydrocyclone Water only cyclones - mineral
PUMP Pump/hydraulic turbine Centrifugal single or multi-stage
pump
RADFRAC TEMA Shell and Tube Exchanger  Single-diameter trayed tower
(column)
 Floating head heat exchanger
(condenser)
 U-tube reboiler (reboiler)
 Horizontal drum (accumulator)
 Centrifugal single or multi-stage
pump (reflux pump)
PETROFAC TEMA Shell and Tube Exchanger  Single-diameter trayed tower
(column)
(condenser)
pump (reflux pump)
 Furnace block
RBATCH Batch reactor Agitated Tank – enclosed, jacketed

RCSTR Continuous stirred tank Agitated Tank – enclosed, reactor
jacketed
REQUIL Equilibrium reactor Agitated Tank – enclosed, jacketed
RGIBBS Equilibrium reactor-gibbs Agitated Tank – enclosed, energy

jacketed minimization
RPLUG Plug-flow reactor Single diameter packed tower
RSTOIC Stoichiometer reactor Agitated Tank – enclosed, jacketed
RYIELD Yield reactor Agitated Tank – enclosed, jacketed
SCFRAC Short-cut distillation Single-diameter trayed tower
SCREEN Wet or dry screen separator Vibrating system
SWASH Single-stage solids washer Rotary drum filter
VSCRUB Venturi scrubber Washer dust collector
ChemCAD V Map Specs
Model Model Description Aspen Capital Cost Estimator Default
BAGH Baghouse filter Cloth bay baghouse dust collector

COMP Adiabatic (isentropic) or Centrifugal Axial Gas Compressor
polytopic Compression
CFUG Basket centrifugal filter Atmospheric suspended basket centrifuge
CRYS Crystallizer or melting by Batch vacuum crystallizer
cooling/heating
CSED Solid-wall basket centrifuge Solid bowl centrifuge
separating solids from liq
slurry
CYCL Gas-solid cyclone separator Cyclone dust collector
DRYE Dryer Direct rotary dryer
EREA Equilibrium reactor Agitated tank reactor
ESPT Electrostatic precipitator Low voltage electrical precipitator
FIRE Fired heater Floating head heat exchanger
FLAS Multipurpose flash Vertical cylindrical vessel
FLTR Vacuum or constant-pressure Rotary disk filter
filter
GIBS Gibbs reactor Agitated tank reactor
HCYC Hydrocyclone Water cyclone (separation equipment)
HTXR Heat exchanger Floating head heat exchanger
KREA Kinetic reactor (plug flow or Agitated tank reactor
continuous stirred tank
reactors)
LLVF Vapor/liquid/liquid flash Vertical cylindrical vessel
MIXE Stream mixer (flash Vertical cylindrical vessel
calculation at output
pressure)
PUMP Liquid pump (to increase Centrifugal pump
pressure of liquid stream)
REAC Stoichiometric reactor Agitated tank reactor

SCDS Simultaneous correction  Single diameter trayed tower
rigorous fractionation (single  Floating head heat exchanger
column) (condenser)
 Centrifugal single or multi-stage pump
(reflux pump)
SCRE Screen Single deck rectangular vibrating screen
TOWR Inside/out rigorous  Single diameter trayed tower
fractionation (single column)  Floating head heat exchanger
(condenser)
(reflux pump)
WASH Washer Washer dust collector
Hysim Map Specs
Model Name Model Description Aspen Capital Cost Estimator Default

BAG FILTER Baghouse filter Dust collector cloth bay
COLUMN Distillation column  Single-diameter trayed tower
 Floating head heat exchanger (condenser)
(reflux pump)
COMPRESSOR Compressor Centrifugal gas compressor
CSTR Continuous stirred- Agitated Tank - enclosed, jacketed
tank
CYCLONE Gas-solid separator Cyclone dust collector
EXPANDER Expander Gas turbine
FILTER Rotary drum filter Rotary drum filter
HEATER Heater/cooler Floating head heat exchanger
HEATEX Simple heat Floating head heat exchanger
exchanger
HYDROCYCLONE Solid-liquid Water only cyclones - mineral separation
hydrocyclone
PIPING Pipeline
PLUG Plug-flow reactor Single-diameter packed tower and others
PUMP Pump Centrifugal single or multi-stage pump
RATEHEATEX Rigorous heat Floating head heat exchanger
exchanger
REQUI Equilibrium reactor Agitated Tank - enclosed, jacketed
RGIBBS Gibbs-energy reactor Agitated Tank - enclosed, jacketed
RSTOIC Stoichiometric Agitated Tank - enclosed, jacketed
reactor

SOLIDSEP Solids separator Cyclone dust collector
HYSYS Map Specs
Model Name Model Description Aspen Capital Cost Estimator Default

AIR COOLER Air cooler Air cooler, free-standing or rack-mounted.
BAG FILTER Baghouse filter Dust collector cloth bay
COLUMN Distillation column Single-diameter trayed tower
CSTR Continuous stirred- Agitated Tank – enclosed, jacketed
tank
CYCLONE Gas-solid separator Cyclone dust collector
FILTER Rotary drum filter Rotary drum filter
HEATER TEMA Shell and Tube Floating head heat exchanger
Exchanger
HEATX TEMA Shell and Tube Floating head heat exchanger
Exchanger
HYDROCYCLONE Solid-liquid Water only cyclones – mineral separation
hydrocyclone
PLUG Plug-flow reactor Single-diameter packed tower and others
PUMP Pump Centrifugal single or multi-stage pump
REQUI Equilibrium reactor Agitated Tank – enclosed, jacketed
RGIBBS Gibbs-energy reactor Agitated Tank – enclosed, jacketed
RSTOIC Stoichiometric reactor Agitated Tank – enclosed, jacketed
SOLIDSEP Solids separator Cyclone dust collector
SimSci’s Pro/II Map Specs
Model Name Model Description Aspen Capital Cost Estimator

Default
CENTRIFUGE Centrifuge Solid bowl centrifuge
COLUMN UNITS Distillation column  Single-diameter trayed tower
(condenser)
pump (reflux pump)
CRYSTAL Crystallizer Oslo growth type crystallizer
CSTR Continuous stirred tank Agitated Tank - enclosed, jacketed
DECANTER Countercurrent decanter Rotary drum filter
DEPRESSURE Non-steady-state Vertical vessel - process
depressure
DRYER Solids dryer Atmospheric tray dryer

FLASH FLASH Vertical vessel - process
HEATEX Simple heat exchanger Floating head heat exchanger
PLUG Plug-flow reactor Single diameter packed tower
PUMP Pump Centrifugal single or multi-stage
pump
REACTOR Reactor Agitated Tank - enclosed, jacketed
RIGHTEX Rigorous heat exchanger Floating head heat exchanger
ROTDRUM Rotary drum filter Rotary drum filter
SHORTCUT Distillation column Single-diameter trayed tower
Design Criteria
After the simulator model is loaded into Aspen Capital Cost Estimator,
mapping and sizing of the items can be performed. If an item is already sized
inside the simulator, the sizing parameters are automatically brought into
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator and used.
Items not sized by the simulator can be sized following the instructions in
Chapter 5. In addition to process information obtained from the simulator,
certain design specifications may be required before sizing can be
accomplished.
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator’s Sizing Expert uses design values based on the
user-defined field values on specification forms in the Design Criteria
sub-folder. The values on these forms provide the basis for developing design
specifications from operating conditions for all equipment to be sized.
You can enter design conditions (design pressure and temperature) for all
equipment (using the Common form) and also enter design conditions for
types of equipment. (Conditions entered on the equipment type forms
override those on the Common form).

Common
Design pressure and temperature entered on the Common specifications form
applies to all equipment except equipment for which you have separately
specified these design conditions.
 Design Pressure
Click in the Design Pressure field to open the Design Pressure
Specifications form. The specifications form lets you specify rules for
calculating the design pressure based on the range in which the operating
pressure falls. The design pressure is calculated from the operating
pressure using the formula shown on the form. You can modify the
pressure limit (upper and lower limit) as well as parameters A and B.
Note: In earlier versions of Aspen Process Economic Analyzer, the

Design Pressure – Multiplier field was used. This field has now been
replaced by the Design Pressure Specifications form. If projects
created using these earlier versions are opened, then the parameters A
and B are automatically adjusted based on the multiplier value specified.
This ensures that old projects can be carried over using the same design
criteria.
 Design Temperature
Click in the Design Temperature field to open the Design Temperature
Specifications form. The specifications form lets you specify rules for
calculating the design temperature based on the range in which the
operating temperature falls. The design pressure is calculated from the
operating temperature using the formula shown on the form. You can
modify the temperature ranges (upper and lower limit) as well as
parameters A and B.

Note: In earlier versions of Aspen Process Economic Analyzer, the
Design Temperature - Increase field was used. This field has now
been replaced by the Design Temperature Specifications form. If projects
created using these earlier versions are opened, then the parameters A
and B are automatically adjusted based on the multiplier value specified.
Pumps
In addition to entering design pressure and temperature (see instructions
under Common, page 200), you can enter the following design criteria for
X X
pumps:
 Pump Overdesign Factor
The pump overdesign factor is used by Aspen Capital Cost Estimator to
increase the volumetric throughput of the pump and the power
requirement of the pump. The total volumetric flow rate calculated from
the simulator information is multiplied by the value provided in this field
to estimate the design flow rate for the equipment.
For example:
o Operation flow rate: 250 GPM
o Pump overdesign factor: 1.1
o Calculated design capacity: 250 X 1.1 = 275 GPM
Compressors
X X
compressors:
 Driver Type
Specifies the driver type used for compressors. The default value is None.
The selections are NONE, GAS ENGINE, MOTOR, TURBINE.
Heat Exchangers
Using Shell&TubeMech detailed Heat Exchanger costing for Icarus cost
estimation of TEAM Heat Exchangers.

To use Shell and Tube Mechanical for heat exchange sizing:
1 In your project, add a TEMA shell and tube heat exchanger to the main
area.
2 Enter values to all the required fields (boxes with red and yellow highlight)
3 Enter values for the following Material of Construction fields:
o Tube material
o Shell material
o Tube sheet material
o Channel material
4 Click the arrow next to the Size button.
5 Click Shell&TubeMech for sizing.

The Icarus window will be hidden and, in a couple of seconds, the Icarus
project evaluation dialog will appear
After the evaluation is over – in a second or two - a message box saying The
Shell&TubeMech GUI will now be launched appears.
6 Click OK to launch the Shell&TubeMech GUI.

The Shell&TubeMech GUI appears.
7 In the Shell&TubeMech GUI, specify the details of the heat exchanger.

8 When you have specified the details of the heat exchanger, click Run |
Run Shell&TubeMech | Calculations + Cost Estimate.
A program status dialog box will pop up during the Shell&TubeMech run.
9 After Shell&TubeMech has finished calculations, close the program
status dialog box.
10 Close the Shell&TubeMech GUI by clicking File | Close.
After the Shell&TubeMech GUI closes, the Icarus window reappears.
11 Evaluate the heat exchanger to import Shell&TubeMech design values
into the Icarus item report.
X X
heat exchangers:
 Launch MUSE
MUSE™ performs detailed simulation of multi-stream plate-fin heat
exchangers made from brazed aluminum, stainless steel or titanium.
A valid MUSE version 3.3 license is required to use this feature.

Select “Yes” to launch MUSE during interactive sizing of plate fin heat
exchangers. Select “No” to run MUSE in the silent mode.
 Furnace Fractional Efficiency
The furnace duty obtained from the simulator is the absorbed duty. Total
fired duty is obtained by dividing the absorbed duty by fractional
efficiency. This value should be <1.0.
 Fuel Heating Value
The Lower Heating Value (LHV) used to estimate the fuel consumption by
fired furnaces.
 Air Cooler Inlet Temperature
This field represents the default value that shall be used as the inlet air
temperature in the case of Air Coolers.
 Air Cooler Exit Temperature
Air Cooler Exit Temperature is used when estimating the surface area of
air cooled heat exchangers. The value given in this field is used as the exit
temperature for the air cooler.
If the field is empty or has value of 0.0, then the Sizing Expert assigns the
exit air temperature value to be 10.0 DEG F greater than the inlet air
temperature.
For example, if the Air Cooler Inlet Temperature is 77.0 DEG F and you do
not enter the Air Cooler Exit Temperature, Aspen Capital Cost Estimator
uses 87.0 DEG F as the default value.
 Apply 2/3 Rule for Design Pressure
In the design of shell and tube heat exchangers, design engineers
sometimes apply the 2/3rd rule in calculating the design pressure. As per
ASME heat exchanger code, if the design pressure of the lower-pressure
side (either tube or shell) is at least 2/3rd the design pressure on the
high-pressure side, then overpressure in the high-pressure side will not
result in rupture in the lower-pressure side (provided relief devices have
been properly sized).
When specified, the 2/3 rule will increase the design pressure of the low
pressure side to at least 67% of the design pressure of the high pressure
side, even when the operating pressure on the low pressure side could
result in a lower design pressure as per the Design Pressure field.
 Heat Exchanger Area Minimum Overdesign Factor
The calculated heat transfer area is multiplied by the value given in the
field.
The mechanical design is performed for the final heat transfer area.
For example:
o Calculated surface area = 1000 SF
o Heat Exchanger Area Minimum Overdesign Factor = 1.1
o Surface area used for mechanical design: 1000 X 1.1 = 1100 SF
Note that the final surface area in general is greater than the calculated
value because of mechanical considerations.

Towers
under Common, page 200), you can enter the following design criteria on the
X X
Towers form (applies to all towers):

 Bottom Sump Height (For Trayed and Packed Towers)
For both trayed and packed towers, extra height in addition to that
required for separation is provided at the bottom for liquid level and
reboiler return.
The value in this field is added to the calculated height of the tower.
 R/R-Minimum (For SHORTCUT model in Pro/II)
The SimSci simulator shortcut distillation model calculates the number of
theoretical stages required for different ratios of operating reflux ratio (R)
to minimum reflux ratio (R-Minimum).
The number of stages should be available in the simulator report for the
ratio chosen.
 Vapor Disengagement Height (For Trayed and Packed Towers)
For both trayed and packed towers, extra height in addition to that
required for separation is provided at the top for vapor disengagement
before passing to the condenser.
The value in this field is added to the calculated height of the tower.
Packed Towers
X X
packed towers:
 Packing Type
Two types of packings, random and structured, are used in packed towers.
The type of packing affects the flood point pressure drop estimation and
the packing efficiency (HETP) value.
The value in this field is used by the Sizing Expert in the calculation of the
tower diameter and height.
 Packing Factor for Packings
Packing factor is used in the Kister and Gill correlation to estimate
pressure drop at the flood point. Once the pressure drop is known, the
flood velocity is calculated using the latest versions of the generalized
pressure drop correlation (GPDC) charts for both the random and
structured packings.
 Packed Tower Derating Factor
With certain systems, traditional flooding equations consistently predict
higher flood points than those actually experienced. To allow for such
discrepancies, an empirical derating factor (< 1.0) is applied. The derating
factor is multiplied by the predicted flood vapor load or liquid load
obtained from the traditional equation to obtain the actual or derated flood
load for the given system.

The derating factors are often vaguely related to the foaming tendency of
the system. The higher the foaming tendency, the lower the derating
factor.
If you do not enter a value, Aspen Capital Cost Estimator uses 1.0 as the
derating factor.
 Packed Tower Flooding Factor
Packed towers are usually designed for 70 to 80 percent of the flood point
velocity. This allows a sufficient margin for uncertainties associated with
the flood point concept and prediction and to keep the design point away
from the region at which efficiency rapidly diminishes (just below the flood
point).
The Sizing Expert uses the default value specified if the user-provided
value is not available.
 HETP
The concept of HETP (height equivalent of a theoretical plate) enables
comparison of efficiency between packed and plate columns. Because
there are only a few variables that significantly affect HETP and due to the
unreliability of even the best mass transfer models, rules of thumb for
HETP successfully compete with the mass transfer models.
For the packing types available in Aspen Capital Cost Estimator (given in
the Icarus Reference), Aspen Capital Cost Estimator estimates the HETP
value based on the packing shape, dimensions and type of material. If a
user-provided value is available, then the Sizing Expert uses the value in
the above field for calculating the height of the packed tower.
 Packed Section Height
The value represents the height of each packed section and is used in the
design of packed towers to estimate the number of packed sections.
 Surface Area Per Unit Volume
Higher specific surface areas (surface area per unit volume) increases
vapor-liquid contact area and therefore, efficiency. For structured
packings, Aspen Capital Cost Estimator determines this value empirically
and uses it in estimating HETP if you have not already specified an HETP
value.
A default value of 75 SF/CF is used in the absence of a user-entered
value.
Trayed Towers
X X
trayed towers:
 Trayed Tower Flooding Factor
Flooding is the condition where pressure drop across a tray is sufficient to
cause the dynamic liquid head to be equivalent to the tray spacing plus
the weir height. At this point, the liquid backup in the downcomer is just
at the point of overflowing the weir on the plate above. When this
happens, the column fills with a foamy liquid and becomes inoperable.

The flood factor is the fractional velocity approach to flooding, that is,,
(Actual Vapor Velocity)/(Vapor velocity at the point of flooding).
The Sizing Expert uses the default value specified if the user-provided
value is not available.
 Foaming Tendency
Vapor disengagement is easy in non-foaming, low-pressure systems.
However, vapor disengagement from downcomer liquid in foaming
systems is difficult as the liquid hangs on to the entrained vapor.
Sufficient residence time must be provided in the downcomer to allow
adequate disengagement of vapor from the descending liquid. Industrial
practice has created a guideline for the mum downcomer velocity of clear
liquids based on their foaming tendency.
The following values for the downcomer liquid velocity are used based on
the choice for the above field.
Downcomer Liquid Velocity, (FPS)

Tray Spacing, INCHES
Foaming
18 24 30
Tendency
Low 0.4 – 0.5 0.5 – 0.6 0.6 – 0.7
Moderate 0.3 – 0.4 0.4 – 0.5 0.5 - 0.6

High 0.2 – 0.25 0.2 – 0.25 0.2 - 0.3
higher flood points than those actually experienced. To allow for such
discrepancies, an empirical derating factor (< 1.0) is applied. The derating
The trayed derating factors are often related to the foaming tendency of
factor. If the user-specified value is not available, a derating factor is
selected based on the value of foaming tendency.
The default value for foaming tendency is Moderate.
 Trayed Tower Derating Factor
higher flood points than those actually experienced. To allow for such a
discrepancy, an empirical derating factor (< 1.0) is applied. The derating
The derating factors are often vaguely related to the foaming tendency of
factor.
If the user-provided value is not available, or the value 0.0 is entered in
the field, then the derating factor is selected based on the foaming
tendency of the liquids in the column.
 Relative Volatility of Key Components

The number of theoretical stages for a trayed tower is obtained from the
simulator report. The actual number of trays is calculated by using the
tray efficiency value provided by the user in the design criteria file.
However, if the field is empty or has a 0.0 value, the tray efficiency for
the separation is estimated by using the correlation of relative volatility of
key components with tray efficiency. The O’Connell correlation is used to
estimate the overall tray efficiency.
 Tray Efficiency
Overall column efficiency is defined by:
E_oc = N_t/ N_a
where:
N_t = Number of theoretical stages required for the separation minus the
sum of theoretical stages provided by the reboiler, condenser, and
intermediate heat exchangers.
N_a = Number of actual trays in the column.
Several empirical correlations are available in the literature. Also, rigorous
theoretical predictions based on gas and liquid film resistances are
available to assist in predicting the tray efficiency.
If the user specification is not available for the field, then the value is
estimated using empirical correlations from the literature.
Configurations Towers
Use this form to specify design criteria for tower configurations.
Vessels
under Common, page 200), you can enter the following design criteria on the
X X
Vessels form (applies to all process vessels):

 Residence Time
The amount of liquid holdup in the vessel is estimated by the liquid
volumetric flow through a vessel in a specified amount of time. The vessel
volume divided by volumetric flow rate is defined as the residence time for
the vessel.
For example:
 Liquid flow through the vessel: 100 CFM
 Residence time: 5 MIN
 Calculated liquid volume in the vessel: 100 CFM X 5 = 500 CF.
 Process Vessel Height to Diameter Ratio (For Vertical and
Horizontal Vessel Design)
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator defaults for this field are used if the field is
empty or has the value of “0.0.” The Aspen Capital Cost Estimator defaults
depend on the operating conditions for the vessel. Based on the operating
pressure of the vessel obtained from the simulator report, the following
values are used:
Pressure (PSIA) Process Vessel Height to Diameter Ratio

0 – 250 3
250 – 500 4
> 500 5
For example:
 Vessel operation pressure: <250 PSIA
 Diameter: 6 FEET
 Calculated vessel height: 6 X 3 = 18 FEET
Residence time overrides Process Vessel Height to Diameter Ratio.
 Minimum Vessel Diameter
The Minimum Vessel Diameter field is used if the vessel diameter
calculated by the sizing routines is less than this value.
 Vapor/Liquid Separator Sizing Method
When sizing vertical and horizontal vapor liquid separators, Aspen Capital
Cost Estimator computes the maximum allowable vapor velocity using the
method selected in this field.
 Liquid Entrainment Method:
This is an empirical correlation developed by Watkins and is a function
of vapor and liquid densities, and the parameter Kv, which itself is a
polynomial function of vapor and liquid flows and densities.
 Particle size separation method:
This method estimates the disengagement velocity of the liquid droplet
in the continuous vapor phase. The design velocity is determined as a
percentage of the disengagement velocity.
 Average Liquid Particle Diameter (For particle size separation
method)
This field specifies the default average liquid droplet diameter. This value
is used in the design of horizontal and vertical vessels by the particle size
separation method (which can be selected in the Vapor/Liquid
Separator Sizing Method field right above this field).
 Design Factor Multiplier for Disengagement Velocity (For particle
size separation method)
This field is used in the calculation of the maximum allowable design
velocity, which is a percentage of the disengagement velocity.
For example:
 Disengagement velocity : 10 FEET/SECOND
 Design factor multiplier for disengagement velocity: 0.5
 Maximum allowable design velocity: 10 X 0.5 = 5 FEET/SECOND
 Separation Factor (For liquid entrainment method)
In the liquid entrainment method, the separation factor is used to
determine the maximum allowable vapor velocity. The separation factor is
either entered by the user in this field or computed by Aspen Capital Cost
Estimator using the relation described in the vessel sizing design
procedure.

Agitated Vessels
X X
agitated vessels:
 Agitator Type
The various types of agitators that can be chosen for design are described
in the Icarus Reference. The type of agitator selected determines the
default driver power and impeller speed. This is used to estimate the
agitation requirements in tanks.
Storage Vessels
X X
storage vessels:
 Number of Holding Days
Storage vessel sizing is determined by estimating the volume of liquid
required for a certain period of operation. Aspen Capital Cost Estimator
uses this field to determine the liquid volume stored in the vessel.
For example:
 Inlet flow rate: 500 CF per day.
 Number of holding days: 30 (specified by user).
 Liquid volume inside the storage vessel: 500 X 30 = 1,500 CF.
 Holding Hours in a Day
Storage vessel sizing is determined by estimating the volume of liquid
required for a certain period of operation. Aspen Capital Cost Estimator
uses this field to determine the liquid volume required per day.
For example:
 Inlet flow rate: 500 CFH.
 Holding Hours in a Day: 24 (specified by user).
 Final volume per day : 500 X 24 = 12,000 CF/day.
 Storage Vessel Height to Diameter Ratio
Once the volume of the storage vessel is determined based on the process
fluid flow rate and design conditions, the actual dimensions (height and
diameter) of the equipment must be estimated. You can specify the
dimensional requirements of the equipment using this field.
A default is used if the field is empty or has value 0.0. The default
depends on the operating conditions for the vessel.
 Vapor Free Space (% of Total Storage Vessel Volume)
A percent volume of the sized vessel in excess of the required liquid
volume.

Horizontal Vessels
X X
horizontal vessels:
 Vapor Area /Cross-Sectional Area
Once Aspen Capital Cost Estimator calculates the maximum vapor
velocity, the velocity and flow rate are used to determine the vapor space
required. The vapor space is then divided by the vapor area /cross-
sectional area to get the total required cross-sectional area.
The process vessel height to diameter ratio overrides this field.
 Separation Factor Multiplier
For horizontal vessels, the separation factor is normally higher under
similar operating conditions than for vertical vessels. Therefore, the
calculated separation factor is multiplied by the separation factor
multiplier.
 Minimum Boot Length
When horizontal vessels are used for three phase separations, the heavy
second liquid phase is removed in the drip leg situated at the bottom of
the vessel.
 Minimum Boot Diameter
This field represents diameter of the boot leg which is designed to remove
the heavy second liquid.
 Boot Leg Liquid Velocity
The bootleg cross-sectional area is estimated using the liquid velocity field
specified in this field and the process vessel height to diameter ratio.
Vertical Vessels
X X
vertical vessels:
 Minimum Disengagement Height
This is the height from the liquid level to the mist eliminator.
 Minimum Height Above the Mist Eliminator
Used in the calculation of the total vessel height.
 Height of Mist Eliminator
Height of mist eliminator section.
 Minimum Ht. Btw Low and High Liquid Level Taps
The liquid level based on residence time should meet this minimum
specification. (Field is at bottom of form, not in Vertical Vessels section.)
 Ht. Btw Inlet Nozzle and High Liquid Level Tap
Represents the height between the inlet nozzle (center line) and the high
liquid level tap. (Field is at bottom of form, not in Vertical Vessels
section.)
 Ht. Btw Low Liquid Level Tap and Tangent Line

Represents the height between the low liquid level tap and the tangent
line. (Field is at bottom of form, not in Vertical Vessels section.)
Miscellaneous
 Vibrating Screen Feed Material
This field specifies the solid material type used by solids handling
equipment. The material type affects the screen unit capacity which is
defined as the amount of solids (TPH) flowing through one square foot of
screen cloth based on material, having 6 to 8% moisture, screen cloth
having 50% or more open area; 85% screen efficiency.
Based on the choice made for this field and the screen opening size, the
screen unit capacity is estimated.
The following choices are available for this field:
 Sand and Gravel
 Limestone/Crushed Stones
 Coal
 Cinders
 Coke
 Wood
 Cyclone Inlet Linear Velocity
In case of cyclones, the sizing program assumes a default linear velocity
of 150 FPS. You can enter a different velocity here.
Configurations Flash
Use this form to specify design criteria for flash configurations.
Utility Specifications
Most chemical processes require heating or cooling process utility fluids to
operate. The choice of which utilities to use often plays an important role in
determining the total project cost, since the utility type affects heat transfer
equipment sizing. In addition, utility costs form an important part of the
operating costs of the plant.
In the design of heat exchangers and reboilers, Aspen Capital Cost Estimator
permits you to select appropriate process utility fluids for the application. You
can select utility fluids from those already available in Aspen Capital Cost
Estimator or create your own based on utility fluid classes allowed by Aspen
Capital Cost Estimator. Once the utility resource for the equipment is selected
(either by you or the Sizing Expert), Aspen Capital Cost Estimator creates a
utility process stream for the equipment. The utility stream information
includes the amount of utility used by the equipment. During the operating
cost evaluation, Aspen Capital Cost Estimator processes all the utility streams
connected to the equipment to determine the utility cost for every utility
resource used in the project.
You can override these selections by a combination of disabling/enabling
appropriate utilities and re-mapping and re-sizing the equipment items.

Alternately, you can specify the desired utility in the interactive Sizing Expert.
This method is available even if the utility has been disabled.
To modify or create a utility stream:

1 Right-click on Utility Specifications in the Project Basis view’s Process
Design folder; then, on the menu that appears, and then click Edit.
The Develop Utility Specifications dialog box appears.
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator provides 11 default utility streams

resources:
 Cooling Water
 High Temp Heating Oil *
 Low Temp Heating Oil **
 Refrigerant – Ethane
 Refrigerant - Ethylene
 Refrigerant - Freon 12
 Refrigerant - Propane
 Refrigerant - Propylene

 Steam @165 PSI
 Steam @100 PSI
 Steam @400 PSI
 High temperature heating oil has the properties of DOWTHERM A.
 ** Low temperature heating oil has the properties of DOWTHERM
E.
2 To modify an existing utility stream, highlight it on the Modify Existing
Stream list and click Modify.
To create a new utility stream:

1 Click Create in the Option section.
2 In the Create New Utility Stream section, type the name and select one
of the following fluid classes:
 High Temp Heating Oil *
 Low Temp Heating Oil **
 Refrigerant – Ethane
 Refrigerant – Ethylene
 Refrigerant – Freon 12
 Refrigerant – Propane
 Refrigerant – Propylene
 Refrigerant 50 Utility
 Steam
 Water
 High temperature heating oil has the properties of DOWTHERM A.
 ** Low temperature heating oil has the properties of DOWTHERM
E.
3 Click Create.
4 Enter or modify the specifications on the Utility Specifications form.

The form contains the following fields:
o Description:
Describes the utility fluid resource in the sizing report generated by
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator. Also, the field value is used to represent
the utility fluid usage and its related cost on the Project Summary
investment analysis spreadsheet (PROJSUM.ICS).
o Fluid:
Determines the type of utility fluid described by the current
specification. The fluid class is used to determine the heat transfer
coefficient, fouling tendency and related thermal and transport
properties used by Sizing Expert.
o Design Temperature
Specifies the temperature, which will be considered in the estimation
of the design temperature for the process equipment carrying the
utility fluid.
o Design Pressure:
Specifies the pressure, which will be considered in the estimation of
the design pressure for the process equipment carrying the utility fluid.
o Inlet temperature:
Provides the inlet temperature for the utility fluid.
o Exit temperature:
Provides the exit temperature condition for the utility fluid.
o Pressure:
Provides the operating pressure for the utility fluid.
o Energy transfer per unit mass:
Specifies the amount of energy provided or removed by the utility fluid
over the specified temperature range. The value in this field is used to
estimate the amount of utility required for the given process
conditions.
o Unit Cost:
Provides the cost value used to estimate the utility cost for the project.
o Unit Cost Units:
Provides the units for the value provided in the unit cost field.
When you specify a new utility fluid resource, all the information on
the specification form must be provided; otherwise, the Sizing Expert
will not be able to use the utility fluid resource properly.
Using the utility specification form, you can specify a maximum of 20
utility fluids.
If different utility fluid resource was used by simulation, then it is
added to the utility resource in Aspen Capital Cost Estimator.
o Utility type:
Describes the usage of the utility fluid. Select either Heat source or
Heat sink.
5 When you are done entering the utility specifications, click OK.

Investment Analysis
Note: Investment Analysis specifications are only included in Aspen Capital
Cost Estimator if you are licensed to use Aspen Icarus Process Evaluator. If
you select at startup to use Aspen Icarus Process Evaluator in the Aspen
Capital Cost Estimator environment, the Investment Analysis specifications
appear in the Project Basis view.
Investment Parameters
To specify parameters required for investment analysis:
1 Right-click on Investment Parameters in the Project Basis view’s
Investment Analysis folder.

Aspen Capital Cost Estimator displays the Investment Parameters in the Main
Window.
A description of the parameters follows.
General Investment Parameters

 Period Description
This field lets you enter text indicating the name/description of a period.
The period is defined in “Number of Weeks per Period.” The period
description is used in the display of some of the results in the
spreadsheets.
 Number of Weeks per Period
The period used for investment analysis is defined in terms of number of
weeks.
 Number of Periods for Analysis
The number of periods to include in the cashflow and other project totals
and calculations.
 Tax Rate

The tax rate for investment analysis, in terms of percent per period, is
used to calculate the percentage of earnings before taxes that must be
paid to the government.
 Desired Rate of Return
The desired rate of return, in percent per period, for the investment.
 Economic Life of Project
This field indicates the length of time in terms of periods over which
capital costs will be depreciated.
 Salvage Value (Percent of Initial Capital Cost)
This number indicates the approximate worth of capital costs at the end of
the Economic Life of Project. The number is expressed as a percent of
initial capital cost.
 Depreciation Method
There are four depreciation methods allowed in Aspen Capital Cost
Estimator. The description of each follows:
 Straight Line
The straight line method is used most commonly. In this method, the
Salvage Value is subtracted from the Total Project Cost. This result is
then divided by the Economic Life of Project, so that the project is
depreciated evenly over its economic life.
 Sum of the Digits
When this method is used, the Depreciation Expense decreases during
each period of the Economic Life of Project. Therefore, the highest
value for the depreciation occurs in the first period and decreases
every period thereafter. The sum of the digits multiplier is
n/((N(N+1))/2), where N is the Economic amount is the Total Project
Cost less its Salvage Value. For the duration of the project’s economic
life, this factor is multiplied by the depreciable amount.
 Double Declining (Balance)
When this method is used, the project is depreciated in geometric
increments. The multiplier for the first period is 2/N, where N is the
Economic Life of Project. For the second period the depreciation rate,
D2, is (1-D1)D1 where D1 is 2/N. For the third period, the depreciation
rate, D3, is (1-D1)D2. For the fourth period, the depreciation rate is
(1-D1)D3. These factors are multiplied by the Total Project Cost. This
process (multiplying the factor by the capital cost) continues until the
Straight Line Method produces a higher value for the depreciation.
When the Straight Line Method produces a higher value, this higher
value is used for the remaining depreciation calculations.
 Accelerated Cost Recovery System (ACRS)
The ACRS approach assumes that operations begin during the second
half of the first period and stop during the first half of the last period.
Therefore, as a result of the two half-periods (one at the beginning
and one at the end of the operating cycle), it takes 6 periods to
depreciate a project which has an Economic Life of 5 periods. The
ACRS adapts the Double Declining Balance Method to the half-life
system. The depreciation rate for the first period, D1, is 2/N, where N
is the Economic Life of Project. However, the half-life convention
reduces this factor to 1/N. For the second period the depreciation rate,
D2, is D1(1-1/ N). For the third period the depreciation rate, D3, is

D1(1-1/N-D2). This process (multiplying the factor by the Total Project
Cost continues until the Straight Line Method produces a higher value
for the depreciation. When the Straight Line Method produces a higher
value, this higher value is used for the remaining depreciation
calculations.
Escalation Parameters
 Project Capital Escalation
This number indicates the rate at which project capital expenses may
increase expressed in percent per period. If the addition of Engineer-
Procure-Construct (EPC) period and start-up period is greater than one
whole period, Project Capital Escalation is used to escalate the capital
expenses for periods beyond the first period.
 Products Escalation
This is the rate at which the sales revenue from products of the facility are
to be escalated (increased) in terms of percent per period.
 Raw Material Escalation
This is the rate at which the raw material costs of the facility are to be
escalated (increased) in terms of percent per period.
 Operating and Maintenance Labor Escalation
This is the rate at which the operating and maintenance costs of the
facility are to be escalated (increased) in terms of percent per period. The
operating labor costs include operators per shift and supervisory costs.
 Utilities Escalation
User-entered percentages reflecting the anticipated utility price increase
each period.
Project Capital Parameter

 Working Capital Percentage
The working capital expressed as a percentage of total capital expense per
period indicates the amount required to operate the facility until the
revenue from product sales is sufficient to cover costs. It includes current
assets such as cash, accounts receivable and inventories. When the facility
starts producing revenue, this cost item can be covered by the product
sales.
Operating Costs Parameters

 Operating Supplies
This field indicates the cost of miscellaneous items that are required in
order to run the plant in terms of cost per period.
 Laboratory Charges
This is a cost per period indicating the cost of having product analyzed
each period.
 Operating Charges
This includes operating supplies and laboratory charges. It is specified as
a percentage of the operating labor costs. (If you specify a value for either

“Operating Supplies” or “Laboratory Charges”, the system will add the two
entered values and calculate the percentage of Operating Labor Costs.
(This is done for compatibility with earlier releases of the system.)
 Plant Overhead
This field consists of charges during production for services, facilities,
payroll overhead, and so on This number is specified as a percent of
operating labor and maintenance costs. This number should not be used
for the construction of the facility, only for operation after start-up.
 G and A Expenses
This represents general and administrative costs incurred during
production such as administrative salaries/expenses, R&D, product
distribution and sales costs. Specify this number as a percentage of
subtotal operating costs.
Facility Operation Parameters

 Facility Type
This field defines the facility type. The following types are currently
available:
 Chemical Processing Facility
 Food Processing Facility
 Oil Refining Facility
 Petrochemical Processing Facility
 Pharmaceutical Facility
 Pulp and/or Paper Processing Facility
 Specialty Chemical Processing Facility (A specialty chemical is defined
as a chemical which is produced in low quantity and has a usually high
price per unit.)
The type of facility affects the number of operators/shift and maintenance
costs of facility equipment.
 Operating Mode
This refers to the operating mode of the facility. The available options are:
 Continuous Processing - 24 Hours/Day
 Continuous Processing - Less than 24 Hours/Day
 Batch Processing - 24 Hours/Day
 Batch Processing - 1 Batch per Shift
 Batch Processing - More than 1 Batch per Shift
 Intermittent Processing - 24 Hours/Day
 Intermittent Processing - Less than 24 Hours/Day
The operating mode of the facility affects the number of operators/shift
and maintenance costs of facility equipment.
 Length of Start-up Period
After the facility has been constructed (that is,, gone through engineering,
procurement and construction), the plant must go through the owner’s
start-up period until it starts producing the product to be sold. This period
is referred to as Length of Start-up Period in weeks and is added into the
EPC duration.

 Operating Hours per Period
This field refers to the number of hours per period that the plant will be
operating.
 Process Fluids
Process Fluids indicate the types of fluids involved in the process. The
selection affects operating and maintenance costs. The selections are:
 Liquids
 Liquids and Gases
 Liquids and Solids
 Liquids, Gases, and Solids
 Gases
 Gases and Solids
 Solids
Operating Unit Costs

To specify operating unit costs:
1 In the Project Basis view’s Investment Analysis folder, right-click
Operating Unit Costs.
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator displays the Operating Unit Costs in the Main
Window.
The Operating Unit Cost form specifies Labor Unit Costs and non-heat
transfer Utility Unit Costs.

Labor Unit Costs are given for Operators and Supervisors. The total cost of
operating labor is calculated by:
1 Determining the total number of operators and supervisors necessary to
run the facility for a certain number of hours.
2 Adjusting that number for the number of hours the facility operates per
period.
3 Multiplying that number by the respective Labor Unit Costs and adding
them together.
Labor Unit Costs

 Operator
The loaded wage rate paid for operating the facility in terms of the cost
per operator per hour. Operator labor includes labor that is associated
with operating the facility.
 Supervisor
The loaded wage rate paid for supervision in terms of the cost per
supervisor per hour. Supervision includes all labor associated with
overseeing personnel who operate the facility.
 Utility Unit Costs
The non-heat transfer utility unit costs are also specified in this file as
“over the fence” costs. Utilities used for process heating and cooling are
given in the Utility Specifications file.
 Electricity
The unit cost per KWH of electricity used for the facility.
 Potable Water
The potable water unit cost per MMGAL or MB used for the plant.
 Fuel
The fuel unit cost per MMBTH or MEGAWH used for the plant.
 Instrument Air
The instrument air unit cost per KCF or MB.
Raw Material Specifications

An investment analysis conducted on any process needs to provide an
accurate figure for total project expenditure. Since operating costs are usually
a large part of this cost, it is important to accurately account for all raw
materials consumed in the process.
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator lets you identify simulator streams as raw
materials for the process.
The raw material costs will be directly placed in the PROJSUM.ICS
spreadsheet for use in cash flow analyses.
To develop raw material specifications:

1 Right-click Raw Material Specifications in the Project Basis view’s
Investment Analysis folder; then, on the menu that appears, click Edit.

The Develop Raw Material Specifications dialog box appears.
2 In the Option group, click Create.

3 In the Create New Stream group, type a name for the stream.
4 Select the Basis (Mass, Volume, or Energy) and the Phase (Solid, Liquid,
or Gas) for the stream.
5 Click Create.
The Raw Material Specifications dialog box appears.
6 The following input information is required in order to estimate the raw

material costs during the evaluation of the operating costs for the project:
o Process Stream (or “none” if user-defined)

o Rate (do not specify a rate if a process stream is selected)
o Cost Per Unit.
In addition to the above minimum information, you must specify certain
field values for the raw material fluid program to estimate the raw
material rate necessary for the cost estimate.
If you specify “none” in the Process Stream field, then the value for the
Rate field must be specified in the appropriate units. If you specify a
process stream, then the program determines the raw material rate in the
desired Specification Basis and units.
You can specify a maximum of 150 raw material streams.
The Raw Material Specifications form contains the following fields:
 Description
The value you provide in this field will be used to describe the raw
material in the Project Summary investment analyses spreadsheet
(PROJSUM.ICS)
 Specification Basis
This field describes the raw material properties from the following list:
o Mass, Gas
o Mass, Liquid
o Mass, Solid
o Volume, Gas
o Volume, Liquid
o Volume, Solid
o Energy
 Process Stream
This field provides a list of fluid streams present in the current project.
You can select any stream to represent the raw material. Also, there is
a provision in Aspen Capital Cost Estimator for you to provide actual
value for the raw material rate if none of the process streams
represent the raw materials for the project. In this case, you must
specify the field value as “none.”
 Rate
This field gives the total rate of raw materials consumed for the
process in the desired rate units.
When a new raw material fluid is specified, Aspen Capital Cost
Estimator checks whether enough information has been specified to
estimate the raw material cost.
 Rate Units
This field describes the flow rate units for the current raw material. The
choices available for the field vary with the selection made for
Specification Basis and your choice of Base UOM:
Specification Basis I-P METRIC
Mass, Gas LB/H KG/H
KLB/H MEGAG/H
MLB/H TON/H
TPH

Mass, Liquid LB/H KG/H
KLB/H MEGAG/H
MLB/H TON/H
TPH
Mass, Solid LB/H KG/H
KLB/H MEGAG/H
MLB/H TON/H
TPH
Volume, Gas GPH M3/H
MMGAL/H L/S
CFH
KCFH
Volume, Liquid GPH M3/H
MMGAL/H L/S
CFH
KCFH
Volume, Solid GPH M3/H
MMGAL/H L/S
CFH
KCFH
Energy BTU/H W
MMBTU/H KW
MEGAW
CAL/H
 Unit Cost
This field provides the cost value per unit mass, volume or energy used to
estimate the raw material cost for the project.
7 When you are done entering raw material specifications, click OK.
The new stream appears in the Existing Stream list on the Develop
Raw Materials Specifications dialog box. You can enter a maximum of
150 raw material streams using this dialog box. When done, click Close.
Product Specifications
An investment analysis conducted on any process needs to include an
accurate figure for the project’s total revenue. In order to do so, it is very
important to accurately account for all the products obtained from the
process.
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator lets you identify simulation streams as product
materials for the process. Once the simulation stream is defined, Aspen
Capital Cost Estimator determines the necessary amount of product materials
generated based on the information provided in the product material
specification file.
The product material costs are directly placed in the PROJSUM.ICS
spreadsheet, where they are used for further cashflow analyses.

To develop product specifications:
1 Right-click Product Specifications in the Project Basis view’s Investment
Analysis folder; then, on the menu that appears, click Edit.
The Develop Product Specifications dialog box appears.
2 In the Option group, click Create.

3 Enter a new stream name, select a basis and phase, and then click
Create.
The Product Specifications dialog box appears.
4 The following input information is needed for Aspen Capital Cost Estimator
to estimate the product material costs during the evaluation of the
operating costs for the project:

 Description
The value specified in this field is used to describe the product material
fluid in the investment analyses spreadsheet (PROJSUM.ICS).
 Specification Basis
This field describes the product material properties from the following
list:
o Mass, Gas
o Mass, Liquid
o Mass, Solid
o Volume, Gas
o Volume, Liquid
o Volume, Solid
o Energy
 Process Stream
This field provides a list of streams present in the current project. You
can select any of the streams to represent the product material. Also,
there is a provision in Aspen Capital Cost Estimator for providing an
actual value for the product material rate if none of the process
streams represent the product materials for the project. In this case,
you must specify the field value as “none.”
 Rate
This field defines the total rate of product materials obtained for the
process in the desired rate units. Do not enter a value if you have
specified a process stream.
When a new product material is specified, Aspen Capital Cost
Estimator checks whether the minimum information necessary to
estimate the product material cost has been specified.
The following minimum information must be present before Aspen
Capital Cost Estimator can proceed with the estimate.
 Rate Units
This field describes the flow rate units for the current product material.
The choices available for the field vary with the selection made for
Specification Basis and your choice of Base UOM:
Mass, Gas LB/H KG/H
KLB/H MEGAG/H
MLB/H TON/H
TPH
Mass, Liquid LB/H KG/H

KLB/H MEGAG/H
MLB/H TON/H
TPH
Mass, Solid LB/H KG/H
KLB/H MEGAG/H
MLB/H TON/H
TPH

Volume, Gas GPH M3/H
MMGAL/H L/S
CFH
KCFH
Volume, Liquid GPH M3/H
MMGAL/H L/S
CFH
KCFH
Volume, Solid GPH M3/H
MMGAL/H L/S
CFH
KCFH
Energy BTU/H W
MMBTU/H KW
MEGAW
CAL/H
Unit Cost
The field provides the cost value used to estimate the product material cost
for the project.
5 When you are done entering product specifications, click OK.
The new stream appears in the Existing Stream list on the Develop
Product Specifications dialog box. You can enter a maximum of 150
product material streams using this dialog box. When done, click Close.
Developing Streams
After opening a project, new streams can be developed. You have the option
to develop completely new streams or use an existing stream as a base.
When an existing stream is used as a base, the new stream can be either
copied from the existing stream (Absolute Basis mode) or copied from and
linked dynamically to the existing stream (Relative Basis mode).
To develop streams, right-click on Streams in the Project Basis view’s main
folder (at the bottom), and then click Edit on the pop-up menu.

The Develop Streams dialog box appears.
Viewing or Modifying an Existing Stream

To view or modify an existing stream, select the stream on the Modify tab
view. You may need to use the scrollbar(s) to locate a stream if a large
number of streams exist in the project. With the desired stream highlighted,
click Modify to have the stream information displayed in a specifications
form.
The functions of the six buttons on the Develop Stream specifications form
are explained below:

Click To do this:
OK Perform a check on the information currently present in the Develop
Stream specifications form to ensure that all information needed to
specify the stream is completed. Aspen Capital Cost Estimator generates
error messages indicating missing data.
Generate estimates for any specifications not entered.
Save the information in the Develop Stream specifications form. The
Develop Stream specifications form closes and the Develop Streams
dialog box re-appears.
Apply Same as clicking OK, but does not exit the Develop Stream
specifications form. This lets you review the estimates and revise the
data.
Update Same as clicking Apply, except that if the Primary Fluid Component, the
Temperature, and/or the Pressure were changed, then all the physical
properties of the stream will be estimated using these new values.
Cancel Exit the Develop Stream specifications form without making checks and
does not save or change any information in the database.
Reset Reset the information in the Develop Stream specifications form to the
values previously saved into the database. Any changes have been made
since opening the form will be lost.
Mixture Define a stream as a mixture. Opens the Mixture Information dialog
box discussed below.
Most Develop Stream specifications need no further explanation. Those that

do are described below.
 Primary Fluid Component
One of the most important specifications in this form is Primary Fluid
Component, which is classifies the chemical components of a stream. The
fluid selected here is used as the basis for any properties that are
unavailable and need to be estimated to complete the specifications for
the stream. The available general fluid classifications are:
o Alcohol
o Aromatic Liquid
o Halogenated Gas
o Heavy Hydrocarbon Liquid
o Hydrocarbon Gas
o Inorganic Gas
o Light Hydrocarbon Liquid
o Medium Hydrocarbon Liquid
o Miscellaneous Inorganic Liquid
o Miscellaneous Organic Gas
o Organic Acid
o Very Heavy Hydrocarbon Liquid
o Solid
The following pure components are also available for selection as the
Primary Fluid Component of a stream:
 Acetic Acid  Glycerol  Phosphoric Acid

 Ammonia  Hydrogen  Propane
 Argon  Isopropyl Alcohol  Propanol
 Carbon Monoxide  Methane  Propylene
 Carbon Dioxide  Methanol  Steam
 Ethane  N-Butanol  Sulfuric Acid
 Ethanol  Nitric Acid  Toluene
 Ethyl Benzene  Nitrogen  Water
 Ethylene  Oxygen
If the Primary Fluid Component is specified, the other needed information
will be filled in with default values. This feature is only apparent when no
temperature or pressure is entered into the Develop Stream specifications
form and the Primary Fluid Component is changed. After changing the
Primary Fluid Component, either press Enter or click on another field and
the default values will be loaded. If either the pressure or temperature
value is changed from the default value, clicking OK , Apply, or Update
will estimate the properties at the new condition(s).
 Base Stream
The Base Stream field contains the name of the stream on which the
displayed stream was based. This cannot be changed.
If the name begins with the character “$”, the stream was created using
Absolute Basis and the stream name following this character is that of the
parent stream. A stream created using Absolute Basis uses the data from
the parent stream; however, if the parent steam’s data changes
afterward, the Absolute Basis stream is not updated.
If the value begins with the character “@”, the stream was created using
the Relative Basis and the stream name following this character is that of
the parent stream. A stream created using Relative Basis is updated when
its parent stream’s data changes.
 Description
Select information from the menu to describe the particular stream. For
example, you can indicate the source component of the stream (for
example, From Pump P-103) or tag it with one of the available utility
stream names.
 Mass Flow
The Mass Flow fields are used to determine the phase of the stream. For
instance, if the stream has only Liquid Mass Flow specified, the stream is
totally liquid; therefore, it will have no vapor properties estimated for it.
The reverse is true for a case with only a Vapor Mass Flow specified. For
cases with both types of flow, all properties will be estimated and the
Primary Fluid Component will belong to the phase of the largest mass
flow.
Note: Aspen Capital Cost Estimator automatically calculates Total Mass

Flow from the individual mass flow values.

 Density
The Density fields are required information. Thus, if a particular phase
has a mass flow rate specified, then the corresponding density must also
be specified. Clicking Update will estimate any required Density fields
based on the flow rate, except in the case of Solid Mass Density. It is
recommended that you enter a Liquid Mass Density if one is available.
Mixture Specs Dialog Box

Clicking Mixture on the Develop Stream specifications form accesses the
Mixture Specs dialog box.
Note: After you click Apply, Aspen Process Economic Analyzer normalizes the
Fraction values to total a sum of one.
The values shown to the right would change into the values shown on the
next page.
The mixture information specified in this dialog box is used to estimate

properties as a mixture of the specified composition. If no mixture information
is present, the stream is assumed to be pure Primary Fluid Component. The
fraction information can be entered on either a Mass or Mole Fraction Basis,
as specified in the Fraction Basis section.
The Cancel and Reset buttons behave in a similar manner as their respective
buttons on the Develop Stream specifications form.
The OK and Apply buttons also behave in a similar manner as their
respective buttons on the Develop Stream specifications form, except the
checking is different. Here, a check is made to ensure that the fractions have
a total sum of one. If not, the values are normalized to give a total sum of
one, as indicated below.

The check also combines duplicate entries into one entry by combining the
two fraction specifications.
After the check is done, the components are sorted in order of decreasing
fractional amount, as shown above. When you click OK, Aspen Capital Cost
Estimator loads into the specifications form the name of the fluid with the
highest fraction and the properties of the mixture generated from the
contributions of the individual components.
Estimation of Utility Usage and Resulting

Costs in Aspen Capital Cost Estimator
Utility usage estimation is based on the stream information. All the streams
that are present in the project are taken into consideration for the estimation
of the utility usage for the project. This includes all utility streams, user-
defined streams, simulator streams, and pre-map Streams. The Description
field on the Develop Stream spreadsheet can be used to designate streams as
utilities. If the Description field for a stream exactly matches (exact text
characters and spaces) the Description field for any utility resource as given
on the Utility Specifications spreadsheet, then that stream is included in the
utility usage calculation. If you change the description of any of the simulator
or pre-map streams, then the new description you provided is used for this
calculation.
Also, stream connectivity information is used to identify the nature of the
stream. If the stream is being generated then it is considered to be revenue
for the project, and if it is being consumed it is considered an expense.
Note: Streams that are connected at both ends to process equipments are
ignored in estimating the utility usage costs. Also, utility streams that have a
zero unit cost do not show up in the final report.
User-defined streams that are not connected to any equipment (do not show
up in the PFD) are considered as input streams, that is, consumption.
System-generated utility streams are included in the utility usage calculation
as long as they are connected to equipment. A case where they would be

disconnected would be if you manually disconnect these streams or if the
equipment to which these streams are connected is deleted.
Stream Connectivity
Process streams are “connected” to project components in a real way. You
can see this in the Process Flow Diagram (PFD), which you can display after
loading and mapping simulator blocks. Each stream has a Source end and a
Sink end. The Source end connects to an Outlet port on a component and the
Sink end to an Inlet as depicted below:
In the PFD view, when you Edit Connectivity (see page 298) for the Sink
X X
end of a stream and move the cursor over a component, only Inlet port(s)
turn green, thereby indicating their availability for making a connection to a
Sink end.
The same concept also carries into the Interactive Sizing form (see
page 349). Only streams whose Sink ends are not connected are listed in the
X X
pulldown for any Inlet. This explains why the Inlet and Outlet pulldowns will
include different streams.
Since the connectivity in the PFD and the Interactive Sizing form are two
ways of looking at the same information, Aspen Capital Cost Estimator tracks
your changes and synchronizes them in both views. Thus, if you change the
connectivity in one view, Aspen Capital Cost Estimator automatically changes
it in the other view.
When you first map and size components, the streams in the simulator will be
connected to the project components and the underlying process conditions of
those streams are available for further use. For example, you may create new
streams based on the properties of any stream, connected or not, then use
these new streams as Sources/Sinks for connecting new components (you
might do this to set up spares). You may also add a New Mapping to an item
already mapped and the newly mapped and sized item utilizes the underlying
stream properties.
Creating A New Stream

You can create streams from scratch or by using a base stream.

To create a stream from scratch:
1 Go to the Create tab view on the Develop Streams dialog box. Without
selecting a stream from the Base Streams list, click Create. (The Basis
selection will not matter.)
The Create Stream dialog box appears.
2 Type a name for the new stream in the Create Stream dialog box. This
name must not be the same as any existing streams in the project. Click
OK.
The Develop Stream specifications form appears.
Note: See page 229 for descriptions of the buttons and fields on this form.
X X
3 Type values for the new stream. See page 230 for descriptions of the
X X
different fields. When done, click OK.
To create a stream based on an existing stream:

1 On the Create tab view on the Develop Streams dialog box, click the
stream to be used as the base.

2 Select the Basis mode.
o If the Basis mode is Relative, the data from the two streams
will be linked so that when the base stream is changed the new
stream will inherit these changes.
o If the Basis mode is Absolute, the data from the base stream
is copied to the new stream at the time the new stream is
created. Changes in a base stream will not affect a new stream
created via Absolute basis.
3 Click Create.
4 On the Create Stream dialog box Stream Name field, type a name for
the new stream. This name must not be the same as any existing streams
in the project.
5 Click OK.
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator displays the specifications form for the newly
created stream. The data is that of the Base Stream. Data appears gray
(dimmed) to indicate that it is relative to a referenced Base Stream.
Note: See page 229 and 230 for descriptions of the buttons and fields on this
X X X X
form.

Even in a Relative Stream, you can override any value with a manual entry. If
you do so, the text turns black, indicating that that value is absolute and
therefore no longer references a Base Stream.
6 Make modifications to the data; then click OK.
Deleting a Stream
To delete a stream:
1 On the Delete tab view, click the stream to be deleted. You may need to
use the scrollbars to locate a stream if a large number of streams exist in
the currently opened project.
Note: Only user-added streams and streams added by the Sizing Expert as
utilities can be deleted.

2 Click Delete.
A dialog box will appear asking for confirmation of the delete action.
3 Click OK to delete the stream.
– or –
Click Cancel to retain the stream.
Specification Libraries
The default specifications are derived from files that you can access, when
outside of a project, from the Palette’s Libraries view.
When you create a project scenario, Aspen Capital Cost Estimator selects the
specification files to use based upon the selected units of measure basis.
However, you can right-click on any of the Project Basis specification that
have corresponding libraries in the Palette, click Select on the pop-up menu,
and select a different file from which to derive the default specifications.
Customizing Specification Libraries

When no project is open, you can create your own specification files or edit
existing files. Then, when in a project, you can select your specification files.
For example, if you frequently created project scenarios that used the same
design basis, you could create a Basis for Capital Costs specification file
with those design basis specifications. Then you could just select this file,
instead of entering the specifications every time.
If, after making modifications to your libraries, you wish to revert to the
original libraries, you can copy or import the copy of the installed libraries
provided in the following folder:

…\AspenTech\Economic Evaluation V8.0\Program\Sys\Libraries
Creating a File
To create a specification file:

1 With no project open, go to the Libraries tab view in the Palette, and
expand the desired specification category.
2 Except for Code of Accounts, right-click on the units of measure basis
folder – Inch-Pound or Metric. For Code of Accounts, right-click the
Code of Accounts folder.
3 On the menu that appears, click New.
The New [Specification Category] dialog box appears.
3 Type a file name and, if desired, a file description.

4 Click OK.

Aspen Capital Cost Estimator creates the file and displays the specifications in
a separate window.
5 Edit the specifications just as in a project.
6 When you are done, close the specifications window. If a library file is
open, you cannot access another library file or open a project.
See page 248 for instructions on selecting the newly created file for use in a
X X
project.
Modifying a File
To modify an existing specification file:

1 In the Palette (Libraries view), right-click the specification file.
2 On the menu that appears, click Modify.
Importing a File
You can import specification files from elsewhere on your computer or
network.
To import a file:
1 In the Palette (Libraries view), expand the library to which you wish to
import a file.
2 Except for Code of Accounts, right-click on the units of measure basis
folder – Inch-Pound or Metric. For Code of Accounts, right-click the
Code of Accounts folder.
3 On the menu that appears, click Import.

4 In the Select a File for Import dialog box, locate the file and then click
Open.
The file is copied to the appropriate sub-folder.
Duplicating a File
To duplicate a file:
1 In the Palette (Libraries view), right-click on the file you want to
duplicate.
2 On the menu that appears, click Duplicate.

3 Type a file name and description (optional) for the new file.
3 Click OK.
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator creates the file and displays the specifications in
a separate window.
4 Edit the specifications just as in a project.
5 When you are done, close the specifications window. If a library file is
open, you cannot access another library file or open a project.
See below for instructions on selecting the newly created file for use in a
project.

Deleting a File
To delete a specification file:
 In the Palette (Libraries view), right-click on the file to be deleted, and
then click Delete on the pop-up menu.
Note: You cannot delete files named Default, only modify them.
Customizing Steel Costs Using an External

File
You can customize the unit prices for steel plant bulks in the system using an
external file. The weight break-down for structural steel columns and beams
can also be customized. You can specify the prices of the following plant bulk
steel items using the external file:
Plant bulk steel items Weight used by the system

Extra heavy steel > 80LB/FT [122KG/M]
Heavy steel 40 to 80LB/FT [60 to122KG/M]
Medium steel 20 to 40LB/FT [30 to 60KG/M]
Light steel 12 to 20LB/FT [18 to 30KG/M]
Extra light steel < 12LB/FT [18KG/M]
Reinforcing bars (Rebar)
Ladders with cage 18 LB/FT
Ladders without cage 10 LB/FT
Handrails 17 LB/FT
Stair channels 13.4 LB/FT
Stair treads 30.4 lb/each
Platforms 20.62 LB/SF
Grating 1x3/16 IN [25x5 MM] CS welded bar
Diagonal Bracing
To use the external steel file:

1 In the project basis view, under Customer External Files, right-click
Steel Material; then click Select.

A Default file is provided as an example for you.
2 Click OK to select this file. You can modify this file and save it for future
use. You can also create new files in the libraries view similar to other
external library files.
To edit the selected external file:

 Right-click Steel Material; then click Edit.
In the dialog box that appears, you can edit:
 Units of measure
 Currency conversions
 Steel cost specifications

Units of Measure: You can specify whether the weight values in the file are
in I-P (Inch-Pound) or METRIC units of measure. The Default file has I-P
units of measure. The weights in the Default file are in LB and the costs are
in Currency/LB.
Currency Conversions: The costs specified in your external file are

interpreted to be in the currency you are using. You must specify conversion
rates from the user currency to the various project basis currencies. In the
Default file, all the costs specified are in USD/LB. Therefore, the conversion
rate for US country base is 1.00. If you want to enter costs in another
currency, you must specify the appropriate conversion rates (your
currency/country base currency) in the Currency Conversions dialog box.

Specifications: Use the Specifications dialog box to specify the weight
break-downs for structural steel and the unit costs for all the items.
Specify the weight only for the structural steel members. Weights specified
for other items are ignored by the system.
To specify the weigh break-down for structural steel members:

 Enter the minimum weight for a given category. For example, in the
Default file all structural steel above 80 LB/FT is considered Extra heavy
steel and will get the COA modifier 5 for Extra heavy steel.

Specify the costs should be specified in your currency per unit weight. If using
I-P units, costs should be in your currency/LB. For metric units costs should
be in your currency/KG.
The cost-base year should not be greater than the cost-base year for the
version of Economic Evaluation being used. If the cost-base year is less than
the cost-base year of the system, the costs are indexed to the current year by
the system. The COA modifier is given for reference only and cannot be
edited.
Notes:
Reinforcing bars (Rebar) costs: If you have specified the Rebar costs in
the Design basis | Civil/Steel Specs dialog box, then the value specified in
the external file are ignored and the value you entered in the design basis are
used.
Grating costs: The grating costs in the external file are applicable only to
the default (1x3/16 IN [25x5 MM] CS welded bar) grating in the system. If
you specify any other grating type then the cost specified in the external file
will not be used for that grating.
Exporting a Customized External Steel Costs File
To save a customized external steel costs file for future use in other
projects:
 Right-click Steel Materials; then click Export to Library.

You can also create customized external steel files in the libraries outside of a
project. Files created in the libraries can then be selected for use within any
project.
Selecting Specification File for Use in a

Project
After creating a new specification file, you still need to select it in Project
Explorer for Aspen Capital Cost Estimator to use its specifications.
To select a specification file:

1 Open the project scenario in which you wish to use the file.
2 In Project Explorer (Project Basis view), right-click on the appropriate
specification category.
3 On the menu that appears, click Select.
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator displays a dialog box listing the files available
for the selected category.
4 Select a new file from which to derive default specifications; then click
OK.
Changing File Directory Location

If you decide to store specification library files in a directory other than the
default, move the default files to the new location and recreate the same sub-
folder arrangement. Otherwise, Icarus will generate an error when you point
to the new location.

Instrument Field Hook-Up
Customization
When you include a component with an instrumentation loop in your project,
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator accounts for instrument field hook-up in the
project’s direct costs and includes the parts for the instrument field hook-up
on the Direct Costs – Overall Installation Details report.
The defaults are detailed in two ASCII files:

 Sample_Inasmbly.dat
 Sample_Inparts.dat
These two files are stored in the UserData folder.
To customize the instrument field hook-ups:

1 Open and modify these files in Wordpad or any other ASCII text editor.
2 Save the files as Inasmbly.dat and Inparts.dat.

The Sample_Inasmbly.dat file is shown below.
There are extensive instructions for use provided toward the top of the
scrollable document. Be sure to read these carefully before modifying. The
editor must not introduce non-printing characters other than a space or
CR/LF, that is,, no tabs are allowed.
The field hook-up assembly data is organized into the following columns:
 LOOP SYMBOL: Symbol that describes the sensor loop.
 DESCRIPTION: Place for comments; does not affect usage.
 PART NO.: A reference to the part number in Inparts.dat file for the part
used in this assembly.
 QTY: Quantity of this part to include in this assembly.
FG: Flag identifying this part as Piping or Instrumentation. The
Piping parts are drawn from items in Inparts.dat with IDs of
1,000 or less. Their material of construction matches the
material on the process side (component or pipe). These parts are
the ones eliminated when you turn off the process connection when
defining modifications to a loop. The Instrumentation parts are
drawn from the remaining items in Inparts.dat, which includes
specifications for their materials of construction.
Note: When you create/edit an InAsmbly.Dat file, and you are specifying a
loop, you have the option to set the FLAG column field to A instead of the
default which is blank (Or P).
For loops that you've created an A version of, the system expects you to also
have defined a primary (default) version. Then by selecting A instead of P in
the project (at the design basis on the loop) you can cause it to pick your A
version instead of the usual selection of P.

Important: The A vs. P choice is not about selecting the internal default or
the Instrument Assembly.Dat loop definition. It is about choosing between
two loop definitions in the selected Instrument Assembly.Dat file, of
you've picked one.
 NOTE: Additional place for comments; does not affect usage.
By changing the part types and quantities for each, you change the results
developed for the field hook-ups.
You can:
 delete the parts of a hook-up
 revise each line
 add parts to a particular field hook-up from Inparts.dat
The Sample_Inparts.dat file is shown below:
There are extensive instructions for use provided toward the top of the
scrollable document. Please read these carefully before modifying the file,
with the same limitations as described above.
The field hook-up assembly parts are organized into the following columns:
 ID: A unique, four-digit part number. This shows up as the PART No. in
Inasmbly.dat.
 COA: A valid Icarus instrumentation Code of Account (COA). You should
use an Icarus COA even if you plan to redefine the COA sets (see Icarus
Reference, Chapter 34, “Code of Accounts”).
 QT: Quantity- must be set to 1.
 UT: Unit of measure.

 DIA I/P: Diameter (if applicable) in Inch-Pound (IP) units. This is
included in the line item details print out to identify the item.
 DIA MET: Same as above, but for Metric.
 DESCRIPTION: Name for the line item to print in the details section of
reports.
 MATL: One of the valid Icarus materials of construction listed in the file.
 BCOST (USD): Material cost of the part in USD for the YEAR indicated in
the file. This is automatically converted to the currency of the project. The
currency units are not important- the USD symbol here is for reference
purposes only. You may change the symbol and/or enter your own cost
values. However, it is critical that you enter the conversions between this
currency and the four country currencies known to Icarus. That is done
using the four CURCONs listed in the file.
 MH: Installation man-hours per indicated quantity (for example, per LF or
M, EA, etc).
 CREW: Select one of the available Icarus instrumentation crews to
perform the work.
 YEAR: The system will automatically escalate the user-entered material
cost (see above, under BCOST) to the base year for the version of Aspen
Capital Cost Estimator that is running the estimate.
For example, if a cost is specified as being valid in 2002, and you are running
a First Quarter 2004 (1Q ’04) version of the system, then the cost in this file
is escalated to 1Q ‘04 before appearing in any report. It is important to note
that the escalation index used is specific for the instrumentation account. This
usually differs from the global system base indices listed in the Icarus
Reference. The Release Notes provided with each cost release details the
year-to-year changes by major account.
Using the Plot Plan Layout Tool

Note: To enable the Plot Plan Layout Tool, you must set Print Equipment
Coordinates on the Equipment Specs sheet to Y (Print coordinates on
datasheet). Default is N (Do not print coordinates on datasheet).
To enable the Plot Plan Layout Tool:

1 On the Project Basis tab, click Basis for Capital Costs | Design Basis.
2 In the Design Basis folder, click Equipment Specs.
The General Equipment Specs dialog box appears.
3 On the General Equipment Specs dialog box, set the Print Equipment
Coordinates value to Y, as shown below:

Note: This feature does not apply to ACCE Versions V7.0 or V7.1.
Workflow for Plot Plan Layout Tool:

1 Open an Aspen Capital Cost Estimator project. Add areas and equipment
in each area according to your project scope. If you want the system to
calculate area size for any area, keep the length and width fields of that
area blank. For structural areas, specify the number of levels/floors. The
system does not calculate area sizes for MODULE type areas; you must
specify the area dimensions. For equipment on structure, you must specify
the floor/level number of the structure on the equipment form as the
location of equipment on the structure.
2 On the main tool bar, click Run | Evaluate Project for cost evaluation of
the project. For areas without specifications of lengths and widths, the
system calculates lengths and widths from the equipment dimensions in
the respective areas.

3 On the main tool bar, click Basic Engineering Link to launch an Aspen
Basic Engineering application. The Aspen Capital Cost Estimator
application is put to sleep, and the costing interface to Aspen Basic
Engineering is launched. All area dimensions and equipment footprints
are exported to Aspen Basic Engineering.
4 Open the drawing editor and create a new plot plan document.
5 On the plot plan, place a scale symbol; the default scale is 100, but you
can change the scale.
Labels and a piperack symbol are available in the Aspen Basic Engineering
plot plan drawing. No other symbols are available. All the exported
equipment, open steel/concrete structure, building and area symbols are
seen under the stockpile, in the plot plan tab. No other symbols (other
than exported components, labels, and pipe rack) can be placed on the
drawing. All areas and components may be placed in one drawing.
6 For a new project, all areas and equipment are displayed in the Stockpile
of Aspen Basic Engineering. Move areas and equipment from stockpile to
the main drawing area. For an existing project with equipment and areas
placed in the plot plan drawing, all old areas and equipment will be placed
in the proper locations of the drawing area.
7 In the Plot Plan interface, all equipment in a single area must reside in
the area. You can move areas in the main drawing area, but you can
move equipment inside its parent area only. You cannot move any
equipment from its parent area to other areas. No new equipment can be
added to the plot plan other than those imported from Aspen Capital Cost
Estimator.
Equipment can be placed one above the other in an open steel structure,
but then only the topmost equipment will be visible. All equipment
located one above other or at different elevations in an open steel
structure must be differentiated by user specified elevation parameter
(level or floor number).
8 Place all the areas and the equipment in each area in the desired locations
(X, Y coordinate) of the Plot Plan area.
9 Close the Plot Plan interface in Aspen Basic Engineering. Area
coordinates (bottom left corner X, Y) with respect to Plot Plan datum (0,0
coordinate of Plot Plan) and equipment coordinates (X, Y, Z) with respect
to parent area coordinates (bottom left corner) will be passed to Aspen
Capital Cost Estimator interface. Area sizes will be passed to Aspen Capital
Cost Estimator from Aspen Basic Engineering.
10 On the main tool bar, click Run | Interconnect Piping Lines to connect
piping lines between equipment.
11 Evaluate the project cost. All lengths for interconnected piping lines will be
calculated using the relative equipment locations and the lines not
connected will inherit default lengths from the system volumetric model.
The connected piping line length will be derived from: (a) a function of the
design parameters of equipment and (b) the coordinates of the
equipment. This length will be divided equally between the equipment if
they are in the same area. For equipment in different areas, the system
assumes that the connected equipment piping line will run to the
respective shortest area boundary and will be on a pipe rack along the
boundary of the areas. The length along the pipe rack will be divided

equally between the equipment. In addition, each line on a piece of
equipment will have a height coordinate where it joins to the equipment
nozzle (available internally) so that the vertical run length of piping can be
calculated.

3 Loading and Mapping
Simulation Data
Note: Simulation data can be used in Aspen Capital Cost Estimator only if
you are licensed to use Aspen Icarus Process Evaluator (Aspen Process
Economic Analyzer) or Aspen Decision Analyzer. If you are licensed, you can
select at startup to use Aspen Process Economic Analyzer or Analyzer in the
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator environment.
Overview
If the process you wish to evaluate in Aspen Process Economic Analyzer is
based on a simulator file report from a process simulator software program,
the first step, after creating a project scenario and defining the Design Basis,
is to load and map simulation data.
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer supports reports from the following
simulators:
 AspenTech’s AspenPlus Version V7.3.2 and V8.0
 Chemstations’ ChemCAD for Windows Version 5.3.2
 HYSIM Version STD/C.271
 AspenTech’s HYSYS Version V8.0
 SimSci’s PRO/II with PROVISION Version 5.61
 Pacific Simulation’s WINGEMS 2.0
 WinSim’s DESIGN II for Windows Version 8.17
Preparing Simulation Reports

For Aspen Process Economic Analyzer to load the simulation data, an
appropriate ASCII output report needs to be generated from the simulator.
Most simulators describe the various steps needed to generate ASCII reports.
This section provides additional procedures to generate reports in an
Analyzer-compatible format.
3 Loading and Mapping Simulation Data 257

The procedures provided here start with the default report generation options.
If changes have been made from the default report generation options, then
it may be necessary to change them back to the default settings for creating
an output report for Aspen Process Economic Analyzer.
AspenPlus Report Generation

AspenPlus provides a template containing the property sets that a project
needs in order to generate an output report for Aspen Process Economic
Analyzer.
Note: If you use the template, the following component specification, if

entered in AspenPlus, must be re-entered in Aspen Process Economic
Analyzer:
Block - CCD
STAGE EFFICIENCY
To use the template:

1 Open the project in AspenPlus.
2 On the File menu, click Import.
3 Navigate to:
Program Files\AspenTech\Economic Evaluation V8.0\Program\Load
Note: This is the default path; it may differ depending on where you installed
Aspen Icarus.
4 Depending on the simulation units of measure, select the appropriate
simulator directory (for example, AspenPlus) and then the corresponding
template (.apt) file.
To create the required property steps in Aspen Plus without using a

template:
1 On the Data menu, click Properties. This will open the data browser to
the property specifications.
2 In the data browser tree structure, open the folder Prop-Sets located in
the Properties folder.
3 Click New to create a new property set.
4 Type a name for the property set or use the default name.
5 Click OK.
6 In the Substream field, select All.
7 Scroll down the list of available properties, clicking those you wish to
select. To start the scroll window, click in a physical properties cell:
o MASSVFRA
o MASSSFRA
o MASSFLMX
o VOLFLMX
o MASSFLOW
258 3 Loading and Mapping Simulation Data

o TEMP
o PRES
o MWMX
The specifications for this property set are complete as indicated by the check
mark displayed on the tree view of the data browser.
8 Click the Prop-Sets folder. You will see the property set you just created
in the object manager and the status should be Input Complete.
9 Create the second property set by once again clicking New.
10 Type a name for the property set or use the default name.
11 Click OK.
12 Click the Qualifiers tab.
13 In the Phase cell, click Total.
14 Click the Properties tab.
15 In the Substream field, click ALL.
16 Now click the Units cell corresponding to the CPMX property and pick
either of the following units:
o KJ/KG-K
-or-
o BTU/LB-R
The specifications for this property set are complete.
17 Click the Prop-Sets folder. The newly created property set will appear in
the object manager with an input complete status.
18 Create the final property set needed by Aspen Process Economic Analyzer
by clicking New.
19 Type a name for the property set, or use the default name.
20 Click OK.
21 Click the Qualifiers tab.
22 In the Phase cell, click Vapor.
23 Click the Properties tab.
24 Select the following properties for this property set:
o VOLFLMX
o MASSFLMX
o KMX
o MUMX
o CPMX
o MWMX
25 Now click the Units cell corresponding to the CPMX property and pick
either of the following units:
o KJ/KG-K
-or-
o BTU/LB-R
The creation of property sets is complete.

Now these property sets must be specified for use in the generation of a
report.
To specify these property sets for use in report generation:

1 If the Setup folder is not already expanded, expand it by clicking on the
plus sign next to the folder symbol.
2 Click Report Options.
3 Click the Stream tab.
4 Click the Property Sets button.
5 Move the three property sets you just created to the Selected property
sets box.
6 Click the > button to move them to the Selected property sets box.
7 Click Close.
The specifications required for loading an AspenPlus report file are now
complete. You can close the data browser window.
After running the simulation, you must create an output report.
To create an output report:

1 On the File menu, click Export.
2 In the Save As dialog box, use the drop-down menu to select Report
Files (*.rep) or XML files (*.xml).
3 Type a file name or accept the default value.
4 Click Save. This will create the ASCII report file needed to load into Aspen
Process Economic Analyzer with the name given above.
Note: The order on any of the tower models must be set to TOP-DOWN in
order for the tray information to get loaded into Aspen Process Economic
Analyzer correctly. This is the default setting.
Aspen Plus Utilities

If a unit operation block has a utility specified, the utility resource
specifications and usage data will be transferred into Aspen Process Economic
Analyzer. After loading the simulator data, a preference screen will appear.
Specify any missing data for the Aspen Plus utilities in order for the Aspen
Plus utility to be properly handled. The Aspen Plus utilities will appear as new
utility resources. The appropriate project components will use the specified
utility resource, based on the Aspen Plus utility used in the simulation.
A message box will appear if utility resources are modified or deleted from the
Aspen Plus simulation prior to a reload of data into Aspen Process Economic
Analyzer. You can choose to delete the old imported Aspen Plus utility
resources in Aspen Process Economic Analyzer, or just add/update existing
imported utilities in Aspen Plus.

AspenPlus – Aspen Process Economic
Analyzer Simulator link
A link from AspenPlus to Aspen Process Economic Analyzer allows you to load
changes into Aspen Process Economic Analyzer when simulation settings are
changed in AspenPlus.
To load process simulator data through the Aspen Process Economic

Analyzer link into a new Aspen Process Economic Analyzer project
scenario:
1 Run the simulation in AspenPlus.
Note: If the Activation dialog box appears, click Close. Use the Activation
dialog box to stay in AspenPlus instead of transferring to Aspen Process
Economic Evaluator.
2 On the ribbon, click Economics | Send to Economics.
When the prompt appears, the Aspen Process Economic Analyzer project
name will be designated to be the name of the simulation file from AspenPlus.
AspenPlus will designate the scenario name. If the scenario name is changed,
any future attempts to run the link for the same project will result in a new
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer project being created. It is recommended
that the scenario name designated by AspenPlus be left as it is for maximum
usability.
3 Click OK.
4 Specify the Project Description, Remarks, and the Units of Measure.
5 Click OK.
6 Verify the Input Units of Measure Specifications; then click OK.
The General Project Data dialog box appears.
7 Verify the General Project Data; then click OK.
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer displays a prompt to load the Simulator
Data.
8 Click OK.
If the simulation has specified units that are undefined, a prompt will appear
to do so. Define all AspenPlus units with those available in Aspen Process
Economic Analyzer.
To load process simulator data through the Aspen Icarus link into an
existing project scenario:
1 Run the simulation in AspenPlus.
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer displays a prompt to load simulator data.
3 Click OK.

Because all other project basis settings have been specified, mapping and
sizing can be performed at this time.
ChemCAD Report Generation

These instructions apply to both ChemCAD for Windows, Version 5.3.2, and
for previous versions of ChemCAD. The specifications are the same for all
versions.
1 On the main menu, on the Output menu, click Report.
Note: In ChemCAD for Windows, just click the Output menu from the menu
bar.
2 Specify the following for report options:
 Select Streams
 Print All Streams: Y
Note: Check box in ChemCAD for Windows

 Select Unit Operations
 Print All Unit Operations: Y
Note: Check box in ChemCAD for Windows.

 Stream Properties
3 Select or deselect the following stream properties as indicated below:
Property Select De-Select
OVERALL PROPERTIES
Mass flow rate X
Mole flow rate X
Temperature X
Pressure X
Mole Vap frac X
Enthalpy X
Molecular wt. X
Total act.dens X
VAPOR PROPERTIES
Mass flow rate X
Mole flow rate X
Molecular wt. X
Vap. Act. Dens X
Vap. Viscosity X
Vap. Cp X
Vap. Thrm. Cond X
Liq. Surf. Tens. X
LIQUID PROPERTIES
Mole flow rate X
Molecular wt. X

Property Select De-Select
Liq. act. Dens X

Liq. Viscosity X
Liq. Cp X
Liq. Thrm. Cond. X
SOLID PROPERTIES*
Mass flow rate X
Molecular wt. X
Density X
PSD X
DISTILLATION OPTIONS
Tray profile X
Tray properties X
Tray sizing X
Packed column sizing X
TRAY COMPOSITIONS
Mass flow rate X
* Solid properties are located on Page 2 of Stream Properties in ChemCAD for

Windows.
The component mass flow rates for individual streams must be included in the
output report.
4 Navigate to the Stream Flowrate/Composition menu under the
Reports/Output menu.
5 Pick Mass Flowrate.
If you want Aspen Process Economic Analyzer to use tray sizing information
from the simulator, then you must include the appropriate sizing information.
6 To do this, go to Distillation Summaries under the Reports/Output
menu; then select the appropriate sizing section (packed or trayed).
7 After the completion of all these specifications, generate the output report
by selecting Calculate and Give Results. This should generate an output
report. You can rename it if you wish. This is the file to be used as input
for Aspen Process Economic Analyzer.
HYSIM Report Generation

1 Copy the following .spc files from the \Program\Load\Hysim directory
to your HYSIM working directory before generating output inside the
simulator.
 MIXER.SPC
 TEE.SPC
 HTXRATE.SPC
 BALANCE.SPC
 CALC.SPC
 MASSBAL.SPC

 MOLEBAL.SPC
For all other operations, use the default .spc files provided by Hyprotech.
2 For HYSIM version 386|C2.12 or earlier, copy the stream format file
STRSUM.FMT located in the /Aspen Process Economic
Analyzer/Docs directory of your HYSIM working directory. If you have
HYSIM version STD:C2.63 and above, copy the stream format file
STRSUM2.FMT located in the /Aspen Process Economic
Analyzer/Docs directory to your HYSIM working directory and rename it
STRSUM.FMT. You must either delete or rename the existing
STRSUM.FMT file to perform this.
The output report generated from HYSIM should contain operation output
(defined as spec_sheet in HYSIM) and the complete stream summary. Both
of these outputs must be saved under the same file name. The information is
appended to the file and does not get overwritten.
To generate the operation output and stream summary (Required):

1 Load the desired project inside HYSIM (*.sim).
o operation output
o stream summary
2 On the main menu, click Print.
3 On the print option, click File; then press Enter.
4 Select the same file (file_name) as above; then press Enter.
5 Click the Print option; then press Enter.
6 Select the Stream option; then press Enter.
7 Inside the Stream option, select Summary; then press Enter.
8 The list of streams present in the current project is displayed. Click the <-
> option for all the streams to be written in file_name.
The procedure creates the required report (file_name), which can be loaded
into Aspen Process Economic Analyzer and used for project evaluation.
If sizing operations are performed inside the simulator and you want the
information to be carried over to Aspen Process Economic Analyzer, the
following steps must be performed in addition to the above procedure:
1 Load the desired project inside HYSIM (*.sim).
sizing summary
2 On the main menu, click Size.
3 Inside the size option, choose the unit operation desired; then press
Enter.
4 Select the particular equipment (for example, col-101) ; then press Enter.
5 Select auto_section or user_section; then press Enter.
6 After the sizing calculations are performed, select Print.
7 Select File; then press Enter.
8 Select the same file name (file_name) ; then press Enter.
9 Click Summary; then press Enter.
Important:

 The operation names and stream names can not contain the following
characters:
+, -, *, or spaces
 The ASCII report has to be created in the default units specified by HYSIM
for the ENGLISH and the SI modes of operation. You can run a simulation
in any simulator-provided units. However, prior to creating the report file,
you must convert the units to the default specifications provided by
HYSIM.
 During the sizing procedure for the column operation, if user_section is
chosen, care should be taken to check that the stage numbers are not
repeated in the different sections of the same column operation. The
following two examples demonstrate the correct and incorrect
specifications.
Correct Incorrect
user_section_1 : (start stage) 1 user_section_1 : (start stage) 1

(end stage) 10 (end stage) 10
user_section_2: (start stage) 11 user_section_2 : (start stage) 3
(end stage) 15 (end stage) 15
 The user_section name should not contain the following characters:

+, -, *
 The report format should be such that the width of the report should be
less than or equal to 4 streams wide. This can be accomplished from the
format option provided in HYSIM.
 Stream summary should follow the operation output in the report, that
is, the order should be maintained.
HYSYS – Aspen Process Economic Analyzer

Simulator link
A link from HYSYS to Aspen Process Economic Analyzer allows you to load
changes into Aspen Process Economic Analyzer when simulation settings are
changed in HYSYS.
To load process simulator data through the Aspen Process Economic

Analyzer link into a new Aspen Process Economic Analyzer project
scenario:
1 Run the simulation in HYSYS.
Note: If the Activation dialog box appears, click Close. Use the Activation
dialog box to stay in HYSYS instead of transferring to Aspen Process Economic
Evaluator.
When the prompt appears, the Aspen Process Economic Analyzer project
name will be designated to be the name of the simulation file from HYSYS.
HYSYS will designate the scenario name. If the scenario name is changed,

any future attempts to run the link for the same project will result in a new
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer project being created. It is recommended
that the scenario name designated by HYSYS be left as it is for maximum
usability.
3 Click OK.
4 Specify the Project Description, Remarks, and the Units of Measure.
5 Click OK.
6 Verify the Input Units of Measure Specifications; then click OK.
The General Project Data dialog box appears.
7 Verify the General Project Data; then click OK.
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer displays a prompt to load the Simulator
Data.
8 Click OK.
If the simulation has specified units that are undefined, a prompt will appear
to do so. Define all HYSYS units with those available in Aspen Process
Economic Analyzer.
To load process simulator data through the Aspen Icarus link into an
existing project scenario:
1 Run the simulation in HYSYS.
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer displays a prompt to load simulator data.
3 Click OK.
Because all other project basis settings have been specified, mapping and
sizing can be performed at this time.
SimSci’s PRO/II with PROVISION Report

Generation
Two methods can be used for generating reports from PRO/II with
PROVISION.
 You can change the input keyword file (*.inp) to include the required
print options using keywords for those using PRO/II directly
-or-
 You can change the print options from within the PROVISION user
interface.
For either method, the operation names and stream names should not contain
the following characters:
 +
 *

Note: When specifying sidestrippers, each sidestripper must be identified by
a unique four-character name. Currently, sidestrippers are not always
identified by their full user-given names in PRO/II with PROVISION report
files. Sometimes, they are identified by only the first four characters of the
user-given names. Therefore, to properly load sidestripper information into
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer, sidestripper Unit identifiers (UID’s) must
be used, which are only four characters long.
To prepare the SimSci report in PROVISION:

1 On the Input menu, select Problem Description. Make sure that the
Problem Identifier field is not blank; something must be entered.
2 On the Output menu, select Report Format.
3 On the Report Format menu, select Miscellaneous Data.
4 Set the Report Width field to 80 Columns (the PROVISION default
value).
5 On the Report Format menu, select Stream Properties.
6 Select Molar Flowrate and Weight Fraction.
7 On the Report Format menu select Unit Operations.
8 For each column unit operation:
A On the Unit Operations list, select Column.
B Click the Print Options button while unit is highlighted.
C Select Molar Basis from the Column Summary list.
D From their respective column print options window, select:
o Molecular Weights
o Actual Densities
o Actual Volumetric Flowrates
o Transport Properties
o Flowing Enthalpies
o Standard Liquid Densities
E Click OK.
F Repeat for each remaining COLUMN unit operation in list.
Note: See the note in the KEYWORD section regarding COLUMN sidestripper’s
UID’s.
9 Click Close to finish.
10 Use the default options for remaining unit operations.
Using Keywords
For General Print Options, use the following keywords:
Print INPUT = ALL
STREAM = ALL
RATE = M
WIDTH= 80

For COLUMN operations, use the following keyword:
Print PROPTABLES = PART or ALL
Loading Simulation Data

The following loading procedure translates the specified process simulator
report file into Aspen Process Economic Analyzer.
To load process simulator data:

1 In Project Explorer, Project Basis view, right-click Simulator Type in
the Process Design folder; then click Edit.
The Select Simulator Type dialog box appears.
2 Select one type from the list; then click OK.

Aspen Process Economic Analyzer displays a message saying what the new
simulator type is.
3 Click OK.
4 In the Process Design folder, right-click Simulator File Name; then
click Edit.

The Open dialog box appears, showing all simulator files in the Report
folder. You can browse other drives and folders as well.
5 Select a file; then click Open.
Note: The List view now displays the pathname of the selected simulator file
when you select Simulator File Name in Project Explorer.

-or-
 On the Run menu, click Load Data.
A confirmation window appears.
7 Click Yes.
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer loads the simulator data.
When the loading of the data is finished, the Process view of Project Explorer
is populated with simulator areas and simulator blocks.

Viewing Data Derived from Simulator
To access simulator-derived data (read-only):
1 Right-click a block, and on the menu that appears, click Modify.

2 Click Cancel to close.
Working with Block Flow

Diagrams
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer automatically generates a Block Flow
Diagram (BFD) from a loaded simulator report. Providing a graphical
representation of the process, the BFD displays computational blocks and
their connections.
The blocks in the diagram correspond to tree items displayed in the Project
Explorer’s Process view. Color-coding of the blocks in both the Process view
and the BFD agree; mapped items are displayed green and unmapped items
are displayed yellow.
Displaying the Block Flow Diagram

To display the Block Flow Diagram:
 On the View menu, click Block Flow Diagram.

The BFD appears in the Main Window.
Note: A block can be moved by clicking on the center of the block and
dragging it to the desired location. Doing so will also move the streams
connected to the block. If the simulator data is reloaded, the block and
stream locations will be regenerated by Aspen Process Economic Analyzer.
In addition to the blocks displayed in the Process view, the BFD displays
streams, direction of stream flows, inlets, and outlets.
The commands on the View menu change when the BFD is active. (See Block
Flow Diagram View Menu on page 271 more information.)
X X
The Drag & Find Feature

There is a quick and easy way to find a block on the BFD.
Drag the block from the Project Explorer’s Process view and drop it anywhere
in the BFD. The part of the BFD displayed changes so that the block you want
to find appears in the upper-left corner of the Main Window.

Drag a block from Project Explorer (Process view) to the BFD
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer finds the block on the diagram
Accessing Commands in the Block Flow

Diagram
Right-clicking on blocks in the BFD accesses the same commands available
when you right-click a block in Project Explorer’s Process view.
Block commands
Clicking View accesses simulator-derived data (read-only), as shown on

page 270.
X X
The Map command and Delete Mappings command are explained in the
next section, Mapping Simulator Items to Icarus Project Components, starting
on page 276. Alteration of mapping will alter the blocks' color based on its
X X
status.
Stream commands
You can double-click a stream to access the Develop Stream specifications
form. This form is explained on page 229.
X X
Zooming
You can use the Zoom In and Zoom Out buttons to increase or decrease the
magnification by degrees:
You can also select an exact magnification by using the Zoom dialog box.

To use the Zoom dialog box:
1 On the View menu, click Zoom.
The Zoom dialog box appears.
2 Click the desired magnification, or click Custom and type a percentage

between 10 and 1,000.
3 Click OK to change magnification and close the dialog box.
-or-
Click Cancel to close the dialog box without changing magnification.
The Zoom dialog box also has two options that affect printing:
Fit into one page
Mark this box to have Aspen Capital Cost Estimator re-size the BFD to fit onto
one page when printed. This automatically selects the next option, What-You-
See-Is-What-You-Get, since the screen image will reflect the size required to
fit on one printed page.
What-You-See-Is-What-You-Get (WYSIWYG)
When WYSIWYG is cleared, zooming in or out will only affect the
magnification factor on the screen, while the printer always prints at 100%.
However, if WYSIWYG is selected, the magnification factor on the printer will
be changed so that the printed image will have the same size as the image
appearing on the screen.

BlockFlow Diagram View Menu
The View menu contains some options that are only displayed when the Block Flow
Diagram is active
Use this to
Toolbar View or hide the toolbar. See page 43 forX X
descriptions of toolbar buttons.

Status Bar View or hide the status bar. See page 28 X X
for description of the status bar.

Project Explorer View or hide Project Explorer. See
page 30 for description of Project
X X
Explorer.
Palette View or hide the Palette. See page 35 for
X X
description of the Palette

Properties Window View or hide the Properties Window. See
page 39 for a description of the Properties
X X
Window.
Workbook Mode Turn Workbook Mode on and off. See
page 32 for an explanation of Workbook
X X
Mode.
Capital Costs View Launch Aspen Icarus Reporter for
interactive reports (on-screen, HTML, or
Excel) or Icarus Editor for evaluation

reports (.ccp). The Project Evaluation
needs to have already been run. See
page 574 and page 565 for details.
X X X X
Investment Analysis View Display Investment Analysis

spreadsheets. See Reviewing Investment
Analysis on page 604 for instructions.
X X
Block Flow Diagram Display Block Flow Diagram of the loaded

simulator data.
Process Flow Diagram Display Process Flow Diagram. This
command is not active until you have
mapped the simulator items.
Streams List Display a read-only list of all simulator-
derived stream properties in a
spreadsheet. You can customize some of
the features of the spreadsheet (which
stream properties to display, whether to
display names of the properties, and the
display style of the property values) by
editing the stream list template file:
...\Economic Evaluation
V8.0\Data\ICS\strlist.fil
Grid Visible View or hide grid lines.
Snap to Grid Move blocks in increments corresponding
to the grid lines when dragging to new
location.
Show Page Bounds View or hide page separation lines. When
displayed, you can see where page breaks
will be when printing.
Ports Visible View or hide ports in the Process Flow
Diagram. Does not apply to Block Flow
Diagram.
Zoom Access Zoom dialog box. See page 273.X X
Mapping Simulator Items to

Icarus Project Components
Mapping is the process of converting each simulator block (that is, model or
unit operation) into one or more Icarus project components.
To map simulator items:

1 If you want to map all items, access the Map dialog box by doing one of
the following:

-or-
 On the Run menu, click Map Items.

2 If you want to map a single block or all blocks in an area, do one of the
following:
 In Process view, right-click a block or area; then click Map on the
menu that appears.
-or-
 In the Block Flow Diagram, right-click a block then click Map on the
menu that appears.
The Map Options dialog box appears.
Select the desired mapping options.

Option Description
Source
Map Selected Unit Map the selected simulator block or the simulator blocks in
Operations(s) the selected simulator area. This option is available only if
you selected Map from a pop-up menu.
Map All Unit Map all simulator items in the project.

Operations
Basis

Option Description
Last Mapping Map a block according to the last time it was mapped. This
option retains only the type of Icarus project component(s)
to which the block was last mapped.
Default Use the Component Map Specs file for the basis.
Default and Simulator Use the Component Map Specs file for the basis, but
Data override the mapping using specific data in the simulator.
For example, if you select this option and a reboiler type is
specified in the simulator report, an equivalent reboiler
type will be used in the mapping.
Users are encouraged to review these recommendations
and either accept them or select a different equipment type
based on their knowledge of their processes and practices.
Options
Size Icarus Project Size the mapped Icarus project component(s).

Component(s) If you are mapping a single item to a single component
that can be sized using the interactive Sizing Expert (see
list on page 360), the Interactive Sizing form will appear
X X
after mapping.
Otherwise, Aspen Process Economic Analyzer uses its
automatic sizing.
Although the Sizing Expert is unavailable when sizing
multiple components, you can still use it later (assuming
the component is one of those that can be sized
interactively). Just right-click on the mapped component
and click Re-Size on the pop-up menu.
Note: See Chapter 5 for instructions on using the

Sizing Expert.
3 Click OK.
The Map Preview dialog box appears.
Note: All simulator items are displayed because Map all Items was selected
at the previous dialog box. Those components being mapped have asterisks
next to them.

If you selected Map Selected Unit Operations(s) on the Map Options
dialog box, the Unit Operations list displays just the selected simulator
block(s). If you selected Map all Unit Operations(s), the Unit Operations
list displays all simulator blocks.
The Current Map List displays any components that are already mapped to
the simulator block highlighted on the Simulation List.
The Configuration option box is active only for blocks representing column
models.
You must use the arrow scroll buttons to see all 12 possible configurations.
Selecting a configuration type automatically fills in the Current Map List with
the components required for that configuration type. See Tower
Configurations on page 284 for more information.
X X
Click Tower Suffixes To indicate
bottoms split bottoms splitter

bot exchanger bottoms exchanger
bottoms pump bottoms pump
cond condenser for the tower
cond acc condenser accumulator
ovhd exchanger Overhead exchanger
overhead split Overhead splitter
ovhd pump Overhead pump
precooler first heat exchanger in “split” configuration”
reb reboiler for the tower
reflux pump reflux pump
Tower main tower
Trim second heat exchanger in “split” configuration”
Other user selectable.
spray cond Spray condenser
spray cond exit pump Pump for recirculating the spray condenser exit
sc tot recycle splitter Splitter in Spray Condenser Configuration that generates

Click Tower Suffixes To indicate
the total recycle stream
sc cooler Heat exchanger in the Spray Condenser Configuration that
cools the entire total recycle stream
sc tot recycle trim splitter Trim splitter in Spray Condenser Configuration 2
sc trim Heat exchanger in the Spray Condenser Configuration that
cools the entire total recycle stream
4 Select a component.
The Map Preview dialog box now displays the component category's item
symbol, equipment type, and description.
Each component mapped from the block must have a unique name; if another
component already has the default component name, Aspen Process
Economic Analyzer prompts you to enter a unique name after you select
another component.
5 Click OK to complete the mapping.
If you selected to size the mapped component(s), Aspen Process Economic
Analyzer also performs automatic sizing or, in cases in which a single item is
being mapped to a single component for which interactive sizing is available,
the Interactive Sizing form appears. See Chapter 5, Sizing Project
Components for information on this feature.

With the block now mapped, the List view displays the components mapped
from the simulator block.
Component Status
You may notice a "?" in the Status column of a project component mapped
from the simulator block. This indicates that there are still specifications that
need to be entered for the component. To enter the specifications, right-click
on the component and click Modify Item on the pop-up menu. Entering
specifications in the required fields will change the status to OK. Required
fields are indicated by color-coding explained on page 316, under Entering
X X
Component Specifications.
If you do not enter the specifications and the "?" remains in the Status
column, the item will not be included in the project evaluation and will have
"0" cost associated with it. It will not cause SCAN messages.
Deleting Mappings
To delete mappings:
 Right-click in the simulator area or simulator block in Process view; then,
on the menu that appears, click Delete.

Tower Configurations
Because a column can be mapped to multiple pieces of equipment, Aspen
Process Economic Analyzer requires that you select a tower configuration on
the Project Component Map Preview dialog box.
You can select from among ten possible configurations:

 Standard – Single
 Standard – Total
 Standard – Total w/Circ.
 Standard – Split
 Standard – Split Total
 Standard – Split Total w/Circ.
 Full – Single
 Full – Single w.Circ.
 Full – Split
 Full – Split w/Circ.
This term means
Single Tower has one condenser.
Split Tower has multiple condensers.
Total the reflux pump handles the total outlet liquid flow from
the accumulator. In such configurations, the splitting into
a reflux and overhead liquid product occurs after the
reflux pump.
Circ. there is a pump between the bottoms splitter and the
reboiler giving a forced circulation configuration around
the reboiler.

Note: Full configurations include the following equipment not found in
Standard configurations:
 overhead pump
 overhead product heat exchanger
 bottoms product pump
 bottoms product heat exchanger
Based on the tower configuration selected, Aspen Process Economic Analyzer
automatically creates a model for each tower block and then maps the model
to an Icarus project component. In addition, you can specify how the
condenser requirements should be split between the Precooler and the Trim
cooler on the Design Criteria specifications form.
If subcooling is present, the precooler will completely condense the overhead
vapor and the trim cooler will perform the subcooling; the split specification
on the Design Criteria specifications form will be ignored when subcooling
is present.
The following figures display the ten possible configurations. The default item
description suffixes (see page 279) are used to identify the configuration
X X
parts, each of which is mapped to an Icarus project component.

Figure 1: Standard – Single
Figure 2: Standard Total

Figure 3: Standard Total w/Circ

Figure 4: Standard Split
Figure 5: Standard Split Total

Figure 6: Standard Split Total w/Circ.
Figure 7: Full – Single

Figure 8: Full – Single w/Circ.
Figure 9: Full – Split

Figure 10: Full – Split w/Circ.

Figure 11: Spray Condenser Configuration 1 w/Circ.
Note: Flow rate of the Spray Cond Total Recycle (SCTR) stream is calculated
using Ratio of Recycle to (Ovhdliqprod + Reflux) Flowrates = mSCTR / (mOVH
LIQ PROD+ mREFLUX). Ratio of Recycle to (Ovhdliqprod + Reflux) Flowrates
is an input specified in the Design Criteria.
mSCTR = mass flow rate of the SCTR stream.
mOVH LIQ PROD = mass flow rate of the Overhead Liquid Product stream.
mREFLUX = mass flow rate of the Reflux stream.

Figure 12: Spray Condenser Configuration 2 w/Circ.
The duty for the SC COOLER and SC TRIM exchangers are calculated using
Ratio of SC Trim Duty to Overall Duty = QSCTRIM / QCONDENSER
QCONDENSER = QSCTRIM + QSCCOOLER
where:
Ratio of SC Trim Duty to Overall Duty is an input specified in the Design
Criteria
QSCTRIM = Spray Condenser Cooler Duty
QSCCOOLER = Spray Condenser Trim Duty
QCONDENSER = Total Overhead Condenser Duty, obtained from
Simulator Data
Then the temperatures of the streams exiting the Spray Condenser Cooler
and Spray Condenser Trim exchangers are calculated using:
a Q = mCpDeltaT calculation.
Flow rate of the streams exiting the SC Tot Recycle Trim Splitter are
determined using:
SC Trim Splitter Flow Split Ratio = mSCRTSEx1 / mSCCEx
mSCCEx = (mSCRTSEx1 + mSCRTSEx2)

SC Trim Splitter Flow Split Ratio is an input specified in the Design Criteria
mSCCE = mass flow rate of the SC Cooler Exit Stream
mSCRTSEx1 = mass flow rate of the SC Rcy Trim Splitter Ex1
Stream
(this is the one that subsequently goes through the SC TRIM exchanger)
mSCRTSEx2 = mass flow rate of the SC Rcy Trim Splitter Ex2
Stream
Sizing Selection
This section outlines the workflow of the sizing selection feature available in
Aspen Icarus Process Evaluator. Sizing selection is a mechanism that lets you
pre-define and/or define sizing rules for project components. Specifically, you
can set rules on equipment models or specific project components to be sized
with one or more custom models.
Project Sizing Selection

Typically, you load data from a simulation and then choose to map the
simulator unit operations. In the mapping screen that appears, there is a
check box to Review Sizing Selection. If selected (the default is based on
the Tools | Options | Preferences | Process | Sizing selection on the
item-size menu), the sizing selection appears.
You select any custom model for sizing the project components listed.
 If an item is selected, the sizing preview screen appears during a size or
re-size performed on one or more project component(s).
 If an item is not selected, the mapping preview screen does not appear for
editing during these steps, but the sizing selection specifications is applied
to the selected project component(s).

Figure 13: Mapping with option to size equipment
If selected, you will see the MapPreview dialog box for a chance to edit how
the project components are sized (see Figure 14).
Figure 14: Sizing Selection preview for specified project components

You can specify the sizing routines (System Sizing and custom models) for
each project component (created by mapping from a simulator or manual
creation) that will be applied during the size-all step.
If a custom model is specified in the current sizing list for a project
component, the project component will be sized in the order shown in the
Current Sizing List (see Figure 14). Any custom models listed will be sized
using the custom model tool automatically without any user-interaction
required. After sizing is complete, the system returns to a ready-state for
you to perform additional project tasks.
For Global Sizing Selection information, see page 356.
X X

Specifying Additional
Components
Icarus project components can be added to areas mapped from a simulator
report. However, these project components must initially be added in a user-
added area. You can later rearrange the components in Project Explorer’s
Project view, drag components from a user-added area to an area mapped
from the simulator report.
Follow the instructions for adding a project component on page 310.
X X
If the component you add is process equipment, Aspen Process Economic

Analyzer adds an icon representing the new equipment item in the upper left-
hand corner of the Process Flow Diagram (PFD). The next section, Working
with Process Flow Diagrams, includes instructions (under “Editing
Connectivity” on page 298) for connecting an added component to a stream
X X
in PFD view.
Working with Process Flow

Diagrams
Process Flow Diagrams (PFD) provide graphical representations of Icarus
process equipment mapped from simulator blocks and the interconnecting
streams. You can edit the layout and connectivity of the mapped items from
PFD view. You can also add streams. Aspen Process Economic Analyzer
provides intelligent port selection, so that when drawing a stream you see the
candidate ports highlighted in green as the mouse is moved over them.
To access PFD view:

1 On the View menu, click Process Flow Diagram.

2 Use the Drag-and-Find feature to locate any equipment item on the PFD.
3 Drag an equipment item from Project Explorer (Project view) and drop it
on the PFD.
The icon in the PFD that corresponds to the selected equipment will be
positioned in the upper left-hand corner (regardless of magnification).
Editing the Layout

To change the position of an item:
 Use your mouse to drag the item to its new position.
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer reroutes any streams connected to the
item.
To change the route of a stream:

 Click the stream; then drag the stream to straighten it or to create an
elbow-bend.
Note: If you eventually select Reroute All Streams on the Run menu,
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer chooses the most logical routes for all
streams.
Process Flow Diagram View Menu

Note: The View menu contains some options that are displayed only when
the Block Flow Diagram is active.

Use this to
Toolbar View or hide the toolbar. See

page 43 for descriptions of toolbar
X X
buttons.
Status Bar View or hide the status bar. See
page 28 for a description of the
X X
status bar.
Project Explorer View or hide Project Explorer. See
page 30 for a description of
X X
Project Explorer.
Palette View or hide the Palette. See
page 35 for a description of the
X X
Palette.
Properties Window View or hide the Properties
window. See page 39 for a
X X
description of the Properties

window.
Workbook Mode Turn Workbook Mode on and
off. See page 32 for an
X X
explanation of Workbook Mode.

Capital Costs View Launch Aspen Icarus Reporter for
interactive reports (on-screen,

HTML, or Excel) or Icarus Editor
for evaluation reports (.ccp). The
Project Evaluation needs to have
already been run. See page 574 X X
and page 565 for details.

X X
Investment Analysis View Display Investment Analysis

spreadsheets. See Reviewing
Investment Analysis on
X X
Block Flow Diagram Display Block Flow Diagram of

the loaded simulator data.
Process Flow Diagram Display Process Flow Diagram.
This command is not active until
you have mapped the simulator
items.
Streams List Display a read-only list of all
simulator-derived stream
properties in a spreadsheet. You
can customize some of the
features of the spreadsheet
(which stream properties to
display, whether to display names
of the properties, and the display
style of the property values) by
editing the stream list template
file:
...\Economic Evaluation
V8.0\Data\ICS\strlist.fil
Grid Settings Access Grid Properties dialog
box, where you can set the grid
increments and select to view or
hide grid lines.
Snap to Grid Move blocks in increments
corresponding to the grid lines
when dragging to new location.
Show Page Bounds View or hide page separation
lines. When displayed, you can
see where page breaks will be
when printing.
Ports Visible View or hide ports.
Zoom Access Zoom tool. This is the
same as in the Block Flow
Diagram (see page 273). X X
Add Stream Access the Develop Streams

dialog box. See Adding A
Stream, page 300, for details.
X X
Draw Disconnected Stream Access the Disconnected Streams

dialog box. See “Drawing a
Disconnected Stream,” page 302, X X
for details.
Activate the Edit Connectivity
Edit Connectivity feature. See “Editing
Connectivity,” page 298, for X X
details.

Setting Grid Properties
You can select to display grids of any increments. In addition, you can select
the color of the grids and whether to be in Snap to Grid mode.
To set grid properties:

1 On the View menu, click Grid Settings.
The Grid Properties dialog box appears.
2 Set the Across and Down grid increments in the Increments section.
Specify in the Units section whether the specified increments are in
inches or centimeters.
3 Select the Snap to Grid check box to turn on Snap to Grid mode. When
you drag a block in this mode, the block’s bounding outline moves in
increments corresponding to the grid.
4 Click Color to select a grid color.
5 Finally, in the Visibility section, click whether to show or hide the grid.
6 Click OK to apply the settings.
Editing Connectivity
The Edit Connectivity feature lets you make changes to the layout of items
in the PFD. Because this involves connecting and disconnecting streams to
ports, the Ports Visible option should be on, as it is by default.
If the ports are not visible, click the Ports Visible button .
Connecting a Stream to Different Inlet Port

To connect a stream to a different inlet port:
 On the toolbar, click the Edit Connectivity button

-or-

 On the View menu, click Edit Connectivity.
2 Place the cursor over the end of the stream you want to connect to a
different inlet port.
The cursor becomes an arrow.
3 Click the end of the stream.

The cursor now appears as a crosshairs.
4 Move the cursor to another inlet port.
When the cursor is in close proximity to a component, the component's
available inlet ports display green.
5 Click the new inlet port.
Connecting an Added Project Component to a

Stream
Project components that you add to the project appear in the upper left-hand
corner of the PFD and are not connected to any streams.
To connect an added project component to a stream:

 On the toolbar, click the Edit Connectivity button

-or-
 On the View menu, click Edit Connectivity.
2 Place the cursor over the added project component that you wish to insert
into an existing stream.
The cursor becomes a hand.

3 Click the component.
A bounding outline, representing the component, appears around the cursor.
4 Move the cursor over a stream. Click when you have placed the cursor
over the desired stream.
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer disconnects the Sink end of the stream
from the inlet port on the current component, then automatically re-connects
it to the inlet port on the inserted component.
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer also creates a new stream, which appears
white and has properties relative to the initial stream. Aspen Process
Economic Analyzer connects the Source end of this new stream to the outlet
port of the inserted item and the Sink and to the inlet port of the original.
The added item can now be sized manually or using the Size Item option,
which either automatically sizes the item or, if interactive sizing is available,
accesses the Sizing Expert. The Sizing Expert, explained in Chapter 6, will
utilize the newly connected streams.
Adding a Stream
From PFD view, you can create a new stream and specify its connectivity. The
process of developing streams is explained in detail under Developing
Streams, page 228.
X X

To add a stream:
 On the toolbar, click the Add Stream button .

-or-
 On the View menu, click Add Stream.

 To create a stream from scratch, click Create and proceed to Step 3.
-or-
 To create a stream based on an existing stream, in the Base Stream
section, click the existing stream; and then click a Basis:
o Absolute If the Basis Mode is Absolute, the data from the base
stream is copied to the new stream at the time the new stream is
created. If the data of the base stream is altered at any time after
this point, the data of the new stream remains unchanged.
o Relative If the Basis Mode is Relative, the new stream’s data is
dynamically linked to that of the stream on which it’s based. This
means that alterations to the data of the base stream immediately
affect the new stream.
3 Click Create.

4 Type a name in the Stream Name field; then click OK.

The Develop Streams specifications dialog box appears.
5 Make any desired modifications; then click OK.
6 Move the cursor, which appears as a square, to an outlet port.
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer provides intelligent port selection,
highlighting the candidate ports in green.
7 Click when you have placed the cursor over the desired outlet port.
8 Move the cursor, which now appears as crosshairs, to an inlet port.
9 Click when you have placed the cursor over the desired inlet port.
Drawing a Disconnected Stream

To draw a disconnected stream:

 On the toolbar, click the Draw Disconnected Stream button .
-or-
 On the View menu, click Draw Disconnected Stream.
The Disconnected Streams dialog box appears.
2 Click a stream; then click OK.

3 Draw the stream as described in the previous instructions for Adding a
Stream.
Working with Streams

Right-clicking on a stream accesses a pop-up menu with the following
commands.
Use this to
Modify Access the Develop Stream dialog box listing the stream’s
specifications, which you can modify.
Disconnect Erase the stream from the screen and store it, so that you
can select it when using the Draw Disconnected Stream
feature (see page 302).
X X
Reconnect Source Reconnect the stream to a new outlet port.

Reconnect Sink Reconnect the stream to a new inlet port.
Delete Delete the stream.

4 Defining Report Groups,
Areas, and Project
Components
When developing a Aspen Capital Cost Estimator project, you can add project
components to areas in Project Explorer’s Project view. Project components
are the pieces of the process plant (or mill) that, when linked together,
complete a process. Components are categorized as follows:
Note: See Icarus Reference for information on individual components.

Category To define
Process Equipment Equipment for gas, liquids and solids handling and
off-site/packaged systems.
Plant Bulks Material commodities that service a section of the plant or
the whole plant. Plant bulks are divided into categories:
Piping, Civil, Steel, Instrumentation, Electrical, Insulation
and Paint.
Site Development Modifications that must be done to the site. Site
development items are divided into categories: Demolition,
Drainage, Earthwork, Fencing, Landscaping,
Roads-Slabs-Paving, Piling and Railroads.
Buildings Civil structures directly involved in the process or for
off-site use.
Quoted Equipment A way to enter special equipment not found in Process
Equipment above.
Unit Cost Library Items from a Unit Cost Library. See Chapter 7.
Equipment Model Library Items from an Equipment Model Library. See Chapter 7.
Adding a Report Group

Areas in Aspen Capital Cost Estimator are divided into report groups. Some
reports summarize costs by report group. A report group is a user-defined
category that can contain any number of areas.
4 Defining Report Groups, Areas, and Project Components 305

Note: Show Report Group in Aspen Capital Cost Estimator must be
marked in Preferences, General tab view, to see report groups displayed in
Project Explorer. This Preferences option is marked by default. (See page 53X X
for information on Preferences.)

New projects include one default report group, with the name Main Area. You
can rename the report group by right-clicking and clicking Rename Report
Group on the pop-up menu.
To add a report group:

1 Double-click Main Project.
-or-
Right-click Main Project and, on the pop-up menu, click Add Report
Group.
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator adds a report group with the default name New
Report Group.
2 Right-click on New Report Group and click Rename Report Group.
3 Type a name for the report group and press enter.
To delete a report group:

 Right-click the report group; then click Delete Report Group.
Adding an Area
To add an area:
1 In Project Explorer’s Project view, double-click a Report Group folder.
The Area Information dialog box appears.
306 4 Defining Report Groups, Areas, and Project Components

2 Define the area, including name, type, and dimensions.
The area type determines the default area specifications. For example, Aspen
Capital Cost Estimator generates an open steel structure for the area type
OPEN, but does not generate one for the area type EXOPEN. See page 36-4 of
Icarus Reference for details on which specifications Aspen Capital Cost
Estimator generates for each area type.
You do not have to use all the default area specifications. The following
section explains how to define area specifications.
Area Types:
 EXOPEN
 FLOOR
 GRADE (Default)
 MODULE
 OPEN
 PAD
3 Click OK.
Project Explorer now displays the new area.
Copying a Report Area over

another Report Area
To copy a Report Area over another Report Area:
1. Right-click on a Report Group (for example, Battery limit).
2. Click Copy All.
3. Right-click the report group you want to replace.
4. Click Copy specs.

5. Right-click project node.
6. Click Paste.
The target Report Area now contains the same information as the source
Report Area.
Defining Area Specifications

You can define mechanical design and cost basis specifications for the newly
added area. You can define or modify area specifications in two ways:
 using the Project view
 using the Spreadsheet view
Method 1: Defining area specifications

using Project View
To define area specifications using Project view:
1 Right-click the area in Project Explorer’s Project view; then, on the pop-
up menu that appears, click Modify.
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator displays the Area Specifications dialog box.
2 Select the specification category you want to define:

Select To do this
Area Title Info Change the area title.
Area Equipment Define standards and procedures applying to this area only.
Overrides specifications entered at the project level for this
area only.
Includes:
 Design allowance
 Weld efficiency
 Wind design required
 Design deflection
 Stress relief option
 Diameter option
 Rotating equipment spares
 Shop fab maximum diameter
Area , Piping, Civil, Steel, Define standards and procedures applying to this area only.
Instrumentation, Overrides specifications entered at the project level for this
Electrical, and Paint area only.
Area Specs Define area’s type, dimensions, and average high/low
ambient temperatures.
Area Insulation For Hot Insulation Schedule: If you have not selected an
external Hot Insulation Schedule, select:
 L-Light ave low ambient > 40DEG F (4 DEG C)
 M-Medium ave low ambient > 20DEG F (-6 DEG C)
 H-High- ave low ambient < 20DEG F (-6 DEG C)
OR
 One or more hot insulation libraries selected from
external files
For Cold Insulation Schedule:
 C-Cold
OR
 One or more cold insulation libraries selected from
external files
Area Modules Define module type (default is SKID: flat base structural
module); beam, column, and bracing options; structure
costs; shipping costs; and impact loads.
Material Index Info Adjust area’s system-generated material costs by a
percentage. Overrides specifications entered at the project
level for this area only.
Man Hour Index Info Adjust area’s system-generated man-hours by a
percentage. Overrides specifications entered at the project
level for this area only.
3 Click Modify to access the selected area specifications.

The Area equipment specs dialog box appears.
4 Enter area specifications; then click OK.
Method 2: Defining area specifications

using Spreadsheet View
To define or modify area specifications using Spreadsheet view:
1 On the main menu bar, click View | Spreadsheet View | Areas.
The Areas spreadsheet view appears.
2 On the Areas spreadsheet view, click Options.
3 On the menu that appears, select the specification category you want to
define/modify.
Select To do this
Area Title Info Change the area title.
Area Equipment, Piping, Define standards and procedures applying to this area only.
Civil, Steel, Overrides specifications entered at the project level for this
Instrumentation, area only.
Electrical, Insulation and
Paint
Area Specs Define area’s type, dimensions, and average high/low
ambient temperatures.
Area Modules Define module type (default is SKID: flat base structural
module); beam, column, and bracing options; structure
costs; shipping costs; and impact loads.
4 On the spreadsheet, make your modifications.
5 When you are satisfied with your modifications, click Apply.
6 Click OK.
Your modifications are made in the project.
Note: You cannot use this feature if a component specs form is open that
would let you edit data that would also be editable in the spreadsheet view.

Adding and Defining Pipeline
Areas
If you selected Allow Pipeline Areas when creating the project (see
page 23), there will be a default report group with the name Pipeline Area.
X X
You can rename the report group by right-clicking and clicking Rename
Report Group on the pop-up menu. The default report group contains one
area called Pipeline Area.
To add a pipeline area:

1 Right-click on the pipeline report group and click Add Pipeline Area.
The Pipeline Area specifications form appears.
2 Select a pipeline title, fluid type (oil, gas, or water; default is oil), main-
line length (used for productivity adjustment in various work items),
whether to have double-jointed piping (default is double-jointed for pipe
diameter equal to or greater than 20 IN [500 MM]), length of delivered
pipe section (default is 80 FT [24 M] if double-jointed and 40 FT [12 M] if
not double-jointed), and internal lining type (fusion-bonded epoxy,
cement, or none; default is none).
3 Click OK.
You can now add pipeline segments to the area.
4 When adding a component (explained in next section), click Plant Bulks |
Piping. Pipeline segments are at the bottom of the list of piping plant
bulks.

To edit a pipeline area:
 Right-click the pipeline area; then click Modify.
Adding a Project Component

Aspen Capital Cost Estimator provides two methods for adding a project
component:
 Drag-and-drop
Drag a component from the Palette to an area on Project Explorer’s
Project view and enter an item description. This adds the component to
the area without displaying the Component Specifications form; the
specifications are left to be entered at your convenience.
 Pop-up menu
Right-click on an area and click Add Project Component from the
pop-up menu, then select a component from the Project Component
Selection dialog box and enter an item description. This adds the
component and also displays the Component Specifications form, where
you can complete the component definition right away.
Method 1: Dragging a Component from the

Palette
To add a component using the drag-and-drop method:
1 With the Palette (Components view) and Project Explorer (Project view)
displayed, drag a component from the components list to an area on the
Project Explorer.
Note: The Recent Items folder in the Components view stores the last 10
project component selections.
2 To drag, click on the component and hold down the mouse button, move
the cursor until over an area, and release the mouse button.

The New Component Information dialog box appears.
3 Enter an item description (required) and User Tag Number (optional), and
then click OK.
The component is added. Project Explorer displays a block for the component
under the selected area. The List view displays general information. You may
notice a question mark (?) in the Status column on the List view. This
indicates that there are still specifications that need to be entered for the
component. To enter the specifications, follow the instructions under
“Entering Component Specifications” on page 315.
X X
Method 2: Using the Pop-up Menu

To add a component using the pop-up menu:
1 In Project Explorer, Project view, right-click on a non-simulator area and
click Add Project Component on the pop-up menu.

The Project Component Selection dialog box appears.
2 Enter the Project Component Name.

3 Highlight the category to which the desired equipment belongs (process
equipment, plant bulks, site development, buildings, quoted equipment)
and click OK.
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator displays a list of sub-categories. Continue to
narrow down the selection to a specific component. Then click OK.
The component is added to the area.
The Component Specifications form is automatically displayed. You can
either complete the definition of the equipment item now or later.

Entering Component
Specifications
After adding a component, you still need to enter at least some component
specifications to complete the component’s definition. Many component
specifications have default values used when no value is entered, but most
component specifications require further input. If a component added still has
any specifications requiring input, a question mark (?) appears in the status
column of the List view for that component.
You do not have to enter specifications immediately upon adding a
component; you may wish to wait until more information about a project
becomes available.
As more information about a project becomes available, you may also wish to
modify previously entered component specifications. The following
instructions apply as well to modifying previously entered specifications.
To enter or modify component specifications:

1 If the Component Specifications form is not already displayed in the
Main window, display the form by right-clicking on the component and
clicking Modify Item on the pop-up menu. You can right-click on the
component in either Project Explorer (Project view) or List view (Area
level)

Double-clicking the component will also display the Specifications form.
Color coding
 Red Border: An entry must be made in the field. All specifications forms
have at least one required entry field.
 Green Borders and Thick Yellow Borders: An entry must be made in either
the field with the thick yellow border or in the two fields with the green
borders. The field with the thick yellow borders and the fields with the
green borders are mutually exclusive. In the form pictured above, either
the pump size must be selected or the fluid head and liquid flow rate must
be entered. The Properties window notes this in the Description. Enter
the specifications.
Note: While on either the component or installation bulks specifications form,

you can quickly determine the net effect of all your changes by clicking the
Evaluate button and reviewing the resulting report. See page 624 for
X X
more information.
To define installation bulks for the component, click the Options drop-down
and select the type of bulks to define.

See “Defining Installation Bulks” on page 317 for a complete description of
X X
installation bulks.
2 After defining the component and installation bulks, save the
specifications form by clicking OK.
Defining Installation Bulks

Installation bulks are items directly associated with the component being
defined and are used to complete the installation of the item, for example, a
foundation for a vessel. The difference between an installation bulk and a
plant bulk is that an installation bulk is associated with a component, whereas
a plant bulk services the whole plant or mill.
You can define Installation bulks when entering or modifying equipment or
plant bulk specifications.
To access installation bulk specifications:

1 Display the Component Specifications form.
2 Click the down-arrow on the Options button.
Note: An asterisk (*) next to an installation bulk indicates that it has been
edited. On the menu pictured below, asterisks indicate that the Pipe - Item
Details and Civil installation bulks have been edited.

3 Click the type of installation bulks you wish to view or define.
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator displays the specifications form for the selected
installation bulk items. See the subsections that follow for descriptions of the
different types of installation bulks.
4 When you are done defining the installation bulk, save your changes in
either of two ways, depending on what you intend to do next:
o If you want to continue modifying this component’s installation
bulks or component specifications, click Apply to save the
changes. You can now select either Project Component or
another type of installation bulks from the Options menu.
o If you are done making changes to the installation bulks and to
the component specifications, click OK to save the changes and
close the specifications window.
Mat’l/Man-hours Adjustments
Using Mat’l/Man-hours Adjustments, you can specify percent adjustments of
system-calculated values as follows:
Category Percent adjustment for
Equipment Material cost (COA 100-299)

Setting Man-hours (COA 100-299)
Piping Material costs and/or man-hours (COA 300-399)
Civil Material costs and/or man-hours (COA 400-499)
Steel Material costs and/or man-hours (COA 500-599)

Instrumentation Material costs and/or man-hours (COA 600-699)
Electrical Material costs and/or man-hours (COA 700-799)
Insulation Material costs and/or man-hours (COA 800-899)
Paint Material costs and/or man-hours. (COA 900-999)
These adjustments compound material and man-hour indexing applied to the

same COA’s. User-entered material costs and man-hours (entered using
either Quoted Equipment or Mat’l/Man-hours % Additions) are not
affected by these adjustments.
The Special Options section at the bottom of the Mat’l/Man-hour
Adjustments form lets you specify that the component is a spare, supplied
by owner, or existing. Aspen Capital Cost Estimator adjusts the component
costs accordingly. In addition, the Special Options section lets you select
demolition (that is, dismantlement) of the component and its installation
bulks.
To demolish a component item:

1 Click Mat’l/Man-hours Adjustments on the Options menu of the
Component Specifications form.
NOTE: Starting with the V8.0 Release of Economic Evaluation, the

Installation Option can be accessed from the main component form. The
functionality remains the same.
2 Scroll down to the Special Options section and, from the Installation
Option scroll list, select DEML.

Note: The form shown above applies to V7.3.2 and earlier.

Note: The form shown above applies to V8.0 and later.
For example, selecting the demolition (DEML) option causes the following
changes to the component:
 Material costs are set to zero.
 Man-hours and labor costs are charged to demolition COAs (for example,
109, 309, 409, and so on.)
 Piping and civil man-hours are down-adjusted:
 Shop fab man-hours are removed from piping man-hours.
 Civil formwork/bracing man-hours are removed.
3 Go back through the Mat’l/Man-hour Adjustments form and make the
proper adjustments to account for the relative difficulty of demolition
versus new build.
For example, if you know unsetting the component is 15% easier than initially
setting it, then enter 85% in the Setting labor adjustment field.
4 Save your changes in either of two ways, depending on what you intend
to do next:

o If you want to continue modifying this component’s installation
bulk or component specifications, click Apply to save the
changes to the Mat’l/Man-hour Adjustments. You can now
select either Project Component or another installation bulk
from the Options menu.
o If you are done making changes to the installation bulks and to
the component specifications, click OK to save the changes and
close the specifications window.
Mat’l/Man-hours Additions
Using Mat’l/Man-hours Additions, you can add lump sum material costs and/or
man-hours to a specified COA. All additions are reported “as is.” Additions are
neither indexed nor adjusted by Mat’l/Man-hours Adjustments. Up to 20
additions may be defined per component.
Example: in the Mat’l/Man-hour Additions form for the CLAD TECHNOCAL

STORAGE TANK component, 20 labor hours have been added to COA 304 and
30 labor hours have been added to COA 604.
Pipe – General Specs

Use Pipe – General Specs to define the rules for developing all installation
piping on the selected component. You can use many fields to define general
piping specifications, such as:
 Material
 Pressure
 Temperature
 Installation - above or below grade
 Fluid or electric tracing
 Flange class and type
 Stress relief
 Insulation type

 Insulation jacket type
 Paint treatment
Note: In Aspen Kbase Version 2004.2, under General Piping specs, there
was a field called fitting spec filename to use to select the fitting spec
filename to use for the project.
In newer Kbase and Aspen Capital Cost Estimator versions, the fitting
specification is moved a Customer External file.
To access this file:
1 Right-click the Fitting external file.
2 Click Select.
A selection dialog box appears in which you can select which external fitting
specs file to use.
Pipe – Item Details

Use Pipe – Item Details to specify individual runs of piping and associated
fittings, tracing, paint and insulation. The line is developed using the rules
defined in Pipe – General Specs unless they are re-defined with Pipe – Item
Details. Up to 40 lines may be defined/adjusted for each component.
Note: To reduce the time required to retrieve data when multiple items
have been added, select in Preferences to not display all items. If Display
P&I Installation Items is unmarked on the Preference dialog box
(General tab view), selecting Pipe – Item Details will display a dialog box
from which you can select the item you wish to edit or select to add a new
item. See page 53 for instructions on entering Preferences.
X X
The component starts with piping depicted in the Piping and Instrumentation
Drawings manual. You can also display the component’s piping and
instrumentation drawing by clicking the P&ID button on the

Component Specifications form. It displays the piping you are adjusting on
the Pipe Details Installation Bulk form.
You can revise the pipe volumetric model for a component line-by-line.
Specifications on the Pipe – Item Details Installation Bulk form override the
project, area- and component-level specifications that otherwise determine
the design of all lines of pipe. For example, area dimensions determine the
lengths of lines generated by volumetric models, except those lines for which
you enter a specific length.

The Piping Volumetric Model field offers the following options:
 “blank” - Specified pipe only, no volume. model
This option should rarely be used. It is a rapid way to discard the
complete piping model for this item; however, in addition to discarding all
of the automatically generated lines of pipe, this also discards all the
associated drains/vents and pipe-associated instrumentation. The system
now generates only piping, drains/vents and on-/in-line instrumentation
for those lines that you subsequently define. Once you have used this
option, the other options below cannot be used because the model is
already discarded. If you subsequently re-create a line that the volumetric
model would have automatically created, the associated on-/in-line
instrumentation is automatically “re-created.”
 A - Add line to pipe volumetric model
This option is used to add a new line of pipe to a component. The number
of the new line must be higher than any other automatically created or
user-defined line. For example, if a component generates lines 1 to 6,
then an added line may have the number 7 to 40. The area dimensions
will have no effect on the length of these lines. It is not necessary to add
line numbers in numeric order; however, they will be generated and
reported in numeric order. To associate instrumentation with a new line,
specify that a sensor or control element location is this line number. Line
40 is reserved for drains/vents.
 C - Change lines on pipe volumetric model
This is a commonly used option. It is used to modify automatically
generated lines of pipe; user-specified lines are not changed. The line is
generated exactly at it would have been in the absence of your
specifications, except for the items which you change. You may use this to

change only the metallurgy, diameter or length of a run, or only the
valves and fittings (including setting the quantity to 0) or any combination
of these.
 D - Delete line on pipe volumetric model
This option deletes a single line of automatically generated pipe and its
associated drains/vents and instrumentation.
 R - Replace line on pipe volumetric model
This option replaces the automatically generated line completely with the
exact line that you specify. If you do not define something for this line,
you do not get it. For example, if you specify a line of fixed length
containing no valves or fittings, then you only get the straight-run of pipe.
To make more than one specification for Pipe – Item Details:
 Click the Add button.
This adds an item specs column to this form.
To delete any unwanted or unused column(s):
1 Click any cell in that column (or drag for a range of columns).
2 Click the Delete button.
Note: Incompletely specified columns must be either completed or deleted

before saving.
Duct
Duct installation bulk items specify individual runs of process ductwork and
associated fittings and insulation. Up to five duct lines may be specified for
each component. Use the same methods described for multiple lines of pipe.
Civil
Civil installation bulk items specify bulk excavation and up to three different
foundation types/sizes. The available foundation types are listed in the Icarus
Reference.
From the specified foundation types and volumes, Aspen Capital Cost
Estimator calculates:
 Excavation and backfill
 Form work (plywood/backup lumber with reuse)
 Rebar
 Sand mat (or ring wall foundation types only)
 Grout
 Anchor bolts/embedments
Steel
The Steel installation bulk specifies the following:
 Ladders

 Stairs
 Platforms
In addition, you can specify up to eight different steel items.
Instrumentation
Instrument installation bulk items specify individual instrumentation loops or
parts of loops with associated sensors, transmitters and signal cabling. Up to
50 loops may be defined for each component.
Note: To reduce the time required to retrieve data when multiple instrument
items have been added, select in Preferences to not display all items. If
Display P&I Installation Items is unmarked on the Preference dialog box
(General tab view), selecting Instrumentation will display a dialog box
from which you can select the item you wish to edit or select to add a new
item. See page 53 for instructions on accessing and entering Preferences.
X X
The component starts with instrumentation depicted in the Piping and

Instrumentation Drawings manual. You can also display the component’s
piping and instrumentation drawing by clicking the P&ID button on the
Component Specifications form. It displays the instrumentation you are
adjusting on the Instrumentation Installation Bulk form.
You can revise the instrument volumetric model for a component loop-by-
loop. Specifications entered on the Instrumentation Installation Bulk form
override the project-, area- and component-level specifications that otherwise
determine the design of all instrument loops.
The Instrument Volumetric Model field offers the following options:

 “blank” - Specified loop only, no volume. model
This option should rarely be used; it is a rapid way to discard the complete
instrument model for this item. The system now generates

instrumentation for those loops that you subsequently define. To define
new loops, you continue to use this “blank” option for each successive
loop. Once you have used this option, the other options below cannot be
used because the model is already discarded.
 A - Add loop to instr. volum. model
This option is used to add a new loop to a component. The number of the
new loop must be higher than any other automatically created or user-
defined loop. It is not necessary to add loop numbers in numeric order;
however, they will be generated and reported in numeric order. For
example, if a component generates loops 1 to 6, then an added loop may
have the number 7 to 50.
 D - Delete loop on instr. volum. model
This option deletes a single loop, including sensor, transmitter, cable,
control center connections and final control element.
 R - Replace loop on instr. volum. model
This option replaces the automatically generated loop completely with the
exact loop that you specify. If you do not define something for this loop,
or you selectively delete a part, you do not get it. For example, if you
specify a sensor and transmitter only, then you only get the signal
generated and sent to the control center.
 “+” - Append to previous loop w/same no.
This option is used to append extra sensors or control valves to the
immediately preceding, user-defined loop (you must also correctly specify
the loop number of the preceding loop). It may not be used to append
items to automatically generated loops; to do this, you should first use the
replace option to redefine the loop, then use the “+” option. Whether you
are appending a sensor or control element, you should make entries for
both the sensor and control valve locations.
To define more than one adjustment:

 Use the same methods described earlier for Pipe – Item Details
(page 325).
X X
Instrument Loop Adjustment

On the Instrumentation Installation Bulk form, there are eight Loop
Modification fields, which allow you to remove different elements of the
instrument loop from the project. Select “-” from the drop-down menu to
remove an element.
Two of the elements, sensor and control valve, can also be specified as
quoted (“Q”) or vendor-provided (“V”) equipment. When either “Q” or “V” is
selected, the system includes installation manhours for the element but not
material costs.

Deleting the process connection removes all of the instrument piping.
The indicating signal and control signal runs are reported together, so
removing one would decrease the amount of cable and supports by half.
The following diagram shows how the eight adjustable loop elements fit into
the loop design:
Notes:
(A) Junction boxes can be found under PLANT BULKS, INSTRUMENTATION,
JUNC-BOX.
(B) Multi-core runs can be found under PLANT BULKS, INSTRUMENTATION,
ELECTRONIC SIGNAL WIRE. You can specify it with or without the junction
box.
(C) Control centers can be found under PLANT BULKS, INSTRUMENTATION,
MULTIFUNCTION CONTROLLERS (electronic) or PLANT BULKS,
INSTRUMENTATION, INSTRUMENT PANEL – ANALOG (pneumatic).

Electrical
The Electrical installation bulk specifies local equipment lighting, control
wiring and power/cable and motor starters for up to three different types of
electrical loads. It also includes Communication and Alarm Systems.
Insulation
The Insulation installation bulk specifies insulation and fireproofing for
component and installation bulk steel. For components, the insulation type,
jacket type, thickness and area may be specified. For component and steel
fireproofing, type, rating and area may be specified.
Paint
The Paint installation bulk specifies surface preparation and painting of
component and installation bulk steel. Paint for pipe is specified under piping.
Entry field specifications include:
 Size of area to be painted
 Number of prime and final coats
 Percent of painted area to be sandblasted
 Galvanizing (for steel)
Quoted Cost Items

Note: This field is applicable only when used with equipment code of
accounts.
 Quoted cost per item – type the cost per quoted item
 Currency unit for matl cost – select the correct currency
 Source of quote – select the source of the quote
Option Description
SG (Default) System Generated
(blank)
VB Vendor Budget Quote
VBL Vendor Budget Quote Long Lead
VF Vendor Firm Quote
VFL Vendor Firm Quote Long Lead
LQ Licensor Quote
SS Single Source Quote
HD Historical Data

Importing Areas and
Components
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator lets you import entire areas or individual
components from other project scenarios. You can select in Tools| Options |
Preferences | Process whether to also include installation bulks and/or
connected streams (see Chapter 1. Getting Started.Preferences. Process). By
default, installation bulks are included and connected streams are not.
To import an area or component:
1 In the Palette’s Projects view, double-click the project scenario from
which you wish to import.
This displays the project areas in the scenario.
2 Expand an area folder to display the components in it.
 To import a component:
o Drag the component to the desired area in Project Explorer,
Project view.
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator adds the component to the area.
 To import an area and its components:
o Drag the area to Main Project in Project Explorer.
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator adds the area and its
components.
 To import all the components in an area to an existing area in the
current project scenario:
o Drag the area from the Palette to the desired area in Project
Explorer.

Aspen Capital Cost Estimator adds the components to the area without
creating a new area.
Importing an Entire Scenario

As well as allowing you to import individual areas or components, Aspen
Capital Cost Estimator lets you import an entire scenario using a drag-and-
drop operation. This imports all the areas and components in the selected
scenario. You can select in Tools | Options | Preferences | Process
whether to also include installation bulks and/or connected streams (see
Chapter 1. Getting Started.Preferences.Process). By default, installation bulks
are included and connected streams are not.
To import an entire scenario:

1 Have Project Explorer’s Project view open, since you will drag the
scenario there.
2 Click on the scenario in the Palette’s Projects view.
3 Drag the scenario from the Palette to Project Explorer’s Project view.
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator displays a confirmation window.
Note: You can only import scenarios that have the same units of measure as
the current scenario. If the units of measure are not the same, a dialog box
will inform you of this when you try to import.
4 Click Yes.
The areas and components of the selected scenario are imported.

Copying Components
The Copy command copies a selected component and all of its associated
installation bulks. This is useful if you want to add a component that is similar
to an existing item. The item can be copied and modified with less effort than
creating a new item.
Remember to change the Item Description when copying components to
distinguish the copy from the original.
To copy and paste a component:

1 Right-click the component in either Project Explorer or the List window (at
area level, so that components are listed), and then click Copy on the
pop-up menu.
You can also copy multiple components at once: select the desired
components on the list window, right-click on one of the components, and
click Copy on the pop-up menu.
2 Right-click on the area to which you want to add the component(s) and
click Paste on the pop-up menu.
The component is added to the area.
Note: If the area contains a component with the same name as the one
being pasted, Aspen Capital Cost Estimator changes the new component’s
name so that “#1#” appears at the beginning.
Cut and Paste

If you want to delete (cut) a component from one area and add (paste) it in
another area, use the same procedure as above, except click Cut instead of
Copy on the pop-up menu.
Drag and Drop

You can also move a component from one area to another by dragging it.
Modifying Components
You can modify the following components using Spreadsheet View:
 Vessels
 Towers
 Heat Exchangers
 Pumps
 Compressors
 Quoted Components

To modify a component using Spreadsheet View:
1 On the main menu bar, click View | Spreadsheet View | <the type of
component to modify>.
The <the type of component to modify> spreadsheet view appears.
2 On the <the type of component to modify> spreadsheet view, click
Options.
3 On the menu that appears, click the option you want to modify.
4 On the spreadsheet, make your modifications.
5 When you are satisfied with your modifications, click Apply.
6 Click OK.
Your modifications are made in the project.
Note: You cannot use this feature if a component specs form is open that
would let you edit data that would also be editable in the spreadsheet view.
Copying Areas
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator's Area Cut-and-Paste operations let you:
 Create a new Report Group with the same Area and specs as an existing
Report Group
 Replace an Area and its specs with another Area and its specs
To create a new Report Group with the same Area and Specs as an
existing Report Group:
1 On the Project View tab, right click Main Project.
2 On the menu that appears, click Add Report Group.
A Report Group named New Report Group appears on the tree.
3 Right-click New Report Group; then click Rename Report Group.
4 Type the new name for the Report Group; then click ENTER.
5 Right-click the area you want to copy to the new Report Group.
6 On the menu that appears, click Copy Specs.
7 Right-click the new Report Group.
8 On the menu that appears, click Paste.
The area and its specs are copied into the new Report Group.
To replace an Area and Components with another Area and Specs:

1 On the Project View tab, right-click the area you want to copy.
2 On the menu that appears, click Copy Specs.
3 Right-click the area you want to overwrite with the copied area
information.
4 On the menu that appears, click Paste.
5 A warning message appears, telling you that performing this action may
overwrite some data. If you are sure you want to overwrite the area with
the copied area information, click Yes.

The target Area and its specs are replaced with the data from the source Area
and the source Area's specs.
Deleting Components
The Delete command removes a component and all associated installation
bulks from the project.
To delete a component:
1 Right-click on the component in either Project Explorer or the List view
and click Delete on the pop-up menu.
A confirmation dialog box appears.
page 53).
X X
2 Click Yes to delete the component or click No to retain the component.

You can also delete multiple components at one time: select the components
on the list window, right-click on one of the components, and click Delete on
the pop-up menu.
Re-numbering Components
After deleting components, you may wish to re-number the remaining
components so that the numbering contains no gaps and reflects the order in
which components were added.
For example, if you add components A, B, C, D, and E in that order, the
automatically generated Order Numbers would be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, respectively
(the Order Number appears on the List view). If you then delete components
B and C and re-number, components A, D, and E would have Order Numbers
1, 2, 3, respectively. The order in which they were created would still
determine the Order Numbers.
To re-number components:
1 On the Run menu, click Re-number.
2 On the menu that appears, click Project Components.

Deleting Areas
The Delete Area command removes the selected area and all of its
components.
To delete an area:
1. Right-click on the area in Project Explorer and click Delete Area on the pop-up menu.
page 53).
X X
3 Click Yes to delete the area.

-or-
Click No to retain the area.
Re-numbering Areas
Areas have reference numbers that are internally stored and then used by the
Evaluation Engine. They are not visible in the current version of Aspen Capital
Cost Estimator. Just as with components, re-numbering is intended to close
gaps in the numbering after deletion.
To re-number areas:
1 On the Run menu, click Re-number.
2 On the sub-menu that appears, click Project Areas.
Using the Custom Model Tool

Aspen Process Economic Analyzer’s Custom Model tool lets you base
component specifications on formulas or fixed data stored in Excel. Use the
tool to send a component’s specification values, connection stream values,
and specified bulk information (pipe-item details, material and man-hour
adjustments) to an Aspen-designed Excel workbook, where you can enter
new specification values based on your own data or formulas. Then, use the
tool to send the new data back to Aspen Capital Cost Estimator.
For instance, you could use the Custom Model tool to calculate a pump driver
power based on a flow rate and pump head or to calculate project component
costs using your own custom method in Excel.
The specifications rules remain stored in Excel, so that you can change the
specifications in Aspen Process Economic Analyzer and then revert back to the

Excel specifications by re-running the tool (if the values are fixed). Once the
tool has been used with a project component, Aspen Process Economic
Analyzer associates the customized project component with the last Excel
spreadsheet used. Running the tool at the project level updates all
components for which the tool has already been run.
The tool provides template files for mixers and pumps, as well as a general
template to use as the starting point for creating files for other components.
However, for components other than pumps and mixers, you must first copy
the general template file (or use Save As) and enter the slot names for the
component specifications you wish to input, as explained below.
To use the Custom Model tool on a project component:
Note: Before using this tool, you must select the Activate Custom Model
option on the Process tab in Preferences. See page 53 for information on
X X
accessing Preferences.
1 In Project Explorer, Project view, right-click the pump or mixer
component that you wish to customize.
2 On the menu that appears, click Custom Model.
The User Custom Model dialog box appears. It displays the name of the
project, scenario, and project component selected for the operation. It also
displays available Microsoft Excel (.xls) template files.

3 Click the Excel template file that you have created for the selected project
component.
4 Click Run.
Excel displays the workbook, with tabs for:
 Input
 Custom Rules
 Output
The Input worksheet displays the original Icarus system values from Aspen
Capital Cost Estimator.
 Item information is provided at the top of the worksheet. The item
information is from the Component Specifications form.
 Stream information, if available, is shown toward the bottom.
 Below the stream information is information on the installation bulks for
Material and Man-hour Adjustments and Pipe Item Detail.

The Custom Rules worksheet is provided for storing any data that you may
wish to use in the output formulas.
Input specs have been placed on the Custom Rules along with sample
alterations for the following:
 Mixer with three inlet streams and one exit stream
 Pump with connection streams, material and man-hour adjustments
 Pipe item details
The Output worksheet displays the same component specification slots as on
the Input worksheet. However, you can customize the values on the Output
worksheet.

The values are in the same column-row position as on the Input worksheet,
so that you can easily reference the Input data when entering formulas.
You send the entries on the Output worksheet to Aspen Process Economic
Analyzer by clicking Apply or OK on the Custom Model tool.
The following include customized values based on the sample alterations on
the Custom Rules worksheet:
 Mixer with three inlet streams and one exit stream
 Pump with connection streams, material and man-hour adjustments
 Pipe item details
These customizations have been entered solely for example purposes.
5 Enter new specifications on the Output worksheet. For example, if you
want to double the Input flow rate value provided on Row 10, Column C,
enter the following formula:
=Input!C10*2
6 Go to the Custom Model tool; then click OK to send the output to Aspen
Process Economic Analyzer and close the tool.
When you display the specifications form of the component, you will see the
values from the Output worksheet.
Creating a Template
To create a template for a component:
1 Open GeneralModelTemplate.xls; then save it as another file. The
folder in which you store Custom Model files is specified on the Locations
tab in Preferences (APICustomModelDir). The default is:
AspenTech\ Economic Evaluation V8.0\Program\API Custom Models
2 Starting on Row 6, Column B for item information, enter the slot names
for the specifications that you want to have sent from Aspen Process
Economic Analyzer when the file is run for a component.

Slot names for every equipment and plant bulk item are provided in Icarus
Technology Object Definitions (API.pdf). For example, to have the tool send
Shell Design Temperature to Excel when the file is run for Fixed Tube
Heat Exchangers, you would need to enter CPDesignTemperatureShell.
3 For connection stream information, enter slot names starting on Row 43,
Column B.
4 For material and man-hour adjustments, enter slot names starting on row
70, column B.
5 For the pipe-item details, enter slot names starting on row 101, column B.
Running the Custom Model Tool at

Project-Level for Batch Update
The batch update process for the Custom Model can be done one of two ways.
 The first method is for a batch update of custom model operations
performed on project components that are already linked to a custom
model template.
 The second method is for a batch update of all selected components.
After using the Custom Model tool for any number of components, you can
continue to experiment with different specifications and easily revert back to
the custom specifications by running the tool at the project level. Simply
right-click Main Project or Project Area in Project Explorer’s Project view;
then click Custom Model.
If more than one project component has been selected for the custom model
(for example, multi-selection, area selection, project selection), a message
box will appear asking you to specify the mode of operation.

If you click Yes, you will be able to specify a custom model template and all
of the selected project components will be processed with the one chosen
template.
If you click No, only project components with a link to a custom model
template will be processed with their associated template.
Note: the output will be based on the values in the Output workbook in
Excel. If the Output workbook contains formulas based on input, changes in
input since originally running the Custom Model will affect the output when
the Custom Model is re-run.
This re-runs all custom models stored in the Custom Model tool.

5 Sizing Project Components
Note: Sizing is only available in Aspen Capital Cost Estimator if you are
licensed to use Aspen Icarus Process Evaluator (Aspen Process Economic
Analyzer) or Aspen Decision Analyzer and you select at startup to use one of
them in the Aspen Capital Cost Estimator environment.
Overview
Sizing for Project Components Mapped
from Simulator Items
Operating conditions for the project components mapped from simulator
models are obtained from the information loaded into Aspen Capital Cost
Estimator from the simulator report. Any Design Data in the simulator report
is also loaded and used during sizing. The information consists of a unit
operation model and the streams connected to it.
You can size a mapped project component in either of two ways:
 Right-click the component in Project Explorer and click Size Item on the
pop-up menu.
 Click the Size button on the Component Specifications form:
5 Sizing Project Components 343

Interactive Sizing Expert
For the following components, Aspen Capital Cost Estimator provides the
Interactive Sizing form that lets you adjust sizing specifications. The
Interactive Sizing form appears when you size the component.
Heat Exchangers DHE FIXED-T-S
DHE FLOAT-HEAD
DHE U-TUBE
DRB KETTLE
DRB THERMOSIPH
DRB U-TUBE
Compressors DCP CENTRIF

DCP GEN-SERV
DGC CENTRIF
DGC CENTRIF-IG
DGC RECIP-MOTR
EGC RECIP-GAS
DCP ANSI
DCP ANSI-PLAST
DCP API 610
DCP API 610-IL
DCP CANNED
DCP TURBINE
DCP PULP STOCK
DCP NAG DRIVE
Pumps DCP ANSI

DCP ANSI-PLAST
DCP API 610
DCP API 610-IL
DCP CANNED
DCP TURBINE
DCP PULP STOCK
DCP NAG DRIVE
Vessels DHT HORIZ-DRUM

DVT CYLINDER
DVT SPHERE
DVT SPHEROID
DVT STORAGE
If interactive sizing is not available, Aspen Capital Cost Estimator sizes the
item automatically using the simulator data.
344 5 Sizing Project Components

Sizing for Project Components Not Mapped
from Simulator Items
Project components not mapped from simulator items can be sized if they are
connected to streams. See “Creating Streams to Connect to Components” on
page 346 for instructions on creating inlet and outlet streams. If the
X X
component is one of those for which interactive sizing is available (see list on
page 360), the Interactive Sizing form is displayed during sizing. See “Using
X X
the Interactive Sizing Form” for instructions on connecting a component to

streams during sizing.
If sizing is not available for a component, the Size option is unavailable.
Resizing Project Components

If the process conditions associated with a component change, then use the
Re-Size command on the project component pop-up menu to update all
equipment sizing information.
The Re-Size command will clear all the previous sizing results and then size
the equipment based on the current process conditions (those that you have
entered and those available from the currently loaded simulator file).
Therefore, if the component being re-sized is one of those for which
interactive sizing is available, the Interactive Sizing form that appears is
blank.
If you would like to keep some of your component specifications (that is,, not
have them replaced by those calculated by the Sizing Expert), do not use the
Re-size command. Instead, use the Size command or the Size button to
access the Interactive Sizing form with current specifications retained, rather
than cleared. Then, clear all fields except those you want to retain and click
OK to execute sizing. Aspen Capital Cost Estimator will re-calculate only the
blank fields.

Creating Streams to Connect to
Equipment Items
For most components, the interactive Sizing Expert requires selection of an
inlet stream (that is, a stream carrying fluid to the equipment item) and an
outlet stream (that is, a stream carrying fluid from the equipment item).
The set of instructions below show how to create streams to connect to an
item. In the example, inlet and outlet streams are created to carry 49 DEF F
water to a heat exchanger and an outlet stream is created to carry 200 DEG F
water from the heat exchanger. In the example used in the set of instructions
following these, a heat exchanger is sized to heat water from 40 DEG F to 200
DEG F, using the streams created in the first examples.
To create an inlet stream and an outlet stream:

1 In Project Explorer’s Project Basis view, right-click Streams; then click
Edit.
2 On the Develop Streams dialog box, click the Create tab.

3 In the Streams tree structure, click User. Leave the Basis as Absolute,
since you are creating a completely new process stream.
4 Click Create.
5 On the Create Stream dialog box, enter a stream name, such as

Process-IN.
6 Click OK.
7 On the Develop Stream specifications form, specify:
o a primary fluid component
o temperature
o pressure
o liquid mass flow
Example:
 In the Primary Fluid Component field, click and click Water.
 In the Temperature (DEG F) field, enter 40.
 In the Pressure (PSIA) field, enter 90.
 In the Liquid Mass Flow (LB/H) field, enter 50,000.
8 Click Apply.
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator fills in the rest of the fields in the Liquid
Information section.

9 Click OK to return to the Develop Streams dialog box, where you now
need to create an outlet stream.
10 In the tree structure, click User. Notice that the inlet stream that you just
created is now displayed under User.
11 Click that stream and, in the Basis group, click Relative. The new outlet
stream will be based upon the inlet stream.
12 On the Create Stream dialog box, enter a stream name, such as
Process-OUT.

13 Click OK.
The Develop Stream specifications form appears. Specifications that appear
gray are the same as those of the base stream. Any modifications made will
appear black.
14 Enter an outlet stream temperature that corresponds to temperature to

which the heat exchanger will be heating the fluid. In the example above,
the temperature has been entered as 200 DEG F and the pressure has
been entered as 80 PSIA. The other specifications are the same as the
base stream’s.
15 Click OK to apply the changes and return to the Develop Streams dialog
box, which you can now close.
Using the Interactive Sizing

Form
With the necessary streams created, you are ready to perform sizing.

To size an equipment item:
1 Add an equipment item for which interactive sizing is available (see list
below) and display the Component Specifications form. If you are
following the example, add a floating head shell and tube exchanger. (See
page 310 for instructions on adding components.)
X X
It is not necessary to enter any values on the specifications form before

starting the Sizing Expert. However, all applicable sizing parameters that are
entered in the component specifications form will be carried over
automatically to the sizing expert and used in calculations.
2 Click the Size button.
The Interactive Sizing form appears.
Note: In order for the Sizing Expert to run, you must select process fluid
streams (one at Inlet and one at Outlet conditions) for at least one side (hot
or cold side).

Any other data you provide (for example,, Duty, Overall heat transfer
coefficient, LMTD, and so on) helps the Expert do its job better, but is not
necessary.
3 Click on the Hot Inlet Stream field and then click to access a
drop-down list that includes all utility resources and user-created streams.
Note: “fluid” refers to liquid or gas.

4 If you are heating a fluid, as in the example, select a utility resource to
use as the heating source. The tables on the following page provide
definitions of the utility resources.
To heat a fluid from 40 DEG F to 200 DEG F, as in the example, the utility
Steam @100PSI-Aspen Process Economic Analyzer UTILITY is appropriate.

-or-
If you are cooling a fluid, select the stream carrying the fluid to be
cooled.
Utility Resources
If you specify a utility resource as a stream, the Sizing Expert will estimate
the actual utility rate required for the heat transfer and use this rate to create
utility streams as though they were user-specified. The utility stream names
are prefixed by “ICU” and are present under the Utility category in the
Develop Streams dialog box. These utility streams differ from utility resources
in that they have an actual flow rate whereas a resource is a “reservoir” that
can provide utility streams at any required flow rate.
Default Utility Resources Available for I-P Projects
Inlet Exit Operating

temperature temperature Pressure
Utility
(DEG F) (DEG F) (PSIA) type
Steam @100PSI 327 327 100 Heat

source
source
source
Low Temp Heating Oil 600 550 25 Heat
source
High Temp Heating Oil 725 675 25 Heat
source
Refrigerant – Freon 12 -21 -21 15.5 Heat sink
Refrigerant – Ethylene -150 -150 15.5 Heat sink
Refrigerant – Ethane -130 -130 15.5 Heat sink
Refrigerant – -50 -50 15.5 Heat sink
Propylene
Refrigerant – Propane -40 -40 15.5 Heat sink
Cooling Water 95 75 50 Heat sink
Default Utility Resources Available for METRIC Projects

Utility
(DEG C) (DEG C) (KPA) type
Steam @2760KPA 229.2 229.2 2760 Heat

source
Steam @1135KPA 184 184 1135 Heat
source
Steam @690KPA 164 164 690 Heat
source

Default Utility Resources Available for METRIC Projects

Utility
(DEG C) (DEG C) (KPA) type
Low Temp Heating Oil 315 287 2523 Heat

source
High Temp Heating Oil 385 357 2523 Heat
source
Refrigerant – Freon 12 -29.8 -29.8 105 Heat sink
Refrigerant – Ethylene -101 -101 105 Heat sink
Refrigerant – Ethane -90 -90 105 Heat sink
Refrigerant – -45 -45 105 Heat sink
Propylene
Refrigerant – Propane -40 -40 105 Heat sink
Cooling Water 35 24 105 Heat sink

5 Click on the Hot Outlet Stream field and then click to access the
drop-down list of utility resources and user-created streams.
6 If you are heating a fluid, select again the utility to use as the heating
source.
-or-
If you are cooling a fluid, select the stream carrying the cooled fluid from
the exchanger.
7 Click on the Cold Inlet Stream field and then click to access the
drop-down list of utility resources and user-created streams.
8 If you are heating a fluid, select the stream carrying the fluid to be
heated.
9 A If you are following the example, select the Process-IN stream that you
created in the previous set of instructions (see “Creating Streams,”
pages 346 through 349).
X X X X
B If you are cooling a fluid, select a heat sink utility to use as a cooling
medium.
Click the Cold Outlet Stream field and then click to access the drop-down
list of utility resources and user-created streams.
If you are heating a fluid, select the stream carrying the heated fluid from the
exchanger.
 If you are following the example,
select the Process-OUT stream that you
created in the previous set of instructions
(see “Creating Streams,” pages 346 X X
through 349).
X X
If you are cooling a fluid, select again the

heat sink utility to use as the cooling
medium.
10 Click Apply. Aspen Capital Cost Estimator fills in the other fields on the
Interactive Sizing form.

Note: results are not transferred to the Component Specifications form until
you click OK and the sizing is successfully completed (that is,, without
generating error messages).
11 Click OK.
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator provides a message informing you of the
overdesign factor.
12 Click OK to accept this message.

The values obtained from Interactive Sizing now appear on the Component
Specifications form.

10 Click OK to save.
You can now run an item evaluation and see the values generated by the
Sizing Expert in the item report.
Global Sizing Selection

You can define and/or select a sizing selection library to pre-define the sizing
selection for a project scenario. For each type of component, you can specify
custom models that will be applied in the sizing phase. These rules can also
be modified on a component-by-component basis when working on a specific
project scenario. For example, if you want to have all DCP CENTRIF based
equipment models within a project scenario sized with a specific custom
model, you can edit or create a Sizing Selection library (see Figure 1) to be
used. These libraries must be edited/created outside of a project.

Figure 1: Library tab in palette
To edit the library:

1 Double-click the library name (for example, my sizing).
The Sizing Selection dialog box appears.
2 To view or edit the sizing selection, click on the equipment model. All
equipment models default to “System Sizing” (see Figure 2).
Figure 2: Sizing Selection dialog box

3 To add or remove a custom model to the sizing selection list, click New
Sizing; then click your choice on the list of available custom models (see
Figure 3).

Figure 3: Add new sizing with custom model
The current sizing list for the equipment model is order dependent (see Figure
4).
Figure 4: Current Sizing List with System sizing and two custom models
Once this library has been specified, it must be selected in the project (see
Figure 5).
Figure 5: Selecting the Sizing Selection library for a project scenario
Sizing Areas
The Area sizing feature in Aspen Capital Cost Estimator develops length and
width of an area from the equipment in the area. When actual area
dimensions are not available, you can get a better estimate of area length
and width from the system when these parameters are not specified in the
area specs form.
The system calculated area length and width is used in the design of all area
bulks. You can use the system calculated area parameters as the area specs.

To have Aspen Capital Cost Estimator calculate the area:
1 Open the Aspen Capital Cost Estimator project.
2 Modify an area spec by right-clicking the area; then, on the menu that
appears, clicking Modify.
3 Click Specification | Area Specs; then, on the menu that appears, click
Modify.
4 Clear the values for Area length and Area width.
5 Click OK; then click Close.
6 Evaluate the project.
In the report, the system-calculated length and width for each area appear in:
 AREA BULK REPORT
 AREA DATA SHEET
To specify the area yourself:

3 Click Specification | Area Specs; then, on the menu that appears, click
Modify.
4 Enter values for Area length and Area width.
5 Click Area Piping; then enter data for the piping envelope.
6 Click Area Electrical; then enter data for Distance equipment to
panel/DB.
7 Click OK; then click Close.
In the report, the system-calculated length and width for each area appear in:
 AREA DATA SHEET
To Develop Area Utility Piping and Pipe Racks – system calculated

area length and width:
3 Click Specification | Area Piping; then, on the menu that appears, click
Modify.
4 Clear the data in the Utility length parameter (0) and Utility stations
(-) fields.
5 Click OK.
6 Click Area Steel; then, on the menu that appears, click Modify.
7 Clear the data in the Pipe rack length (0) field; then click OK.
8 Close the Area Specification menu.

Some areas generate utility headers, utility stations. and pipe rack bulks. This
information appears in:
Sizing Requirements,
Calculations, and Defaults
Certain types of components have minimum input requirements for sizing.
Those requirements are provided in the following sections, along with
explanations of how the sizing is calculated for different component types.
Air Coolers
Minimum Input Requirements

 Inlet Stream
 Exit Stream
Sizing Procedure
The air cooler thermal and detailed mechanical design equations are given
below:
For thermal design:

Q = U*A*MTD
MTD = f*LMTD
For mechanical design:

A = pi*D_tube*N_tubeRows*N_tubesPerRow* Tube_length
where:
Q = Heat Duty
U = Heat transfer coefficient
A = Bare tube surface area
MTD = Mean Temperature difference
LMTD = Log mean temperature difference, based on
purely countercurrent flow
f = Temperature correction factor
N_bays = Number of bays
N_tube_rows = Number of tube rows
N_tubesPerRow = Number of tubes per row (takes into account the
presence of a fan shaft)
Tube_length = Length of tubes

The process fluid properties (temperature, pressure, and specific heat
capacity) are assumed to be constant throughout the air cooler and are
estimated as the mean of the inlet and outlet stream properties. The required
heat duty is calculated from the inlet and outlet process stream conditions if it
is not specified.
The process fluid stream temperatures, inlet and exit, are used along with the
temperatures specified for the air stream (Design Criteria specifications) to
calculate the LMTD. The temperature correction factor is then used to
calculate the MTD.
If the process fluid temperatures and air temperatures are appropriate,
meaning that there is no temperature crossover and the temperature
approach at the ends is reasonable, then the surface area required for the
given heat duty is estimated using the thermal design equation. The air flow
rate needed to realize this heat duty is then calculated using the specified
ambient and outlet air conditions.
An iterative algorithm has been developed to size the air cooler. The sizing
routine calculates the heat duty that can be realized using the specified tube
bundle geometry (bay width, number of tube rows, and tube length). It
assumes defaults for parameters that you have not specified. If the computed
heat duty is larger than the heat duty actually required, the iterative
procedure terminates. The tube bundle arrangement used represents the
specification of the air cooler selected. If the calculated heat duty does not
meet the required heat duty then a bigger air cooler is chosen (that is,
parameter values are increased) and the above procedure is repeated. The
iterative procedure terminates either when a tube bundle geometry that can
meet the heat duty requirements is found, or when even the largest available
air cooler does not meet the process requirements.
Air-side heat transfer coefficients are calculated using the relations that take
into account the tube bundle geometry.
The work of Young, Briggs, and Robinson, as summarized in [6] is being used
to evaluate the heat transfer and pressure drop of air across the tube bundle.
The pressure drop thus calculated is used in estimating the fan power
required. The number of fans required is calculated based on the aspect ratio
(tube length/bay width). For any aspect ratio of up to 1.5, only one fan is
selected.
Defaults
Tube pitch = 2.5 INCHES
Tube thickness = 0.125 INCHES
Bay width = 4 ft to 20 ft
Tube rows = 3 to 6
Maximum Tube = 3*Bay width
length
Inlet air temperature (from Design Criteria specifications)

Outlet air temperature (from Design Criteria specifications)

Agitated Tanks

 Inlet stream
 Exit stream
Sizing Procedure
The capacity of the agitated tank is determined by the following equation:
C = Q * (T_r / 60.0)
where:
C = Capacity , CF
Q = Liquid volumetric flowrate, CFH
T_r = Liquid residence time, MINUTES
The diameter of the agitated tank is determined using L/D and geometry:
C = (/4) * D^2 * L
where:
D = Diameter of vessel, FEET
L = Fluid height, FEET
Vessel height is obtained by the following:

H = L + h_d
where:
H = Vessel height, FEET
h_d = Vapor disengagement height, FEET
Design parameters are based on the current Design Criteria specifications if

available:
Length/Diameter Ratio: = 3
Default
Vapor disengagement height: = 1 FEET
Default
Agitator type: Default = ANCHOR
Driver type: Default = STD
Impeller type: Default = T6FB

Operating pressure is obtained from the simulator report. If the report does
not have a value, then the pressure of the inlet stream having the maximum
value is chosen as the operating pressure.
The operating pressure is used to obtain the L/D ratio (if user specification is
absent).
If P <= 250 PSIA, then L/D = 3

If 250 < P <= 500 PSIA, then L/D = 4
If P > 500 PSIA, then L/D = 5
where:
P = Pressure, PSI
L = Fluid height, FEET
D = Diameter of vessel, FEET
The project component must have at least one process stream connected to
the inlet and exit. Also, since the sizing procedure is based on the liquid
holding period, at least one of the streams should have liquid phase.
The design pressure and temperature are based on the operating pressure
and temperature as modified by your entries on the Design Criteria
Compressors

 Inlet and Exit stream information
 Driver Power (for Reciprocating Compressors)
Sizing Procedure
The capacity requirement for the compressor is calculated from the inlet
stream information. The inlet stream flow rate and density are used to
estimate the total volumetric flow rate through the compressor.
The compression ratio (exit to inlet pressure) is obtained from the operating
pressures of the inlet and exit stream.
The compressibility factor (inlet and exit) is based on user-specified
information, if available, or estimated by the sizing expert based on the
Primary Fluid Component.
The Icarus Evaluation Engine estimates the driver power if it is neither user-
specified nor provided in the simulator report. The engine currently uses a
mechanical efficiency of 100% to arrive at the brake horsepower. The brake
horsepower, thus calculated, is compared against a table of available
standard motor sizes. If the calculated brake horsepower is not found in the
table, then the motor with the next higher horsepower is selected.

If the driver horsepower is either user-specified or provided in the simulator
report, the engine uses this value. However for pricing the compressor, the
table of available standard motor sizes is referred. If the specified horsepower
is not found in the table, then the price of the motor with the next higher
horsepower is used.
In the case of simulator inputs, different simulators provide information that
may be slightly different. For instance, in the case of AspenPlus, the
compressor calculations take into account any mechanical efficiency specified
during the simulation run. So the “brake horsepower” reported in the case of
AspenPlus already takes into account the mechanical efficiency. However,
other simulators, such as SimSci (“Actual Work”); HYSIM and HYSYS (“Energy
Required”), and ChemCAD ( “Actual Power”); do not account for mechanical
efficiency. Keep this in mind and be aware of what has been accounted for in
the simulation side when using simulator information as inputs.
Defaults
Minimum inlet pressure for air compressors is 14.696 PSIA
Crushers
Minimum Input Requirement

 Inlet and Exit stream information
 Final product size.
Sizing Procedure
The sizing expert estimates the solid flow rate from the inlet stream
information. The crushing ratio (feed to product size) is set at 4.
Work index is the total energy in KWH/TONS, needed to reduce the feed to a
size so that 80% of the product will pass through a 100 micron screen. The
sizing expert in Aspen Capital Cost Estimator assumes a default value of
13.81 for the material work index.
The total driver power required for the crusher is calculated using material
work index and the value of the product size.
The following equation is used to estimate the driver power:
P = 1.46 (T_m) (W_i) ( 1/(d_p ^ 0.5) - 1/(d_r ^0.5))
where:
P = Driver power, HP
T_m = Crusher capacity, TPM
W_i = Material work index
d_p = Product size, FEET
d_r = Feed size, FEET

Defaults
 Material Work Index: 13.8 KWh/ton
 Size Reduction Ratio: 4
Crystallizers
Minimum Information Required

Inlet and Exit Stream information
Additional Information
Final Product size
Sizing Procedure
The sizing program calculates the crystallizer capacity based on the inlet and
exit stream information.
Default value of 0.83 MM is used as final product size if the user-specified
value is not available from the simulator report.
In addition, the following defaults values are used for the design parameters:
Growth = 0.36 MM/H
rate
The residence time in hours for a batch crystallizer is determined by the

following relation:
Residence time = d_p / (3 * R_g
where:
d_p = Product size, MM
R_g = Growth rate, MM/H
Based on the minimum and maximum values for the required fields in the
component specification form, the number of additional crystallizers are
estimated.
Dryers

Inlet and Exit stream information

Sizing Procedure
The sizing program calculates the dryer capacity based on the total
evaporation rate for the drying process. For tray and drum dryers, an average
depth of 2.25 FEET is used to determine the total dryer requirements. For
vacuum and jacketed rotary vacuum dryers, the dryer capacity is determined
by obtaining value of the drying time and the average percentage utilization
of the dryer capacity.
The system defaults are as follows:
Drying = 0.75 HOUR
time
Average = 25
percentage
utilization
The number of additional items required for the given drying operation is
determined from the knowledge-based engine in Aspen Capital Cost
Estimator, which analyzes minimum and maximum values for the required
fields in the specification form.
Dust Collectors

Sizing Procedure
The sizing program estimates the vapor volume flowing through the dust
collector using the exit stream information available from the simulator
report.
In case of cyclones, the sizing program assumes a default linear velocity of
150 FPS. The height to width ratio is fixed at 2.5.
Using the above defaults, the volumetric rate through the separator is
obtained using Zenz correlation represented by the following equation:
Q = 2.5 (D ^ 2) V / 16
where:
Q = Vapor volumetric rate, CFS
D = Cyclone separator diameter, FEET
V = Linear velocity, FPS
In case of baghouse dust collectors, the sizing program uses Nylon as the
default filter cloth material to determine the air to media ratio which then
determines the diameter of the separator.

Air to media ratio is the flow rate of air (at 70 DEG F) in CFM. The default
ratio results in a pressure drop of 0.5 INCHES of water when passed through
1 SF of clean fabric.
The sizing program uses a default air to media ratio of 10 CFM.
The minimum and maximum values of the required field(s) shown in the
component specification form are used to determine the number of identical
equipment items.
Filters

 Inlet stream
 Exit stream
Sizing Procedure
The sizing program calculates the total amount of filtration product rate based
on the exit stream information. Based on the type of filter selected, the
average dimension of the filter equipment is selected and the filter size is
then optimized for the given operation such that the dimensions selected for
the equipment are within the minimum and maximum values as specified by
the knowledge-based engine.
In case of batch filtration, a default batch time of 0.25 HOUR is used. In case
of plate and frame filters, default value of cake thickness of 0.3 FEET is used.
In the case of continuous operation, the cycle time default is 0.08 HOUR.
Based on the actual capacity requirement and the maximum and minimum
sizes provided by the knowledge-based engine, the number of identical items
is determined.
Heat Exchangers
The heat exchanger sizing program estimates the heat transfer area required
for the given operating conditions. The model also performs detail estimation
of the number of tubes, tube length, and other internal components of the
heat exchanger based on either user-defined specifications (from the process
simulator report or the Design Criteria specifications form) or system defaults.

Inlet and Exit Process Stream Information
Sizing Procedure
The process stream(s) are classified into various categories. The Primary Fluid
Component class that you specify for the process fluid(s) flowing through the
heat exchanger is used to estimate the following design parameters:

 Latent heats (vaporization and condensation)
 Fouling resistance
 Specific heat capacity of the fluid
 Liquid film resistance
 Overall heat transfer coefficient
Duty requirement for the heat exchanger is either directly obtained from the
simulator report or estimated based on the inlet and exit process stream
information for the process model. In case the fluid undergoes phase change,
a boiling point temperature, Tb, is estimated that would lie between the inlet
and exit stream temperature. The estimated Tb is then used in the calculation
of the sensible and latent heats based on the Primary Fluid Component. The
sensible heat of any solids present in the stream is also accounted for in the
duty calculation.
In estimating the design pressure on shell and tube heat exchangers, the
2/3rd Rule is applied if it has been selected on the Design Criteria
specifications form (see page 199).X X
If only the process fluid conditions are specified by the simulator model, the
heat exchanger sizing program determines the appropriate utility from the list
of utilities that you specify using the Utility Specifications accessed from
Project Basis view (see page 212). If multiple utilities are available for heat
X X
transfer, then the sizing expert uses the utility fluid with a temperature
approach closest to the process fluid. This minimizes the heat transfer losses.
However, a minimum of 1 degree Fahrenheit difference in the final
temperature of the process fluid and the utility fluid must exist for the utility
fluid to be selected for the process. If an appropriate utility fluid is not
available for the heat transfer process, the heat exchanger sizing program will
terminate without estimating the heat exchanger size requirements.
The mean temperature difference (MTD) is estimated based on the fluid
temperature for both the shell and the tube side. It also depends on the flow
configuration for shell and tube heat exchangers, which is specified by the
number of shell and tube passes. For reasons of compactness of equipment,
the paths of both fluids may require several reversals in direction. Mean
temperature differences in such cases can be obtained by applying a factor
(called the F-factor) to the terminal temperature difference. The logarithmic
mean temperature difference (based on purely counter current flow) is
multiplied by the F-factor to obtain the mean temperature difference.
If the temperatures are not properly entered then appropriate warning
messages are displayed. In such cases it recommended that you check the
inlet and outlet temperatures of the shell and tube side streams and verify
that they are realistic.
The overall heat transfer coefficient is either directly obtained from the
simulator report or evaluated based on the shell and tube fluid properties
(film resistance, fouling tendency present for the various processes in the
system database).
The heat exchanger sizing program determines the position of the fluids in
the shell and tube heat exchanger. The position depends on both the process
and utility fluid class.

If duty is provided by the simulator report, then you can override the value
only through interactive sizing.
The final heat transfer area is obtained by multiplying the heat transfer area,
calculated based on the duty required, with the Heat Exchanger Minimum
Overdesign Factor. If you do not specify an overdesign factor then the default
value is used from the Design Criteria specifications.
If the duty generates a surface area less than minimum required for practical
design, the item report will give the appropriate warning message.
FLOAT HEAD or U-TUBE heat exchangers have an even number of tube
passes. If you enter an odd number for the number of tube passes for any of
these heat exchanger types, Aspen Capital Cost Estimator generates warning
messages.
The shell and tube design pressure and temperature are based on the
maximum operating conditions of the fluid flowing through the shell and tube
respectively. The Design Criteria specifications form lets you change them
according to individual project requirements.
Note: If a size is entered for heat exchangers/reboilers after a scaling run is

made, only the area is scaled. If tube diameter is specified, then that value is
retained after scaling. If no diameter is given, then the default diameter is
used in the scaling calculations.
Heat Exchanger Internals

The final heat transfer area is determined by the actual number of tubes
chosen for the equipment. The least surface area of the combination of
numbered tubes and shells is changed for final design.
A default tube length of 20 FEET is used for calculating the number of tubes.
System default values for tube diameter, tube thickness, tube pitch and baffle
distances are used if user specifications are not available.
General Information
The utility requirement is estimated only when the system determines the
utility fluid. If both shell and tube side fluid stream information is specified in
the simulator report, then the system assumes that both of the fluid streams
are process streams and that no utility fluid is expended.
Presently, the model defaults are used for determining the material of
construction.
For shell and tube heat exchangers, if the heat transfer surface area
calculated by the sizing program is greater than the largest heat exchanger
designed by the design and cost engine, then the heat exchanger is divided
into multiple shells with identical configurations. The capital cost estimation is
then calculated based on the complete heat exchanger.

Note: When mapping a rigorous heat exchanger model (HXRIG) from
SimSci, the number of shells in parallel is used to determine the number of
shells in Aspen Capital Cost Estimator. For Aspen Capital Cost Estimator, the
maximum number of shells in series is 1.
Double Pipe Heat Exchanger

The sizing program in Aspen Capital Cost Estimator estimates the total
surface area required for the given duty. During the capital cost estimation,
detailed design for the heat exchanger is developed based on the values for
tube length and number of tubes per shell obtained from the simulator report
or from the user.
Fin Tube Heat Exchanger

The sizing program estimates the total surface area required for the given
duty. During the capital cost estimation, detailed design for the heat
exchanger is developed based on the tube length and number of fins per tube
obtained either from the simulator report or from the user.
Spiral Plate Heat Exchanger

The sizing program estimates the total surface area required for the given
duty. During the capital cost estimation, detailed design for the heat
exchanger is developed based on the tube length and number of fins per tube
obtained either from the simulator report or from the user.
Pumps

Sizing Procedure
The sizing program calculates the total capacity requirements for the selected
pump based on the total flow rate of the inlet fluid stream(s) obtained from
the simulator.
Flow Rate/Capacity
Pump flow rate is obtained from the simulator information. If the information
does not exist, then pump flow rate is calculated based on the stream flow
rates. The stream is assumed to be completely liquid phase and no check is
made for presence of vapor phase.
The pump flow rate obtained from the simulator information is multiplied by
the pump overdesign factor, also referred as the capacity over-design factor,
present in the Design Criteria specifications file.

Pump% Efficiency
Pump efficiency is directly obtained from the simulator. If the value is not
present in the simulator report, then the default value of 70% is used.
Pump Overdesign
You can modify the pump overdesign factor either on the Design Criteria
specifications form or the Interactive Sizing form. Modifying the overdesign
factor using the Design Criteria specifications form (page 199) will applies the
X X
new factor to all the pumps in the project. Modifying the overdesign factor for
a pump using the Interactive Sizing form (page 349) applies the factor only to
X X
that particular pump. This lets you either specify the factor for all pumps or
specify the factor individually for each pump.
Driver Power
If you specify a driver power in the component specification form then this
value is used. If the user does not provide the value then it is calculated by
the cost engine. The Icarus Evaluation Engine calculates the hydraulic
horsepower based on the capacity, viscosity and head, and then uses the
pump efficiency to estimate the brake horsepower. The brake horsepower is
compared against a set of standard available motor sizes to estimate the
pump driver power.
If multiple inlet streams are present, the minimum value of pressure is used
for determining the operating pressure of the equipment.
Defaults (if they are not obtained from the

simulators):
 Operating pressure: 14.696 PSIA
 Operating temperature: 77 DEG F
Calculating Pump Head

The total head developed by the pump is composed of the difference between
the static, pressure, and velocity heads. Additionally, friction at the suction
and discharge sides would also contribute to some head loss. The pump head
is calculated using the following relation:
Head, = h_d – h_s
FEET
where:
H = total pump head, FEET
h_d = discharge head, FEET
h_s = suction head, FEET
Assumptions:
 No friction losses at the entrance and exit.
 No static head on suction and discharge sides.

 Velocity heads are not included in estimating the suction and discharge
heads.
Head in feet is estimated by the following relations:
Head, = (Pressure, PSIA) * (2.31)/(Fluid specific gravity)
FEET
The specific gravity of the fluid is based on inlet streams conditions. The
discharge pressure for the pump is based on the maximum value for the exit
stream(s). The suction pressure is based on the minimum value for the inlet
streams(s).
Screens

 Inlet stream information
 Screen opening size (or average product size)
Sizing Procedure
The sizing program determines the capacity of the screen based on the inlet
flow rate estimated from the stream information.
The screen opening size is used to determine the final product size.
The feed material for the vibrating screen is obtained from the Design Criteria
specifications. The following choices are available:
 Sand and Gravel
 Limestone/Crushed Stones
 Coal
 Cinders
 Coke
 Wood
The material type affects the screen unit capacity which is defined as the
amount of solid (in tons per hour) flowing through one square foot of screen
cloth based on material, having 6 to 8% moisture, screen cloth having 50%
or more open area; 85% screen efficiency.
Based on the material selected and the screen opening size, the screen unit
capacity is chosen. Further, the sizing program assumes that five layers of
particles are present on the screen. The surface area required for the
vibrating screen is obtained.
Based on the maximum and minimum values specified by the knowledge base
for the screen capacity, additional items required by the operations are
determined.

Towers

 Stage temperature, pressure, flowrates
 Number of stages
 Inlet stream
 Exit stream
Sizing Procedure
The distillation column sizing module can be used to size the following Icarus
process equipment:
 DDT TRAYED
 DDT PACKED
 TW TRAYED
 TW PACKED
 DC HE TW
The following simulator models can be used to generate the necessary
process information required for successfully executing the application:
Simulator Models used
AspenPlus ABSBR, DISTWU, DISTL, RADFRAC

HYSIM/HYSYS COLUMN
Pro/II COLUMN, IO, SURE, CHEMDIST, SHORTCUT
Loading Column Model from Simulator

In Aspen Capital Cost Estimator, the rigorous column unit operations loaded
from the simulator report (that is, COLUMN UNITS model in PRO/II) are
developed in great detail, including all pieces attached to the main column
unit.
Typically, the simulator model develops stage information for the main tower
and duties for an associated condenser and reboiler. These duties are used
along with the specified fluid conditions available from the stage information
tables to generate all of the input specifications required for the equipment.
Sidestrippers and pumparounds are separated from the main tower if
necessary during the loading process after all the relevant information is
collected for the models. Once the report is loaded, these units are treated as
separate simulator models which can be mapped and sized independently of
the main tower design.
Sidestrippers
Sidestrippers attached to tower models are separated from the main tower
model during the loading process. Sidestrippers load information from the
same tables in the report from which the main tower information is discerned.

For example, the typical information loaded for sidestrippers in Pro/II are:
SIDESTRIPPER ABC
COLUMN SUMMARY
—————— NET FLOW RATES —————— HEATER
TRAY TEMP PRESSURE LIQUID VAPOR FEED PRODUCT DUTIES
DEG C KPA KG-MOL/HR M*KJ/HR
————— ————— ———————— —————— —————— ————— ——————— ———————
1/ 10 200.3 600.50 22. 20.0L 8.5V

2/ 11 202.2 601.53 7.8 5.0V 20.1L
SIDESTRIPPER ABC
TYPE STREAM PHASE

FROM TO LIQUID FLOW RATES HEAT RATES
TRAY TRAY FRAC KG-MOL/HR M*KJ/HR
————— —————— —————— ————— ——— —————— —————————— ———————————
FEED ABCDRW LIQUID 10 1.0000 23.00 1.3216
FEED ABCSTM VAPOR 11 .0000 5.55 .2785
PROD ABCSRVP VAPOR 10 8.46 .5325
PROD ABCPRD LIQUID 11 20.09 1.0678
Information is obtained for the sidestrippers in the same manner as for the
main tower unit (Refer to information for obtaining process data for main
tower unit).
Pumparounds
The inlet and outlet fluid conditions for pumparounds are obtained from the
stage information to which the unit is connected. Additionally, the duty
associated with each pumparound is loaded into the unit. This unit is then
separated during the loading process and is treated as an independent
simulator model which can be mapped and sized on its own.
For example, the information required by pumparound units in PRO/II are
obtained from the following part of the column report:
COLUMN SUMMARY
————— NET FLOW RATES ————— HEATER

TRAY TEMP PRESSURE LIQUID VAPOR FEED PRODUCT DUTIES
DEG F PSIG LB-MOL/HR MM BTU/HR
———— ————— ———————— —————— ————— ————— ——————— —————————
.
.
.
40R 355.9 33.00 5618.9 4301.4L 94.6551
PUMPAROUNDS
TRAY TEMP, DEG F LIQUID FRACTION ——————————— RATES ———————————

FROM TO FROM TO FROM TO LB-MOL/HR M LB/HR STD BBL/HR
—— —— —————— ————— —————— ————— ————————— ———————— ——————————
40 40 355.9 416.1 1.0000 .4108 7273.09 995.238 3569.48
Mapping the Tower Model

Typically, column models in simulators do not include the ancillary equipment
attached to the main tower. For example, a tower unit may really consist of
the following equipment:
 Main tower
 Overhead condenser
 Condenser accumulator
 Overhead split

 Reflux pump
 Overhead pump
 Overhead product sub-cooler
 Reboiler
 Bottoms split
 Bottoms product pump
 Bottoms product heat exchanger
Both overhead and bottoms split are process stream splitters and therefore
do not represent any project component. In Aspen Capital Cost Estimator,
during mapping and sizing process, they are typically mapped as a quoted
cost item with zero cost.
In addition, the equipment design could involve splitting the units into more
than one actual piece for reasons of economy. For example, in many
applications, condensers are split into a precooler (which is typically an air
cooler but also can be any other type of heat exchanger) and a trim cooler
(typically a shell and tube heat exchanger).
Tower models (such as RADFRAC model in AspenPlus, COLUMN UNIT in
PRO/II and COLUMN in HYSIM/HYSYS) can be mapped into any of the
following ten Aspen Capital Cost Estimator configurations:
 Standard - Single or Standard - Total
o Tower
o Condenser
o Condenser accumulator
o Overhead split
o Reflux pump
o Bottoms split
o Reboiler.
 Full - Single
o Tower
o Condenser
o Overhead split
o Reflux pump
o Overhead pump
o Overhead product heat exchanger
o Bottoms split
o Reboiler
o Bottoms product pump
o Bottoms product heat exchanger
 Standard - Split or Standard – Split Total
o Tower
o Precooler
o Trimcooler

o Overhead split
o Reflux pump
o Bottoms split
o Reboiler
 Full - Split
o Tower
o Precooler
o Trimcoooler
o Overhead split
o Reflux pump
o Overhead pump
o Bottoms split
o Reboiler
 Standard - Total w/Circ.
o Tower
o Condenser
o Overhead split
o Reflux pump
o Bottoms split
o Reboiler
o Circulation pump
 Full - Single w/Circ.
o Tower
o Condenser
o Overhead split
o Reflux pump
o Overhead pump
o Bottoms split
o Reboiler
o Circulation pump
 Standard – Split Total w/Circ.
o Tower
o Precooler

o Trimcooler
o Overhead split
o Reflux pump
o Bottoms split
o Reboiler
o Circulation pump
 Full - Split w/Circ.
o Tower
o Precooler
o Trimcoooler
o Overhead split
o Reflux pump
o Overhead pump
o Bottoms split
o Reboiler
o Circulation pump
Refer to Tower Configurations in Chapter 4 for detailed flow diagrams.
These configurations should be regarded as the “maximum” model with all
potentialities satisfied The components actually developed depend upon the
process conditions. For example, if the main tower model does not have a
condenser and a reboiler, then only the tower model is mapped.
If the overhead product is cooler than the temperature of the fluid from the
condenser outlet, then an overhead exchanger is mapped.
A bottoms product exchanger is mapped only when the bottoms product
stream has a different temperature from the temperature of the bottom stage
of the tower.
In the case of split models, where the condenser duty is split into precooler
and trimcooler duties, the ratio of the duty split is obtained from the Design
Criteria specifications form. The overhead vapor stream flowing to the
precooler is assumed to be at dew point if the condensation temperature is
not provided.
Loading Tower Input Information

From the tower results in the report, the tables consisting of stage
temperatures, stage pressures, stage molar vapor flow rates and stage molar
liquid flow rates are loaded in the mapping process.
For example, in the case of AspenPlus, the following tables in the RADFRAC
block are loaded by Aspen Capital Cost Estimator in the mapping process:

Table 1: Stage temperature and Stage Pressures are loaded (Column 1 and
2)
ENTHALPY
STAGE TEMP. PRESSURE BTU/LBMOL HEAT DUTY
F PSI LIQUID VAPOR BTU/HR
1 149.27 20.000 -0.12156E+06 -42602. -.23509+08

2 223.45 22.000 -0.11895E+06 -87138.
3 227.79 22.100 -0.11909E+06 -92519.
4 230.39 22.200 -0.11918E+06 -95701.
5 232.06 22.300 -0.11925E+06 -97662.
6 233.25 22.400 -0.11931E+06 -98970.
7 234.18 22.500 -0.11935E+06 -99924.
8 234.98 22.600 -0.11939E+06 -0.10068E+06
9 235.72 22.700 -0.11942E+06 -0.10135E+06
10 236.74 22.800 -0.11941E+06 -0.10196E+06 45802+08
Table 2: Stage molar liquid flowrates and Stage molar vapor flowrates
are loaded. (Column 1 and 2)
STAGE FLOW RATE FEED RATE PRODUCT RATE

LBMOL/HR LBMOL/HR LBMOL/HR
LIQUID VAPOR LIQUID VAPOR MIXED LIQUID VAPOR
1 1239. 430.0 .57657-01 430.0000
2 0.2571E+05 1669. .24001+05
3 0.2586E+05 2140.
4 0.2595E+05 2286.
5 0.2602E+05 2380.
6 0.2606E+05 2444.
7 0.2610E+05 2493.
8 0.2614E+05 2532.
9 0.2617E+05 2568.
10 0.2357E+05 2604. .23571+05
Inlet and exit streams (and their stage numbers) are loaded in the mapping
step.
For example, in the case of a RADFRAC model for AspenPlus, the following
portion of the report is loaded in Aspen Capital Cost Estimator:
INLETS7 STAGE 2
OUTLETS - 8 STAGE 1
9 STAGE 10
When sizing information is present in the report, the mapping program loads
all the relevant information present in the sizing sections.
For example, in the case of a RADFRAC model for AspenPlus, the following
portion of the sizing report is loaded in Aspen Capital Cost Estimator for every
section:
Case : Tray tower sizing section
STARTING STAGE NUMBER 2

ENDING STAGE NUMBER 29
TRAY SPECIFICATIONS
— — — — — — — — —
TRAY TYPE SIEVE
TRAY SPACING METER 0.60960
***** SIZING RESULTS @ STAGE WITH MAXIMUM DIAMETER *****

COLUMN DIAMETER METER 4.00228
Case : Packed tower sizing section
STARTING STAGE NUMBER 2

ENDING STAGE NUMBER 9
PACKING SPECIFICATIONS
— — — — — — — — — — —
PACKING TYPE BERL-SADDLE
HETP FT 2.00000
PACKING HEIGHT FT 16.0000
Determining Tower Process Conditions

 Operating Temperature
The maximum temperature value for all the stages (given by column 1) is
used as the operating temperature for the tower.
 Operating Pressure
The maximum pressure value for all the stages (given by column 2) is
used as the operating pressure for the tower.
 Minimum Operating Pressure
The minimum pressure value for all the stages (given by column 2) is
used as the minimum operating pressure for the tower.
 Design Pressure
The maximum value from the stage pressure profile is used for calculating
the design pressure of the tower (that is, after applying the user-defined-
design value from the design criteria file). When stage pressures are not
available, the maximum value of pressure from all the inlet streams is
used.
 Design Temperature
The maximum value from the stage temperature profile is used for
calculating the design temperature of the tower (that is, after applying the
user-defined design value from the design criteria file). When stage
temperatures are not available, the maximum value of temperature from
all the inlet streams is used.
 Number of Stages
The number of theoretical stages is provided by the number of rows in
Table 1. The final number is determined by taking into account condenser
and reboiler (if they are provided). Also, the number of stages is affected
by the reboiler type depending on whether the reboiler simulated in the
report is kettle or thermosiphon.
For example, in the case of RADFRAC model for AspenPlus, consider the
following table:
STAGE TEMP. PRESSURE BTU/LBMOL HEAT DUTY

F PSI LIQUID VAPOR BTU/HR
1 149.27 20.000 -0.12156E+06 -42602. -.23509+08

2 223.45 22.000 -0.11895E+06 -87138.
3 227.79 22.100 -0.11909E+06 -92519.

4 230.39 22.200 -0.11918E+06 -95701.
5 232.06 22.300 -0.11925E+06 -97662.
6 233.25 22.400 -0.11931E+06 -98970.
7 234.18 22.500 -0.11935E+06 -99924.
8 234.98 22.600 -0.11939E+06 -0.10068E+06
9 235.72 22.700 -0.11942E+06 -0.10135E+06
10 236.74 22.800 -0.11941E+06 -0.10196E+06 .45802+08
If the reboiler is kettle, then the number of theoretical stages is eight.

If the reboiler is thermosiphon (reboiler type is obtained from simulator),
then the number of theoretical stages is nine.
 Liquid Density
Density of liquid flowing inside the column is estimated from the density of
the inlet streams and the exit streams. If liquid density cannot be
obtained from the streams, the density of water is used as default.
 Vapor Density
Density of vapor flowing inside the column is estimated from the density
of the inlet streams and the exit streams. If vapor density cannot be
obtained from the streams, the vapor density is estimated based on gas
law. The vapor density is estimated at the minimum operating pressure
and operating temperature.
 Average Molecular Weight of Vapor Inside Tower
Average vapor molecular weight is estimated from the inlet and exit
streams. The lowest molecular weight of the streams is assigned as the
vapor molecular weight.
 Average Molecular Weight of Liquid Inside Tower
Average liquid molecular weight is the maximum molecular weight for the
inlet and exit streams.
Sizing Procedure
The sizing procedure varies depending on the type of internals desired and
the simulator model used for the operation. The procedure described below
gives a description of the actual steps used by the sizing module to estimate
the sizes for the different types of trayed and packed towers.
Trayed Tower Sizing

General Procedure (Followed for all tray internals):
The type (class) of the fluid in the column is used to estimate some of the
properties in designing the tray internals, such as surface tension, foaming
tendency, deration factor if they are not specified in the simulation output
report or on the Design Criteria specifications form.
You can specify the overall column tray efficiency in the Tray Efficiency box
on the Design Criteria specifications form (see pages 200). If the value is not
X X
provided, then it is estimated using Lockett’s modification of the O’Connell

Correlation. This correlation is based on tests on actual plant columns and has
been the standard of the industry.

The tray efficiency is used to calculate the actual number of stages required
for the separation.
EOC = 0.492 ( L ) -0.245
where:
EOC = efficiency, O’Connell Correlation
L = viscosity of liquid, CPOISE
 = relative volatility of key component
A default value of 1.5 is used for the relative volatility of key components that
you can modify on the Design Criteria specifications form. The liquid viscosity
is either directly obtained from the report or estimated from the fluid
classification.
 Once the internal height of the column is estimated (based on the actual
number of trays), additional height for vapor disengagement and liquid
return is based on your Design Criteria specifications.
 In general, the number of stages provided by the simulator report
represent the theoretical number of stages. However, if detailed design of
the tower has been done by the simulator using tray efficiency, then the
number of trays are actual trays. If Aspen Capital Cost Estimator finds
that the number of trays are actual, then it uses the value to estimate the
height and does not add any additional tray efficiency.
Using Tower Sizing Information

When a simulator report provides sizing information, Aspen Capital Cost
Estimator tries to use as much of the information as possible in the final
design. When multiple sections are present in the report, the information
used by Aspen Capital Cost Estimator depends on the equipment to which the
model is mapped.
Single Diameter Trayed Tower (TW TRAYED)

If multiple sections are present with different diameters and tray spacings,
then the largest values of the diameters and tray spacings are used for the
actual design of the tower.
Double Diameter Trayed Tower (DTT TRAYED)

For double diameter trayed tower, the two largest diameters in the sectional
report are used in the design. Once the tower is divided into two sections
(based on diameter), the value of the tray spacing for each section is based
on the stage numbers present in each section. The largest values of tray
spacing for each section are used to estimate the tower height.
For example, for AspenPlus, assume the following sizing information is
obtained from the report after completing the loading process.
Section 1:
Diameter = 5 FEET
Tray Spacing = 24 INCHES
Stages = 2 to 4

Section 2:
Diameter = 6 FEET
Stages = 5 to 7
Section 3:
Diameter = 8 FEET
Stages = 8 to 10
The sizing program will design a double diameter tower with the following
dimensions:
Top Section = 6 FEET
Diameter
Top Section Tray = 30 INCHES
Spacing
Top Section Stages = 2 to 7
Bottom Section = 8 FEET
Diameter
Bottom Section = 18 INCHES
Tray Spacing
Bottom Section = 8 to 10
Stages
The program estimates the cross sectional area for each stage. Then, the
maximum value is used to design the single diameter tower. In case of double
diameter tower, the program estimates the diameter for the bottom section
and the top section based on the cross sectional area estimated for each
stage.
Sieve Tray Design

The capacity factor, CSB, is evaluated based on the correlation developed for
entrainment flooding by Kister and Haas. Jeronimo et. al correlation is used to
estimate the clear liquid height in the spray regime. Strictly, the Jeronimo and
Swistowski correlation predicts the clear liquid height at the transition from
the froth to the spray regime. However, empirical evidence has shown that
clear liquid height in the spray regime is much the same as clear liquid height
at that transition.
The CSB estimated at the flooding point is used to evaluate the flooding vapor
velocity.
The bubbling area is calculated based on flood velocity, the derating factor
and the safety factor. (Column default design is 90% of flood.)

Downcomer liquid velocity is based on the foaming tendency of the fluid and
tray spacing. Foaming tendency can be specified on the Design Criteria
The downcomer cross-sectional area is based on the downcomer velocity and
the maximum liquid flow inside the tower.
The total tower cross-sectional area is calculated by adding the bubbling area
and the downcomer area.
The diameter of the tower is obtained from the cross-sectional area by
rounding the area up to the next half foot. The minimum diameter for the
tower is 1.5 FEET.
Valve Tray Design

Valve tray sizing is based on the V-type Ballast trays produced by Glitsch. The
system factors are estimated based on the fluid classification performed on
the fluid flowing through the column. The tray diameter is evaluated for either
single pass trays or two pass trays. It is based on 24 INCHES tray spacing
and 80% of flood.
Bibliography
“Distillation Design”, by Henry Z. Kister.
“Applied Process Design For Chemical And Petrochemical Plant”, Volumes 1
and 3, by Ernest E. Ludvig.
“Standard Handbook of Engineering Calculations”, by Tyler G. Hicks
“Chemical Engineers HandBook”, by Perry and Chilton, 6th Edition.
Bubble-Cap Tray Design

The allowable vapor velocity and the corresponding diameter for bubble-cap
trays have been represented by the Jersey Critical formula which
corresponds to the work by Souder and Brown for column flooding.

D  0.0956 Wv / K  L  v 12
where:
D = Diameter, FEET
Wv = vapor flow rate, LB/H
L = liquid density, LB/CF
v = vapor density, LB/CF
The factor K depends on the tray spacing as follows:

Tray Spacing, INCHES 18 24 30 30+
K 3.4 4.2 4.7 5.0

Packed Tower Design
Packed tower design is accomplished for both random and structured
packings. The various types of packings supported by the system are
described in the Icarus Reference.
Kister and Gill flood point correlation is used to estimate pressure drop at the
flood point as a function of packing factor alone.
FL = .155 (Fp0.7)
where:
FL = Pressure drop at flood point
Fp Packing factor
Note: You can provide the value for the packing factor on the Design Criteria
specifications form. The system defaults are used for each of the different
types of packings if you do not enter a value.
Once this pressure drop is known, the flood velocity is calculated using the
latest version of GPDC (Generalized Pressure Drop Correlation) charts for
both random and structured packings.
HETP Prediction
You can provide the HETP value on the Design Criteria specifications form. If
the value is not specified, rules of thumb prediction reported in literature are
used to predict the packed tower efficiency.
For random packing columns, the following rules are used for estimating HETP
(FEET):
HETP = 1.5 dp
dp = Packing diameter, INCHES
HETP > DT for DT < 2 FEET
For estimating the structured packing efficiency, the following rule of thumb is
used:
HETP, = 1200 /ap + 4
INCHES
ap = Packing surface area per unit volume, SF/CF
System Defaults
The following system default values may be modified on the Design Criteria
specifications form and Component Specifications form:
Trayed Tower Defaults

Tray Type = Sieve
Tray Spacing = 24 inches
Flooding Factor = 80 %
Foaming Tendency = Moderate

Packed Tower Defaults
Packing Type = Random
Packing Material = 1.0PPR
Specific area per unit = 0.75 SF/CF
volume for the
packing
General Defaults
Top vapor = 4 FEET
disengagement
height
Bottom sump height = 6 FEET
SimSci’s SHORTCUT Column Operation

In case of SHORTCUT column operation, the simulator provides only the
minimum reflux ratio for the distillation process. To design the tower, the
ratio of the operating reflux ratio and minimum reflux ratio has to be
provided. The system uses the default value of 2.0 for the ratio. The ratio can
be changed on the Design Criteria specifications form (see page 200). If the
X X
simulator report does not contain information (number of trays) for the
operating reflux ratio, the tower sizing program returns to the system without
performing sizing for the tower.
Vessels
Horizontal Vessels
The following graphic shows a typical horizontal vessel.

The following design variables are specified on the Design Criteria
specifications form:
 Residence Time
 Process Vessel Height to Diameter Ratio
 Average Liquid Particle Diameter
 Design factor multiplier for disengagement velocity
 Separation Factor
 Vapor area /cross sectional area
 Separation Factor Multiplier
 Minimum Boot Length (used in Horizontal Vessel Design)
 Minimum Boot diameter
 Boot Leg Liquid Velocity
Design Requirements
The maximum number of exit streams is three; two of the streams can be
liquid.
Calculating Diameter
Vessel diameter is based on the maximum allowable vapor velocity inside the
separator, to reduce the liquid entrainment in the vapor.
The following two methods are available in Aspen Capital Cost Estimator
(chosen from the Design Criteria specifications) to obtain vapor velocity.
 Liquid Entrainment Method
 Particle size separation method.
Calculating Vapor Velocity
Liquid Entrainment Method

The maximum allowable vapor velocity, to reduce liquid entrainment is
obtained as a function of liquid and vapor density and the Separation Factor,
which itself is a polynomial function of vapor and liquid density and vapor and
liquid flowrates. The polynomial equation was based on 5% of liquid entrained
in the vapor and is valid for the range (defined below) of 0.006 to 5.0. Aspen
Capital Cost Estimator lets you override the computed value of Separation
Factor.
W = l_mfr/v_mfr * sqrt (v_rho/l_rho)
X = ln (SF)
k_v = EXP(A + BX + CX^2 + DX^3 + EX^4)
K = k_v * k_vm
v_m = K * sqrt ((l_rho - v_rho)/v_rho)
where:

l_mfr = Light Liquid Mass Flow rate
v_mfr = Vapor Mass Flow rate
l_rho = Light Liquid Density
v_rho = Vapor Density
K = System Factor
SF = Separation Factor
k_v = Polynomial Function of SF
k_vm = Separation Factor Multiplier
A = -1.877478097
B = -0.8145804597
C = -0.1870744085
D = -0.0145228667
E = -0.0010148518
The above relation for Separation Factor is valid for a “W”(SF) between 0.006
and 5.0. If “W” falls outside the range, the sizing program gives a warning
message and the limiting value of W is used to estimate Separation Factor.
For example, if calculated value of W is 0.001, then the value used in the
correlation is 0.006. If the calculated value of W is 10.0, then the value used
in the correlation is 6.0.
Particle Size Separation Method

This method estimates the disengagement velocity of liquid bubble in the
vapor space. The maximum allowable vapor velocity is determined as a
percentage of the disengagement velocity.
Liquid drops falling in gases appear to be spherical up to a Reynolds number
of 100. Large drops (greater than 0.3125 INCHES) will deform, with a
resulting increase in drag, and in some cases shatter.
For estimating vapor velocity, the liquid bubbles are assumed to remain in
spherical shape.
The terminal settling velocity can be obtained for different flow conditions.
For laminar flow (K < 3):
v = g * (rho_l - rho_v) *(dp^ 2)/ (18.0 * mu_v)
and for turbulent region:

v = 1.74 (g * dp * (rho_l - rho_v) / rho_v)^0.5
where:
K = dp * (g * rho_v * (rho_l - rho_v)/ (mu_v^2) )^0.33
v = disengagement velocity
g = gravitational constan
rho_l = liquid density
rho_v = vapor density
dp = liquid bubble diameter

mu_v = gas viscosity (assumed to be 0.05 LB/FT/H)
The design velocity is then estimated by the following equation:

v_m = v*f
where:
v_m = disengagement velocity
f = design factor multiplier for disengagement velocity
v = disengagement
Calculating vessel cross-sectional area

Vapor cross sectional area is estimated based on the vapor velocity and the
vapor volumetric flow. The vapor cross sectional area is divided by the ratio of
vapor area/cross sectional area to get the total required cross sectional area.
v_csa = v_vol/v_m
t_csa = v_csa/r_vc
where:
v_csa = Vapor area
v_vol = Vapor volumetric flow
r_vc = Vapor area/cross sectional area
t_csa = Vessel cross sectional area
Estimate Vessel diameter based on vapor flow:

D_v = sqrt ((t_csa * 4) /)
where:
D_v = Vessel Diameter based on vapor flow
 = 3.14
Estimate vessel diameter based on liquid holdup volume and user-specified

value of L/D ratio.
The maximum value of diameter calculated using vapor velocity and liquid
holdup is used for final design.
Calculating Length
Vessel liquid holdup volume is obtained based on the light liquid flowrate and
the residence time. The vessel length is then calculated as given below:
l_vol = l_vfr * r_t
L = (l_vol * 4) / ( * D^2 * (1 - r_vc))

where:
l_vol = Liquid holdup volume
L = Length
l_vfr = Light liquid volumetric flowrate
r_t = Residence time
r_vc = r_vc
Checking L/D Ratio

For all liquid vessels L/D is calculated as follows:
If P <= 250 PSIA, then L/D= 3
If 250 < P <= 500 PSIA, then L/D = 4
If P> 500 PSIA, then L/D= 5
After estimating the length (L) and diameter (D) of the vessel, the ratio of
L/D is compared with the Process Vessel Height to Diameter Ratio specified on
the Design Criteria specifications form.
Estimating Boot Dimensions

Boot dimensions will be estimated only if the exit streams contain a heavier
liquid phase. Boot diameter is based on the heavier liquid phase volume and
boot liquid velocity.
Boot volume (bt_vol) = hl_vfr * r_t
Boot cross section area = bt_vol / hl_vel
(bt_csa)
Boot diameter (d) = sqrt (4.0 * bt_csa /)
Boot length (l) = (bt_vol * 4)/( * d^2)
where:
hl_vfr = heavy liquid volumetric flow rate
hl_vel = heavy liquid velocity
l = boot length
d = boot diameter
Vertical Vessels
The following graphic shows a typical vertical vessel.

The following design variables are specified on the Design Criteria
specifications form:
 Residence Time
 Process Vessel Height to Diameter Ratio
 Average liquid particle diameter
 Design factor multiplier for disengagement velocity
 Separation Factor
 Minimum Disengagement Height
 Minimum height above the mist eliminator
 Height of Mist Eliminator
Vessel diameter is calculated in the same manner as for horizontal vessels.
The default value of Separation Factor Multiplier is available in the Design
Criteria specifications.

Calculating Vessel Height
Vessel liquid holdup volume is based on the light liquid flowrate and the
residence time. The liquid height in the vessel is then calculated and the
additional height is added to obtain the overall vessel height.
l_vol = l_vfr * r_t
l_ht = (l_vol * 4) / ( * D^2)
h = LLLTap_ht + l_ht+ HLLTap_ht + d_ht + me_ht + mea_ht
where:
l_vol = liquid holdup volume
l_vfr = light liquid volumetric flowrate
r_t = residence time
l_ht = liquid height based on residence time
LLLTap_ht = minimum height between low liquid level tap and
tangent line (design criteria)
ddHLLTap_ht = height between inlet nozzle and high liquid level
tap (design criteria)
d_ht = disengagement height
me_ht = mist eliminator height
mea_ht = Height above the mist eliminator
If the calculated l_ht is less than the minimum height between the taps,
specified in the design criteria, then the minimum height is used.
Checking L/D ratio
For all liquid

After estimating the length (L) and diameter (D) of the vessel, the ratio of L/D is compared with
the Process Vessel Height to Diameter Ratio specified on the Design Criteria specifications form.

6 Piping and Instrumentation
Models
Overview
Icarus provides hundreds of default piping and instrumentation drawings
(P&ID’s), each associated with a process equipment item. If a process
equipment item has a P&ID, the P&ID button is active on the Component
Specifications form.
Using the P&ID Editor

Features of P&IDs
 Functionality equivalent to Icarus 2000 added to Aspen Capital Cost
Estimator
 Uses Intergraph RAD technology as drawing engine
 Intelligent P&ID for single component only
 Port based system with Piping, Electronic, Pneumatic, Thermocouple and
Process Connection ports
 Piping and Process Connection ports are uni-directional; others are bi-
directional
 Administrator mode for building components or user P&ID models for
system library
 User mode selects system default models or alternate user P&ID models
 User can modify some characteristics of P&ID in a project
 Uses Aspen Capital Cost Estimator line diameter and length calculations or
user supplied calculations using Line Sizing Equation Editor
P&ID Modes
You can work with P&IDs in two ways:
6 Piping and Instrumentation Models 393

 If you are not in a specific project, you are in Administrator mode. Use
Administrator mode to build components or to build user P&IDs for the
System Library.
 If you are in a specific project, you are in User mode. In User mode, you
can select system default models or user P&ID models. You can also
modify some P&ID characteristics.
P&ID Layout and Structure

To access the P&ID user interface:
1 On the palette, click the Libraries tab.
2 On the Libraries tab, double-click the P&IDs icon .
The P&ID User Interface appears.
The left pane contains the User P&IDs. This is where you can create
customized drawings and manage your library.
The right pane contains the System P&IDs. This is where you view the system
PIDs.
394 6 Piping and Instrumentation Models

In the User P&ID Libraries area, you can add
 categories
 files
You can create folders to organize your custom drawings. The system PIDs
are organized by equipment type. You cannot add or remove PID files and
folders cannot be added or removed from the system area, but you can
customize a system drawing by copying and pasting or dragging and dropping
into the Users PIDs area.
Each PID file can only be used for a specific equipment type, such as a
horizontal tank. A file can be further limited to an application of that
equipment type, such as Batch operations. You specify this when you initial
create your initial PID.
To add a new category to the User P&ID Libraries area:

1 Right-click User P&ID Libraries.
2 On the menu that appears, click New | Category.
The rename dialog box appears.
3 In the rename dialog box, type the name for your new category.
4 Click OK.
Your new category appears in under User P&ID Libraries.
To add a new User P&ID file:

1 Right-click User P&ID Libraries or the category under which you want to
insert the new file..
2 On the menu that appears, click New | File.
The New File dialog box appears.
3 On the New File dialog box, type:

o the Name for the P&ID file (required)
o a Description of the P&ID file (optional)
Note: Each PID file can only be used for certain equipment types

o the Item Symbol (type of equipment) this new drawing will apply to
(for example, VT). You can browse for the Item Symbol by clicking the
More button .
o the Item Type (optional) to further restrict the drawing to an individual
application (for example, Storage only). You can browse for the Item
Type by clicking the More button .
Note: If you leave the Item Type field blank, the P&ID will apply to all
applications of the selected Item Symbol (for example, all VTs).
4 When you are satisfied with the details of the new file,
 Click OK to insert the new file.
-or-
 Click Cancel to abandon adding the new file.
Note: If you click OK in Step 4 above, this will be a blank drawing where you
must draw the desired drawing.
To Delete (Remove) a User P&ID category or file:

1 Right-click the category or file you want to remove.
2 Click Remove.
Your category or file is removed.
The Aspen Capital Cost Estimator PID

Layout: Radpfs Interface
This second user interface is the Radpfs drawing tool. This application lets you
view a PID and make changes to it.
The main area of the interface is the drawing area. The symbol menu is on
the left side of the screen and the labels are at the bottom.
The drawing area contains the PID objects and the labels. The labels include:

 PID title
 number
 date
 company name
Use the toolbars at the top for:
 drawing
 zooming
 labeling
 and so on
Note: You can remove the toolbars at the top to give you more drawing
space.
Symbol Menu
The symbol menu is where you can select objects to add to the drawing.
These objects include:
 equipment symbols
 instrument bubbles
 piping lines
 valves and fittings
Symbol Menu – Details

The illustrations below show the details of the Symbol menu.

Symbol menu categories
The Line types section of the Symbol menu includes:
 Electronic
 Pneumatic
 Thermocouple
 Process connections
When you select a line type in the Symbol menu, all of the ports of this type
on the PID appear.
The Piping section of the Symbol menu contains all of the valves and fittings
that have graphical representations. Here are some example Piping objects:
Under the Instrumentation heading of the Symbol menu you will find the
control valves, which can be connected to piping lines and instrument bubbles
to form loops. Here you will also find the instrument bubbles, which can be
connected to equipment symbols or piping lines using process connections
ports; the bubbles are connected to each other and control valves using
electronic and pneumatic ports to form loops.
Here are some example Instrumentation objects:

The last two headings of the Symbol menu contain the equipment symbols:
 Equipment contains the system default equipment symbols.
 Custom Equipment contains any customized equipment symbols.
Working with Ports

The RadPfs PID editor is a port based system. Ports:
 let you connect piping and instrumentation lines to objects in your PID
 appear on the PID as arrows
 display the port name if the cursor is positioned over it
Port Properties
Every port has the following properties:
 Name
 Type – A port can be connected only to another of the same type
o Piping
o Process Connection
o Electrical
o Pneumatic
o Thermocouple
 Direction
o In
o Out
o Bi-directional

Making Ports Visible
To make ports visible:

 On the Symbol menu, under Line Types, click the type of line for which
you want to make the ports visible.
For example, if you want to make the Piping ports visible on your drawing,
under Line Types, click Piping.
The Piping ports are now visible, as shown below.
Forming Connections Using Ports
To use ports to form connections (or draw a line) on the drawing:

1 On the Symbol menu, click the port type you want. Ports of that type are
made visible.
2 In the drawing, left-click the port you want to use. A dotted red line
showing the link moves as you move the mouse.
3 Left-click another port of the type you are using. A line will be drawn
automatically between the two ports. You might use this technique for a
branching pipe or instrument loops.

-or-
In the case of piping lines, drop the other end of the red dotted line onto
a blank area on the drawing. This will also draw the line automatically, but
it will represent a line coming from or traveling to an area outside of the
drawing.
Editing P&IDs
You can make changes to a PID in radpfs, such as:
 adding piping lines
 adding valves and fittings
 adding instrumentation
 adding labels
 deleting objects
Adding Piping Lines

Remember that at least one end of a line of pipe will be connected to a piping
port on the equipment symbol or another line of pipe. The other end of the
piping line can be
 connected to a piping port or it can be
 dropped onto white space to represent originating from or traveling to a
destination outside of the PID
The suggested order is to:
1 Add the line of pipe.
2 Supply a pipe number.
3 Add valves and fittings.
To add a piping line:

1 On the Symbol menu, click the Piping line type.
2 Click a port you want to use. As you move the mouse around the screen
you will see a red dotted line.

3 Click to assign the other end of the line of pipe. A line will be drawn
automatically for you.
The next step is to supply a pipe number.
To supply a pipe number:

1 Right-click on the newly created piping line.
2 On the menu that appears, click Number Piping Line.

3 Type a pipe number for the piping line number.
4 Click OK.
The next step is to add valves and fittings.
To add a valve or fitting:

1 In the left pane, expand Piping.
2 Click the name of the type of valve (or other fitting) you want to add.
A graphical representation in the lower left pane. The example below is of a
butterfly valve.
3 Click the location on the line of pipe where you want to add the valve or
fitting.
It is drawn and connected automatically.
To display the line number or the description on the PID:

1 Right-click on a line.

2 On the menu that appears, click:
o Display Piping Number
o Display Piping description
To display more information about this line of pipe

1 Right-click the line of pipe.
2 On the menu that appears, click select View Piping Properties.
The Piping Line Properties dialog box appears.
 Use the Description field to change the description of this line of pipe at
the top of the screen.
 Use the fields in the Fitting group to add valves and fittings which do not
have graphical representations, such as elbows or tee’s. You can see that
the first two valves are grayed out – these have graphical representations,
so they must be added or deleted on the PID itself.
 Use the remainder of the fields to select fittings to add.
 Use the fields in the Line Sizing group to specify line sizing details. The
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator PID system lets you write line sizing rules
that calculate diameter and length relative to aspects of the component,
such as volume or flow rate. See Line Sizing Tutorial, page 416, for details
X X
about how to create a new rule. The Line Sizing area is where you can
select a rule for use on this piping line.
The Temperature and Pressure Type fields are for:
 gas compressors
 double diameter towers
 heat exchangers

Use these fields to tell the system where this line of pipe is connected to one
of these pieces of equipment.
The Connect to equipment location field is used for nozzle sizing for
vessels and towers only.
Adding Instrumentation Loops

All instrumentation and control valves in the Aspen Capital Cost Estimator
system are grouped as loops. If you are familiar with the Icarus system,
especially the instrumentation installation bulks form, a helpful concept is
that:
By selecting bubbles and editing the Instrumentation Properties, you
provide the exact same information you would find in the Installation
Bulk – Instrumentation screen.
The suggested workflow for adding an instrument loop is:
 Add the desired bubbles to the PID.
 Connect the loop together.
 Provide a loop number.
The instrument bubbles are found in the Symbol Menu.
They are organized by location, then by process variable.
Location is important because it will affect the pieces of equipment generated
in your estimate: for instance, if you choose a local control bubble only, you
will not get a run of instrument cable from the field to the control center.
Control center bubbles will not have process connection ports, so choose
bubbles which represent your process most accurately.
To add instrument bubbles and control valves to the PID:
Note: This example is a pressure loop with a control valve.
1 On the left pane, expand Instrumentation.

2 Click the instrumentation type you want to place.
3 Move the cursor into the drawing where you want to place the
instrumentation bubble; then click.

The bubble is placed in the drawing.
4 Add the next instrumentation bubbles one by one.

5 Add a control valve (Instrumentation | Control Valves | <name of
control valve>) if necessary.
Next, the process connection ports are used to connect the local bubbles to
the piping line or equipment symbol.
6 In the left pane, click Line Types | Process Connection to display the
Process Connection ports so you can attach the bubble to a line of pipe.
A dotted red line appears when you move the cursor, showing you where the
line will be drawn.
7 Click again where you want the line to connect.
8 In the left pane, click Line Types | Electronic to display the Electronic
ports so you can connect the rest of the loop.

9 Click an Electronic port.
A dotted red line appears when you move the cursor, showing you where the
line will be drawn.
10 Click again where you want the line to connect.
The line is connected.
11 Continue connecting bubbles and ports until the loop is complete.
12 Right-click anywhere on the loop.
13 On the menu that appears, click Number Loop.
You can modify the loop, by:

 removing parts of the loop from the estimate
 adding a Back of Panel Option
 changing instrument quantity
 and so on
To modify the loop:

1 Right click the loop.
2 On the menu that appears, click View Loop Properties.

The Loop Properties dialog box appears.
If you are familiar with the instrumentation installation bulk form, you will
probably notice that this interface provides many of the same inputs.
The following inputs are unavailable, because they are determined graphically
by the PID loop bubbles:
o Process Variable
o Panel Action
o Sensor Type
o Instrument Location
o Signal Type
3 Use the Loop Properties dialog box to customize:
o Description: Loop name
o Back of Panel Option
o Quantity
o Number of Solenoids
o Loop Modifications
 Remove specific pieces of the loop from the estimate
4 When you have finished customizing the loop, click OK.

Adding or Editing P&ID Labels
Each PID has space at the bottom for:
 title
 number
 date
 company name
To add or edit P&ID labels:

1 At the bottom of the drawing, double click in the box you want to edit.
The text in the box becomes red, indicating you can edit it.
2 Type your additions or edits.
3 Click anywhere else in the drawing.
Adding Miscellaneous Labels

You can add miscellaneous labels throughout the PID.
To add a miscellaneous label:

1 On the Label toolbar, click the Label icon as shown below.
Note: If the Label toolbar is not visible,

A Click View | Toolbars.
B Select Label.
C Click OK.
2 Click in the drawing where you want to place the label, moving your
cursor to make a box into which the label will go.
3 Type your label into the box.
4 Click anywhere else in the drawing.
Deleting Pipe, Instrumentation, and Valves
To delete any objects from your drawing:

1 Right-click the object you want to delete.
2 On the menu that appears, click Delete.
When deleting objects, one common situation that is created is a
disconnected line of pipe because you delete a valve or fitting from the middle
of it, as shown here.

After deleting a valve
To reconnect the line:

1 Delete one of the loose ends.
2 Right click the other loose end.
3 On the menu that appears, click Reconnect Source or Reconnect
Destination, depending on the direction of the pipe.
Line reconnected
Efficient PID Creation

When you create a drawing from scratch, the recommended workflow is to
add items in this order:
1 Equipment symbol
2 Lines of pipe
3 Pipe numbers
4 Valves and fittings

5 Instrument bubbles
6 Control valves
7 Instrument connections
8 Instrument loop numbers
9 Labels
AspenTech has found that efficiency is improved by positioning the objects in
the drawing before using ports to form connections. This is because moving
the objects into position before making all the connections saves
readjustment effort later.
Cosmetic Tips
You can adjust the position of any lines on your PID by dragging and
dropping, as shown here.
When you move objects around, you may see that there are kinks in some
lines.
To straighten kinked lines:

1 Right-click the line you want to straighten.
2 On the menu that appears, click Align.

You can move all objects on the PID, including line numbers, descriptions,
and text boxes, by dragging and dropping.
Adjusting line intersection points
To adjust the position of connection points between two lines:

1 Position the mouse over the connection point.
2 When the arrow appears, click and hold to drag and drop the connection
up and down the line.
When you use branch or join ports to connect one piping line to another, the
branch port is always on the top of the line, and the join port is on the
bottom. Sometimes this isn’t what you want.
To reverse the connection:

1 Position the mouse over the connection point.
2 Click and drag to reverse the connection.
Radpfs toolbars
The most often used toolbars are:
 the Symbol menu
 Label
 Main
 Draw

To add or delete toolbars:
1 On the main menu click View | Toolbars.
The Toolbars dialog box appears.
2 On the Toolbars dialog box, select or clear the check boxes for the
toolbars until you are satisfied.
3 Click OK.
You can shift toolbars around the screen (undock them), by dragging and
dropping.
Zooming
Use the Zoom icons on the Main toolbar to control your view of your
drawing.
Use this icon to
highlight an area to zoom in on

Zoom Area
zoom in
Zoom In
zoom out
Zoom Out
fit the viewable area to the full drawing area
Fit
move the drawing around in the drawing space
Pan

Custom Equipment Symbols
In addition to using the system default equipment symbols, you can create
custom symbols. You can:
 customize the default symbols
 import symbols
 create your own symbols from scratch
Getting Started with Custom Equipment Symbols
To add a new symbol to the system:

1 Double-click a blank PID file to open Radpfs.
Note: You can find a blank file by expanding List of All P&ID Library Files
in the center pane.
2 On the Main menu bar, click File | Add Custom Equipment Model.
The Add Custom Model dialog box appears.
3 In the Enter model name field, type a name for the new model.
4 If you want, in the Enter display name field, type a description for the
new model.
5 In the Select category field, tell the system where in the folder structure
you want to keep this new symbol (this is where you will find it in the
Symbol menu). We recommend adding new symbols to the Custom
Equipment heading.
Note: On this interface you can create new subfolders by double clicking
on the New category items.

Modifying a system equipment symbol
To modify a system equipment symbol:
1 Click File | Add custom equipment symbol.
2 Click File | Open.
3 In the /AspenTech/RADPFS <version>/icons/AspenEQ/ directory,
click a file.
4 Click the equipment symbol to highlight it.
5 Click Edit | Copy; then select Window | <your new symbol file>.
6 Right-click; then click Paste.
7 Drag and drop the symbol to position the symbol in the middle of the
drawing area.
Now you add ports to the system equipment symbol.
When you are customizing a symbol, the Port menu is visible on the left-
hand side of the Radpfs interface instead of the Symbol menu
To add a port:
8 Right-click a type in the Port menu; then click add port.
9 Give the port a descriptive name that indicates the intended function of
the port.
10 Select a type; then click OK.
11 You can now put this port into position by dragging and dropping onto the
equipment symbol.
12 Use right-click and rotate to adjust the orientation of the port.
13 Repeat steps 1 through 5 to add all the ports you think you’ll need
14 Save the ports in the CustomEQ folder for use in future PIDs
15 Save the symbol file in the CustomEQ folder.
This new symbol will now be available for use in future drawings.
Importing an equipment symbol

In addition to customizing an Icarus equipment symbol, you can import a
symbol image from an outside drawing package, such as AutoCad or
Microstation, and add ports to it.
To import a system equipment symbol:

2 Click File | Open.
3 Open an outside drawing instead of a symbol file from the AspenEQ
folder.
4 Left-click the equipment symbol and copy it.
5 Use the Window menu to switch back to the screen where you are defining
the customized symbol.

6 Right click and paste the symbol; drag and drop to position the symbol in
the middle of the drawing area.
To add a port:
the port.
equipment symbol.
14 Save the symbol file in the CustomEQ folder.
This imported symbol will now be available for use in future drawings.
Creating an equipment symbol from scratch

The third option for creating new equipment symbols is to draw your own
using the Microsoft drawings tools, found on the Draw toolbar.
To create a system equipment symbol from scratch:

2 Use the shapes in the drawing toolbar to create your symbol

To add a port:
the port.
equipment symbol.

10 Save the symbol file in /AspenTech/RADPFS
<version>/icons/CustomEQ/.
This new symbol will now be available for use in future drawings.
Line sizing Tutorial

Instead of using the system default rules for calculating pipe length and
diameter, you can write your own. You can use the Line Sizing Equation
Editor to create new rules which size the pipe according to equipment
properties such as:
 volume
 height
 flow rate
To access the line sizing Equation Editor:

 Without a project open, on the Libraries tab in the right pane of the
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator interface, double-click Line Sizing
Equation.
The Equation Editor dialog box appears.
The main list box contains the equations which are part of the system at this
time. When you are editing an individual equation, you will use the inputs at
the bottom of the interface.
Line Sizing Equations

Each line sizing equation is either a rule for calculating the pipe length or
diameter. Each equation:
 is either a Length or Diameter rule (determines starting letter L or a D)
 has a reference number (example: 1001)
 has a Descriptor line (example: D1001D)
 has a Equation line (example: D1001E)
The first line in the definition of a rule is the Descriptor line. This contains
the text description and the unit of measure basis.

The second line contains the equation itself.
Note: You can add as many comment lines as you want in the list box to
describe an equation or section of equations.
In the example above,
 the unit of measure basis is IP
 the length is calculated as the Diameter of the equipment component
divided by 2 plus 10 feet
To create a new line sizing equation:

1 Without a project open, on the Libraries tab in the right pane of the
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator interface, click Line Sizing Equation.
The Equation Editor dialog box appears.
2 On the Equation Editor dialog box, click the Add button three times to
add three more lines.
There are three steps to creating an Equation:
Step 1: Add a comment or comments
Step 2: Specify the Descriptor and Units of Measure
Step 3: Specify the Equation itself
Step 1 To add a comment or comments:

1 Click the first of the newly-added lines to highlight it.
2 Click Edit.
3 In the Comment field, type any comments you want to describe this
equation/section.

4 Click Apply.
Your comment appears in the main window.
Step 2: To specify the descriptor and Units of Measure:

1 Click the second of the newly-added lines to highlight it.
2 On the Card Type list, click Length or Diameter.
The other fields in the row are now available.

3 In the Ref. No. field, type a unique Reference Number.
4 On the Data Type list, click Descriptor.
5 In the Description field, type a text description for this equation.
6 On the Units list, click the unit of measure basis for this equation.
Note: The line sizing system has been constructed so that all quantities
used in the equations are assumed to be in the selected unit of measure
basis.
o An I-P equation will result in a length in feet or diameter in
inches.
o A metric equation will calculate a length in meters or a
diameter in mm’s.
o All variables used in the equation will also be calculated in
terms of the selected unit of measure basis. For this reason
your equations can be used by both Metric and I-P projects with
equivalent results.
7 Click Apply.
Step 3: To specify the Equation itself:

1 Click the third of the newly-added lines to highlight it.
This line will contain the equation used to calculate the Length or Diameter of
the piping line.
2 Create an equation using:
o real numbers
o variables selected from the Symbols drop-down box
o operator symbols from the Operators and Operands area
3 When you are satisfied with your equation, click Apply.
4 Click Compile to add the new equation to your system.

5 If you are prompted as to whether to save your changes before compiling,
click Yes.
6 Click Close.
You can now use this new equation in any PID by selecting the equation in
the Piping Line Properties screen – Length or Diameter drop-down boxes.
To open the default drawing for a component:
 Click the arrow of the P&ID button and, on the drop-down menu;
then click Open Default.
This opens the drawing in the P&ID Editor, where you can print the drawing
(File | Print) or send the drawing through electronic mail (File | Send).

You can use the P&ID Editor to make modifications to the drawing.
Modifications affect only the active project.
You can also use the P&ID Editor to create your own P&ID’s and build a User
P&ID Library. Then, when adding an equipment item in a project, you can
select to use your custom P&ID instead of the default.
The following sections explain how to create custom P&ID’s and how to use
them in Aspen Capital Cost Estimator.
Using Custom P&ID’s in Aspen Capital Cost

Estimator
There are several ways to use custom P&ID’s in Aspen Capital Cost Estimator:
 Set a custom drawing as a component’s default P&ID. This will make your
custom drawing the component’s default P&ID in all future projects, until
the default is reset.
 Attach a custom drawing to a single component added to a project.
 Set a custom drawing as a component’s default P&ID for only the active
project.
Setting a Component’s Default P&ID

You can make a custom drawing a component’s default P&ID. This must be
done with no project open.
To set a component’s default P&ID:

1 In Aspen Capital Cost Estimator, with no project open, click the Libraries
tab in the Palette.
2 Double-click P&ID to open the P&ID Libraries.
3 Click the Components tab in the Palette.

4 Right-click on a component; then click Set Default P&ID on the pop-up
menu.
The Set Default P&ID dialog box appears.
This dialog box displays the name, location, and application type of the
default drawings for the selected equipment item. The Location column
shows Sys for system drawings and User for custom user drawings in the
user folder.
5 Click the default P&ID you want to change out; then click Default.

The Selection dialog box appears.
6 Click a P&ID file (it will display the complete path of the file at the bottom
of the dialog box); then click OK.
7 Click OK to close the Set Default P&ID dialog box.
Resetting the Default P&ID

You can reset the default to the original system P&ID.
To reset a component’s default P&ID:

1 In Aspen Capital Cost Estimator, with no project open, click the Libraries
tab in the Palette.
2 Double-click P&ID to open the P&ID Libraries.
3 Click the Components tab in the Palette.
4 Right-click on the component.
5 On the menu that appears, click Set Default P&ID.

The Set Default P&ID dialog box appears.
6 Click the P&ID file you want to change out; then click Reset.
The original default file replaces the user-selected one.
7 Click OK.
Attaching a Custom P&ID to a Component

You can attach a custom P&ID to a component:
 when adding a component to a project
 when modifying a previously added component
To attach a custom P&ID to a component:

1 On the Component Specifications form, click the P&ID button’s
drop-down arrow and click Select and Open Alternate.

2 On the Selection dialog box, click the custom drawing; then click OK.
3 After the drawing is displayed, on the File menu click Exit and click No in
the Close dialog box for saving changes.
Setting a Component’s Default P&ID in Active

Project Only
To set the default P&ID for an active project:
1 Attach a P&ID file to the component (see above).
2 Click the P&ID button’s arrow; then click Set as Default on the menu.
Default P&ID Options: Always FULL or

Determined by User Options
When you open the default P&ID for an equipment item the system will open
the FULL model if this is an option. This behavior is independent of your input
in the Piping and Instrument Design fields at the Project or Area levels.
(The options for these fields are STD (standard) or FULL). If you prefer to
have the system to check these inputs when selecting the default P&ID, you
can change the behavior of the system by navigating to the following
directory:
…/Program Files/Aspen Tech/Economic Evaluation
V8.0/Program/Sys/Drawings/
The text file pnidcros.tbl determines this behavior.
To have the system to consider the STD or FULL input:

1 Delete the existing pnidcros.tbl file.

2 Copy STDorFULLpnidcros.tbl; then rename the new copy pnidcros.tbl.
To revert to the default behavior (default is always FULL):

If you want to revert back to the default behavior (default is always “FULL”)
repeat this process with the “ORIGINALpnidcros.tbl” file.
Working with Non-Graphic

P&ID Data
Inside a Aspen Capital Cost Estimator project, you can open a component
form with piping and instrumentation data, then save that information as
non-graphical P&ID in a P&ID library file.
You can also create non-graphical P&ID libraries outside a project from the
Library tabs and save them in new or existing library files.
Saving Component Information as Non-

Graphical P&ID
To save component information as non-graphical P&ID:
1 Open a component form.
2 Add or modify piping and/or instrumentation data.
3 Save the information by clicking Apply.
4 On the toolbar, click the arrow to the right of Options.
5 On the menu that appears, click Non-graphical P&ID.
6 Click Save P&ID in a library.
A list of existing library files along with an option to create a new library file
appears.
7 Either create a new library file, or click a library file on the displayed list.
8 Specify a unique name for the P&ID and save it in the library file.
Note: P&ID information will be saved without diameter and length

information for pipes.
Creating Non-Graphical P&ID Libraries

Outside a Project
To create non-graphical P&ID libraries outside a project:
1 On the Library tab, click Non-graphical P&ID.
A list of existing library files appears. You can also or create a new library file
folder.
2 Click the desired library file folder; then right-click.

3 On the menu that appears, click Create New.
4 On the dialog box that appears, type the P&ID name; then click OK.
A window appears similar to component form, with options only for piping and
instrumentation installation bulks.
5 Specify information for lines and loops; then save the P&ID information in
the library file.
You can also copy an existing P&ID in a library file, assign it a new name,
modify it, then save in the same or different library file.
Importing External P&ID Data

Generate project estimate by importing piping and instrumentation
information from SPPID (Intergraph SmartPlant P&ID, an external P&ID
drawing tool) in Aspen Capital Cost Estimator.
Importing of P&ID Drawings generated in Intergraph SmartPlant P&ID into
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator comprises of two steps:
1. Export the P&ID Drawing to an XML file through the Use of TEF.
2. Import the XML file using the Aspen Capital Cost Estimator framework.
The import process generates piping and instrumentation installation bulk
sets for all P&ID equipments in Aspen Capital Cost Estimator. No Graphical
data is imported.
Open a new or existing Aspen Capital Cost Estimator project, and add
equipment components to the new project.
Because the equipment data in a P&ID drawing is not sufficient to develop
equipment components in Aspen Capital Cost Estimator, you must create the
equipment components (present in P&ID drawings) in a Aspen Capital Cost
Estimator project. Subsequently, the PID XML file is imported using the
Import P&ID Drawing on the File menu.

Browse to the location where the exported XML files are stored, and select the appropriate
exported XML File.

Upon selecting the XML File:
 PID Data (Equipment, Lines, and Loops) are imported into a Temporary
Access Database.
 A Preliminary Evaluation of the Project is performed to generate
Volumetric (or Installation) Bulk Pipe Lines.
 A Mapping GUI is Launched: The GUI displays Equipment and Lines from
both the P&ID Drawing, and the Aspen Capital Cost Estimator Project.
 You are expected to map SPPID Equipment to Aspen Capital Cost
Estimator Equipment, and SPPID Pipe line to Aspen Capital Cost Estimator
Installation bulk pipe.
 Alternately, you can select Automap, and map equipment and lines by
user tag and line tag.
Select the desired SPPID Equipment to map:

 Details about the selected equipment appear in the lower text area.
 P&ID Lines connected to the Equipment are listed in the P&ID Line list.
 Aspen Capital Cost Estimator Equipment that are similar or have the same
tag are listed in the Aspen Capital Cost Estimator Equipment list.
 When you hover over any item on any list, a tooltip lists details about the
item.
 Select the SPPID Equipment and an appropriate Aspen Capital Cost
Estimator Equipment; then click the Map button.

Continue until all equipment are mapped to Aspen Capital Cost Estimator;
then proceed to map the SPPID Lines to Aspen Capital Cost Estimator
equipment or lines.
 Select the desired SPPID line to map:
 Details about the selected line appear in the lower text area
 When you hover over any line, a tooltip lists details about the line

 A PID Pipe Line can be mapped to Aspen Capital Cost Estimator
Equipment or to an individual Aspen Capital Cost Estimator pipe line
o Select a Aspen Capital Cost Estimator Equipment to map to
o Select a Aspen Capital Cost Estimator line to map
o Click the Map button
Note: You can choose to map one long SPPID line to two Aspen Capital
Cost Estimator lines. In this case, fittings are partitioned between the two
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator lines.
In the example given below, Line P-13802-4”-1S3984 is mapped to the
centrifugal pump; if you wanted to map it to the centrifugal pump inlet, then
the SPPID line can be mapped to DCP-2 Line 2.
Continue mapping SPPID lines to Aspen Capital Cost Estimator Equipment or

Lines until all the interconnecting lines are mapped. If a single SPPID line is
mapped to two Aspen Capital Cost Estimator lines, the fittings on the line are
distributed to both lines of Aspen Capital Cost Estimator.
When All Equipment and Lines have been mapped, you can choose to do one
of three things:
 Save mapping and exit, for instance, to import more drawings (the Aspen
Capital Cost Estimator Project not yet updated with lines and loops)
 Update the Aspen Capital Cost Estimator project with line/fittings and
loop/instrument data
 Cancel and quit the mapping GUI.
After all piping and equipment from one or more drawings have been
imported and mapped, the project is updated. This results in piping and
instrumentation installation bulk sets for all P&ID equipments in Aspen Capital
Cost Estimator. No Graphical data is imported.

Interconnecting Volumetric
P&ID Lines
Connect pipelines between components in a Aspen Capital Cost Estimator
project, estimate the project, and create piping line list report for connected
lines with the same line tag.
Open a Aspen Capital Cost Estimator

project
Open a new or existing Aspen Capital Cost Estimator project, add equipment
components to the new project.
Run Interconnect Piping Lines

To run interconnect piping lines:
1 On the main tool bar, click Run.
2 Click Interconnect Piping Lines to launch the GUI as shown below:

The GUI displays five lists. All equipment and its associated pipelines in the
project are displayed in two groups:
 Connect From
 Connect To
The first two lists display equipment and piping lines in the Connect From
group.
The third list displays all connected lines.
The fourth and fifth lists display piping lines and equipment in the Connect
To group.
3 On the list in the Connect From and Connect To groups, click the
desired equipment item.
The line lists will then display only the lines corresponding to the selected
equipments. When the mouse hovers over an equipment or a line, the tooltip
in the list provides additional information related to this item. The related
additional information is also displayed in the bottom text area when clicking
on an equipment or a line.
Connecting Piping Lines

To connect two lines:
1 Select the Auto Generate Line Tag check box, or, in the Line Tag field,
type a unique line tag.
2 In the Connect From line list, click a piping line.
3 In the Connect To line list, click the desired line.
4 Click Connect.

5 Repeat Steps 1-4 above to connect all the desired lines between the
equipment items.
Note: Use Filter to display all disconnected equipment or all disconnected

lines.
Disconnecting Piping Lines

To disconnect all existing pipeline connections between all
equipments:
 Click Disconnect All.
All connected lines will be removed from middle list and will be displayed in
the respective line list.
To disconnect a specific line between the two equipments:

 In the middle list, click a line item; then click Disconnect.

Renaming a Line Tag
To rename a line tag:
1 On the Connecting list, click the desired item.
2 In Line Tag field, edit the line tag.
3 Click Rename Line Tag.

Saving All Connections and (optionally)
Updating the Project
To save all the connections and update the project:
 Click the Update Project.
To save all the connections without updating the project:

 Click the Save Mapping & Exit.
All connections on the GUI are saved, but the project is not updated.
Getting the Connected Line List Report

To get the connected line list report:
1 Evaluate the above project.
2 Click View | Capital Cost View.
The Select Report Type to View dialog box appears.
3 On the Select Report Type to View dialog box, click Interactive
Reports; then click OK
The reporter is active.
4 Click Excel reports.
5 Click Other reports | Discipline | Pipe:
o Connected Line List
-or-
o Model Line List
as shown below:
6 Click Run Report.

The report is shown below:
Connected Line List
Model Line List
Mapping Streams to Piping

Lines
Note: For Aspen Capital Cost Estimator with Aspen Process Economic
Analyzer Overlay project, see the Aspen Process Economic Analyzer user
guide (AspenProcessEconAnalyzerV8.0-Usr.pdf).
In an existing or new Aspen Process Economic Analyzer (or Aspen Capital
Cost Estimator with Aspen Process Economic Analyzer Overlay) project, you
can assign stream physical properties to lines in order to size the line
diameter.
Importing 3D Piping and

Structure Data Using the

SmartPlant 3D–Aspen Icarus
Interface
Overview
The process of using the SmartPlant 3D–Aspen Icarus Interface is composed
of two steps:
1 Exporting data from SmartPlant 3D using a reporting feature.
2 Importing data to create components in an Aspen Icarus project.
Step 1: Exporting Data from SmartPlant 3D

The goal of the first step is to create spreadsheet reports containing the data
exported from SmartPlant 3D. SmartPlant 3D can generate three types of
reports.
 Pipe Rack data
 Open Steel Structure data
 Pipe Run data
To generate these reports:

1 On the SmartPlant 3D Tools menu, click Run Report.
The Run Report dialog box appears.

2 On the Run Report dialog box, on the Catalog Reports tab, click the
report that includes the desired data.

Pipe Racks:
Structure:

Pipe Runs:
3 In the File name field, type the output file name; then click Run.
Step 2: Importing the data to Aspen Icarus

The goal of the second step is to import the data in the spreadsheets
generated in the first step into Aspen Icarus to generate components. During
the import process, the spreadsheets being imported are broken into two
types.
 The Pipe Run and Pipe Fitting spreadsheets
 The Non-Pipe Runs spreadsheets:
o Pipe Rack spreadsheets
o Steel Structure spreadsheets
Note: All the spreadsheets to be imported in one run must be in the same
folder.
To import the spreadsheets generated in the first step, you follow these three
steps:
1 Selecting the Non-Pipe Run spreadsheets to import
2 Selecting the Pipe Run and Pipe Fitting spreadsheets to import.
3 Loading the spreadsheets.
Step 1: Selecting the Pipe Runs and Fitting

Spreadsheets to Import.
To select the Pipe Run and Pipe Fitting spreadsheets to import:

1 Open a project in Aspen Icarus with the desired basis of design
configured.
2 On the Aspen Capital Cost Estimator File menu, click Import SP 3D.

The Add SP 3D Spread Sheets dialog box appears.
3 On the Non-Pipe Runs Sheets pane, click Add Sheet.

The Select Non-Pipe Run file dialog box appears.
4 On the Select Non-Pipe Run file dialog box, click a spreadsheet exported
from SP 3D other than the Pipe Run and Pipe Fitting spreadsheets.

5 Repeat Step 4 above as many times as desired, typically once for Pipe
Racks and once for Steel Structures.
Step 2: Selecting the Pipe Runs and Fitting

Spreadsheets for Import
Importing Pipe Run data requires has two steps.
A Selecting the Pipe Run data
B Selecting the Pipe Fitting data that goes with the Pipe Run data selected.

Step A: Selecting the Pipe Run spreadsheet
1 On the Add SP 3D Spread Sheets dialog box, on the Pipe Sheets with
Fitting sheets pane, click Add Sheets.
The Pipe Runs file dialog box appears.
2 On the Pipe Runs file dialog box, click a Pipe Runs spreadsheet.

Step B: Selecting the Pipe Fitting data
The Select a Fitting file dialog box appears.
3 On the Select a Fitting file dialog box, click the corresponding file.
4 Repeat the Add Sheets process as many times as necessary.

Step 3: Loading the Data
5 After selecting all the sheets to import, on the Add SP 3D Spread
Sheets dialog box, click OK.
The main Aspen Icarus interface is hidden and a progress dialog is displayed.
When the process is complete, the Aspen Icarus interface is re-displayed and
the components imported have been created.
Adding or Updating Codes to this Interface

In cases where undefined codes are specified in the spreadsheets published
by Smart Plant 3D for different piping, fitting, or structural attributes (for
example, materials, fittings type, pipe schedule, pipe rack type, and so on),
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator will generate a loading error log file
(SP3Derr.log) detailing the incompatible/unrecognized codes. The current
OOTB interface contains codes received from Intergraph mapped to an
appropriate equivalent in Aspen Capital Cost Estimator. At times, there may

be changes or updates to these codes or the inclusion of company specific
codes which will not be present in the OOTB solution. The following
procedure describes the steps necessary to account for such changes in the
codes so the Aspen Capital Cost Estimator loading process can proceed
without error:
1 Locate the following XML file (SP3DIConfig.xml) in (V8.0 location):
\Program Files\AspenTech\Economic Evaluation
V8.0\Program\Sys\loader.
2 Backup this file as this file contains all valid codes for both applications
in the OOTB solution.
3 Edit this xml file (in a manner consistent with the existing xml format)
to add the new or changed codes in the relevant SPAttribute section:
Example: For new pipe material codes add the new code(s) under
CpPipeMaterial, new fittings codes under SpFittingType, new
pipe rack codes under CpPipeRackType, and so on.
4 Provide an appropriate mapping to the new codes for the desired
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator attribute. The mappings need to be
recognized by Aspen Capital Cost Estimator; otherwise an error will
occur when loading the data. The existing xml file has many of the
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator mapping codes available, so this can be
used as a reference. In addition, you can refer to the Aspen Capital
Cost Estimator GUI if certain attributes are not present in the XML file
and are desired to be used (for example, pipe materials).
5 Save the changes, ensuring the file name is maintained as

SP3DIConfig.xml. The new file with added codes will be used the
next time a load is performed for new projects.
6 For existing projects where the old codes (that is, the old xml file) was
used, you will not see the updated codes when reloading the data
unless the following is performed:
a. Open the old project
b. Locate the iccache directory (OOTB V8.0 location:
\Documents and Settings\UserName\Local Settings\Application
Data\AspenTech\Economic Evaluation V8.0\Projects\Project
Name
c. In this location, delete the SP3DIConfig.xml file.
d. Reload the SP3D spreadsheets, the new codes will be used.
It is recommended that an administrator perform these changes/updates and
distribute the new xml file to users as needed. In addition, in order to use
this updated data with future versions of Economic Evaluation, this xml file
will have to be copied to the appropriate location of the new installation
version. In cases where Aspen Tech makes changes to this file, previous
company specific changes should be merged with Aspen Tech changes if
necessary.
Note: It is highly recommended the installed version of the xml file be

backed up and retained prior to making any changes in the event the original
file is required.

Known Issues
Slab Thickness
An issue with the Export of slab thickness export exists – Integraph is
working to resolve the issue.
Piping Design Pressure

In Version 2004.2, an issue with the import of piping design pressure existed.
This is resolved in Icarus 2006 and subsequent versions. Because we expect
the pipe schedule data to be exported, the design pressure data is not
required for the evaluation.

7 Developing and Using Cost
Libraries
Overview
The Libraries view on the Palette arranges libraries in a tree-structure. Most
of the libraries listed access project specifications (explained in Chapter 3).
The Cost Libraries are unique, however, in that they comprise collections of
particular cost items that you can add as project components. The cost
libraries are customizable; you can add items to the libraries provided, as well
as add your own libraries.
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator includes two types of cost libraries:
 Equipment Model Library (EML)
 Unit Cost Library (UCL)
Each library type may include one or more library files, which in turn may
contain one or more library items, each representing a particular type of cost
item.
Equipment Model Library (EML)

Note: If you are interested in accessing data as Unit Cost Libraries from
Aspen Richardson's WinRace or another third party data source, see
Accessing External Unit Cost Data in Chapter 6, Developing and
Using Cost Libraries, in Aspen In-Plant Cost Estimator V8.0 User Guide
(AspenInPlantCostEstimatorV8.0-Usr.pdf).
The EML is intended to store custom equipment items, for which you create
component specification forms. In a project, you can add an item from the
EML as a component and fill out the form that you earlier created.
The library can store a generic equipment item that comes in discrete sizes,
such as an extruder, or an equipment item that follows a continuous
cost-capacity relationship such as linear, semi-log or log-log.
7 Developing and Using Cost Libraries 447

Unit Cost Library (UCL)
The UCL is intended to store and retrieve direct costs and installation
man-hours, which are based on a simple unit of measure (for example, the
cost of a material item or installation man-hours per unit of area, per unit of
length, per item, and so on). Costs can also be stored in a library for indirect
items such as project management man-hours per month, crane rental (plant
hire) on a daily, weekly, monthly basis, and so on
For one-of-a-kind cost items not worth storing in a library, the unit cost
library may be used to create a dummy item for recall and modification in a
project. The dummy item is stored in the library with as little data as possible.
This can be retrieved and modified in as much detail as required whenever
you need a one-time cost added into a project.
Developing and Using an

Creating an EML
The instructions in this sub-section show you how to create an EML. The
instructions in the sub-sections that follow this one, which show you how to
add an item to an EML and then add the item to a project, use a single
example that can be added either to an Inch-Pound EML that you created or
to one of the two Inch-Pound EML’s provided.
To create an EML:
1 With no project open, go to the Palette’s Libraries tab view.
2 Expand Cost Libraries in the tree-structure; then expand Equipment
Model Library.
The Cost Libraries are divided into Inch-Pound and Metric.
3 To create a library for use in projects with an Inch-Pound units of measure
basis, as in the example used in these instructions, right-click on
Inch-Pound, then on the menu that appears, click New.
448 7 Developing and Using Cost Libraries

The New Equipment Model Library dialog box appears.
4 Type a file name (required) for the EML and a brief description (optional);
then click OK.

An empty Library dialog box appears.
You can now add items to the new library.
Adding an Item to an EML

The instructions below for defining and using an EML item follow a single
example from item creation through the addition of the item to a project.
Using the example provided will define the item in such a way that it
automatically generates a foundation and/or electrical power supply bulks.
To add an item to an EML:

1 If you just added a library, the Library dialog box is displayed, and you
can skip to Step 2. If not, follow these steps:
2 Go to the Palette’s Libraries tab view.
3 Expand Cost Libraries, Equipment Libraries, and either Inch-Pound
or Metric. (If following the example provided, select Inch-Pound.)
4 Right-click on the library to which you want to add an item, and then click
Modify on the pop-up menu.
5 Click Add on the Library dialog box.
6 Enter a Reference ID for the item in the Add Item dialog box.
The one- to six-character alphanumeric Reference ID uniquely identifies
the library item being added. The ID is used to sort and search for library
items. The first character must be a letter.
7 Click OK.

8 Enter the descriptive data for the item in the Develop Equipment Model
Library form. If following the example, enter the data exactly as shown
below. Be sure to correctly enter the sizing parameters, CAPFLOW and
PWRDRVR; Aspen Capital Cost Estimator knows to use GPM (or L/S for
METRIC) and HP, respectively, for these parameters.
Note: Sizing method: the data is in the form of either a continuous curve
(linear, log-log or semi-log) or a set of discrete tabular values. When an
equipment model library item is retrieved into a project, the specified size for
the project component is used to develop the appropriate cost, man-hours
and weight from the library data.
9 Click OK to save your specifications.
The new item appears on the Library dialog box, which you can now close.
Adding an EML Item as a Project

Component
To add an EML item as a project component:
1 Open the project to which you want to add the EML item. For the purposes
of this example, you can use either an existing or newly created US/I-P
based project.

2 In Project Explorer (Project view), right-click on the area in which to add
the EML item, and then click Add Project Component on the pop-up
menu.
3 On the Icarus Project Component Selection dialog box, specify a
project component name for the item.
4 Click Equipment Model Library; then click OK.

5 On the Select an Equipment Model Library File dialog box, click the
EML to which you added the item.
6 Click OK.
7 At the Select an Equipment Model Library Item dialog box, select the
item you added and click OK.

8 Enter your specifications for the item at the Component Specifications
form, as shown below. Note that the Size parameters CAPFLOW and
PWRDRVR are included on the form.
9 Click OK to apply and save the specifications.

The item will now be included in project evaluations.
Note: If you want to use sizing parameters with the EML, you must use one
of the sizing parameter symbols listed below:
Symbol Description
AREA Heat Exchanger Area
AREAH Area Height
AREAL Area Length
AREAW Area Width
CAP Liquid Volume
CAPACITY Liquid Volume

CAPFLOW Liquid Flowrate
CAPREF Refrigeration Capacity
DENS Fluid Density
DENSITY Fluid Density
DIA Vessel Diameter
DIAMETER Vessel Diameter
DIA1 Bottom Diameter
DIA2 Top Diameter
DTMP Design Temperature
DTMP2 Alt Design Temperature
DUTY Heat Transfer
FLOW2 Alt Gas Flow
FLOWRATE Gas Flow
HEAD Fluid Head
HEIGHT Vessel T-T Height
HGT Vessel T-T Height
HGT1 Bottom Height
HGT2 Top Height
JPRES Jacket Pressure
LENGTH Equipment Length
LTH Equipment Length
MWGT Molecular Weight
NITEMS Multiple Items
POWER Power
PRES Pressure
PRES2 Alt Pressure
PRESSURE Pressure
PWRDRVR Power
RAT Flow
SPGR Specific Gravity
TMP Temperature
TMP2 Alt Temperature
VISCOS Viscosity
VOL Gas or Solid Volume
VOLUME Gas or Solid Volume
WIDTH Equipment Width
WTH Equipment Width
Developing and Using a Unit

Cost Library (UCL)
The instructions below use as an example a library of asbestos abatement
(ASBABT) costs and man-hours. This example has been selected because
environmental remediation data is difficult to model, since costs and

man-hours tend to vary greatly based on site conditions and project types.
Items of a unique and/or variable nature are ideal for storing in a UCL.
The instructions take this example through the following stages:
1 creating a unit cost library
2 adding items to the library
3 adding a library item to a project as a component
4 forming an assembly in the project out of multiple UCL items
Creating a Unit Cost Library

To create a unit cost library:
1 With no project open, go to the Palette’s Libraries tab view. Expand Cost
Libraries in the tree structure, and then expand Unit Cost Library.
The libraries are divided into Inch-Pound and Metric.
2 To create a library for use in projects with an Inch-Pound units of measure
basis, as in the ASBABT example used in these instructions, right-click on
Inch-Pound and click New on the pop-up menu.
3 In the New Unit Cost Library dialog box, type a file name (required) for
the UCL and a brief description (optional).

4 Click OK to create the new UCL.
An empty Library dialog box appears.
You can now add items to the new UCL.
Adding an Item to a UCL

To add items to a UCL:
1 If you just added a library, the Library dialog box is displayed, and you
can skip to Step 2. If not, follow these steps:
A Go to the Palette’s Libraries tab view.
B Expand Cost Libraries, Unit Cost Libraries, and either Inch-Pound or
Metric.
C Right-click on the library to which you want to add an item, and then
click Modify on the pop-up menu.
2 Click Add on the Library dialog box.
3 Enter a Reference ID for the item in the Add Item dialog box.

The one- to six-character alphanumeric Reference ID uniquely identifies the
library item being added. The ID is used to sort and search for library items.
The first character must be a letter.
4 Click OK.
5 In the Develop Unit Cost Library form, enter information for the new
item.
Note: Costs for the item will be allocated to the specified Code of Account
(COA). See Icarus Reference Chapter 34 for COA definitions.
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator uses the Material Cost Per Unit and Labor Cost
Per Unit to cost the item in an estimate. If Labor Hours Per Unit is specified
and Labor Cost Per Unit is left blank, Aspen Capital Cost Estimator will
calculate the labor cost using the project wage rates at the time of the
estimate.
The Unit of Measure can be designated for “each” or by any appropriate unit
(for example, “1000 SF”). Be sure to sufficiently describe the item so that you
know what the unit costs include when the item is retrieved at some future
date. The quantity is entered when the library item is retrieved into a project.
The Date and Source are for your reference and are not transferred into an
estimate.
6 When done entering specifications for the item, click OK.
7 To add a set of items as in the ASBABT example, repeat the process
(Steps 2-4) to add the following items in addition to the one shown in the
previous graphic.

Code Mat’l Labor Date
of Cost Cost Unit of of
Refere Item Accou Per Per Measu quotat
nce No. Description nt Unit Unit re ion
AAB200 Polyethylene 800 .021 .004 SF 04APR0

Sheeting 1
AAB201 Duct Tape 800 3.50 ROLL 04APR0
(300’ roll) 1
AAB202 Adhesive 800 6.00 CAN 04APR0
Spray (60’ / 1
can)
AAB300 Decontamin 800 300.00 2 EACH 04APR0
ation 1
Shower
AAB301 Neg Air 800 300.00 2 EACH 04APR0
Pressure 1
System
AAB400 Lighting 800 .01 EACH 04APR0
Fixture 1
Removal
After the above are added, the Library dialog box will appear as shown
below.
8 When done adding items to the UCL, click close on the Library dialog
box.
Adding a UCL Item to a Project

To add a single UCL item to a project:
1 Open the project to which you want to add the UCL item. To add an item
from the ASBABT library developed as an example in the previous

instructions, you can open either an existing or newly created US/I-P
based project.
the UCL item, and then click Add Project Component on the pop-up
menu.
3 On the Icarus Project Component Selection dialog box, specify a
project component name for the item.
4 Select Unit Cost Library and click OK.

5 At the Select a Unit Cost Library File dialog box, select the UCL to
which you added the item and click OK.
6 At the Select a Unit Cost Library Item dialog box, select the item you
added and click OK.

7 On the Component Specifications form, click the Option drop-down
button and select Unit Cost Items.
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator retrieves the unit cost data you set up in
Libraries.

8 You can now enter the quantity data and modify any of the retrieved data.
Creating an Assembly of UCL Items

This section shows how to add several items from the library to form an
assembly. In the example, the items from the ASBABT library are added to
form an Asbestos Abatement Area Preparation Assembly.
To create an assembly of UCL items in a project:

the UCL item, and then click Add Project Component on the pop-up
menu.
2 On the Icarus Project Component Selection dialog box, enter as the
project component name a description of the assembly.

3 Click Unit cost library; then click OK.
4 On the Select a Unit Cost Library File dialog box, click the UCL
containing the first item to add to the assembly; then click OK.
5 On the Select a Unit Cost Library Item dialog box, click the first item to
add to the assembly; then click OK.

6 On the Component Specifications form, click the Options drop-down
button; then click Unit Cost Items.
7 Click Add.
8 On the Select a Unit Cost Library File dialog box, click the UCL
containing the next item to add to the assembly; then click OK.
9 On the Select a Unit Cost Library Item dialog box, click the next item
to add to the assembly; then click OK.

10 Repeat the process of adding items until the form contains columns for all
the items in the assembly.
11 After entering quantities for the items, click OK.

The assembly is listed as one project component on the Project Explorer
(Project view) and the List view.
You can now run an evaluation on the item (see page 563 for instructions).
X X
An Item Report would summarize total costs and man-hours, as well as list
each assembly item’s costs and man-hours.

Working with Cost Libraries
Equipment model and unit cost libraries share the functions described in this
section.
Copying a Library Item

When adding a library item similar to one that already exists, it is easier to
copy the existing library item and modify the necessary specifications.
To copy a library item:

1 Highlight a library item in the Library dialog box; then click Copy.
2 Enter a Reference ID for the new item.
The one- to six-character alphanumeric Reference ID uniquely identifies
the library item being added. The ID is used to sort and search for library
items. The first character must be a letter.
3 Click OK.
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator adds the new item with all the same data as the
original — only the Reference ID has changed.
Deleting a Library Item

When a library item is no longer useful, it can be removed from the library
file.
To delete a library item:

1 Highlight a library item in the Library dialog box and click Delete.
A dialog box appears to confirm the delete.
2 Click Yes to delete the selected library item.
-or-
Click No to retain the library item in the library file.
Escalating Library Costs

Library items contain costs that change over time due to inflation. Escalating
library costs bring the library costs up to date.
To escalate library costs:

1 Click Escalate on the Library dialog box.

The Escalate Costs dialog box appears.
2 Enter the escalation specifications.

In this field type
New Base Date The date of escalation or the date at which the prices are
current.
Material Escalation The amount by which to escalate material costs.
Labor Escalation The amount by which to escalate labor costs. Because EMLs
only include setting man-hours, not labor costs, this field
appears only when escalating unit cost libraries.
3 Click OK to escalate all library items in the library file.
Importing a Cost Library

You can import UCL files, which have the extension “.LIB”, and EML files,
which have the extension “.EML”, from elsewhere on your computer or
network.
To import a cost library:

1 In the Palette (Libraries view), right-click the appropriate Units of
Measure basis (Inch-Pound or Metric).

2 Click Import.
The Select a File for Import dialog box appears.
3 In the Select a File for Import dialog box, click the file; then click
Open.
The file is now included in the Palette, and its items can be added as Aspen
Capital Cost Estimator project components.
Duplicating a Cost Library

To duplicate a cost library:
1 In the Palette (Libraries view), right-click the library you wish to
duplicate; then click Duplicate on the pop-up menu.
2 Enter a file name and description (optional) for the new library.

Aspen Capital Cost Estimator displays the Library dialog box for the new
Library, which contains the same items as the original. You can add, modify,
or delete the items without affecting the original.
Deleting a Cost Library

To delete a cost library:
1 In the Palette (Libraries view), right-click the library to be deleted.
2 On the menu that appears, click Delete.

8 Changing Plant Capacity
and Location
Note: In order to have access to the features covered in this chapter, you
must be licensed to use Aspen Process Economic Analyzer. You must also
select at startup to use Aspen Process Economic Analyzer in the Aspen Capital
Cost Estimator environment.
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer lets you evaluate alternate plant capacities
and locations.
When you change plant capacity, Aspen Process Economic Analyzer re-sizes
each project component to a desired plant capacity. Unique expert system
rules, based on engineering principles, provide the basis for revising the size
of every project component in the process facility that is implicated in stream
flows, as well as the size of other plant facility components in the plant
layout, including process and utility components inside battery limits (ISBL)
and outside battery limits (OSBL), associated installation bulks, piping, cable
runs, buildings, structures, pipe racks, and site improvements.
Changing Plant Capacity

Changing the production capacity affects not only every stream flow, but the
size, and in some cases, the number of project components. Aspen Process
Economic Analyzer’s Analyzer Scale-up Module (ASM) automatically examines
each element of a project, applies a set of scale-up rules unique to that
element and recreates the entire plant description according to the new
production capacity.
ASM contains hundreds of rules for each of the hundreds of Aspen Icarus
project components. Rules are based on engineering principles for elements
that are directly linked to production capacity. For other elements that are
footprint oriented such as building and structures, rules based on heuristics
are applied.
When the scaled project is evaluated, design quantities that are developed for
the newly sized components are designed to meet the needs of a project.
Further, revisions to P&IDs and similar user adjustments contained in the
baseline project are also treated in the same way. The idea is to design a
scaled project as it is intended to be built. This methodology eliminates the
8 Changing Plant Capacity and Location 469

need for applying a factor to the baseline plant cost to scale it up or down.
Given a new capacity, ASM recreates the entire plant.
The ASM process is automatic and rapid. ASM revises sizes of components to
meet a revised capacity and the project evaluation engines do the difficult,
time-consuming evaluation work. Users find ASM performs its re-sizing
operation results to be similar to engineering design methods with the added
benefit of much reduced time and resources. Further, equal confidence can be
applied to evaluation results before and after using ASM as rules are
discipline-based and the before and after evaluation processes are identical.
To change plant capacity:

1 Open your baseline project and save it under a new scenario name that
reflects the new capacity. This will ensure that your baseline project
remains intact, separate and apart from your about-to-be scaled project.
2 On the Run menu, click Decision Analyzer or click the “A” button on the
toolbar.
The Decision Analyzer dialog box appears.
3 Select the Change Plant Capacity by (5-600%) check box.

4 Type the desired percentage adjustment or select it using the Up/Down
arrow buttons. For example, if you need to revise the capacity by a value
beyond 600% to 700%, scale your project twice. For this, the Evaluate
470 8 Changing Plant Capacity and Location

Project check box should be cleared. Then you can split the desired 700%
into two parts: first use 350%, and on completion, scale it again at 350%.
5 Click OK to initiate the Analyzer Scale-up Module.
6 Upon completion, save the scaled project.
Analyzer Scale-Up Module

(ASM)
How ASM Works
Scale-up of a project to a new production capacity is a two-step process.
1 The Aspen Scale-up Module is invoked. The ASM processor
1 analyzes each specification in your project
2 applies the appropriate scale-up rule
3 revises the specification to a new value
4 moves on to the next specification
You can follow the progress of this phase by noting the item names in the
display at the bottom of your screen.
2 The project is evaluated. This phase performs the designs, develops
quantities, hours, costs, and so on, and prepares the basic set of reports
for your project at the new capacity. On completion of this step, you can
proceed to prepare special reports and perform other analyses on your
newly scaled project.
Save the project after the scale-up operation.
Scale-Up Rule Set

Analyzer contains rules for hundreds of components and cost elements that
are based on (a) engineering design principles for scale-up of all process
equipment, stream flows, etc and (b) heuristics for plant items that are based
on footprint and plot plan. The current rule set in some instances modifies the
number of items rather than change sizes, as in the simple example of trees
along a fence line, where the number of trees would be revised rather than
the size of each tree. In the current rule set, there is no automatic provision
for increasing the number of project components.
Limiting Conditions
It is possible that on extreme capacity scale-ups, sizes of certain equipment
or bulk items may surpass a system limiting value. In this case, an error
condition would be issued. The user would then examine the scaled model for
the particular item(s) and revise the size and number of out-of-range items
accordingly, as an item in an error condition would be excluded from the
estimate.
Warning messages are generated after project scaling (via ASM) is performed
notifying users if scaling rules could not be applied to certain equipment

components due to min/max limits on equipment specs being reached. In the
event scaled values fall outside either min. or max. equipment spec limits, the
pre-scaled value is retained. Once an error condition is met, you have the
option to either stop the scaling operation or continue. If stop is clicked then
further operations based on your selection in the Decision Analyzer dialog (for
example, evaluation) will not be run. These error messages are similar to
scan errors dialog and will provide you with a listing of components in which
the ASM rules cannot be applied (see example below).
Scale-up Candidates
ASM rules apply to the following types of project information:
 Area specs: distances, dimensions, cost per unit weight
 Project Component specs: specific rules based on item type and
specification, typically size dimension, capacity, power and occasionally
number of items
Note: Several sanitary process equipment items associated with batch

food processing will not be scaled.
 Installation specs: quoted costs, hours and numeric specs for piping,
duct, civil, steel, electrical, insulation, paint. Text-based sizes such as pipe
schedule, wire size, and so on, are symbolic and are not scaled.
 Project Component Quoted Cost: While ASM has rules for quoted cost, the
ASM rule may not be the best for your type of item. Here, it’s better to
apply a % Adjustment to the system’s estimated cost in an amount that
will bring the estimated cost up to your quoted value. Then, on scaling,
the new reported cost will be calculated by applying your % Adjustment to
the estimated cost. Based on the scaled sizes.
 Quoted hours: based on item type
 Quoted weight: based on item type
 Stream flow rate: scaled to the new capacity
Scale-Up for Configuration Analysis

Often, sections of a proposed facility may be required to consist of parallel
trains, joining up to meet downstream units. Situations such as these are best

handled by creating models of these sections at a standard capacity and then
scaling desired sections to say 50% capacity. You would then import the
various sections into an overall model, with multiple trains being imported as
many times as required. The resulting model would then be evaluated for
capital investment and process economics.
Analyzer Relocation Module

(ARM)
The Analyzer Relocation Module lets you evaluate the impact of worldwide
location on capital cost and a variety of other econometrics. Specifically, you
can “relocate” a project from one basis to any one of 89 worldwide locations.
You can choose to retain the location of your engineering workforce or choose
any one of 89 worldwide locations.
When you need to evaluate a project that you might engineer and/or
construct in a different city or country location, ARM will quickly and
automatically revise your project parameters with those contained in its
location knowledge base. The ARM knowledge base includes key location-
dependent data and rules to properly convert your project from its starting
basis to your selected location(s) using location dependent values for design
parameters, engineering and construction work forces, cost of materials, and
engineering, material and construction indirects. You can use ARM in
combination with the Analyzer Scale-up Module (ASM) and Analyzer
Economics Module (AEM) all in the same run or separately from the other
modules.
Relocation Terminology
 Baseline project: initial case, before executing ARM.
 Relocated project: after ARM processing of the baseline project.
 Relocation: a process of evaluating an initially formulated project
(baseline project) to a new location (relocated project).
 Locations: a general location, characterized by a city and country name,
which is used to represent a particular EPC function. The function may or
may not be physically sited in that city.
 Engineering location: city and country name used to characterize the
engineering workforce assigned to the project.
 Plant location: city and country name used to characterize the plant site.
Workflow
The figure below shows the general work process. ARM specs, contained in
the ARM rule set are applied to the user’s model. A description of the
elements in the table is provided in the section following the Workflow.

How the Analyzer Plant Relocation Module
(ARM) Works
Baseline Reports Relocation Reports

For Base For New
Engineering and Engineering and
Plant Location Plant Location
Analyzer
Project
Baseline Relocation Relocated
Project
Project Module
ARM Specs
Project
Specs
Construction Construction Material Engineering Engineering

Hours Rates Quantities Hours Rates
Construction Materials Engineering

Indirects Indirects Indirects
Construction Materials Engineering

Contingency Contingency Contingency
Construction Engineering
Fee Cost
Construction Material
Cost
Cost
Project
Contingency

1 Because ARM processing is automatic, it is wise to first save your base
project under a new scenario name in advance of running ARM. Use a
scenario name that refers to the planned new capacity. This will ensure
that your baseline project remains intact for further evaluations.
2 On the Run menu, click Decision Analyzer or click the A button on the
button bar:
This will display the Decision Analyzer dialog box.
Note: ARM shares space with ASM and AEM and Evaluate Project on the
four-part Decision Analyzer dialog box.
3 Select the Change Plant Location to check box.
4 Select the Plant Location from its pull-down list.
5 Select the Engineering Location from its pull-down list.
6 Use the remaining check boxes to select options to
o Enable escalation for Aspen Capital Cost Estimator projects.
o Retain your defined construction start date and duration. If unchecked,
a new date will be developed on relocation.
Note that the last line on the Decision Analyzer dialog box displays three
pieces of information:
 plant location
 currency name
 currency symbol, in parentheses

This information is a reminder to users of the Analyzer Economics Module
(AEM) who are interested in reporting costs in currency different from the
plant location currency. For this, two entry slots are provided for an exchange
rate and symbol. If AEM is not invoked, values so entered will not affect the
reporting aspects of relocation aspects. In Figure 2, the user elected to run
AEM. This would take place immediately after ARM completed the relocation
process, described as follows.
Example: The illustration below is for a plant to be engineered in Rotterdam
and constructed in Singapore. The currency of the plant location is displayed
in the last wire-frame.
Relocating the Project

7 Once having completed the choices, click OK to run the project. If you
choose CANCEL, all choices will be ignored and control will return to the
explorer view.
With your OK, Decision Analyzer’s relocation module automatically converts
your base location project to the selected engineering and plant location. Your
project then contains the results of the relocation, which you can review and
modify.
To do this:
1 Click the Project Basis view and click the desired basis category.
2 Open the associated form, review the data and modify the data, as you
desire.

3 When you are satisfied with the results, save the project, ensuring that it
is saved under a scenario name that describes the relocation and, most
important, that your baseline project is not disturbed by the save.
4 Evaluate the project and review the results.
5 When you are satisfied, a final save will save the results.
ARM Knowledge Base

The ARM knowledge base consists of approximately ten thousand location-
specific data values plus rules that govern the way the location data will be
applied to your baseline project. The ARM knowledge base is derived from a
variety of qualified sources including:
 Aspen Richardson international construction data: raw data from this
source (also used to prepare the Aspen Richardson International Cost
Factor Manual) were analyzed and mapped into Icarus technology formats
for use in ARM
 Proprietary sources
 Practicing professionals, EPC and owner customers and associates
 Surveys
 Technical publications that specialize in international construction costs
 Government sources: seismic, climate data and other location data
 Financial sources: exchange rates, etc.
 Aspen Icarus models: to blend and fill in sparse data areas
Five Bodies of Data

The ARM knowledge base consists of five bodies of data:
 Location specs
 Project specs
 Engineering specs
 Construction specs
 Material Cost specs
Highlights of each component follow.
Location Specs
ARM is formulated for 89 locations in 33 currencies. Locations listed below
include the four Icarus country base locations. The locations are similar to
those in the Aspen Richardson International Cost Factor Manual list.
Locations are organized and sorted by continental region, country and city.
For Canadian and US locations, names include state, province or territory.
Conventional short forms of country and city names are used for simplicity.
 Regions - The number of locations for each region is listed in Table 1.
 City Locations outside the US are listed in Table 2
 US locations are listed in Table 3.

TABLE 1. List of Locations in Each Region
Region Number of locations
Africa 3
Asia 15
Australia 3
Canada 6
Central America 2
Europe 12
Middle East 6
South America 5
United States 37
All Locations 89
Non-US Locations 52
TABLE 2. List of Non-US Locations

Region City, Country Near
Africa El Hassania, Morocco Casablanca

Ibadan, Nigeria
Johannesburg, South Africa
Asia Beijing, China
Guangzhou, China
Shanghai, China
Bhopal, India New Delhi
Mumbai (Bombay), India
Jakarta, Indonesia
Kobe, Japan
Tokyo, Japan
Kuantan, Malaysia Kuala Lumpur
Manila, Philippines
Singapore, Singapore
Seoul, South Korea
Taipei, Taiwan
Samut prakan, Thailand Bangkok
Binh Duong, Vietnam Hanoi
Australia Melbourne, Australia
Perth, Australia
Sydney, Australia
Central America Guatemala City, Guatemala
Mexico City, Mexico
Canada Calgary, Canada
Montreal, Canada
Toronto, Canada

Vancouver, Canada
Windsor, Canada
Winnipeg, Canada
Europe Brussels, Belgium
Paris, France
Frankfurt, Germany
Dublin, Ireland
Milan, Italy
Amsterdam, Netherlands
Rotterdam, Netherlands
Warsaw, Poland
Moscow, Russia
Barcelona, Spain
London, United Kingdom
Manchester, United Kingdom
Middle East Cairo, Egypt
Kuwait City, Kuwait
Dammam, Saudi Arabia Al Jubail
Jeddah, Saudi Arabia
Gebze, Turkey Istanbul
Abu Dhabi, UAE
South America Buenos Aires, Argentina
Rio de Janeiro, Brazil
Medellin, Colombia
Lima, Peru
Caracas, Venezuela

TABLE 3. List of US City Locations
Anchorage, AK
Atlanta, GA
Baltimore, MD
Boston, MA
Cape Girardeau, MO
Cayey, PR
Charlotte, NC
Chicago, IL
Cincinnati, OH
Dallas, TX
Denver, CO
Fairbanks, AK
Green Bay, WI
Houston, TX
Huntsville, AL
Indianapolis, IN
Kansas City, MO
Knoxville, TN
Las Vegas, NV
Los Angeles, CA
Louisville, KY
New Orleans, LA
New York, NY
Newark, NJ
Oakland, CA
Philadelphia, PA
Phoenix, AZ
Portland, ME
Portland, OR
Sacramento, CA
San Francisco, CA
Seattle, WA
Sherman, TX
Spartanburg, SC
St Louis, MO
Syracuse, NY
Wilkes-Barre, PA

Project Data
The ARM knowledge base contains a comprehensive set of values for project
level data. These should be considered as a starting point in the evaluation of
a project. Concerned users should replace the ARM knowledge base values in
their relocated project with more representative values obtained from
company surveys of the intended site.
 Currency: Exchange rate (FEX), as of the first day of the basis year, with
exchange rate and currency units scaled to meet Icarus currency formats.
Scaled currency units are provided at three levels: 3-character symbol, 8-
character name and 24-character description. Values are listed in Table 4.
o Currency: 33 currencies are defined; some ARM locations share the
same currency
o Exchange rate, for each location. The ARM knowledge base works with
exchange rates relative to the currency of each of the five country
bases (US, UK, JP, EU, ME). The currency table contains the rates as
of the listed date.
o Exchange rates are scaled in size to conform to Icarus exchange rate
formats (0.01 to 99.9 in value)
o Scaled currency symbols, names and descriptions are defined to
conform to Icarus format; these contain symbols such as K to
represent thousands and M to represent millions of scaled currency
units, as indicated in Table 4.

Table 4: List of Currencies
Exchange Rate
Currency Currency Currency , per USD
Country Description Name Symbol (1 Jan 2012)
Argentina Argentine Peso Peso-A P 4.3124
Australia Australian Dollar Dollar-A A$ 0.9802
Brazil Brazilian Real Real R 1.8651
Canada Canadian Dollar Dollar-C C$ 1.0223
China Chinese Yuan Renminbi R 6.379
Renminbi
Colombia K Colombian Peso K Peso K-P 1.94989
Egypt Egyptian Pound Pound-E PDE 6.0607
European Union Euro Euro EUR 0.7718
Guatemala Guatemalan Quetzal Quetzal Q 7.9612
India Indian rupee Rupee R 54.8
Indonesia K Indonesian Rupiah K Rupiah K-R 9.15751
Japan K Japanese Yen K Yen K-Y 0.0769557
Kuwait Kuwaiti Dinar Dinar DK 0.2788
Malaysia Malaysian Ringgit Ringgit R 3.1768
Mexico Mexican Peso Peso-MX P 13.9575
Morocco Moroccan Dirham Dirham-M D 8.662
Nigeria K Nigerian Naira K Naira K-N 0.164397
Peru Peruvian Nuevo Sol Nuevo Sol NS 2.7133
Phillipines Phillipine Peso Peso-P P 43.9452
Poland Polish Zloty Zloty Z 3.4749
Russia Russian Rouble Rouble RBL 32.0114
Saudi Arabia Saudi Riyal Riyal R 3.7513
Singapore Singapore Dollar Dollar-S S$ 1.297
South Africa South African Rand Rand ZAR 8.1396
South Korea K South-Korean K Won K-W 1.16171
Won
Taiwan Taiwan Dollar Dollar-T T$ 30.5026
Thailand Thai Baht Baht B 31.988
Turkey Turkish New Lira New Lira NL 1.8936
United Arab Utd. Arab Emir. Dirham-U D 3.6734
Emirates Dirham
United Kingdom British Pound Pound-UK PDS 0.6437
United States US Dollar DollarUS USD 1
Venezuela Venezuela Bolivar Boliv-F B 4.3049
Fuerte
Vietnam K Vietnamese Dong K Dong K-D 21.1348
Current European Union Locations:
 Belgium
 France
 Germany
 Ireland
 Italy
 Netherlands
 Spain

Note: Certain combinations of location currencies and country base
currencies may result in exchange rates that exceed the format bounds for
exchange rate. In such cases, ARM will automatically scale the exchange rate
ratio and revise the currency units, usually with a prefix of "K" to indicate
thousands of the above-listed currency unit. Example: The exchange rate for
Plant location: India, at 46.899 per USD and Country Base: Japan at
0.092586 is 495.74 R/K Yen, which is beyond the exchange rate bound: the
resulting ratio will be scaled by 1000 to 0.496 KRupee/K Yen, and costs will
be reported in KRupee (KR)
 Equipment: design code (ASME, BS5500, DIN, JIS, or EN 13445
depending upon the plant location)
 Civil and Steel: seismic acceleration, soil, footing depth, low/high ambient
temperatures, wind velocity, hand excavation
 Electrical: power supply frequency
 Equipment Rental: a Construction Technology Level (CTL) parameter
(L, M, and H) is assigned to each location. Locations assigned as H-level
draw from the entire system slate of equipment rental items. S-level
locations select from a smaller slate than M-level locations.
 Use of gin poles vs. heavy cranes: each location is assigned a value for
the heavy lift option
Engineering Work Force

The ARM knowledge base contains a comprehensive set of engineering
workforce values, which should be considered as a starting point in the
evaluation of a project. Concerned users should replace the ARM knowledge
base values in their relocated project with more representative values
obtained from company surveys of the intended site.
The following are provided by ARM for each engineering work force location:
 Hourly rates for each of 77 disciplines in the engineering workforce slate.
Hourly rates are provided in the currency of the engineering location.
During the processing of a project, these rates are converted, for
consistent cost reporting, to the currency of the plant location using the
exchange rate ratio:
Discipline Rate in Plant Location Currency = Discipline Rate in the
Engineering Location Currency x Plant Location Exchange Rate /
Engineering Location Exchange Rate
 Engineering workforce productivity – one value is provided for each
engineering location, relative to the engineering productivity at the
country base location
 Engineering Indirect Costs – values are provided for each location for each
of the eight phases of engineering:
o Expense rates
o Payroll burdens
o Office indirects
The eight phases of engineering are:
o Basic Engineering
o Detail Engineering

o Procurement
o Engineering Management
o Home Office Construction Services
o Field Office Supervision
o Construction Management
o Start-up, Commissioning
 Engineering confidence level, associated with the sources of the ARM
knowledge base data, used to compute a value of engineering
contingency. Engineering contingency is computed as the root-mean
square value of the user engineering contingency and engineering
confidence level. For example, if the user contingency before relocation
UC =18% and the ARM location confidence value LC = 10%, then the
computed contingency after relocation is
=  (UC2 + LC2) =  (182+102 ) = 20.6%
Construction
The ARM knowledge base contains a comprehensive set of construction
workforce values, which should be considered as a starting point in the
evaluation of a project. Concerned users should replace the ARM knowledge
base values in their relocated project with more representative values
obtained from company surveys of the intended site.
The following are provided by ARM for each construction work force location:
 Field Craft rates – hourly rates (“nearly all-in”) for each of 28 field crafts
in the construction work force slate and a foreman differential for each
location. By “nearly all-in”, we mean that each craft rate is a unique
composite of the following rate contributions:
o Craft Worker Base Hourly Wage Rate
o Health, Welfare, Pension
o Fringe Benefits
o Hourly Indirect Rate for:
 Temporary Construction
 Consumables and Small Tools
 FICA Unemployment Workers Compensation
Insurance
 Multi-level construction
Craft rates in the ARM knowledge base do not include indirect
construction costs for the following categories as these would be
determined during project evaluation:
o Construction Equipment Rental, including Fuel, Oil, Lubrication,
Maintenance (FOLM)
o Field Supervision
o Contractor Home Office Costs
 Construction workforce productivity – one value is provided for each plant
location, relative to the construction productivity at the country base
location

 Field indirect costs, including construction equipment rental (see Project
Data, below), field supervision, home office costs
 Work week: hours, number of shifts, overtime
 Construction equipment rental: slate of items (see Project Data, below)
 Extent of hand excavation vs. machine excavation
 Construction confidence level, associated with the sources of the ARM
knowledge base data, used to compute a value of construction
contingency. Contingency is computed as the root-mean square value of
the user construction contingency and construction confidence level. For
example, if the user contingency before relocation UC =18% and the ARM
location confidence value LC = 10%, then the computed contingency after
relocation is:
=  (UC2 + LC2) =  (182+102 ) = 20.6%
Material Costs
 Location Indexing
The ARM knowledge base contains a set of location indexes which will
adjust country base material costs to the plant location. Two sets are
provided. The first deals with equipment costs. The second applies to bulk
materials. Use of the supplied location indexes should be considered as a
starting point in the evaluation of a project. Concerned users should
replace the ARM knowledge base values in their relocated project with
more representative values obtained from company surveys of the
intended site.
The location indexes make use of Aspen Richardson values for the average
split of local vs. imported materials. Costs of local and imported materials
are figured by applying location values for freight, taxes, VAT, and other
expenses. Location indexes are stored for each of the four country bases
and are used to characterize material costs by account code (100 to 299
for equipment, 300 to 999 for bulk materials.)
 Unit cost of rebar, ready-mix concrete, in the currency of the plant
location
 Material cost confidence level, associated with the sources of the ARM
knowledge base data, used to compute a value of material cost
contingency. Contingency is computed as the root-mean square value of
the user material contingency and material cost confidence level. For
example, if the user contingency before relocation UC =18% and the ARM
location confidence value LC = 10%, then the computed contingency after
relocation is:
=  (UC2 + LC2) =  (182+102 ) = 20.6%

ARM Notes:
Wire size conversion and wire size input issues in ARM.
 Beginning with V8.0, relocation in ARM to locations which have wire size
input units as M or A show the correct wire size tables in the wire size
fields by setting the wire size units input field correctly in the input
units of measure form .
 The wire sizes if specified anywhere in the project also change from
AWG/KCMIL to the equivalent size in MM2 from the corresponding table
and vice versa.

9 Aspen Utility Modules
Introduction
Important: In Aspen Capital Cost Estimator, only the AUM_Air Utility Module
is available. However, if you load Aspen Process Evaluator (Aspen Process
Economic Analyzer) when you load Aspen Capital Cost Estimator, the
AUM_CW Cooling Water Utility Module is also available.
Both Utility Modules are available in Aspen Process Economic Analyzer. For
convenience, the documentation for both is presented in this chapter.
Analyzer Utility Modules (AUM) – Design

and Scope Generators for Utility Systems
One of the difficulties with process economic analyses, both capital cost and
payback determination, is the lack of scope definition for non-process or
outside boundary limit (OSBL) portions of the project. With AUM modules
creating utility systems in harmony with the process sections of a project,
9 Aspen Utility Modules 487

more accurate, realistic and confident business assessments can be made for
cost and economics.
Each AUM module works in the same way. It extracts information on the
specific utility needs of each project component and area in your project. You
can then interactively revise default values for design preferences and
configuration, evaluate messages, review reports of design results. On
completion, a press of a Load button will automatically transfer to your
project, a list of selected, sized, designed project components assembled
within a unique date- and time-stamped utility area. Should a prior utility
area of the same type be present in your project, you can chose to delete the
old one and replace it with new scope.
All of this takes place in times measured in minutes rather than traditional
days and weeks. Of course, evaluation time depends on the size of the
project. For front end engineering design work, AUM modules can be revisited
in each cycle of scope change to ensure the project needs are properly
satisfied by each utility system.
A Control Panel, a task bar button and numerous hypertext links provide for
easy navigation and rapid access to a status report, specs for preferences and
configurations, reports, an a guide. Messages are provided to assure data
integrity; an error condition will disallow loading of results into your project.
AUM_CW: Cooling Water Utility Selection,

Sizing, and Design Module
The cooling water utility module requires Aspen Process Economic Analyzer or
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer plus Aspen Capital Cost Estimator to
identify cooling water resource streams and their flow conditions. Up to four
cooling water systems can be configured for a project, each with its own set
of sized components: cooling towers, circulation pumps, chemical injection
pumps, supply and return distribution piping, valves, and fittings.
You can interactively define design conditions such as ambient air
temperatures, size limits to distribution piping, equipment types, and assign
individual areas to each cooling water system. Redundancy capabilities
include stand-alone pumps, two 50% capacity pumps, stand-by spares.
Distribution piping includes expansion loops for long runs and circuits include
main lines, branch lines, area headers, and risers and laterals for 3D-type
areas. Each line type has its own “iso” for valve and fitting type. Line sizes
and pump heads are pressure drop based.
AUM_Air: Instrument and Plant Air Utility

Selection, Sizing, and Design Module
The air utility module can be accessed by either Aspen Process Economic
Analyzer or Aspen Capital Cost Estimator. AUM_ Air gathers air requirements
from your project in two ways:
 Instrument air: From a count of air operated control valves and controllers
and instrument air flow required for each based on control valve size
488 9 Aspen Utility Modules

 Plant air: From an air usage model based on a common air tool usage set,
with area utility stations derived from area size and equipment count
within an area
Up to four air plant units (APU) can be configured for a project, each with its
own set of sized components:
 air intake filters/screens
 ductwork
 compressors
 interstage coolers
 air receivers
 pre-filters
 air dryers
 after-filters
 piping distribution network
You can interactively define design premises such as ambient air conditions,
equipment types, equipment redundancy, etc. and assign individual areas to
be served by each air plant unit. Redundancy capabilities include stand-alone
compressors, start-up compressors, receivers, dryers. Redundancy choices
include one at 100% capacity, two at 50% capacity, stand-by spares.
Distribution piping includes two sets, each sized for the required flow of
instrument air and plant air. Piping isos for line segments include expansion
loops for long runs, valves and fittings, Line segments are defined for main
feeders, main manifolds, main lines branch lines, area feeders, area headers
and for 3D–type areas, risers and laterals. Each line type has its own “iso” for
valve and fitting type. Line sizes are pressure drop based.
Analyzer Utility Module (AUM)

Cooling Water (AUM_Water)
Introduction to Analyzer Utility Module
(AUM) Cooling Water
Cooling Water Selection, Sizing, Design Model

This section is divided into four parts:
1 Overview
 Analyzer Utility Module (AUM)
 Cooling Water Design Model
o Value in Time and Effort
o The Key Steps
2 Working with the Cooling Water Model
 Preparation Workflow

 The Workflow Cycle
 Accessing The Cooling Water Model
o Interactive Session Workflow – the Design Phase
o Overview
o Details of the Work Process
o The Initial Design
 Interactive Session Workflow – The Design Phase
o Overview
o Details of the Work Process
o The Initial Design
3 Working with the Cooling Water Model Worksheets
 Introduction
o Worksheets
o Button actions
 Cooling Water Design Model Worksheets
 Worksheet Details
o Status Worksheet
o Preferences Worksheet
 How to Revise Default Values
 Design Preference Categories
o Circuits Worksheet
 Initial Configuration
 Step 1: Assignment of Areas to Circuits
 How Area Assignments are Used for Circuit Design
 Step 2: Assignment of Spacing Between Areas
 Status messages and Values Used for Circuit Design
4 Basis for the Cooling Water Design Model
o General Flow sheet for cooling water service
o Cooling Water Model Circuitry
o Cooling water distribution network
o Naming conventions
 Project cooling water area
 Areas Requiring Cooling Water
 Plant bulk pipe item descriptions
 Distribution Piping Line types
o Sequencing of Areas on the Main Line
o Cooling Water ”Footprint Model”
o Pipe, Valves and Fittings Count
o Line Sizing and Pressure Drop Calculations
 Projects with a prior cooling water utility model area
 Cooling towers- terminology and the defining stream
temperatures

1. Overview
Analyzer Utility Module (AUM) Water

One of the difficulties with economic analysis, both capital cost and payback
determination, is the lack of scope definition for non-process utility or outside
boundary limit portions of the project. The Analyzer Utility Module, AUM, was
created as the “home” for a series of automated utility design models to
address this difficulty. The Cooling Water Selection, Design and Sizing Model
is the first utility design model in AUM and its functionality and method of use
is described in detail in this chapter.
Cooling Water Design Model

The Cooling Water Design Model is an automated, interactive and rapid design
module that is contained in Aspen Decision Analyzer and works with stream-
based projects. The cooling water model identifies heat exchanger equipment
or any other type of project component that requires cooling water by its
connection to a cooling water utility resource stream.
To access the Cooling Water Design Model:

1 Starting with an open project that contains utility streams as part of its
definition, click Run, then click Utility Model. Or, simply click the U
button to access utility models.
2 Click Cooling Water.
At this point built-in design and processing procedures do all the hard work
under your control and guidance and a few minutes later, your project will be
augmented with a new cooling water utility area that contains designed
cooling water circuitry and associated project components. You can use the
model results using its set of adjustable design parameters or revise any and
default values within prescribed limits to suit your needs.
In the discussions to follow, the term early design metrics is used to
indicate values prepared by the cooling water model during an interactive
design session. These are presented for guidance in advance of final design
values that would be prepared on completing a project evaluation run.
Note: Worksheet names are shown in italic bold face to distinguish the
names from text.
Value in Time and Effort

The cooling water design model does all the hard work – design, selection,
reporting, loading the design results – in minutes rather than traditional hours
and days. It is a powerful resource in the development of a typical Front End
Engineering Design:
 Early process technology evaluation stage - focus is on Inside Battery
Limits (ISBL) components

 With the process technology selected and additional scope, total project
costs are sought. Outside Battery Limits (OSBL) components are
required, particularly cooling water utility service.
The cooling water design model
 Automatically selects, designs, and adds sized utility system components
to the project scope definition
 Can be revisited in each cycle of scope change.
The Key Steps

On initiating the cooling water model, the model automatically analyzes your
project for cooling water requirements and automatically generates selected,
sized and designed cooling water utility service project components – all
based on initial default design preferences and circuitry. Two interactive
workbooks Preferences and Circuitry enable you to revise default values for
the design and selection basis. Studying design alternatives starts with either
a click of an option box or a data entry. Being interactive, the cooling water
model enables you to cycle from design basis to early design results in a
matter of mouse clicks. Each new specification results in a new design and a
report of key decision metrics. The list of sized project components is
retained until you choose to load the results into your project. Messages and
metrics reports are provided extensively to guide you quickly and knowingly
through a study of design alternatives.
When you have settled on a design, you can load the results into your
project. The loading operation begins with a click of a Load button and
processing is automatic. After a minute or so, the loading process will be
complete and the Project Basis view will be displayed on your screen. Scope
items added to your project include a uniquely named cooling water area
followed by a list of cooling water utility project components: cooling towers,
circulation pumps, chemical injection pumps, working and stand-by spares,
and distribution piping, valves and fittings. Each component is selected,
designed and sized in harmony with your design basis and the needs of heat
exchange equipment in your various project areas.
2. Working with the Cooling Water Model
Preparation Workflow
The Cooling Water Design model requires a stream-based project built in
either Aspen Process Economic Analyzer or Aspen Decision Analyzer, with
components that require cooling water connected to one or more cooling
water utility resources.
The flow rates, water temperatures, duties and components provide the basis
for the design requirements. The cooling water model will first diagnose the
project’s requirements and initiate a design. The user can then revise the
design basis and review early design metrics for a variety of design scenarios,
settle on a design basis and load the design results into the project.

The Workflow Cycle
Figure 2.1 illustrates the cooling water design cycle: from project to design
model and back to the project with added new scope. Two buttons control the
process:
 U to select the cooling water model
 Load to load designed results
Using these two actions, you can participate interactively in the design
process, making design selections, reviewing early metrics, revising
selections, and clearing any error messages.
Figure 2.1. The Workflow Cycle, extracted from the Welcome worksheet
To initiate a cooling water design model session, three steps are required
1 Save the project under a new scenario name.
2 Evaluate the project
3 Run the Cooling water utility model
Each of these steps is detailed and illustrated in the following sections.
Accessing the Cooling Water Utility Model

1 SAVE AS: Since AUM-Cooling Water processing is automatic, it is wise to
first save your base project under a new name. This will ensure that your
base project remains intact for further evaluations.

2 Evaluate the project: Click Run |Decision Analyzer as in Figure 2.2a or
click the A button as in Figure 2.2b. This will provide the Decision Analyzer
dialog box, Figure 2.2c. Check Evaluate Project and provide a file name.
Figure 2.2a. To evaluate from Run:
Figure 2.2b. To evaluate using the A-button.
Figure 2.2c. Choose Evaluate Project.

The reason for this step is to ensure that the project scope and cooling water
requirements developed during evaluation are current and up to date. It will
also eliminate an error message (Figure 2.2d) that would be displayed when
accessing the cooling water model no evaluation data were available.
.
Figure 2.2d. Error message if the project was not evaluated
3 Select the Cooling Water Model: To do this, click Run | Utility Model
(Figure 2,2a) or press the “U” button on the button bar (Figure 2.3a):

Figure 2.3a. To obtain utility models using the U-button.
This will bring up the Utility Model dialog box, Figure 2.3b. A blank value
under Status indicates the project does not contain a prior cooling water
model area. If a project contained a prior area, the Status field would
indicate Loaded.
Figure 2.3b. Utility model selection

3b Select Cooling Water: Click OK. This will either initiate an interactive
Cooling Water Design session in MS Excel and display a Load option or
display a project-not-evaluated error message (see Step 2 above).
Interactive Session Workflow – the Design Phase
Overview
When the cooling water model is invoked, it:
(a) analyzes for project cooling water requirements
(b) works from Preferences (user-modifiable, default set of design
parameter values)
(c) prepares an initial design.
Results of the initial design and any subsequent interactive scenario are
presented in a Capture worksheet. If the design meets with the user’s
approval, a user click of the parked Load button will load the design results
into the project, at which time the project can be re-evaluated.
The Preferences and Circuits worksheets allow the user to modify the
default design basis. Each spec change will result in a new design. Hyperlinks
provide rapid access from one sheet to another and sections in a sheet. The
Control Center toolbar button opens the Control Center worksheet, which
has hyperlinks to other sheets and their major categories. Worksheet tabs
are color coded to match hyperlinks at the top of each worksheet.

The following sections provide a detailed description of the work process as
well as detailed descriptions of each worksheet, category and item.
Details of the Work Process

With the click of the OK button in step 3b above, three actions will occur
1 The model first identifies if a prior cooling water model area is present in
the project. If present, the user can choose to Delete the prior area and
continue with the model or return to the project. If Delete is chosen, the
utility model will proceed with the design and delay deletion until it is time
to load the new results.
2 If no prior cooling water utility area is detected, the Welcome screen is
displayed and remains present during a time when:
a Project requirements are automatically passed to the model
b The model prepares an initial design
c A Load | Cancel | Minimize option is provided (Figure 2.4). To
continue, click the minimize button at the top. This will park the
button box for access during the design phase. Cancel will end the cooling
water model session and return normal project functions with no change
to the project.
Figure 2.4. Load-Cancel-Minimize button boxes

 a Control Center button bar (figure 2.5) is provided to access the
Control Center worksheet from any worksheet
 Seven worksheets are presented in a MS Excel framework:
o Welcome
o Control Center
o Status
o Preferences
o Capture
o Guide
3 The model then displays the Control Center worksheet, which links to all
other worksheets and provides an indication of success (green signal) or
failure (red signal) to create an initial design based on default design
parameters.
The Initial Design

On initiation, the cooling water model will report the Status of the design on
the Control Center (see Figure 2.5) worksheet under Status Report, and if

any, will identify clashes on the Status worksheet and further, on the
Preferences and Circuits worksheet.
A Status Report message: “Successful. A Load can proceed” indicates all is
well between project requirements, design parameters and design
methodology. At this point, it is wise to review early design metrics by
accessing the Captured Results worksheet (see Figure 2.6). The user can
return to Preferences and Circuits to study design alternatives. If captured
results are acceptable, a click of the parked Load button will (1) carry the
design results into the project, (2) close the worksheets and (3) return to the
project for evaluation of the augmented project.
Should the design basis produce a clash with project requirements, error
messages and flags will be displayed in a top-down succession of worksheets.
The first indication is given under Status Report on the Control Center
Worksheet. The Status worksheet is the central reporting agency, where
checks are made and links are provided to source locations in the
Preferences and Circuits input worksheets.
Figure 2.5. Illustration of the Control Center Worksheet, with display of

Control Center toolbar and Load button

Figure 2.6. A section of a Results Capture sheet showing values in the project
units of measure set.
3. Working with the Cooling Water Model

Worksheets
Introduction
Worksheets: Seven worksheets are provided, of which Preferences and
Circuits are for user input, to revise the design basis:
 Welcome: greetings, workflow graphic
 ControlCenter: navigation
 Status: message center
 Preferences: design selections
 Circuits: circuit definition
 Capture: early design metrics
 Guide: help
Button Actions: The Control Center toolbar is always available during a
model session. A click will open the Control Center worksheet and a hyperlink
click will direct you to a chosen worksheet. When the Control Center toolbar is
parked together with the Excel Web toolbar you can quickly search forward
and backward.

You can step from one sheet to another, revise the design basis, review
status and results, decide on an alternate design basis, make revisions,
review the results and when ready, click the Load button (see Load-Cancel-
Minimize) to inject the results in the project. Or, you can refuse the design
using Cancel. Clicking Load conveys the design results to the project, the
cooling water design model’s Excel sheets and return to normal Analyzer
functions. Cancel bypasses the cooling water model and returns to Analyzer.
Cooling Water Design Model Worksheets

The SPECS cooling Model workbook consists of
 Two design basis sheets – this is where you input your selections
o Preferences: process and mechanical design specs:
 Red error flags and messages are displayed for out of
range or missing data values
 Uses click boxes for either/or choices, “B” and “R”
switches to select base (default) or revised value and
user value to replace the base value
o Circuits: assignment of areas to a circuit, spacing of areas in
a circuit along the main line:
 Assignment uses 1, 2, 3, 4 to assign an area to a circuit
 Spacing uses the “B” and “R” switch method and user
spacing to replace the base footprint model value
H H
 Status sheet – all messages are summarized here for your review and
repair
o Key status message is highlighted in color (green: Loading can
be performed, red: Errors must be cleared)
o Summarizes other messages, links directly to input locations for
revision
 Capture Results: displays early design metrics for decision making,
provides the basis for alternative choices of preferences or circuitry.
By “early design metrics” is meant values in advance of those created
during project evaluation
 Guide: provides instructions, describes data entry, color coding
 Control Center: hypertext links interconnect all sheets and main
categories for rapid navigation
 All sheets: are conveniently color coded, with red flags appearing on
error condition. All error conditions must be cleared before results can
be loaded
 Welcome sheet: Welcome, displayed during the initiation process,
contains a workflow graphic
On completion of an error-free interactive session, pressing the LOAD button
will automatically load and inject the results into the project. The project will
then contain new scope additions: (1) a uniquely named, time-stamped
cooling water area will be used to contain (2) a selected, designed list of
cooling water utility project components. Each item so added by the model
may be opened, reviewed, revised in the same way as any other project
component.

Worksheet Details
Status Worksheet
The Status sheet reports messages and has hypertext links to source
locations in the event of a reported error. Major report categories are:
 Overall status
 Existing cooling water area is in the project
 Cooling circuit components – wet bulb temperature, minimum
approach temperature, lowest desired cooling water temperature
 Cooling water resources: naming, excluded streams and reasons, net
number
 Project components: total, number served by cooling water
 Project areas: total number, those served by cooling water
 Cooling water loads: total flow rate, total heat duty, excess capacity,
total flow rate at excess capacity
 Layout distances: number of parameters out of range
 Pumps specs out of range
 Piping specs out of range
 Circuit assignments out of range
 Spacing assignments out of range
Figure 3.1 illustrates an extract of a Status sheet
Figure 3.1 Extract, sample of a Status Sheet
Preferences Worksheet
Units of measure used in the Preferences worksheet correspond to those
defined in the project. Error messages are displayed alongside each entry;

errors are flagged in red. This sheet uses click boxes and data entry fields for
specifying design preferences. Each preference is provided with a
explanatory text, limit values, user entry field and a default value which is
used in the initial design and any subsequent design should the user not
provide an over-ride selection or value.
How to Revise Default Values
This worksheet uses two methods, check boxes and data entries controlled by
switch boxes to revise the supplied set of default (base) design parameters.
Throughout data entry discussions, the term used for a model-supplied set of
data is referred to as default values. For a particular parameter, the model-
supplied value is termed a base value, symbolized by the letter B. A value
supplied by the user is termed a revised value and is symbolized by the letter
R. A mouse click will switch between using a base value and a revised value.
See Figure 2.2c (page 494) for information on how to use a check box:
X X
 A default value is provided to the left of the check box

 A check box title signifies the alternative to the default value
 The resulting choice is displayed to the right
 A status message is displayed that provides additional information
Figure 3.2 Extract, sample of a Preferences sheet showing click box method
of selection
Design Preference Categories:
 Cooling Tower (values in this section affect the circuitry, sizing of
cooling towers and flow-related equipment such as circulation pumps
and distribution piping)
o Design Capacity, excess capacity
o Design Temperature: Summer wet bulb temperature
(see Cooling Tower discussion of wet bulb temperature,
H H
approach gradient, range)

o Messages relating to cooling water resource requirements
vs. design preferences

o Number of Cooling Towers
o Multiple Cooling Towers: choose either one tower for all
circuits or one for each circuit
o Working “Twin”: choose a single tower at 100% capacity or
two “(twins), each at 50% capacity
 Layout (these are dimension limit checks that are applied to entries on
the Circuits worksheet
o Distance
 From tower to first branch to an area
 Minimum value to first branch to an area (often defined
by fire regulations)
 From a branch to an area header
 Maximum spacing between areas (a limit check)
 Status messages related to distance
 Pumps
o Area Pressure Drop: pressure drop for equipment requiring
cooling water, applies to all areas
o Working Pumps
 Limiting value for number of working pumps in a circuit
 Pump type: horizontal (CENTRIF or API 610 model
types) or vertical (TURBINE model type, at low speed
only)
 Pump speed: low or high RPM
 Stand-by pumps if four or less pumps in a circuit: yes
or no
 Stand-by pumps if more than four pumps in a circuit:
yes or no
 Electrical power to pumps based on voltage choice: LV
(low-voltage), MV (mid-voltage), HV (high-voltage).
Limiting values of power per pump motor are displayed
based on project specifications. A voltage choice defines
the maximum power to a motor driver and hence, the
number of pumps in a circuit. Recall that each change
to a specification results in a completely new design; a
voltage selection results in a design value for the
number of pumps and can produce an error condition
and message if the number of pumps exceeds the
limiting value for number of pumps in a circuit.
 Design messages for pumps and piping for each of four
possible circuits
 Piping: Limiting values for line size, by line type, where line sizes are
in the units of measure of the project, either “IN DIAM” or “MM DIAM”
 Suction line size for circulation pumps (a flow rate per
pump suction line based on selected line size is provided
for information purposes)
 Main line segment line size
 Branch line size

 Area header line size
 Risers line size (for 3D area types)
 Laterals line size (for 3D area types)
Circuits Worksheet
Units of measure used in the Circuits worksheet correspond to those defined
in the project.
This worksheet is designed to handle up to one hundred cooling water areas.
Areas are listed vertically. The worksheet is divided into five major categories
in columns of data:
1 Initial Configuration
See Figure 3.3 for the initial configuration
Figure 3.3 Extract from Circuits sheet – Initial Configuration (left), Step 1
(right)
The following (see Figure 3.3, left side) are reported for each area being
served by a recognized cooling water utility resource stream:
 Initial Sort Sequence: sequenced by area, from the area with highest
cooling water requirements to the area with the lowest
 Area Name: user-assigned name, carried into the cooling water
design model from project area specs
 Area Type: user-assigned area type, carried into the cooling water
design model from project area specs
 Area CW Rate: area cooling water (CW) flow rate, the sum of all
recognized cooling water flow rates for equipment in an area as
adjusted by the Excess Capacity value in the Preferences worksheet
 Initial Circuit Number: always 1 as all areas are initially assigned to a
single circuit
 Initial Circuit ID: always “A”
2 Step 1 – Assignment of Areas to Circuits (User entry one of two)
Please refer to Figure 3.3 (right side):

 Enter a Circuit Number 1, 2, 3, or 4: user value is required; if only
one area requires cooling water, enter 1. If two areas, use 1 for both
or assign 1 to one area and 2 to the other. The design model will
sequence the areas. In an error condition, an error message and a red
flag will be displayed. Error conditions must be resolved to obtain
loadable design results.
 System-Assigned Circuit Id: The model will assign a letter ID (A, B, C,
D) to each area based on circuit assignments and total circuit flow
rate. If the project contains four or more areas, then it is possible to
assign areas to circuit numbers 1 to 4. The model will collect all the
area flow rates in each circuit and sequence the circuits from greatest
flow to least in the sequence A, B, C, D. The “A” circuit will have a
larger total flow rate than circuit “B”, “B” will be greater than circuit
“C” and “D” will have the least flow rate. Similarly, for three areas in a
project, valid circuit numbers range from 1 to 3 and circuit IDs assign
to these circuits, based on total flows will be sequenced and labeled A,
B and C. A one-area project will be assigned a circuit ID of “A.”
 Status
o Status of all entries: summarizes number or errors to be
resolved; if none, “OK” is displayed
o Status for individual entries: message is issued for invalid
circuit numbers and field is flagged in red
3 How Area Assignments are Used for Circuit Design
Please refer to Figure 3.4
Figure 3.4 Extract of Circuits sheet – defining area spacing using the B/R
switch
Each line item in this section represents an area and its properties. Areas are
sorted and sequenced in descending total circuit flow rate and then by area
flow rate. Circuits are labeled A, B, C, D with circuit A being the one with the
highest flow rate; B is next etc. An area that was tagged as circuit 2 in step 1
may be in a circuit with the lowest flow and would be organized accordingly
and given a Circuit ID letter depending on the other circuit flows.
This section displays the properties and attributes of each area in the
sequenced list.

Values displayed for information purposes are:
 New Sort Sequence: displays values vertically in the sequence 1, 2, 3,
etc
 Initial Sort Sequence: displays the initial sort sequence number for
H H
the area
 ID of Area In Report Group (ArRg): the ArRg ID for the area
H H
 Area name: user-assigned project area description

 Area CW Rate: displays the cooling water rate, as adjusted by the
H H
Preferences value for excess capacity

 Area Heat Duty: heat duty requirements for all equipment within the
area identified as requiring a valid cooling water resource
 User circuit number: value entered in Step 1, for reference purposes
 Circuit ID: letter A, B, C, D assigned by the cooling water model based
H H
on sequencing circuit flow rates

 Position Of Area In Circuit: Only one area can be first in line in a
circuit. “First” if the area has the highest flow rate of all areas in the
circuit, otherwise no a blank display. The area with a “First” position
will take on a default distance from the cooling tower as defined by the
Preferences value for that distance.
4 Step 2: Assignment of Spacing Between areas
Each line item in this section corresponds to item 4 above. A line item
represents an area and its properties, with areas being sorted and sequenced
in descending circuit and area flow rate.
This section enables the user to revise base values for the spacing of areas
along the main line. It uses the “Switch” method to revise a base value as
described in the section on Preferences.
 Base Value for Spacing Along Circuit Main Line: This is the run length
of the main segment between the prior and current area as developed
by the footprint model.
H H
 Enter Switch: B for Base, R to revise. Choose a blank entry or enter

either a B (or b) to indicate use of the base value. Use R (or r) to
indicate use of a revised value
o Switch value is blank: design will use the base value
o Switch value is B or b: design will use the base value
o Switch value is R or r: indicates a forthcoming user value will
revise the default spacing value. The design will use the
revised value if the user value is within range of prescribed
limits.
 Enter Revised Spacing Along The Circuit Main Line: This value will
replace the base value if it meets range limit conditions specified in the
Preferences worksheet. By spacing is meant the distance between
successive areas. As the line items in this section represent areas that
are sorted and sequenced, the spacing for a particular line item is the
spacing between the start of the prior area and the start of the current
area. This spacing is a measure of the area’s main line segment. See
the section on the Cooling Water Footprint Model. Piping runs lengths are
H H
typically longer than spacing as they include pipe to configure fittings,

expansion loops, etc.

Enter a value. The resulting action depends on the corresponding switch
value
o Switch value is blank, B or b: user value is ignored, base value
will be used
o Switch value is R or r: user value is tested against range limits
and design criteria. If error free, the user value will be
displayed as the Applied Value. Error conditions will display
instructional status messages, red flag, and prevent completion
of a valid design
5. Status messages and values used for design
o Flag: A red flag is displayed to indicate a line item error
condition
o Status: B (Base) uses base value, R (Revise) uses revised value
or status message (displays limiting values, error messages)
o Value used for spacing along circuit main line: The value used
in the design
4. Basis for the Cooling Water Design

Model
This section describes the basis of the cooling water design model. It is
presented with numerous graphics to enable a clear understanding of the
work being performed by the model when it is analyzing and designing
cooling water project components that are in harmony with your design
preferences and the needs of components requiring cooling water.
General Flow Sheet for Cooling Water Service

Figure 4.1 is a schematic diagram of a typical cooling water circuit. In this
figure, circulation pumps draw cooled cooling water, the cooling water supply
stream, from the supply basin at the bottom of a cooling tower and distribute
it through piping to heat exchanger located in one or more project areas.
Cooling water return streams are combined and sent to a cooling tower where
it is cooled, principally by evaporative cooling. Motor driven fans mounted on
the tower draw (induced draft) or force (forced draft) ambient air into the
cooling tower where it contacts the downward flow of cooling water. The
cooled cooling water drops down from the tower into a supply basin, awaiting
withdrawal by the circulation pumps.
Water is added to make up for losses through evaporation, air-born drift and
for blow-down. Water drawn from the system to prevent the build-up of
contaminants is termed “blow-down.”
See below for more on cooling towers, terminology and defining stream
H H
temperatures
Cooling water in such a circuit tends to accumulates algae, corrosion
contaminants and particles that slough off the distribution system. Water
treatment chemicals are added to alleviate these conditions, with the degree
of such treatment depending on the water supply source and environmental
conditions. Five types of treatment chemicals are typically used in small

quantities to control the water quality. The cooling water model provides each
cooling tower with a diaphragm type of pump and a stand-by for each of the
treatment chemicals. The model uses the following labels to identify the
types:
 Sulfuric acid (pH control)
 Sodium hypochlorite (pH control)
 Biocide (algae growth control)
 Corrosion inhibitor
 Dispersant (suspended particles control)
Figure 4.1 Illustration: Cooling Water Flow Diagram
Cooling Water Model Circuitry

The cooling water model is designed to support up to four independent
cooling water circuits. Each circuit can have its own cooling tower or all
circuits can be defined to share a cooling tower. A circuit consists of pumps
and distribution piping to and from project areas. It is the P&ID specs that
define the component’s hook-up piping to the cooling water model’s circuitry.
Summarizing, the cooling water model develops piping runs to a project area
and distributes cooling water to components in the area via an area header or
risers and laterals in the case of 3D area types. Each circuit is provided with
a supply and return distribution network; what is supplied must be returned:
one supply line implies one return line.
Figure 4.2 is a schematic diagram showing several areas that have equipment
requiring cooling water and one that does not. The cooling water model will
not serve an area that does not have cooling water requirements. If such an
area is to be included, then it is recommended that one or more exchangers
connected with cooling water utility streams be introduced in that area.
The cooling water model allows for a one cooling tower (or two 50% towers)
to serve all circuits or individual cooling tower (or two 50% towers) for each
circuit. Clearly, if only one area requires cooling water, only one circuit can
be defined, up to two circuits for two areas, up to three circuits for three

areas and a maximum of four circuits for four or more areas requiring cooling
water.
Figure 4.2 Single, Independent Cooling Water Circuit

Figure 4.3, case (a) is a diagram showing a single treed circuit. Figure 4.4,
case (b), illustrates multiple treed circuits. The difference between the two
cases is (a) one cooling tower for each circuit or (b) one for all circuits. Case
(a) would apply to projects with a single area or for multiple circuits, with
each circuit being served by its own cooling tower.

Figure 4.3 (case a). Illustration of one cooling tower used to serve a set of
areas in a single circuit. The model will permit up to four single circuits, each
having its own cooling tower and circulation pumps.
Figure 4.4 (case b). Illustration of one cooling tower used to serve multiple
circuits. For this case, the model will provide one cooling tower for all
circuits and a set of circulation pumps for each circuit.

Cooling Water Distribution Network
This section describes the methodology used in circuit design
 Naming conventions
 Sequencing of areas on the main line
 Cooling water footprint model
 Pipe, valves and fittings count
 Line sizing and pressure drop calculations
Naming Conventions
Project Cooling Water Utility Area: The cooling water design model will create
a cooling water model utility area to contain project components for each
circuit. On loading, the area will be named with a date and time stamp to
ensure it is unique and can be detected and properly deleted when a new
design is to take its place.
The naming convention is: “AUMCoolWater ddmmmyy_tttt”, where
 dd is the day number of the session month (1, 2, 3, ….., 31)
 mmm is a three character representation of the session month (jan,
feb, mar, apr, may, jun, jul, aug, sep, oct, nov, dec)
 yy is the last two digits of the session year (05 for 2005, etc)
 tttt is the decimal fraction of the session day
Utility project components are time-stamped in a similar manner. As only
four digits are used (tttt), it is possible that a load action might span two tttt
times (one ten-thousandth of a day, duration of 8.64 seconds) with no
significant resulting consequence.
Once a cooling water utility area is loaded in the project, the user may access
any item in the usual way, by using the Project View, clicking on any
component and viewing the design parameters in the forms view. Any and all
data in the cooling water utility area may be modified as required.
Areas Requiring Cooling Water: Each area that requires cooling water is
identified by a unique ArRg number that is made up of system–assigned
numeric values for Area ID and Report Group. An ArRg value of 201 indicates
Area ID = 2 in Report Group 1. The user-assigned area description, which
may not be unique in a given project, is printed in reports along with its
unique ArRg value.
Plant Bulk Pipe Item Descriptions: The naming convention above is combined
with the Area Code and is time stamped when loaded into the project. For
example, “MainSeg, ArRg 201_T7883” is the item description for main line
supply and return line segment that serves area 2 in report group 1, time
stamped T7883.
Distribution Piping Line Types: The distribution network in this cooling water
model consists of the following named types of lines:
 Main line segment: a portion piping along the main line
o “MS”
o “MainSeg”
o “MainChk” for a main segment that contains a check valve

 Branch segment: a short run of pipe, from the main line to a specific
project area
o “B”
o “Branch”
o “BrChk” for a branch that contains a check valve
 Area header: a line of pipe, valves and fittings that distributes cooling
water along the long dimension of the base of a project area
o “AH”
o “Area Header”
o “ArHdrChk” for an area header that contains a check valve
 Risers – vertical runs of pipe to bring cooling water to each level in a
3d structure
o “R”
o “Risers”
o “RiseChk” for a riser that contains a check valve
 Laterals – horizontal runs of pipe that distribute cooling water to each
floor in a 3D structure
o “L”
o “Laterals”
o “LatChk” for a lateral that contains a check valve
 Vents and drains – high-point vents, low-point drains on supply and
return lines, short runs of small bore pipe
o “VD”
o “VentDrain”
Lines with check valves are of minimal length to satisfy the plant bulk PIPE
mode and are separate line items as only one check valve is assigned to a
supply-return line pair.
Figures 4.5 and 4.6 illustrate these line types for 2D (PAD, GRADE) and 3D
area types (OPEN, EXOPEN, FLOOR, MODULE)

Figure 4.5 Schematic of cooling water piping for a 2D area type (PAD, GRADE)
Figure 4.6 Schematic of cooling water piping for a 3D area type (OPEN,
EXOPEN, FLOOR, MODULE)

Sequencing of Areas on the Main Line
Upon identifying which areas that require cooling water and their assigned
circuit, the cooling water model arranges the areas in decreasing cooling
water usage. The largest consuming area is placed at the front of the line
and the smallest consumer is placed at the end. In this way, min line
segments will be larger in diameter at the front of the line and decrease as
each consumer reduces the total flow rate to the next area.
Figure 4.7 illustrates various line types and sequenced areas.
Figure 4.7 Schematic of Line Types Serving Areas Requiring Cooling Water
Cooling Water “Footprint Model”

Upon identifying an area as one that requires cooling water, the footprint
model develops an area footprint by using (a) the total number of
components in an area, (b) the area type (2D or 3D), (c) the number of level
and (d) a packing density (number of components in a bay) and (e) area
aspect ratio, length:width, of 1.5:1.0.
The result of the footprint model is a set of dimensions for each area requiring
cooling water. These dimensions are used to develop a default value of the
spacing between the start of one area along the main line and the next area.
The default spacing distances are reported in the Step 2 of the CIRCUITS
worksheet and can be over-ridden by the user.
Pipe, Valves and Fittings Count

Each line type is provided with a piping iso model that consists of set of pipe,
valves and fittings. Pipe and fitting diameter is determined by volumetric flow
rate and limiting line velocity (suction lines being different from distribution

lines). Line length is determined by (a) minimum length of pipe required to
each type of fitting and (b) the long area dimension, which is developed from
a cooling-water “footprint model” for each project area and area type.
H H
Fittings are assigned to each line type from a list that includes elbows (EL),
tees (TE), reducers (RE), flanges (FL), blind flanges (BL), gate valves (GA),
check valves (CH).
Each line type is based on five configuration components. The total line
length is determined by as the sum of the linear run distance plus pipe
lengths of pipe to satisfy the make-up of the configuration components. The
make-up of each configuration component is based on line type and consists
of quantities of the following:
 “Main run” component: pipe, of length determined by (a) the footprint
model, or (b) user preference value
 “Fixed” component: FL, GA, CH fittings, pipe length based on diameter
of run
 “Head” component: EL, FL fittings, pipe length based on diameter of
run, to provide directional change
 “Branch point” component: TE, RE, FL, BL fittings, for connection to
next line type
 “Vent and drain station” component: TE, FL GA fittings, pipe;
frequency of placement is based on linear run distance
 “Expansion loop” component: EL fittings, pipe length based on
diameter of run, frequency of placement is based on linear run
distance
Expansion loops and vent and drain stations are placed along the run based
on line length
The configuration of each line type serving each area is defined as a project
component located in the cooling water area created by the cooling water
model. Once loaded in the project, any line configuration can be reviewed
and modified in the usual manner by opening that project component in its
form.
Line Sizing and Pressure Drop Calculations

The Cooling Water Model has a Preferences worksheet where, in the Piping
section, limiting sizes of each line type are defined. Once areas are assigned
to a circuit, the flows through the circuit are known. Areas are ordered in
sequence according to their flow requirements, with the largest consumer at
the head of the line. The computations are interactive and a new design will
be computed unnoticed each time a design value is revised. It is wise to
check early design results that are displayed in the Capture worksheet when
revising design specifications.
Line size and pressure drop computations take place in this general manner:
 Starting point is limiting velocity, as defined in the Icarus Reference
Guide
 Flow rate combined with limiting velocity results in required flow area
 Maximum line size determines number of parallel lines
 Built-in iso for each line type defines valve and fitting count

 Line length is derived from spacing between areas from circuitry input,
minimum spacing between areas and minimum lengths from line
 Total run length is a combination of line length and number of parallel
runs
 Pipe friction is based on Fanning type equation
 Line-size based fitting resistances are used to determine fitting friction
losses
 A single average value for the pressure drop across cooling water
usage components in any area is defined in the Preference worksheet
 Pressure at junctions, where flows meet, is common to junction
streams
 Overall circuit pressure drop comes from a stepwise calculation across
all junctions
 An addition head loss due to cooling tower elevation completes the
pressure drop determination
It is possible that the limiting line size for branch and area headers may be
too small for some circuits with large flows. This would result in a cluster of
two or more parallel lines. To alleviate this condition, consider increasing the
limiting line size.
Projects with a Prior Cooling Water Utility Model Area

The cooling water model will allow a single cooling water utility area of its
making in a project. If a project contains a prior area, the model will detect
its presence and defer action until the user decides to load a new cooling
water model design. Choosing to load will delete the prior area and the new
one will be loaded. Is the choice is not to load, the model worksheets are
closed with a return to the normal view.
Cooling Towers: Terminology and the Defining Stream Temperatures
Figure overview_4.8 shows a cooling tower with air and cooling water
streams and their temperatures.
Terms used in the cooling tower industry, illustrated in Figure 4.8, are:
 Cooling tower: a device used to cool water by the countercurrent
action of ambient air against a downward flowing stream of water to
be cooled. The cooling process involves the cooling of entering water

by evaporative cooling of water and sensible heat to a much lesser
degree
 Cooling water supply stream: cooling water supplied to heat
exchangers for purpose of cooling process streams
 Cooling water return stream: cooling water streams leaving heat
exchangers, combined for return to a cooling tower
 Range: cooling water return temperature, Tr – cooling water supply
temperature, Ts, directly related to the heat duty
 Approach Gradient: the difference between the wet bulb air
temperature and cooling water leaving the cooling tower.
Theoretically, the cooling water temperature can not drop below the
air wet bulb temperature. For a given cooling water flow rate, as the
approach gradient decreases, the cost of a cooling tower will increase.
Notes to Analyzer Utility Model (AUM)

Users:
Cooling Water utility resources that must accounted in the Analyzer Utility
Model (AUM) should be named either:
Cooling Water or "Cooling Water xx"
where:
xx can be two digits ranging from 01 to 99,
for example, Cooling Water 01
User created utility resources that do not adhere to this format (for example,
CW, Sea Water, Cooling Water o3) will not be identified as cooling water
streams and will be excluded from AUM's cooling water analysis.
Cooling water streams that are not associated with any equipment, will be
assigned to the Area with the maximum cooling water flow rate. For areas
assigned to two or more circuits, the collected unassigned cooling water flow
rate will be assigned to the first area in the circuit handling the largest circuit
flow rate.
Cooling water can either be bought or be made. If it is to be made, the dew
point of ambient air added to the lower model limit for the approach gradient
will determine the lowest possible deliverable temperature. To ensure that
your specified cooling water utility resource streams can be made, please
review the limits for the two cooling water models:
 CTWCOOLING
 CTWPACKAGED

AUM_Air
Utility Design and Scope Generator
for Instrument and Plant Air
Overview
The Air Utility Module automatically and interactively:
 selects, designs, and sizes air plant project components that conform to
your:
o Project scope design basis
o Interactive entries for air utility design and configuration
preferences
 Augments the scope of your project with a list of designed air utility
project components in a unique air utility area on the click of the Load
button
 Interactive session enables a review of results prior to LOAD creates
o Status messages, suggestions to alleviate design clashes
o Interactive report of equipment and distribution piping design
results
With the Air Utility Module, you can review, revise, add other project
components and/or Run the augmented project to obtain a new project
evaluation.
The Air utility model can be
 applied to projects that have been created using
o Aspen Aspen Process Economic Analyzer, Aspen Decision
Analyzer
o Aspen Capital Cost Estimator
 within Aspen Aspen Process Economic Analyzer or Aspen Capital Cost
Estimator
Project areas and their project components

 Aspen Process Economic Analyzer/Analyzer projects:
o Each group of project components is contained in a unique
“Report Group”
o A report group is a project area
 Aspen Capital Cost Estimator projects: You can create
o A project area
o A report group to coordinate a group of project areas
o The AUM Air utility module works with each project area and its
air requirements

Benefits:
 You get early design metrics for decision making
 Decide what’s best, then trigger the LOAD operation
 With LOAD, a new Air utility area will be inserted into your project with its
designed list of air system project components
 Before LOAD, air system project components are interactively
o Selected based on your selection preferences
o Designed in accordance with your project basis and air design
preferences
o Sized
o Reported
 In a small fraction of the time and effort it takes to do this work in the
traditional manner
 Change the project scope? Re-run the utility module!
How AUM_Air Works
General AUM_Air Workflow

1 Press U button to initiate.
2 Select Air Utility.
AUM_Air opens in MS Excel
3 Move the supplied Control Center toolbar to the top and click it.
4 Check Status.
5 Review the Guide, page 525.
X X
6 Select and enter Preferences.

7 Check messages, review results in Report.
8 Revise Configuration parts 1 and 2.

9 Check messages, review results in Report.
10 Click the Load button to close AUM_Air and load the design results into
your project.
11 Review Area and components.
12 Run the project, review results.
Using AUM_Air
Accessing AUM_Air
To access AUM_Air:
1 Starting with an open project that has been evaluated, click Run, then
click Utility Model. Or, click the U button to access utility models.
The Utility Model dialog box appears:
2 Click Air – Instrument, Plant.

3 Click OK.
Three actions now occur
1 The model first identifies if a prior Air – Instrument, Plant
model area is present in the project. If present, you can choose to
Delete the prior area and continue with the model or return to the
project. If you click Delete, the utility model will proceed with the
design and delay deletion until it is time to load the new results.
2 If no prior Air – Instrument, Plant utility area is detected, the
Welcome screen is displayed and remains present during a time
when:
a Project requirements are automatically passed to the model
b The model prepares an initial design
c The model then displays the Control Center worksheet, which
links to all other worksheets and provides an indication of success

(green signal) or failure (red signal) to create an initial design
based on default design parameters.
3 A Load | Cancel | Minimize dialog box is provided.

4 To continue, click the minimize button at the top. This parks the
button box for access during the design phase. Cancel ends the Air –
Instrument, Plant model session and returns normal project functions
with no change to the project.
Note: A Control Center button bar is provided to access the

Control Center worksheet from any worksheet.
Nine worksheets are presented in a MS Excel framework:
 Welcome
 Control Center
 Guide
 Status
 Preferences
 Config 1
 Config 2
 EquipStats
 PipeStats

The Initial Design
On initiation, the Air – Instrument, Plant model reports the status of the
design on the Control Center worksheet under Status, and if there are any,
identifies clashes on the Status worksheet and, further, on the Preferences
worksheet.
A Status Report message: Successful. A Load can proceed indicates all is
well between project requirements, design parameters, and design
methodology. At this point, it is wise to review early design metrics by
accessing the EquipStats and PipeStats worksheets.
If captured results are acceptable, a click of the parked Load button:
 carries the design results into the project
 closes the worksheets
 returns to the project for evaluation of the augmented project
Should the design basis produce a clash with project requirements, error
messages and flags are displayed in a top-down succession of worksheets.
The first indication is given under Status Report on the Control Center
worksheet. The Status worksheet is the central reporting agency, where
checks are made and links are provided to source locations in the EquipStats
and PipeStats worksheets.
To load the Air – Instrument, Plant data into your Icarus project:
When you are satisfied with the model and the Status worksheet shows that
there are no errors, you can load the Air – Instrument, Plant model into
the project.
1 Click the Maximize button on the parked Load | Cancel | Minimize
dialog box.

2 Click Load.
The Aspen Icarus Loader appears, showing the progress of loading the XML
data into Icarus.
When the Air – Instrument, Plant data has been loaded into Aspen Icarus,
the following confirmation message appears:
3 Click OK.
The Air – Instrument, Plant data is now included in your project.
Modifying Air – Instrument, Plant Data

When you have loaded Air – Instrument, Plant data in your project, you
modify that data using the AUM_Air module.
To Modify Air – Instrument, Plant Data:

1 On the main menu, click Run, then click Utility Model. Or, click the U
button to access utility models.
The Utility Model dialog box appears. Note that the Status column says
Loaded.

2 Click Air – Instrument, Plant.
3 Click OK.
The following warning message appears:
Note: Clicking Yes does not actually delete the Air – Instrument, Plant
data in your project. You can click Yes, modify the Air – Instrument, Plant
data, then choose not to replace the previous Air – Instrument, Plant data
with the modified data by clicking Cancel on the Load | Cancel | Minimize
dialog box.
4 Click Yes.
5 Modify the data to your satisfaction.
If you want to replace the loaded data with your modified data, follow the
steps below.
dialog box.

2 Click Load.
The Aspen Icarus Loader appears, showing the progress of loading the XML
data into Icarus.
When the Air – Instrument, Plant data has been loaded into Aspen Icarus,
the following confirmation message appears:
3 Click OK.
The Air – Instrument, Plant data is now included in your project.
If you want to keep loaded Air – Instrument, Plant data and not replace it
with your modified data, follow the steps below.
dialog box.

2 Click Cancel.
The following warning message appears:
3 Click Yes to cancel the loading process.

Your original loaded Air – Instrument, Plant data is retained.
Guide for the Air Utility Model

(AUM)

SPECS Organization Chart
About this SPECS Book

About an Air Plant Unit

About Distribution Piping for an APU
Methods
In the conceptual design phase, lacking a plot plan, this method is used to
develop air distribution piping.
 Some runs may be long, some short.
 Components in the augmented project scope definition may be modified,
deleted, new ones added.
The following is a brief description of the methods used.
 Areas assigned to an APU are collected in the sequence of the project and
are assembled in a column-row array
 Array dimensions are determined from area dimensions
 Row and column dimensions are figured from total area, number of areas
and an initial aspect ratio of 3:2
Air Distribution
 Piping is developed for Instrument Air as well as Plant Air.
 Piping for each service is developed in the same way, except for
volumetric flow and line size
Distribution Piping
 The APU feeds air to the array through a Main Feeder (MF)
 The Main Feeder length is defined in Preferences
 Two Main Manifolds (MM) are used on extra-wide arrays, els one or none
for an array one column wide
 Each MM feeds a Main Line (ML)
 Main lines feed Branch Lines (BR)
 A tee of the Branch line supplies air to an Area Feeder (AF)
 Area Feeders connect to Area Headers (AH)
 Area headers, for 2-D area types such as Grade, Pad, etc supply air to the
I-P transducers, control valves
o P&ID information from the original project provide the
requirements for I-P and control valve components
o Utility station requirements are developed for each area based
on anticipated air tool usage and area size
 A plant air connection is made off the Area Header Plant
for each utility station
 Area headers, for 3-D area types such as open steel structures, etc supply
air to Risers, then Laterals which then connect to I-P transducers and
control valves.
o Utility station requirements are developed for each 3-D type
area based on anticipated air tool usage and area size

Schematic
The following schematic was prepared to illustrate a large project of 78 areas:
Configuration of Air Utility

Project Components
 Project Components
 An Air Plant Unit - APU

 Schematic of an APU
 Multiple APUs
 Compressor Redundancy
Project Components
The Instrument and Plant Air Utility Model creates a set of project
components in accordance with the needs of your:
 Project Scope definition
 Design and selection preferences for Instrument and Plant Air
Typical components
 Air Compressors
 Interstage and After-coolers
 Air Filters
 Air Receivers
 Air Dryers
 Air distribution piping (instrument, plant air)
 Utility Stations (air, water, steam, condensate drain services)
 Associated installation bulks would be developed during project run
Components are contained in a uniquely defined

Area
 Area Title contains a unique time and date to differentiate one run from
another
 Area can be modified or deleted in the usual way using Aspen Capital Cost
Estimator, Aspen Process Economic Analyzer/Analyzer
An “Air Plant Unit” - APU

 Air intake screens
 Air intake ductwork
 Air compressors
o One main compressor at 100% capacity or two at 50%
capacity each
o Optional standby spare compressor
o Optional start-up compressor
 Interstage and after-stage coolers
o Optional TEMA water cooled or fin-fan air cooled exchangers
 Air receivers
o Optional individual receivers for instrument and plant air or
combined receiver
o Optional main receiver or two at 50% capacity each
o Optional stand-by receiver

 Air filters – pre-filter and post-filter, one or more of each
 Air dryers - dual tower type (one working, one regenerating)
o One main at 100% capacity or two at 50% capacity each
o Optional standby spare air dryer
o Optional dryer for Plant Air
 Utility piping for turbine steam/condensate, cooling water/return
 Distribution piping
o Instrument and plant air
o Utility stations
o Cooling water, steam/condensate headers
o Interconnects between two or more air plant units
Schematic of an Air Plant Unit

General Layout
Multiple Air Plant Units for Multiple Areas

One or up to four Air Plant Units to serve area air requirements.
Two distribution networks for each APU:

 instrument air
 plant air

Compressor Redundancy: Multiple, Stand-
by, Start-up
Design Considerations
 Units of Measure
 Designed Components
 Volumetric Air Flow Rate
 Equipment Selection and Design
o Compressor Model Selection
o Interstage and After Coolers; choice of
 Air Coolers (for rack mounting)
 Shell & Tube Heat Exchangers
o Air Receivers
o Air Filters
o Air Dryers
Units of Measure
Values are reported in the Unit of Measure set of the user’s project, in the:
 Utility Module interactive worksheets and reports
 Augmented user’s project file

Air Utility Area
 Designated as AUM_Air_ddmmyy_tttt (date and time stamped)
 Contains Air Utility system project components
Air Utility Project Components

Each item is selected and sized:
 Area headers for cooling water/return, steam/condensate, instrument and
plant air
 Air intake screens
 Air intake ductwork
 Compressors
 Interstage coolers
 Utility piping for turbine steam/condensate, cooling water/return
 Plant and Instrument Air Receivers
 Air Pre-filters, After-filters
 Air Dryers
 Distribution Pipe, Valves, Fittings
o Distribution circuits: up to four circuits (one to four air plant
units)
o Distribution piping, for 2D, 3D area types
o Utility stations (total number of stations)
Instrument Air (IA) Requirements: Air Flow

Rate

Plant Air (PA) Requirements: Air Flow Rate
Compressor Model Selection Method
Sizes compressor based on

 Total project air flow
 Number of desired air plant units
 Project areas assigned to each air plant unit
 Air plant unit redundancy (working spares, stand-by spares)
 Specs for start-up compressor
Model type is based on compressor air flow rate

 Low flow rates – reciprocating
 High flow rates – centrifugal
 Flow rates less than model minimum -reciprocating

Reciprocating Compressor for Low Capacity
Range
Gasoline Motor-Driven Reciprocating Compressor

for Low Capacity Range, Stand-by Spare

Centrifugal Compressor for High Capacity Range
Inter- and After-compression stage Coolers

Air Filters
Air Receivers

Air Dryers
Interactive Specs
 Design Basis
o Equipment Redundancy
o Equipment Configurations
o Selection Specs
o Design Preferences
o Air Distribution
 Areas and Air Plant Units
 Layout
 Air Distribution Configuration
o Assignment of APUs to Areas
User Preferences
 User enters specs interactively in MS Excel SPECS workbook
 Preferences worksheet– design and equipment configuration basis
o Organized by category
o Color coded
o Either/or selections are provided with a base (default) value
o Numeric selections are provided with a base (default) value
o Help messages assist selections
o Error messages are issued for out-of-limit or design clash
conditions
 CONFIG worksheets: basis for distribution air piping to areas
o Part 1: Assignment of plant air to areas devoid of equipment
o Part 2: Assignment of an APU to an area

Equipment Redundancy
 Main item at 100% capacity
 Main item split into two, each at 50% capacity
 Stand-by spare
o Optional
o Same size as main item or main item at 50% capacity
o Power option for stand-by compressors
 Electric motor drive
 Large compressors: steam turbine drive
 Small compressors: gasoline engine drive
 Start-up compressors only
o Optional
o Size based on user % of total capacity of main item
Equipment Configurations
Equipment configuration choices:
Combined air train
Individual Instrument air train
Wet or dry plant air train

Basis for Design: Preferences - 1
With the exception of item 1 (Conversion of “Quoted cost” items ….) where no
default value is provided, every other user preference is supplied with a
default value and minimum and maximum limit values where appropriate.
Item 1 requires user entry for an exchange rate which is used in an air utility
internal cost model to evaluate costs of air intake screen/filters.
1 Conversion of "Quoted cost" items to Project Currency Units (PCU)
o Exchange rate, Project Currency Units per USD:
Note: This entry is required.

2 Ambient Air Conditions (one set for all APUs)
o Dry bulb temperature
o Wet bulb temperature
o Atmospheric pressure
3 Air Requirements - Capacity for Instrument and Plant air (one set for all
APUs)
o Excess capacity, %
 Instrument air
 Plant air
o Air system leakage, %
o Install utility stations?
o Number of utility stations, % adjustment
4 Air intake screens/filters (uses an AUM_Air cost model)
o Air to media ratio
o Adjustments to model estimate
 Cost
 Hour to install
 Weight
5 Compressors (one set of specs for all APUs) Main compressor:
o Main compressor
 One at 100% capacity or two each at 50% capacity
 Limiting flow rate for a single main compressor, % of
model maximum flow
o Stand-by spare compressor
 Install?
 Driver type (electrical or other: turbine, gas motor)
o Start-up compressor
 Install?
 Minimum flow rate to qualify for installation
 Running time
o Interstage Coolers
 Type:
 Water cooled (small: Pre-engineered type or
large: TEMA BEU)

 Air cooled (AIR COOLER)
 Cooling water inlet and rise temperature
 Air temperature rise for fin-fan air coolers
Notes:
If low capacity type is selected, may generate multiple low capacity
compressors
High capacity compressors may require project mid- and/or high voltage
power distribution levels.
o Utility services for compressors
 Steam lines: run distance from boiler house to turbines
 Cooling water lines: run distance from cooling water
plant
6 Air Receivers
o Common or separate receivers for instrument air and plant air?
o One main receiver at 100% capacity or two, each at 50%
capacity
o Install a stand-by spare?
o Horizontal or vertical vessels?
o Maximum diameter
o Maximum tangent-to-tangent length
o Instrument air supply time during emergency shut-down
o Plant air supply time during emergency shut-down
7 Air Dryers (Dual Bed–one working, one regenerating)
o Common air dryer for instrument and plant air?
o Is plant air to be dried?
o One main dryer at 100% capacity or two, each at 50% capacity
o Air purge rate
8 Air Filters
o Instrument air
 Number of pre-filters
 Number of post-filters
o Plant air
 Number of pre-filters
 Number of post-filters
9 Distribution piping
o Minimum line size for air piping
o Distance from APU to process area
o Typical tie-in run length from one APU to another

Configuration Layout Method and
Distribution
Basis for Air Utility Model Piping

o Layout and primary distribution piping is based on the specs for
all areas assigned to an APU
o Area feeder and header, risers, laterals are based on area specs
Area layout in lieu of a project plot plan

o Project areas are arranged in project sequence
o Each area is given an ID code based on its report group and
area number
 Example:
 Report group 2 “Solvent Recovery”
 Area 4 description: “Distillation”
 Is given an ID code of 100 x 2 + 4 = 204
 ID code 204 is characterized by its report group
name and area description
o Areas are placed in a rectangular array according to the total
number of areas with an initial aspect ratio of 2:3 (fewer
columns than rows)
o Column-row arrangement is modified to obtain a row-column
balance
o A branch line is run across each row with area feeder take-offs
to each area in a row
o Area headers (and risers and laterals for 3D area types)
connect to individual project components in that area
o Branches are fed using a Main Line
o Main Lines are fed by Main Manifolds for wide arrays
o Main Manifolds are fed by a Main Feeder from the Air Plant Unit
APU Configuration:
o Choose default (one APU for all) or assign each Report Group to
one of four APUs

Example layout – group of areas served by
APU “A”
Circuit Preferences: Configuration of APUs

 Worksheet provides a list of Project Areas and air consumption
 Configuration in two parts:
o Part 1: enables areas with no Instrument air requirements to
be provided with plant air, else no air is provided
o Part 2: enables each area to be assigned to an APU
 Initial configuration: all areas are assigned to APU “A”
o Design results are presented for the initial configuration
 Revised configuration: use of up to four (4) APUs
o Design results are presented for the revised configuration

Sample Layouts: One APU
Sample Layouts: Multiple APUs
Design Methods
 Sizing Distribution Piping
 Schematic of Distribution Piping
Basis for Sizing Air Distribution Piping

 Configuration (IA = instrument air; PA = plant air)

o Assignment of an APU to Project Areas
o Initial configuration: all are areas assigned to one APU
o APU Air flow for IA and PA is determined from sum of area
usage requirements
 Sizing
o Air Module uses a built-in layout model to estimate air
distribution piping line lengths
o Each line type is assigned an “Iso” with valve and fitting counts,
expansion loops for long runs
o Areas provides air flow requirements for each line
o Lines are sized based on air consumption and a pressure drop
of 1 PSI per 100 ft [22.6 KPAG/100 M] or less with a minimum
line size as defined in Preferences
o Design pressure: 150 psig [1350 KPAG]
Air Distribution Piping to Project Areas

Distribution for a 3D-Type Area
Sample AUM_Air Worksheets

Displayed below are sample AUM_Air worksheets. Note the following details
about AUM_air and these sample worksheets:
 sheets are non-functional
 all worksheets visible to the user have the version number printed at the
bottom of the sheet
 the project illustrated is Aspen Process Economic Analyzer ETOH Sample
Project
 except for currency and exchange rate, sheets are in the user's units of
measure defined in the user's project specs
o currency is referred to as PCU - project currency unit
o you must enter an exchange rate when opening a project for
the first time. The exchange rate value will be "remembered"
on opening the project thereafter
o ControlCenter, Status and Preferences sheet will always
show an error because you must enter an exchange rate for the
currency of the project (hyperlinks lead you from ControlCenter
to Status to Preferences to the item to be revised)
o on entering a proper value, the error message is not displayed
List of AUM_Air Worksheets
 Welcome
 ControlCenter

 Guide
 Status
 Preferences
 Config_1
 Config_2
 EquipStats
 PipeStats
Welcome Worksheet
Control Center Worksheet

Guide Worksheet

Status Worksheet

Preferences Worksheet

Configuration Part 1: Assignment of Plant
Air to Areas Not Requiring Instrument Air
Configuration Part 2: Assignment of Areas

to an APU

Note: For clarity in this documentation, the following screen shot is shown
below the one above it. On the actual Config 2 Worksheet, they are side by
side.
Report – Equipment Component Stats

Report – Pipe Stats

10 Evaluating the Project
Running a Project Evaluation

After all the process simulator data has been properly mapped and defined,
you are ready to run a project evaluation. The project evaluation produces
capital costs reports that can then be viewed in Aspen Icarus Reporter and
Icarus Editor. If any of the components are modified, the evaluation process
must be re-run.
To run a project evaluation:
1 Click on the toolbar.

– or –
On the Run menu, click Evaluate Project.
2 The dialog box shows the default Capital Costs report file name,
Cap_Rep.ccp. This is the report reviewed in Icarus Editor. If you want to
give this file a different name, type the file name in the Report File field.
3 Click OK.
If you are using the default Preferences, Aspen Capital Cost Estimator scans
the project specifications for errors and/or inconsistencies and any found are
10 Evaluating the Project 563

listed in the Scan Messages window.
Note: You can select in Preferences to skip the scan for errors (see
page 53).
X X
There are four types of messages:

Scan Message Description/Importance Level
INFOrmational For your information

WARNing Design can be produced, but you are alerted to problems
ERROR A design or cost cannot be produced for an item
FATAL Rare instance for extreme problems
You have the option to continue or stop the evaluation process (except in the
case of FATAL errors, which stop the evaluation process). You should carefully
review these and fix any problems before proceeding.
When the project evaluation is done, Aspen Capital Cost Estimator lists all
errors found in the capital cost evaluation for your reference.
If you are using the default preferences, Aspen Capital Cost Estimator
automatically displays reports in Icarus Editor when the evaluation is
complete.
Note: You can select in Preferences not to have Icarus Editor automatically
appear after the evaluation (see page 53).
X X
564 10 Evaluating the Project

Reviewing Results in Icarus
Editor
Icarus Editor is a fully OLE-compliant, Multiple Document Interface (MDI) text
editor program.
Accessing
If you are using the default preferences, Aspen Capital Cost Estimator
automatically displays evaluation reports in Icarus Editor immediately after
you run a project evaluation. If you have selected not to automatically display
results, you will need to complete the steps below to display evaluation
reports in Icarus Editor. Even if you are using the default preferences, you
may want to use the following procedure if the project was evaluated
previously and has not changed since.
To display evaluation reports in Icarus Editor:

– or –
On the View menu, click Capital Costs View.
The Select Report Type To View dialog box appears.
2 Select the Evaluation Reports check box; then click OK.

Icarus Editor opens displaying the evaluation reports.
The right-hand pane contains the reports. The left-hand pane contains a tree-
structure Contents view that lets you jump to different sections.
Note: Click on the toolbar to turn the Contents view on and off (or click
Contents on the View menu).
Printing a Single Section

The Contents view also lets you print a single section, rather than the entire
report.
To print a single section:

1 Right-click a section.
2 Click Print Barcharts.
Icarus Editor Toolbar

Click this to
open a new document in the Document View

New
open an existing document
Open

save current document to disk
Save
view selected properties of current
File Properties document
print the current document
Print
print preview the current document
Print Preview
specify how the current document will be
Page Setup printed
cut selected text to windows clipboard
Cut
copy selected text to windows clipboard
Copy
paste contents of windows clipboard into
Paste insertion location
bold selected text
Bold
italicize selected text
Italic
underline selected text
Underline
specify font for selected text
Select Font
find any text string within the current
Find (CTRL+F) document
set and save your preferences
Preferences
turn OFF/ON the Contents View
Toggle Contents
display multiple documents cascaded
Cascade
display multiple documents tiled horizontally
Tile Horizontal
display multiple documents tiled vertically
Tile Vertical
display on-line help
Help Contents
Report Sections
Title Page
The Title Page includes the following:
 Estimate Base: financial quarter from which cost basis is derived and date
of Icarus Evaluation Engine (IEE).
 IEE version number.
 Run Date: Date and time that project evaluation was run.
 Currency symbol used in the report.
 Telephone numbers to call for technical support.

Contract Structure
The Contract Structure section provides names of contractors and reporting
arrangement.
Contents
The Table of Contents lists section names and the page number on which
each starts. The number of sections may vary depending on the number of
report groups. If the project contains only one, then there will be only a single
summary. If more than one, there will be a separate summary for each, plus
a summary for the total project.
Project Summary
The Project Summary provides an overview of project costs.

Project Data Sheet
The Project Data Sheet lists items with separate columns showing user-
entered values and system default values.

Project Schedule
Total Manpower Schedule

The Total Manpower Schedule shows construction manpower loading based on
the CPM Construction Schedule.
Ways to influence this schedule include:

 Adjusting productivities, shifts per day, length of the workweek using the
General Rates specifications form and the Craft Rates specifications form.
These forms are accessed in Project Basis view under Project Basis\Basis
for Capital Costs\Construction Workforce.
 Indexing man-hours either at the Project level (Project Basis\Basis for
Capital Costs\Indexing) or at the Area level.
The number of MEN PER DAY for each vertical bar is generated by summing the
labor assigned to all the work items that fall within the period represented by
that bar in the barchart.
Cashflow Summary
The Cash Flow Summary shows total capital cost spent.

This barchart schedule assumes that the DESIGN ENG’G AND PROCUREMENT
monies are already spent at the start of construction - the curve is not truly
tied to the CPM schedule. During construction, capital is then spent for
material, direct field labor, equipment rental and subcontract work, Home and
Field Office, Start-up, and so on, as the cost is incurred. By the end of
construction, the TOTAL,AMOUNT given in the Project Summary is indicated
here.
Operating costs, such as start-up utilities, raw materials, initial catalyst
charges, and so on, are not included.
Project Schedule Data Sheet

The Project Schedule Data Sheet lists the fabrication and ship times for
equipment items by class and provides barcharts of the following:
 General Schedule: Balanced display of Basic and Detail Engineering,
Procurement and Construction (EPC).
 Engineering Schedule: Details for Basic and Detail Engineering and
Procurement; summary for Construction.
 Construction Schedule: Details for Construction- others summarized.
 Contracts Schedule: Schedule for contractor(s). When a single contractor
is performing all work, this schedule shows no new information.

Contract Summary
The Contract Summary breaks costs down by contractor.
Summaries By Report Group

Summaries By Report Group provides the direct material and labor costs and
manhours by report group for all areas reporting to that group.

Area Lists of Equipment and Bulk Material
For each Area, the Equipment and Bulk Material List is divided into three
sections. First there is the Component List, followed by the Area Bulk Report,
and finally the Area Data Sheet. Following the last Area of each Report Group,
there are two more reports - the Report Group Summary and the Report
Group Equipment Summary.
Appendix A- Detailed Bulk Material and Field

Manpower Listing
Appendix A lists the design and cost details for every component, whether
system-generated or user-added. The results are reported in the sequence
that the items appear in the Area tree diagram.
Appendix B- Bulk Material and Field Manpower

Summary- by Report Group
Appendix B consists of one summary of the material and manpower man-
hours and cost for all direct costs in the project. There is one report per
Report Group; if there is only one Report Group, then this report is
eliminated. It is replaced by the project bill of material (see Appendix C
description below).
Appendix C –Bulk Material and Field Manpower

Summary - Total Project
Appendix C is a project bill of material (BOM) providing a material and
manpower summary for each plant bulk category. Due to the fact that the
numbers are large, this is the best source of material costs and man-hours for
calibration.
Appendix D – Direct Material and Manpower

Summary by Major Account - Total Project
Appendix D is a project bill of material (BOM) providing direct material and
manpower summary by major account for the total project.

Appendix E – Units of Measure Data Sheet
Appendix E lists the Icarus default units of measure as well as any user
modifications.
Reviewing Results in Aspen

Icarus Reporter
Accessing Aspen Icarus Reporter
To access Aspen Icarus Reporter:

– or –
Click Capital Costs View on the View menu.
The Select Report Type To View dialog box appears.
2 Keep Interactive Reports selected; then click OK.

Reporter imports and loads the reports from Aspen Capital Cost Estimator.
After the reports are loaded, the Aspen Icarus Reporter window appears.

Reporter allows you to select and run multiple Standard reports or Excel
reports or Update On Demand reports. These selections can be remembered
by clicking the Remember Selections button shown in the figure below.
These selections are retained and shown the next time the Reporter
application is run. Beginning with V7.3, reporter remembers these selections
product as well as project wise.
In V7.2 and prior versions the selections are cleared once the reports are
displayed. Beginning with V7.3 these selections are retained until you choose
to do otherwise.

Remembering selections product wise
In V7.2 and prior versions, reporter does not remember these selections
product wise separately and only remembers the last selections made among
all the three Economic Evaluation Products (Aspen Capital Cost Estimator,
Aspen In-Plant Cost Estimator and Aspen Economic Analyzer). Beginning with
V7.3, this limitation has been removed and reporter can remember the
selections for all the three types of products separately.
When a reporter application is run on a newly created project, last
remembered selections (if any) for that product type are shown by default.
Similarly, for an existing unsaved project last remembered selections (if any)
for that product type are shown by default.

Remembering selections project wise
Beginning with V7.3, you can save selections product wise as well. These
selections remembered by clicking Remember Selections can be saved
permanently with the project by selecting the File | Save menu item or
clicking the Save Project toolbar button on the main Economic
Evaluation frame window. When the reporter is invoked on such a saved
project, it retains the selections saved with the project.
Note: Clicking Remember Selections saves or updates the selections for

the current report mode (Standard Reports or Excel Reports or Update
On Demand) only. If you want to save or update the selections for other
type of reports then you need to select that report type and then click
Remember Selections after selecting the reports.
Clear these selections before adding or removing any new custom reports.
Aspen Icarus Reporter Menu Bar
File Menu
Click this to
Import Data Import project reports. See page 601 for instructions.
X X
Run Report Run selected report. See pages 579 (Standard reports), 594 (Excel
X X X X
reports), and 589 (HTML reports) for instructions.

X X
Open Open the last Excel workbook created. See page 597 for instructions.
X X
Workbook
Create User Export SQL database. See page 602 for instructions.
X X
Database
Exit Close Aspen Icarus Reporter.
Trend Menu
Click this to
Add Trend Add the trend data from the project reports currently loaded in Aspen
Data to Icarus Reporter to the trending database. See page 599 for X X
Database instructions.
Create New Export trending database to Excel. See page 599 for instructions.
X X
Trend in Excel
View Existing Open the trending data workbook in Excel. See “Data Trending,”

Trend Data pages 598 through 601, for instructions.
X X X X
Clear All Clear the trending database. See page 598 for instructions.
X X
Saved Trends
Which Report Mode?

Four report modes are available:
 Standard reports
 HTML reports
 Management reports
 Excel reports
 Update on Demand
All but Management reports present Capital Costs and Design and Basis
reports. Management reports contain snapshots of project data frequently
requested by project management.
Standard, HTML, and Excel reports do not just present the same data in
different applications. Because of the differing capabilities of the applications,
data is presented differently in each. The choice of mode may depend upon
what you wish to do with the data at a particular time.
Standard Reports
With Standard reports selected in the Report Mode section, the Reports
section displays a tree structure grouping of standard reports.
Report Descriptions
Open the necessary category and sub-category folders and click on a report
to display a brief description of that report in the Description section.

Note: See page 578 for descriptions of all Standard reports.
X X
Opening a Report
Not all of the reports contain each of the features described in this user’s
guide. For example, the Contents view only appears on reports with multiple
sections. In order to see all the features described, select the Contractor –
COA Summary report located in the following folder:
Capital Cost Reports\Direct Costs\COA Summaries
To open the selected report:

 Do one of the following
 Click the Run Report button.
-or-
 On the File menu, click Run Report.
-or-
 Double-click on the report.

The report window appears.
Navigating
If there are multiple sections, a tree-structure Contents view appears on the
left side of the window, allowing you to jump to a section simply by clicking
the section in the Contents.
The arrow buttons on the toolbar allow you to page through the report:
Next Page Previous Page
Last Page First Page

Since the last page of a report usually contains the totals, clicking the Last
Page button is a convenient way to access them.
Magnification
To change the magnification level:
 Click in the Magnification box; then click the desired level from the
menu.

You can also click directly in the Magnification box (without clicking ) and
then zoom in and out using the up and down arrow keys on your keyboard.
When viewing the report at large magnification, you may wish to hide the
Contents view by clicking the Toggle Group Tree button . This makes
more room for the report.
Segregating a Cost Section

If the cursor changes into a magnifying glass icon when placed over a cost
section’s title or totals, you can double-click to open a separate tab window
containing only that cost section.
For example, under Civil in the Contractor – COA Summaries report, the
cursor changes into a magnifying glass when placed over the Concrete cost
section’s title or totals.
Double-clicking on this cost section’s titles or totals opens a separate tab

window.

Note: Here, the Concrete cost section is displayed in a separate tab window,
where it can be viewed and printed apart from the rest of the report.
Searching
To search the report:

2 Enter the text string for which you want to search and click Find Next.
The next instance of the text string is framed in red.
Printing
To print the report:

2 The Print dialog box appears.
3 Make any desired changes to the default settings and click OK.

List of Standard Reports

HTML Reports
With HTML reports selected in the Report Mode section, the Reports section
displays a tree structure grouping of HTML reports.
Report Descriptions
Open the necessary category and sub-category folders and click on a report
to display a brief description of that report in the Description section.

Opening an HTML Report
To open the selected report:
-or-
-or-
A status window tells you when the export is complete and asks if you would
like to view the report now.
2 Click Yes.
Your browser displays the report.
Note: Generating the report as .htm file allows the report to be sent in an
e-mail.
Management Reports
When Management Reports is selected as the Report Mode, the Reports
section displays a tree structure grouping of Management reports. These
reports are intended to serve as snapshots of the project scenario.

Opening a Management Report
To open a Management report:
 Select the report and do one of the following:
-or-
-or-
The Management Reports Viewer displays the report. Pictured below is the
Detailed Weight Information report, one of the Piping reports in the Discipline
folder.
Other reports, like the Equipment Cost (Total Cost) report shown below,
show simply a bottom-line total.
Exporting Management Reports to Excel

You can export Management reports to Excel. This is particularly useful for
when you want to be able to e-mail the report.

To export a Management report to Excel:
1 Click Export to Excel on the Viewer’s File menu.
2 Reporter searches for the last Excel workbook to which you exported a
report.
 If no existing workbook is found, Reporter asks you to specify a worksheet
name (see step 3) and creates a workbook – either DefaultWB.xls in the
Reporter output folder (if this is your first export to Excel since last re-
booting) or a workbook with the file and path name of the last workbook
to which you exported since starting your computer.
 If an existing workbook is found, the Export to Excel Workbook dialog
box appears, asking if you want to overwrite the existing workbook,
append the report to the existing workbook, or create a new workbook.
Click To do this
Overwrite existing Reset the existing workbook with the selected report as
workbook the only worksheet; any previously created worksheets
will be cleared.
Append to existing Add the report as another worksheet in the existing
workbook workbook; previously created worksheets will be retained.
Create new workbook Specify a new workbook in which the selected report will
appear as a worksheet.
Clicking Create new workbook expands the dialog box to let you select a
folder and enter a file name.

Note: Do not enter a file extension or period when entering a new workbook
name.
3 Make your selection and click OK.
4 Enter a name for the worksheet.
5 Click OK.
The Export Status dialog box informs you when the export is done and asks
if you would like to open the workbook now.

4 Click Yes to open the workbook.
Excel displays the report.
Excel Reports
When you select Excel reports as the Report Mode, the Reports section
displays a tree structure grouping of Excel reports.
Report Descriptions
You can have Aspen Icarus Reporter display a description of the selected
Excel report.
To display a brief description of a report:

1 Open the necessary category and sub-category folders.
2 Click a report to display a brief description of that report in the
Description section.

Opening an Excel Report
To open a report:
1 Mark the checkbox next to the desired report.
You can mark multiple report checkboxes to open multiple reports.

Marking a folder’s checkbox will open all of the reports in the folder.
2 Click the Run Report button or click Run Report on the File menu.
Reporter searches for the last Excel workbook to which you exported a report.
 If no existing workbook is found and this is your first export to Excel
during this session, Reporter creates DefaultWB.xls in the Reporter
output folder:
...Economic Evaluation V8.0\ic_cache\Reporter\Output
 If no existing workbook is found, but you have exported from Reporter to
Excel since you last started you computer (to a file that’s since been

moved or deleted), Reporter creates a workbook with the file and path
name of the last workbook to which you exported.
 If an existing workbook is found, the Export to Excel Workbook dialog
box appears, asking if you want to overwrite the existing workbook,
append the report to the existing DefaultWB.xls workbook, or create a
new workbook.
Click to do this
Overwrite existing Reset the existing workbook with the selected report as
workbook the only worksheet; any previously created worksheets
will be cleared.
Append to existing Add the report as another worksheet in the existing
workbook workbook; previously created worksheets will be retained.
Create new workbook Specify a new workbook in which the selected report will
appear as a worksheet.
Clicking Create new workbook expands the dialog box to let you enter a
workbook path and name.

Note: Do not enter a file extension or period when entering a new workbook
name.
3 After you make your selection, click OK. Excel opens a workbook
displaying the report.

Note: Exporting the report to an .xls file allows it to be sent in an e-mail
AutoFilter
Several of the larger Excel reports generated by Aspen Capital Cost Estimator
take advantage of the AutoFilter feature in Excel. In order to view a report
that includes AutoFilter, open the following report:
Capital Cost Reports\Direct Costs\Item Summaries\Combined
When AutoFilter is available, clicking next to a column displays a list of
all entries made in the column. Selecting an entry displays only rows that
contain that entry in the column.
For example, clicking 105 – Misc. Item Allowance in the COA Description
column of the Item Summary Combined report would display only accounts
with Code of Account (COA) 105.
 Clicking Top Ten displays only items that contain one of the top ten most
frequent entries.
 Selecting Blanks (from the bottom of the list) displays only rows that
contain a blank cell in the column, while clicking NonBlanks displays only
rows that contain a value in the column.
Opening Workbook without Running a Report

To view the last workbook created without running a new report, click Open
Workbook on the File menu.
Update on Demand Reports

The Update on Demand option is intended for data modification, for
example:
 deleting line items
 modifying line items

 calculating intermediate results
The Update on Demand option is available only if stored table and stored
queries entries exist.
In the Stored Reports table, specify:
Set type = UoD.
Click the Update on Demand option to run any query in the Stored
Queries table.
Your query is run only when a user specifies it with the Update on
Command option.
Data Trending
Data Trending facilitates comparison of scenarios by allowing you to review
capital cost summaries of different scenarios in a single Excel workbook. If,
for example, you created three different scenarios for a project, you could use
the Data Trending feature to display the direct costs of each on one
spreadsheet, with a separate row for each scenario.
Clearing Trending Database

Since you only wish to compare certain scenarios, the first step is usually to
clear the database used to populate the Excel trending workbook.
To clear the trending database:

1 On the Trend menu, click Clear All Saved Trends.
2 Click Yes to confirm clearing of the data.

The Trending Data Update dialog box appears when this is done.
3 Click OK.
Adding Trend Data to Database

The next step is to add trend data to the database.
To add the current project reports’ trend data to the database:
1 On the Trend menu, click Add Trend Data to Database.
The Trending Data Update dialog box tells you when Reporter has finished
adding the trend data.
2 Click OK.
You will need to add the trend data from the project reports of the other
scenarios you are comparing. For each of the other scenarios, open the
reports in Reporter and complete the Adding Trend Data to Database
instructions above.
Using Reporter’s import function, you can open the other scenarios’ reports in
Reporter without opening the scenarios in Aspen Capital Cost Estimator. See
X X
Creating a New Trend in Excel

After you have added the trend data from the Capital Cost reports of the
scenarios you are comparing, you are ready to create a new trend in Excel.
To create a new trend in Excel:
1 On the Trend menu, click Create New Trend in Excel.

The Export to Excel Trending Workbook dialog box gives you the choice of
either appending the trend data to the existing file or creating a new file.
2 Make you selection and click OK.

The Export Trend Data into Excel dialog box appears. By default, all six
capital cost categories are marked.
3 Clear any categories you wish to exclude from the workbook and click OK.
The Export Status window tells you when the export is complete and asks if
you would like to open the trending workbook now.
4 Click Yes.
Excel displays the trending workbook containing a spreadsheet for each of the
capital cost categories. Each set of trend data entered into the trending
database is displayed on a separate row. (The workbooks for any categories
excluded at the Export Trend Data into Excel dialog box are blank).

After having created the trending workbook, you can access it from Reporter
by clicking View Existing Trend Data on the View menu.
Importing Data into Aspen Icarus Reporter

When you have a project scenario open in Aspen Capital Cost Estimator and
select Capital Costs (Interactive) from Aspen Capital Cost Estimator, Reporter
automatically imports that project scenario’s Capital Cost reports as it opens.
However, once you’re at the Aspen Icarus Reporter window, you can import a
project scenario’s Capital Cost reports without having the project scenario
open in Aspen Capital Cost Estimator.
To import a Capital Cost report:

1 On the File menu, click Import.

The Import Selection dialog box appears.
2 Use the browse tree to locate the project scenario folder, which should be
at:
...Data\Archives_Aspen Capital Cost Estimator\[Project]\[Project
Scenario]
After clicking the project scenario folder, PROJID should appear in the File
set to import section.
3 Select PROJID and click Import.
Reporter imports the data. When complete, the selected scenario’s reports
can be run from Reporter.
Creating a User Database

You can export the Icarus SQL Database, listing the Relation attributes used
by the Icarus Evaluation Engine (IEE), to a Microsoft Access Database (.mdb)
file.
Note: Icarus Reference, Chapter 35, “Database Relations”, defines the Icarus
Database Relations and the different attributes under each.
To create a user database:

1 On the File menu, click Create User Database.
Reporter searches for the last .mdb file it created.

If the file is not found or if this is your first database creation, the Create
User Database dialog box appears with only one Export Option: Create
New Workbook. The lower part of the dialog box provides fields for selecting
a path and filename.
However, if the last created file is found, the Export Options also include
Overwrite Existing Workbook. This option is marked by default, so the
lower part of the dialog box is not visible until you mark the Create New
Workbook checkbox.
2 Select a folder, enter a database name, and then click OK.

Reporter creates the .mdb file.
To review and work with the database:

 Start Microsoft Access and open the .mdb file.
Splitting Very Large CCP Reports

Because very large Capital Cost Project (CCP) Reports (greater than 100mb)
can cause problems, Aspen Capital Cost Estimator splits CCP Reports greater
than 100 MB by section and content. The entire data file still loads initially,
but navigating through the results will be done via section selected
You select the section you want to view in left side content pane (for
example, Design Data Sheets).

Only results for the selected section appear (which helps improve speed of
the application).
Notes:
 You cannot move/print above or below that section in the main
window.
 Searching capabilities only apply to section selected.
 Projects with CCP Reports less than the 100 MB are not split.
You can specify the split file size when using the splitting workflow.
To specify the Split File Size:

1 On the Report Editor menu bar, click Options | Preferences.
2 On the Preferences dialog box, click the Document tab.
The Document tab appears.
3 On the Document tab, in the Documents group, specify the Split File
Size.
Reviewing Investment Analysis

Note: Investment Analysis is only included in Aspen Capital Cost Estimator if
you are licensed to use Icarus Process Evaluator (Aspen Process Economic
Analyzer) or Analyzer and you select at startup to use one of them in the
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator environment.
If you are using the default Preferences, Aspen Capital Cost Estimator
automatically displays the four Investment Analysis spreadsheets in the Main
Window after you run a project evaluation. You can set Preferences so that

Aspen Capital Cost Estimator does not automatically display the spreadsheets,
in which case you would have to select to view them as described below.
Viewing Investment Analysis

To view the Investment Analysis:

–or –
 Click Investment Analysis View on the View menu.
2 Use the tabs at the bottom of the window to move among the four
spreadsheets.
Equipment Summary
The Equipment Summary (EQUIP.ICS) contains a list of project components
used in the analysis.
For each component, the summary contains the following information:

Area Name The name of the operational unit
area.
Component Name The name of the project
component.
Component Type The type symbol for the
component.
Total Direct Cost The total direct material and labor
costs associated with the project
component (including installation

bulks), in the project currency.
Project Summary
Project Summary (PROJSUM.ICS) contains a project summary for the capital
costs (equipment plus bulks) and schedule. This worksheet also includes
operating unit costs (labor wage rates and utility unit costs), utility flow/use
rates (steam/water flow rates, and so on) and operating and maintenance
costs.
Project Summary Input Data

The following information on the Project Summary spreadsheet is user-
entered, except where noted:
Project Information
Project Name Aspen Capital Cost Estimator project name
Project Brief description of Aspen Capital Cost Estimator
Description project, from Project Properties
Analysis Date The date and time this analysis was performed
and Time
Simulator Type The name of the process simulator from which
process data was imported
Simulator The version of the process simulator
Version
Simulator Report The name of the process simulator report file
File
Simulator Report Date and time of the process simulator report file
Date
Economic The name of the Icarus system used for the

Analysis Type evaluation
Aspen Capital Version number for Aspen Capital Cost Estimator
Cost Estimator system
Version
Project Directory Directory path for the current Aspen Capital Cost
Estimator project
Scenario Name Name of the current scenario (if applicable)
Scenario Description of the current scenario, from Project
Description Title in General Project Data
Capital Cost Evaluation Basis
Date Date of capital costs/schedule analysis
Country Country basis for the capital costs/schedule
analysis
Units of Measure Units of Measure for analysis
Currency (Cost) System currency symbol which depends on the
Symbol selected country basis
Currency Conversion factor between user-selected
Conversion Rate currency to the currency used by the system
internally for the selected Country basis. For
example, if the US country basis is selected, the
internal system currency is US Dollars.
Therefore, all numbers will be reported in US
Dollars. However, if a currency conversion rate
of 1.5 is specified, all internal values will be
multiplied by 1.5 and then reported
System Cost Base The capital costs basis date of the system. The
Date Adjusted Total Project Cost represents the
calculated capital cost of the project (calculated
at this base date) escalated to the Start Date of
Engineering.
Project Type Project type identified in the standard basis
specs
Design code Selected design code for equipment
Prepared By Identifier for the preparer of the process
evaluator
Plant Location Location of the plant
Time Difference Number of days between the date of the
Between System system’s Cost Base data (for example, first
Cost Base Date quarter, 2000) and the project’s start date for
and Start Date for basic engineering.
Engineering
User Currency User assigned name for the currency
Name
User Currency User assigned description of the currency
Description
User Currency User assigned symbol of the currency. This is
Symbol the symbol used for reporting the cost results in
the reports.
Descriptions for the following parameters are provided in more detail under
Investment Parameter specifications (page 216). X X
Time Period

Period Description Duration of time
Operating Hours per Number of hours in specified period
Period
Number of Weeks per Number of weeks in specified period
Period
Number of Periods for Set to 20 periods for investment analysis
Analysis
Schedule
Start Date for The beginning date for EPC (engineering,
Engineering procurement, and construction)
Duration of EPC Phase The calculated EPC duration in weeks
Length of Start-up Number of weeks scheduled for start-up
Period beyond the end of the EPC phase
Duration of The calculated construction duration in weeks
Construction Phase
Completion Date for The calendar date for the end of EPC
Construction
Capital Costs Parameter

Working Capital Percentage of total capital expense per period
Percentage required to operate the facility until the
revenue from product sales is sufficient to
cover costs.
Operating Costs Parameters
Operating Supplies Indicates the lump-sum cost of operating
supplies.
Laboratory Charges Indicates the lump-sum cost of laboratory
charges.
User Entered Indicates the user-entered value for total
Operating Charges operating charges.
(as percentage)
Operating Charges Includes operating supplies and laboratory
(Percent of charges. If the user enters a lump-sum value
Operating Labor for either “Operating Supplies” or “Laboratory
Costs) Charges”, the addition of the two values will
override the “User Entered Operating Charges”
Plant Overhead Consists of charges during production for
(Percent of services, facilities, payroll overhead, and so on
Operating Labor
and Maintenance
Costs)
G and A Expenses General and administrative costs incurred
(Percent of Subtotal during production such as administrative
Operating Costs) salaries/ expenses, R&D, product distribution
and sales costs.
General Investment Parameters
Tax Rate The percent per period of earnings that must
be paid to the government.

Desired Rate of Indicates the desired (that is, user- entered)
Return return rate, in percent per period, for the
investment.
Economic Life of Indicates the length of time in terms of periods

Project over which capital costs will be depreciated.
Salvage Value The expected value of an asset at the end of its
(Fraction of Initial usable life for the company. The difference
Capital Cost) between an asset’s cost and its salvage value is
the amount to be depreciated over the asset’s
usable life.
Depreciation There are four depreciation methods allowed in
Method Aspen Capital Cost Estimator: Straight Line,
Sum of the Digits, Double Declining (Balance),
Accelerated Cost Recovery System (ACRS). See
“Investment Parameters” in Chapter 3 for a
detailed definition of each depreciation method.
Escalation
Project Capital Rate at which project capital expenses may
Escalation increase expressed in percent per period. If the
addition of Engineer-Procure-Construct (EPC)
period and start-up period is greater than one
whole period, Project Capital Escalation is used
to escalate the capital expenses for periods
beyond the first period.
Products Escalation Rate at which the sales revenue from products
of the facility are to be escalated (increased) in
terms of percent per period.
Raw Material Rate at which the raw material costs of the
Escalation facility are to be escalated (increased) in terms
of percent per period.
Operating and Rate at which the operating and maintenance
Maintenance Labor costs of the facility are to be escalated
(increased) in terms of Escalation percent per
period. The operating labor costs include
operators per shift and supervisory costs.
Utilities Escalation User-entered percentages reflecting the
anticipated utility price increase each period.
Project Summary Output Data

The following OUTPUT data is generated by Aspen Capital Cost Estimator :
Project Results Summary

Total Project The total capital cost investment needed for
Capital Cost the project. If the calculated EPC period is
more than a year, the capital costs expenditure
will be spread out over the length of the EPC
period.
Total Raw Materials The total raw material cost of the facility ex
Cost pressed in terms of cost per period.
Total Products The total product sales of the facility expressed

Sales in terms of cost per period.
Total Operating The operating labor (including operators/shift

and Maintenance and supervisors/shift) and maintenance labor
Labor Cost costs in terms of cost per period. The
maintenance cost includes maintenance labor
and supplies.
Total Utilities Cost The total utilities usage cost expressed in cost
per period.
Total Operating The total of raw material, utility, operating
Cost labor, maintenance, operating charges, plant
overhead and G and A expenses.
Operating Labor Includes operators per shift and supervisors
Cost per shift costs.
Maintenance Cost Maintenance cost of the equipment including
labor and materials.
Operating Charges Includes operating supplies and laboratory
charges.
Plant Overhead Consists of charges during production for
services, facilities, payroll overhead, and so on
Subtotal Operating Subtotal cost of raw materials, operating labor,
Cost utilities, maintenance, operating charges, and
plant overhead.
G and A Cost General and administrative costs incurred
during production. This is calculated as a
percentage of the Subtotal Operating Costs.
The costs listed under Project Results Summary are broken
down into individual elements under Project Capital Summary:
Project Capital Summary
Purchased The total material cost of process equipment
Equipment and quoted equipment cost items. Material cost
is accounted for in the codes of account 100 -
299.
Equipment Setting The total construction labor cost for setting
equipment in place.
Piping The cost reported for each of these items

Civil indicates the total material and construction
labor cost calculated for the category. The
Steel
above cost items may have originated from
Instrumentation two sources:
Electrical Installation Bulks (please refer to Icarus
Insulation Reference).
Paint User: The user can add project components
that create cost items in these categories. The
project components may be in the following
categories: Plant bulks, Site development and
Buildings.
Other This item is the total of the following costs:
design, engineering, and procurement costs;
material charges (freight and taxes); and

construction field indirect costs (fringe
benefits, burdens, consumables/small tools,
insurance, equipment rental, field services,
field office construction supervision, and plant
start-up).
Subcontracts The total cost of subcontracted work. This cost
item is normally zero in Aspen Capital Cost
Estimator.
G and A General and administrative costs associated
Overheads with engineering, materials, and construction
work.
Contract Fee The total cost of contract fees for engineering,
material, construction, any subcontracted
work.
Escalation The total capital costs escalation amount. This
cost item is normally zero in Aspen Capital
Cost Estimator.
Contingencies The additional costs required to bring this
project to completion. In Aspen Capital Cost
Estimator, this cost item is automatically
calculated based on the project type and
process complexity.
Total Project Cost The total project capital cost of the plant
calculated by the Icarus Capital Costs Engine
as of the “System Cost Base Date”.
Adjusted Total Indicates the Total Project Cost (described
Capital Cost above) adjusted to the Start of Basic
Engineering. The Total Project Cost is
escalated (using the Project Capital Escalation
Parameter) from the system Cost Base date to
the start date of basic engineering.
Raw Material Costs and Product Sales
Raw Materials Cost Total raw material usage cost per hour
per Hour specified in the Raw Material Specifications
file.
Total Raw Materials Total cost of raw materials per period. This
Cost number is generated by multiplying Raw
Products Sales per Total produced product sales expressed in
Hour cost per hour.
Total Products Sales Total product sales per period. This number is
generated by multiplying Products Sales per
Hour by Operating Hours per Period.
Main Product Name The main product of the plant is considered to
be the product which produces the largest
sales figure per period. This field contains the
description of the main product (assigned by
the user).
Main Product Rate The production rate of the main product.
Main Product Unit The unit cost rate of the main product.
Cost
Main Product The production basis (or unit of measure) of
Production Basis the main product (LB,
GALLONS, and so on).

Main Product Rate The production rate of the main product per
per Period period .
Main Product Sales The total sales figure of the main product per
period.
By-product Sales The total sales figure per period of the by-
products (that is,, products other than the
main product of the plant).
Operating Labor and Maintenance Costs
Operating Labor
Operators per Shift The number of operators per shift per hour
necessary to operate the plant.
Unit Cost The wage rate for each operator expressed in
cost per operator per shift.
Total Operating Total operating labor cost obtained by
Labor Cost multiplying number of operators per shift by
the unit cost and by Operating Hours per
Period.
Maintenance
Cost/8000 Hours The cost of maintaining the facility equipment
for 8000 hours of operation of the facility.
Total Maintenance The total maintenance cost of the facility per
Cost period.
Supervision
Supervisors per Shift The number of supervisors per shift per hour
necessary to oversee personnel who operate
the facility.
Unit Cost The wage rate for each supervisor expressed
in cost per supervisors per shift.
Total Supervision Total supervising labor cost obtained by
Cost multiplying number of supervisors per shift by
the unit cost and by Operating Hours per
Period.
Utilities Costs
The utility cost breakdown is given below for electricity, potable
water, fuel and instrument air as well as user defined process utilities
such as steam. The description of each utility includes:
Rate The rate of use of the utility in terms of
amount per hour.
Unit Cost The unit cost of the utility in cost per amount.
Total Cost The total cost of the utility in cost per period.

Cashflow
Cashflow (CASHFLOW.ICS) calculates the Net Present Value (NPV), Internal
Rate of Return (IRR), Profitability Index (PI), payback period, and so on
The spreadsheet displays the cashflow information shown by period. The

beginning part of the spreadsheet contains data/results carried over from the
Project Summary (PROJSUM.ICS) spreadsheet.
Item Description
TW Number of Weeks per Period
T Number of Periods for Analysis
DTEPC Duration of EPC Phase
DT Duration of EPC Phase and Startup
WORKP Working Capital Percentage
OPCHG Operating Charges
PLANTOVH Plant Overhead
CAPT Total Project Cost
RAWT Total Raw Material Cost
PRODT Total Product Sales
OPMT Total Operating Labor and Maintenance Cost
UTILT Total Utilities Cost
ROR Desired Rate of Return/Interest Rate
AF ROR Annuity Factor
TAXR Tax Rate

IF ROR Interest Factor
ECONLIFE Economic Life of Project
SALVAL Salvage Value (Percent of Initial Capital Cost)
DEPMETH Depreciation Method
DEPMETHN Depreciation Method Id
ESCAP Project Capital Escalation
ESPROD Products Escalation
ESRAW Raw Material Escalation
ESLAB Operating and Maintenance Labor Escalation
ESUT Utilities Escalation
START Start Period for Plant Startup
PODE Desired Payout Period (excluding EPC and Startup Phases). Reserved
for future use.
POD Desired Payout Period: Reserved for future use.
DESRET Desired Return on Project for Sales Forecasting: Reserved for
future use.
END End Period for Economic Life of Project.
GA G and A Expenses.
DTEP Duration of EP Phase before Start of Construction.
OP Total Operating Labor Cost.
MT Total Maintenance Cost.
Sales
A number will appear in this category only after the time allotted for all prior
phases (engineering, procurement, construction and startup phases) has
expired.
SP (Products The total products sales value per period
Sales) calculated in PROJSUM.ICS.
SPF Reserved for future use.
(Forecasted
Sales
Annuity
Factor)
SF Reserved for future use.
(Forecasted
Sales)
S (Total Indicates the amount received per period from
Sales) sold products. This number is either SP or SF.

Expenses
Includes both capital and operating expenditures per period
listed below.
CAP (Capital Indicates, by period, total funds spent prior to
Costs) startup.
Unescalated Cumulative Capital Cost: Indicates
the total capital costs spent through the current
period. This is based on the Total Project Capital
Cost in PROJSUM.ICS.
Capital Cost: Indicates, by period, the amount of
initial, non-variable costs associated with the
project. This number is based on the Total Project
Capital Cost found in PROJSUM.ICS.
Cumulative Capital Cost: Indicates capital
expenditures through period n. For example, the
number in period 4 represents the total capital
expenditures beginning in period 1 and ending in
period 4.
Working: Indicates the amount required to
operate the facility before the revenue from
product sales is sufficient to cover costs. Working
Capital is a lump-sum amount which takes effect
during the start-up period. It is escalated at rate
equal to the Project Capital Escalation rate.
OP Indicates, by period, the total expenditure on the
(Operating following items necessary to keep the facility
Costs) operating: Raw Materials, Operating Labor Cost,
Maintenance Cost, Utilities, Operating Charges,
Plant Overhead, Subtotal Operating Costs, and G
and A Costs. This number is the Total Operating
Cost imported from PROJSUM.ICS and entered in
this field after capital expenditures cease.
(R)Revenue
Indicates, by period, the amount of money available after capital and
operating expenses have been paid. This number is obtained by subtracting
Capital Costs and Operating Costs from Sales.
DEP Indicates the amount by which the value of the capital cost decreases
each period. The Total Project Capital Cost is depreciated, via the chosen
depreciation method, over the useful Economic Life of the facility. The
Straight Line Method assumes that the item will depreciate by a constant
amount over its Economic life. When the Sum of the Years Method is used,
the depreciation expense decreases during each year of the project’s useful
life. When the Double Declining Balance Method is used, the project is
depreciated in geometric increments. The Accelerated Cost Recovery System
assumes that the project begins operating in the second half of the first year,
rather than in the beginning of the first year.

E Indicates the funds available after all expenses have been paid. This
number is obtained by subtracting the Depreciation and the Interest Expenses
from the Revenue.
TAX Indicates amount owed to the government. This number is obtained by
multiplying the tax rate by Earnings Before Taxes.
NE Indicates the funds available after taxes have been paid. This number
is obtained by subtracting the Taxes from the Earnings Before Taxes.
TED Indicates total cash available from project. This number is computed
by adding the Depreciation Expense to the Net Earnings. Since the
depreciation expense is a non-cash expense (no cash actually leaves the
facility in order to pay the depreciation expense) adding the depreciation to
the net earnings gives the total cash flow obtained from the project. Inclusion
of the Depreciation Expenses reduces the amount of taxable income.
TEX Specifies the total expenses of the project including capital, operating,
and any interest expense.
FVI Sums the Sales received through period n and indicates what the Sales
would be if they had been received in the current period. For example, the
value in period 4 is what the sales in periods 1-4 would have been if all of
these funds had been received in period 4.
PVI Indicates the current worth of all the cash received through period n.
For example, the number in period 4 represents the value that the sales
generated in periods 1 through 4 would be if those sales were received in the
first period. This number is obtained by summing all of sales from prior time
periods adding this amount to sales in the current time period. Using the
specified interest rate, this total is then discounted back to the first time
period.
PVOS If the user enters a number for PODE, this number indicates the
current worth of all of the cash paid through period n.
PVOP Indicates the current worth of all of the cash paid through period n.
For example, the number in period 4 represents the value that the expenses
paid in periods 1 through 4 would be if those expenses were paid in the first
period. This number is obtained by summing all of the outflows (Capital
Costs, Operating Costs, Interest Expense) from prior time periods and adding
this amount to the outflows in the current period. Using the specified interest
rate, this total is then discounted back to the first time period .
PVO Represents PVOS or PVOP depending on whether or not you entered a
desired payout period. If you entered a desired payout period, the basis for
the cash outflow calculation is the Forecasted Sales. Otherwise, the basis is
Product Sales.
PV Indicates the present worth of the Total Earnings received in the
current period. For example, the number in period 4 represents the value that
the Total Earnings generated in period 4 discounted back to the first time
period.
Final results are shown below:

NPV Indicates the current worth of all the Net Earnings received through
period n. For example, the number in period 4 represents the value that the
Net Earnings generated in periods 1 through 4 if those earnings were received
in the first period. This number is obtained by summing all of the Net
Earnings from prior time periods and adding this amount to the Net Earnings
in the current time period. Using the specified interest rate, this total is then
discounted back to the first time period. The sign of this value determines the
analysis result. If, in a certain period, the sign of the net present value is
negative, then the proposed investment appears not to be profitable, thus far.
For example, if the sign of the net preset value is negative in period 3, then
the project does not appear to be profitable during periods 1, 2, and 3.
However, if the sign is positive, then the project appears to be profitable,
from period 3 onward. If the net present value equals zero, then the project
does not incur any losses or gains (break-even point).
IRR Is the rate at which the present value of all cash flows is zero. It is
also known as the Discounted Cash-Flow Rate of Return. This value is
calculated at the “End Period for Economic Life of Project” (that is,, “Economic
Life of Project” and considering the length of EPC and Startup Period). At the
“End Period for Economic Life of Project”, it is assumed the salvage value of
the plant and the working capital are recouped. IRR is the after-tax interest
rate at which the organization can borrow funds and break even at the end of
the project life.
MIRR Indicates the profitability of the project. The internal rate of return is
the interest rate which equates the present value of a project’s expected cash
inflows to the present value of the project’s expected costs (or outflows). The
internal rate of return for each period is calculated by dividing the Present
Value of Cumulative Inflows by the Present Value of Cumulative Outflows and
raising this to a power and multiplied by 100. Two criteria are critical in
evaluating the internal rate of return. First, if the sign of the rate of return is
negative, the project appears not to be profitable. If the sign is positive, then
the project appears to be profitable. If the rate of return equals zero then the
project incurs no losses or gains (break-even point). In addition, if the rate of
return is greater than the rate which could be obtained from other
opportunities (that is,, investing in a bank), then the project probably should
be undertaken.
NRR Indicates the profitability of the project. The net rate of return for each
period is calculated by dividing the Net Present Value by the Present Value of
Cumulative Outflows and then multiplying the result by 100.
PO Represents the expected number of years required to recover the
original investment in the project. This row will indicate the length of time
that the facility needs to operate in order to recover the initial capital
investment (total capital cost plus working capital). If a number is entered for
the Desired Payout Period, the spreadsheet will determine the amount of
Sales necessary to meet this desired payout.
ARR Measures a project’s contribution to the firm’s net income. This
number is the ratio of the project’s Average Annual Expected Net Income to
its Average Investment. For example, the Average Annual Expected Net
Income for the fourth period is determined by summing net earnings from
periods 1 through 4 and divided by 4. The Average Investment is determined
by finding the Salvage Value, and adding this number to the Total Project

Cost and dividing this total by 2. If the accounting rate of return is greater
than one, then this is an indication that the project might be a profitable
undertaking. If the sign is negative, then the project does not appear to be
profitable. If this number equals zero then the project incurs no losses or
gains (break-even point).
PI The profitability index shows the relative profitability of any project; it
shows the present value of the benefits relative to the present value of the
costs. For each period, this number is computed by dividing the Present Value
of the Cumulative Cash Inflows by the Present Value of the Cumulative Cash
Outflows. If the profitability index is greater than one, then the project
appears to be profitable. If this index is less than one, then the project
appears not to be profitable. If this number equals zero then the project
incurs no losses or gains (break-even point).
Analysis
Analysis results are shown by period. “( - )” indicates the project in the
current period appears unprofitable, while “0” indicates break-even status.
Depreciation Calculations
This section presents details on the calculation of depreciation.
Executive Summary
Executive Summary (EXECSUM.ICS) contains a project summary intended to
be reviewed by executives and other business decision makers.
It contains the following information:

PROJECT NAME Aspen Capital Cost Estimator project

name
CAPACITY Capacity of plant for major product
PLANT LOCATION Location of plant
BRIEF Brief description of project, from
DESCRIPTION Project Properties
SCHEDULE
Start Date for The beginning date for EPC
Engineering (engineering, procurement, and
construction)
Duration of EPC The calculated EPC duration in weeks
Phase
Completion Date The calendar date for the end of EPC
for Construction
Length of Start- Number of weeks scheduled for start-
up Period up beyond the end of the EPC phase
INVESTMENT
Currency Conversion factor between user-
Conversion selected currency to the currency used
by the system internally for the
selected Country basis. For example, if
the US country basis is selected, the
internal system currency is US Dollars.
Therefore, all numbers will be reported
in US Dollars. However, if a currency
conversion rate of 1.5 is specified, all
internal values will be multiplied by 1.5
and then reported
Total Project The total capital cost investment
Capital needed for the project. If the calculated
EPC period is more than a year, the
capital costs expenditure will be spread
out over the length of the EPC period
Total Operating The total of raw material, utility,
Cost operating labor, maintenance,
operating charges, plant overhead and
G and A expenses
Total Raw The total raw material cost of the
Materials Cost facility expressed in terms of cost per
year
Total Utilities The total utilities usage cost expressed
Cost in terms of cost per year
Total Product The total product sales of the facility
Sales expressed in terms of cost per year
Desired Rate of Desired rate of return expressed in
Return terms of percent per year.

PROJECT INFORMATION
Simulator Type The name of the process simulator from
which process data was imported
Version The version of the process simulator
Report File The file name of the process simulator
report file
Report Date Date and time of the process simulator
report file
Economic The name of the Icarus system used for
Analysis Type the evaluation
Version Version number of the Icarus system.
System Cost Base The capital costs basis date of the
Date system. The Adjusted Total Project Cost
represents the calculated capital cost of
the project (calculated at this base
date) escalated to the Start Date of
Engineering.
Project Directory Directory path for the current Aspen
Capital Cost Estimator project
Analysis Date Date investment analysis was run.
Country basis Country basis for the capital
costs/schedule analysis
Project Type Project type identified in General Specs
Design code Selected design code for equipment
Prepared By Identifier for the preparer of the
process evaluator
Using the Reporting Assistant

The Reporting Assistant feature lets you create your own customized report
spreadsheets, combining information from all other Icarus generated
spreadsheets.
To develop a customized spreadsheet file and template:

1 On the Tools menu, click Options and then Reporting Assistant.

The Reporting Assistant Options dialog box appears.
2 On the Report File tab view, click New.

3 In the Save As dialog box, type a name for the report file that will contain
your customized spreadsheet. For example, type “Custom” as shown
below.
4 Click Save.
5 Switch to the Report Templates tab view.

6 In the Template Files section, click New.
7 In the Save As dialog box, type a name for the template file (for
example, “summary”) and click Save.
Note: This example creates a reporting template for future use called
Summary.tra.
8 In the Template Entries section, click New Entry. In the Column Label
field, enter a label (for example, “Project Name”) for the first column on
your custom report spreadsheet. The Display Column box should
automatically display “1”.
9 The Entry Definition section defines the data to be entered in the above
column. Select a file name in the Source box, then enter the column and
row of the source data.
For example, in the figure below, the contents of Column C, Row 8 of
Project.ics has been specified to appear in the customized report
spreadsheet’s Project Name column.

10 Follow the same procedure (steps 7 - 8) to add more entries. You can use
a variety of sources. For example, adding the following entries will result
in a report template that uses all three of the previously discussed .ics
files as sources.
Display Source
Column Label Column Source Column Source Row
Project Name 1 projsum.ics C 8
Start Date for
2 projsum.ics C 61
Engineering
Tax Rate 3 projsum.ics C 112
Purchased Equipment
4 projsum.ics C 172
Cost
Total Project Cost 5 cashflow.ics C 14
Total Maintenance
6 cashflow.ics C 40
Cost
Completion Date for
7 execsum.ics B 17
Construction
11 When all the template entries are added, return to the Report File tab
view. To the right of the Template File field, click Browse.
12 Select the newly created template file (for example, Summary.tra) and
click Open.
13 Click OK to exit the Reporting Assistant Options dialog box.
Generating the Custom Report
To generate a report developed in Reporting Assistant:

1 Run a project evaluation.
2 On the Run menu, click Add Entry for Reporting Assistant.
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator generates the report based upon the template
created in the Reporting Assistant. The data that was entered under List of

Entries on the Reporting Assistant Options dialog box appears as columns
in the spreadsheet.
Every time Add Entry for Reporting Assistant is selected, the latest data is
entered on the bottom row of the report. This way, you can compare results.
Item Evaluation
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator lets you run an evaluation on a single
component and view an Item Report. The type of Item Report displayed can
be selected in Preferences (see page 54).
X X
To run an item evaluation and display the Item Report:

1 Right-click on the component in either Project Explorer or the List view,
and then click Evaluate Item on the pop-up menu.
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator runs the item evaluation.

2 Right-click the component; then click Item Report on the pop-up menu.
You can also click the Evaluate button on the Component Specifications
form to run the item evaluation and display the Item Report.
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator displays the Item Report in the Main Window.

Note: If the evaluation has already been run, you only have to select Item
Report.
You can include multiple components in the Item Report: on the List view
(area level), select the desired components, right-click on one of the
components, and click Item Report on the pop-up window. The resulting
Item Report lists individually the summary data (cost or sizing) for each
selected component.
Sample Item Report
The following Item Report is for a floating head shell and tube heat exchanger
with “Example” as its item description:

Sample Item Report (continued)

11 Introducing IPS
ICARUS Project Scheduler (IPS) is the intelligent scheduling interface between

Aspen Capital Cost Estimator and Primavera Enterprise Project Manager
(P3E). IPS creates complete P3E project networks, including all of the
activities, resources, and durations that represent the engineering and
construction work contained in your Aspen Capital Cost Estimator project
estimate.
IPS provides three types of networks:
 AREA
 ITEM
 FULL
AREA - Summary activity for all similar components per area
IPS generates a concise, easy-to-manipulate, summary bar chart schedule
with a detailed overview of the engineering, procurement and a summary
overview of construction phases of the project.
ITEM - One summary activity per major code of accounts (COA) for each
component
IPS generates a concise, easy-to-manipulate, summary bar chart schedule
similar to AREA type except in the construction phase it will generate one
summary activity per major COA for each component in an area.
FULL - Detailed list of activities for each component
IPS generates a detailed overview of engineering, procurement, and detailed
installation tasks in each bulk account (piping, steel, civil etc.) for each
project component.
Depending on your need, IPS can present you with a P3E project showing
summary tasks to more detailed construction installation tasks. The network
developed from IPS contains many chains of activities and adapts them
dynamically to the scope of your Aspen Capital Cost Estimator project.
Relationships are re-evaluated based on actual tasks to be performed as
identified in the estimate. You can also make any desired modifications to
condense or delete activities, add or delete relationships to activities, and/or
change durations for activities using options in the IPS Project Schedule
Settings.
IPS jump-starts your effort by providing your planning staff with the
opportunity to benefit from engineering knowledge and project scope data
11 Introducing IPS 629

previously validated by the Aspen Capital Cost Estimator estimate. Additional
benefits can be derived by configuring the estimators’ data to include the
planner’s recommendations for duration adjustments, delivery times, and
parallel work areas.
630 11 Introducing IPS

12 Getting Started With IPS
Installing Icarus Project

Scheduler (IPS)
The Icarus Project Scheduler (IPS) product requires successful installation of
a number of Primavera products in order to function. Although the Primavera
documentation provides all the necessary information for installation, the
information is distributed over various unrelated documents, and, often, not
readily available. A brief summary is presented here to summarize the
essential requirements for the Aspen IPS product to function. This is not
intended to replace the Primavera documentation, and the sole purpose of
providing this summary information is to provide Aspen Capital Cost
Estimator/IPS users with a checklist of installation requirements. For further
details, consult the appropriate Primavera documentation.
Installation Steps and Sequence

Primavera Project Management (P3E) stores scheduling data into the SQL
Server/Oracle database (default database name is PMDB).
A successful installation of P3E and Integration API would require the
following steps in order:
1. Install database and load application data
The latest version of Primavera Project Management (version 6.0 and
above) software includes SQL Server Express 2005. This can be installed
by running setup.exe in the SQLSERVER directory. It can also be
installed by selecting Primavera-Standalone option when prompted
during installation step (see step 2 below). Selecting this option also
installs client applications, an empty database and sample data (optional).
If you already have the database server installed, you can use the P3E
database wizard for creating a new database structure and loading the
application data into the database. You can run the Database wizard to
create a new database from a client computer that has the Microsoft SQL
Server client or Oracle installed or Primavera Project Manager client
application (version 4.0 and above), or you can run the wizard from the
server itself. The Database wizard creates any necessary file structures
and users for you. The project manager database (PMDB) stores the
project manager data used by Primavera Enterprise. Installation of the
database is required.
12 Getting Started With IPS 631

This wizard can be run by executing dbsetup.bat file (located in the
install\database directory) in Primavera Project Management Application
Version 6.0 and above.
Use ConfigAsst.exe (located in the install\database directory) to invoke

the database wizard for version prior to Primavera Project Management
Application Version 6.
632 12 Getting Started With IPS

2. Install the Primavera Project Manager Enterprise Client
Application and configure database
After installing the Primavera database in step 1, install the Primavera
Project Manager Enterprise Client application, by running the Setup wizard.
The application requires approximately 23 MB of disk space. Administrator
rights are required to install the Primavera client application.
Selecting the Custom option when prompted lets you install Project
Management and Job service.
On the Configure SQL Server Connection dialog box or the Configure

Oracle Connection dialog box, enter the database connection settings. If
you are configuring Microsoft SQL Server or SQL Server Express, type the
database host name and database name. The database name was
specified when the database was created; for example, PMDB. The host
name is the name of the computer or IP address where Microsoft SQL
Server is installed. If you are configuring Oracle, type the Oracle database
name.
The screenshot below shows an example for configuring database
connection for SQL Server.
Where,
Host Name: P3E\PRIMAVERA
P3E: System name where SQL Server is running
PRIMAVERA: SQL Server instance name.

Database name: PMDB$PRIMAVERA
PMDB: Name of the database created during step 1 on PRIMAVERA SQL
Server.
3. Install the Primavera Job Service
If the Primavera Job Service component is not installed in step 2, install it
by running the setup wizard again. The Primavera Job Service lets you
configure scheduling, summarizing, exporting, and applying actual
operations to run in the background. The Primavera Job Service runs as a
Windows NT/2000 service and can support an unlimited number of jobs,
each with its own schedule of execution. Jobs are defined in Project
Manager and stored in the enterprise’s project manager database. If you
are working with more than one project manager database, you can run
jobs for all of the databases from one Windows NT/2000 server. If you do
not have a Windows NT or 2000 service, you will not have the project
scheduled after loading from the IPS software. Then, you must manually
use the Tools | Options | Preferences | Schedule menu in the Project
Manager application.
4. Configure Primavera Project Management Application
Have the Primavera administrator configure the licenses to allow access to
both the Primavera Project manager and the integration API. The
Primavera enterprise user licensing can be modified using the Admin |
Users menu item in Primavera Project Management application.
Corresponding licenses should also be available.
Follow the steps below to configure Primavera Project Management to use
Primavera Integration API:
1. Open and login to Primavera Project Management application.
2. Click the Admin | Users top level menu item
3. Select Integration API.

5. Know your SQL Server database port
The SQL Server database host port is required while configuring Primavera
Integration API.
To identify Database Host Port perform following steps
1. Open and login to Primavera Project Management application.
2. Click Help | About Primavera.
3. The System tab in the About Primavera dialog displays username,
database name, SQL Server name, SQL Server Database Host Port.
For example, 1153 is the Database Host port as shown below

6 Install the Java Runtime Environment or Java Development Kit
A copy of JRE (Java Runtime Environment) is included in the
install\database directory. JRE or JDK (Java Development Kit) can also be
downloaded from the Sun Microsystems Web site. If you are using the
Java SDK, ensure that it is installed before running the Integration API
setup. It is essential that the JDK be installed in a directory that does not
have spaces in its name. Presumably this limitation will be removed
shortly.
During installation of Java Integration API, a suitable Java Virtual Machine
(JVM) needs to be specified by selecting its java.exe file from the java
installation (bin) directory.
7 Install the Integration API
Go to the root folder of the Integration API Installation CD-ROM; double
click setup.exe. Specify the installation mode to be Local Mode, using it
without the Java RMI. Specify the database type to be the same as what
you installed earlier. Specify the database connection parameters. The
first time you install the Integration API, choose Create a new
configuration. This is necessary to support the addition of new
configuration settings for the release.
Use the database configuration wizard to configure the Integration API
license.

Where,
Default User Name: pubuser
Default Password: pubuser
Database Name: Same as in step 2 above
Database Host Address: Same as in step 2 above
Database Host Address: From step 5 above.
8 Configure User, Password and API location in the Aspen Capital
Cost Estimator/IPS Application.
After successful installation of the P3E enterprise client and the
Integration API, it is necessary to provide information regarding the P3E
user name, password, and the location of installation of the Integration
API in the client machine (since IPS only supports local mode installation
of the API). All three data may be added to the IPS through the use of
Tools | Options | Preferences | Schedule menu, or changed inside a
project by adding to the Primavera Project information tab in the Project
basis tab of the IPS and Aspen Capital Cost Estimator products.

System Requirements for the Integration
API
The Primavera Integration API has the following system requirements for
local mode installation:
 Java Runtime Environment
JRE 1.4 or higher (developers will require Java SDK 1.4 or higher,
which includes the JRE)
You can download the JRE or Java SDK from the Sun Microsystems
Web site. If you are using the Java SDK, ensure that it is installed
before running the Integration API setup. Install it in a directory
without blanks in the names.
 Operating Systems
The Primavera Integration API is fully supported on Windows operating
systems.
 Project Manager Database
Primavera version 4.0 or higher, and a Project Manager database
(Oracle, and SQL Server are supported) are required. Either a SQL
Server or Oracle client must be installed on the machine or, alternately
you can install the database from the server machine.
Primavera Enterprise Client and Server

Requirements
 Supported Platforms for Primavera Enterprise
Client Applications
o Microsoft Windows 98 Second Edition
o Microsoft Windows NT 4.0 (SP6a recommended)
o Microsoft Windows 2000, (SP1, SP2)
o Microsoft Windows XP
o Microsoft Windows Vista, 7.0 (32-bit)
 Minimum Client Configurations
For clients running Project Manager:
o 128 MB of RAM, 256 MB free recommended
o 40 MB of hard-disk space (per application)
o Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.0.1
o Netscape Communicator 4.75
o TCP/IP network protocol
Starting Icarus Project

Scheduler
After completing the installation, you can start IPS.

Creating a Primavera Schedule
For both IPS and Aspen Capital Cost Estimator/IPS, the primary step towards
scheduling a project involves clicking the Run | Project Scheduler button as
shown below.
Upon completion of loading the Aspen scheduling engine results into the
Primavera database, the P3E (or P3E/C for Construction) interface is launched
automatically. You must enter the password as shown in the next figure.

Upon entering the password, the primavera project manager screen “Select
Project Portfolio” appears. Select the “Open Existing Project” button and
choose the appropriate project from the P3E project list. (IPS creates P3E
projects with titles specified in the Project Basis View using the IPS project
schedule settings ->Schedule Appearance Adjustments -> Title form). This
brings up the Project Manager “Home” screen where the user may select the
activities button in the left hand pane to arrive at a schedule layout as shown
in the subsequent page.
Primavera Addendum
In EEV8.0 we have added support for Primavera P6 V8.2. Although the
Primavera documentation provides all the necessary information for
installation, the information is distributed over various unrelated documents,
and, often, not readily available. A brief summary is presented here to
summarize the essential requirements. This is not intended to replace
Primavera documentation, and the sole purpose of providing this summary
information is to provide Aspen Capital Cost Estimator, Aspen In-Plant Cost
Estimator users with a checklist of installation requirements. For further
details, consult the appropriate Primavera documentation.

Prerequisites for Primavera P6 V8.2
The Primavera P6V8.2 has the following requirements for installation:
 Java SDK
JDK 1.6.x: This can be downloaded from Oracle’s website.
 SQL Server 2005/2008 Express or any other edition.
Installation Steps and Sequence

A successful installation of P6 and Integration API would require the following
steps in order
1 Install Project Management Database (PMDB)
Primavera Project Management (P6) stores scheduling data into SQL
Server database. The default name of the database is PMDB. You need to
install this database using database setup utility which comes with Oracle
Primavera P6 Enterprise Project Portfolio Management (EPPM).
Below are the steps to install this database
1 A new PMDB database can be created by using “Primavera Database
Setup Wizard”. This wizard can be run by executing dbsetup.bat file
(located in the p6suite\database directory of root directory of P6
Enterprise Project Portfolio installation DVD)
2 Select “Install a new database” from “Database Options”. Select
“Microsoft SQL Server” as “Server Type”
3 Provide database Connection Information (DBA user name, DBA

password, Database host address and Database host Port)

Where:
PETEST: The host name of the computer where Microsoft SQL Server
is running.
PRIMAVERA: Name of the SQL Server Instance.
4 Configuring Microsoft SQL Server
Default database name is PMDB.

5 Create SQL Server Users (privuser, pubuser and pxrptuser)
6 In the “Configuration Options” dialog set Administrator

username\password as admin\admin and Install the database.

2 Installing Primavera P6 Professional for EPPM R8.2
1 Run setup.exe from the root directory of installation DVD and choose
Typical Installation. Choosing the Typical installation option is required
to install or upgrade only the P6 Professional application, for use with
the EPPM database installed.
Please note that do not install Professional database as this is not
compatible with Integration API.
2 Select Microsoft DQL Server as a s P6 Professional driver type in

Database Configuration Utility dialog box.
3 On the Configure SQL Server Connection dialog box enter the database
connection settings. Type the SQL Server host name and name of the
PMDB database created above.

The screenshot below shows an example for configuring database
connection for SQL Server.
4 Enter Public Login Information: Enter SQL Server username and

password created above.

3 Installing P6 Integration API R8.2
1 Run setup.exe from the root directory of Integration API installation
DVD. Specify the installation mode to be Local Mode Packages only.
2 Select P6 Integration API root name and browse the path where you
want to install the product. Note that the user should have both read &
write access to this path. Specify the database connection parameters.
The first time you install the Integration API, choose Create a new
Configuration. This is necessary to support the addition of new
configuration settings for the release.
3 Use the database configuration wizard to configure the Integration API

Navigating the Schedule in P3E
It is possible to view the predecessors, successors, resources, and activity
codes under the activity layout using the Show/Hide Bottom Layout icon
on the P3E activity pane. A number of example layouts are provided in the
AspenTech\ Economic Evaluation V8.0\Program\Schedule folder;
these can be imported by pressing the Layout dropdown button in the
activities screen. These layouts are named Aspen Icarus ---.plf. In a similar
manner, a number of standard reports have been created and placed in the
AspenTech\Economic Evaluation V8.0\Program\Reports directory.
These reports (.ERP files) may be imported into P3E using the Tools |
Reports | Reports menu function on the P3E activities screen. Once the P3E
Reports screen appears, right click on the Report Name button to locate and
import the desired report. These reports can be run using the P3E database.
Developing Schedule Basis Libraries

Development of the Icarus Project Scheduler settings input is not a trivial
task. To facilitate reuse of prepared input models, you can use the library
option. Outside a project, it is possible to create a “Project Scheduler” library.
As shown below, use the Library tab to create different prepared input
models.
Selecting a Project Scheduler Library brings up the IPS input tree structure,
which can be edited with the input forms described earlier. Right-clicking the
Default file allows editing and/or duplication into user customized library
files.

Selecting a Schedule Basis inside a Project
After an IPS basis is created, it can be used inside a project to load company
specific data. Inside a project, right-clicking the IPS project schedule settings
brings up a list of IPS basis files that have been created. Selecting the
appropriate basis file will lead to the reuse of previously generated IPS input
data. Use of a standardized IPS basis, which can be company-specific, leads
to rapid schedule generation.

13 IPS Project Schedule
Settings
IPS Project Schedule Settings

Note: IPS Project Schedule Settings are only included in Aspen Capital Cost
Estimator if you are licensed to use Aspen Icarus Project Scheduler (IPS). You
need to create an Aspen Capital Cost Estimator project with Project Execution
Schedule Settings and Evaluate the project in Aspen Capital Cost Estimator
before you can open the project in the IPS user interface.
If you are licensed to use Aspen Icarus Project Scheduler (IPS) and selected
to use IPS in the Aspen Capital Cost Estimator environment at startup or start
the IPS product separately, the IPS Project Schedule Settings folder is
included in the Project Explorer’s Basis view.
The Project Schedule Settings discussed in this section let you make
adjustments to the Primavera Enterprise schedules produced by Aspen Capital
Cost Estimator.
13 IPS Project Schedule Settings 651

Changes made to the IPS Project Schedule Settings will be reflected in the
scheduling reports generated for display in Primavera. The following are
descriptions of the settings.
Schedule Appearance Adjustments
Title
To enter a project schedule title to replace the system-generated

title:
1 Double-click Title (or right-click and click Edit on the pop-up menu).
2 Enter a title, up to 60 characters.
3 Click Apply.
Note: Regardless of the IPS Project/Scenario Name, any title entries made
here will become, by default, the P3E project name.
652 13 IPS Project Schedule Settings

Description Modification - Engineering
To modify an engineering activity description:

1 Double-click Engineering (or right-click and click Edit on the pop-up
menu).

one blank column (Item 1). If it has already been filled in, click Add to add a
new column in which to enter a modification.
Activity Number.
ACTIVITY NUMBER. Activity Numbers are listed in Appendix A have 10
characters. If you want to modify a group of activities, you can enter
“wildcard” asterisks in some fields. At least one of the fields (besides the two
preset fields) must contain numbers.

engineering phase:

characters are “00”. The engineering contract number is determined
based on your specifications for contractors under Basis for Capital
Costs in the Project Basis. It must be a number between 01 and 98. If
all engineering contractor numbers are to be selected, enter two asterisks
(**).
3 – Piping
4 – Civil
5 – Steelwork
7 – Electrical
8 – Insulation
9 – Painting
asterisk (*).
 Sequence in account group number
Note: Where applicable, the seventh and ninth characters of the

Equipment classes are defined in Appendix C.
tag.
the Engg. activity description field (up to 32 characters).

7 Click Apply/Ok when done to commit the changes. Click Cancel to close
the form without committing the changes.
Description Modification – Construction
To modify a construction activity description:

1 Double-click Construction (or right-click and click Edit on the pop-up
menu).

one blank item column (Item 1). If it has already been filled in, click Add to
add a new item column in which to enter a modification.
Activity Number.
The Activity Number is broken up into the fields under ACTIVITY NUMBER.
Construction Activity Numbers are listed in Appendix B have 12 characters. If
you want to modify a group of activities, you can enter “wildcard” asterisks in
some fields. However, at least one of the fields must contain numbers.
 Area number
The first and second characters of the Activity Number indicate the Area
number, 01 through 90, or other project-level items, such as substations,
control panel and power transmission lines, which always use 91. If
activities from all Areas are to be selected, enter two asterisks (**).
 Identification number
number from the specifications form for equipment items and plant bulks.
For substations, the fourth and fifth characters contain the substation
reference number (01-99) specified by the user or, if not specified, the
System default reference number of 00. If all reference numbers are to be
selected, enter three asterisks (***).

 Equipment type
Appendix D for Equipment Code definitions. All other activities have a
fixed identifier in positions six and seven of the activity number, as
listed in Activity Numbering Conventions table in Appendix B. Enter
two asterisks (**) if all Equipment Type numbers are to be selected.
See page Appendix D for the Equipment Code definitions.
listed in Appendix B. If all account group numbers are to be selected,
enter an asterisk (*).
The construction activities are listed in Appendix B, by the last three
characters of the Activity Number. These last three characters form
the account group number and account code.
 Account code
Enter the ninth and tenth digits of the Activity Code for the activities to
be selected for modification (that is,, excluding the first character,
which is the Account Group number, above). If all Activity Codes are to
be selected, enter two asterisks (**).
 Contractor number
tag.
the Constr. activity description field (up to 32 characters).
Schedule Adjustments by Duration

The activity duration and construction crew size are interrelated, such that an
adjustment to the duration will cause an inversely proportional adjustment to
the activity crew size, and vice versa. You can specify a duration adjustment,
a maximum crew size, a minimum crew size, or all three. If a conflict occurs,
the crew size adjustment will override the duration adjustment.

If not adjusted, durations are calculated for each activity based on the type of
activity and associated direct construction man-hours.
Crew Size
You can adjust the system activity durations by entering minimum/maximum
crew sizes for various construction activities within each account group.
To adjust crew size:

1 Double-click on Crew Size (or Right-click and click Edit on the pop-up
menu).
2 Specify minimum and maximum crew sizes for each construction crew
type.
Crafts
The Craft Adjustments form lets you modify the system-defined crafts. The
craft code and craft description may be completely replaced by a user-defined
code and description.
In addition, the maximum craft pool sizes may be modified as required.
Modifying the craft pool sizes will affect the activity durations and the overall
job durations.

To adjust a craft:
1 Double-click on Crafts (or right-click; then click Edit on the pop-up
menu).
2 Select the craft to be adjusted by entering the System craft code. See
Icarus Reference, Chapter 30, for lists of craft codes by Country Base.
3 Enter a numeric (01-99) User craft code to substitute for the preceding
System craft code.
Note: If you specify a craft code already in use (that is,, a system craft code
or a previously added user craft code), Aspen Capital Cost Estimator will
combine all pool sizes and resource requirements for the specified craft code
and the existing code.
4 Enter a description for the craft in the User craft description field, up to
20 characters.
5 Enter the number of men in the user craft pool or enter an adjustment
relative to the system craft pool size. The system craft pool size is
calculated based on the system craft man-hours and schedule duration.
6 Enter a 4-character user craft symbol. If nothing is entered, the system
craft symbol is used.
7 To enter another adjustment, click Add. This adds another column where
you can repeat the process.
Durations
The engineering, construction, and procurement duration forms can be used
to adjust durations by percentage.
Engineering
 Engineering Duration Adjustments
You may enter a percentage adjustment to the durations calculated by the
system for Basic Engineering, Detail Engineering, and/or Procurement.

 Client Review Period (Future Implementation)
You can use the Basic engineering review period field to set the duration
of Activity 0000003013, “CLIENT APPROVAL-ESTIM&SCHED”. Since all Detail
Engineering activities are preceded, directly or indirectly, by this activity, you
may impose a delay of any duration on the continuation of engineering
activity. This effectively breaks up the work flow to simulate, for example,
budget approval delay.
Construction
You may enter a percentage adjustment to the durations calculated by the
system for nine different construction activities. Any change in activity
duration will cause a corresponding change in activity resource (crew).
Procurement
For each equipment group, you can enter the number of weeks needed to
fabricate and ship the equipment to the site after vendor data approval.

If you make no adjustment, Aspen Capital Cost Estimator uses the following
durations:
Equipment Group Duration
Vessels 24 weeks
Towers 36 weeks
Storage Tanks 32 weeks
Pumps 22 weeks
Compressors 50 weeks
Turbines 50 weeks
Heat Exchangers 32 weeks
Boilers 55 weeks
Furnaces 40 weeks
Air Coolers 28 weeks
Package Refrigeration 44 weeks
Generators 26 weeks
Air Dryers 24 weeks
Conveyors 28 weeks
Mills 45 weeks
Fans 16 weeks
Elevators 26 weeks
Motors 16 weeks
Dust Collectors 30 weeks
Filters 16 weeks
Centrifuges 40 weeks

Mixers 16 weeks
Cooling Towers 32 weeks
Miscellaneous Equipment 26 weeks
Package Items 36 weeks
Packings and Linings 20 weeks
Schedule Adjustments by Activity and Logic
Logic Modification
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator provides sequencing logic, varying with the
activities present, for all engineering and construction activities, except the
following:
 Where logical relationships cannot be predicted for system-designed
activities, such as project site development.
 Where logical relationships cannot be predicted because the activity is
user-specified.
 Where a logical chain of activities has been substantially broken by
deletion of activities.
The Logic Modification forms provide the means to either add relationships
between successor and predecessor activities not provided by the Aspen
Capital Cost Estimator logic or to modify the Aspen Capital Cost Estimator
logic by adding and deleting relationships. Separate forms are provided for
engineering and construction sections of the network. When adding
relationships, a particular relationship type may be specified. However, when
deleting relationships, all relationships between the specified activities are
For engineering activities, only engineering predecessors are allowed. For
construction activities, engineering and construction predecessors are
allowed.
To add or delete an engineering relationship:

1 Double-click Engineering (or right-click and click Edit on the pop-up
menu) to display the Logic Modification form for engineering.

3 Select a successor activity, or group of activities, for which logic
modifications are to be made. This is done by specifying all or part of the
Activity Number.
SUCCESSOR ACTIVITY. Activity Numbers, which are listed in Appendix A,
have 10 characters. If you want to modify a group of activities, you can enter
“wildcard” asterisks in some fields. At least one of the fields (besides the two
preset fields) must contain numbers.
See Appendix A for a list of Activity Numbers
o Engineering phase
engineering phase:

o Engineering contractor number
engineering contract number. For fixed project-level activities,
these characters will be “00”. The engineering contract number is
determined based on your specifications for contractors under
Basis for Capital Costs in the Project Basis (refer to the Aspen
Capital Cost Estimator User Guide for further information). It must
be a number between 01 and 40. If all engineering contractor
numbers are to be selected, enter two asterisks (**).
Accounts.
3 – Piping
4 – Civil
5 – Steelwork
7 – Electrical
8 – Insulation
9 – Painting
asterisk (*).
Exception: where applicable, the seventh and ninth characters of
the Activity Number indicate the process equipment class (01-26).

The eighth character of the Activity Number is fixed and the same for all
activities. It is always “0”.
The ninth and tenth numbers provide sequential grouping within
the major hierarchy of the first eight characters. If all numbers
within a sequence group are to be selected, enter two asterisks
(**).
Note: where applicable, the seventh and ninth characters of the

4 Select an activity, or group of activities, to be added or deleted as

predecessor(s) to the specified Successor. Use the fields under

PREDESSOR – ENGG. ACTIVITY to select an activity the same way you
selected a successor activity.
7 Click Apply.
8 To add or delete another relationship, click Add and repeat the
process.
To add or delete a construction relationship:
Note: Enter either an engineering or a construction predecessor, not both.

1 Right-click Construction; then click Edit on the pop-up menu.

3 Select a successor construction activity, or group of activities, for which
logic modifications are to be made. This is done by specifying all or part of
the Activity Number.
The Activity Number is broken up into the fields under SUCCESSOR
ACTIVITY. Construction Activity Numbers, which are listed in Appendix B,
 Area number
asterisks (**).

 Identification number
See Appendix D for the  Equipment type
Equipment Code The sixth and seventh characters contain the Equipment Code. See
definitions.
The construction  Account group number
activities are listed in The eighth character, the account group number, refers to the type of
Appendix B by the last
three characters of the
Activity Number. These with the account code (in the field below), form the three-character
last three characters form code by which the construction and site development activities are
the account group
number and account
code. enter an asterisk (*).
 Account code
Enter the ninth and tenth characters of the Activity Code for the
 Contractor number
4 You can select either an engineering or a construction activity, or group of
activities, to be added or deleted as predecessor(s) to the specified
Successor. This is done by entering all or part of an engineering or
construction Activity Number.
To specify an engineering activity, enter all or part of an engineering
Activity Number in the fields under PREDESSOR – ENGG. ACTIVITY.
Engineering Activity Numbers, which are listed in Appendix A, have 10
characters. If you want to modify a group of activities, you can enter
“wildcard” asterisks in some fields. At least one of the fields (besides the
two preset fields) must contain numbers.
 Preset engineering field 1
See Appendixes A and B for lists of Engineering and Construction Activity
Numbers.
 Engineering phase
engineering phase:

 Engineering contractor number
asterisks (**).
 Account group number
3 – Piping
4 – Civil
5 – Steelwork
7 – Electrical
8 – Insulation
9 – Painting
asterisk (*).
Exception: where applicable, the seventh and ninth characters of the
Equipment classes are defined in Appendix C
 Sequence in account group number
Note: Where applicable, the seventh and ninth characters of the Activity
are defined in Appendix C.
To specify a construction predecessor activity or group of activities, enter
all or part of a construction Activity Number it in the fields provided under
PREDECESSOR – CONSTR. ACTIVITY, the same way you specified a
successor construction activity.

7 Click Apply.
Activity Modification
The Activity Modification forms for engineering and construction allow you
to modify the coding of activities. Activities may be combined within a
common activity number or deleted entirely.
Activities can be combined by changing an activity number to another existing
number. Specify all or part of an existing activity number, then all or part of
the other activity number that will replace it. Icarus Project Scheduler (IPS)
will sort the activities into numerical order, merging all identically numbered
activities, including the craft resources.
Activities can be deleted by selecting an activity and then entering asterisks
instead of the number of a modified activity.
To modify engineering activities:
1 Right-click Engineering; then, on the menu that appears, click Edit.

2 Select a source activity, by specifying all or part of the Engineering
Activity Number.
The parts of the Engineering Activity Number are broken up into the fields
under SOURCE ACTIVITY. Engineering Activity Numbers, which are
listed in Appendix A, have 10 characters. If you want to modify a group of
activities, you can enter “wildcard” asterisks in some fields. At least one of
the fields (besides the two preset fields) must contain numbers.
Note: See Appendix A for a list of Engineering Activity Numbers

 Engineering phase
engineering phase:
 Engineering contractor number
characters will be “00”. The engineering contract number is
determined based on your specifications for contractors under Basis
for Capital Costs in the Project Basis (see page 151). It must be a

number between 01 and 40. If all engineering contractor numbers are
to be selected, enter two asterisks (**).
3 – Piping
4 – Civil
5 – Steelwork
7 – Electrical
8 – Insulation
9 – Painting
asterisk (*).
Exception: where applicable, the seventh and ninth characters of the Activity
defined in Appendix C, page 705.

 Sequence in account group number
defined in Appendix C.
4 Click Apply.
To modify construction activities:

1 Right-click Construction and click Edit on the pop-up menu.

2 Select a source activity. This is done by specifying all or part of the
Construction Activity Number.
The Construction Activity Number is broken up into the fields under
ACTIVITY NUMBER. Construction Activity Numbers, which are listed in
Appendix B, have 12 characters. If you want to modify a group of activities,
you can enter “wildcard” asterisks in some fields. However, at least one of the
 Area number
asterisks (**).
 Identification number
 Equipment type

Note: See Appendix D for the Equipment Code definitions

enter an asterisk (*).
Note: The construction activities are listed in Appendix B by the last

three characters of the Activity Number. These last three characters
form the account group number and account code.
 Account code
Enter the tenth and eleventh characters of the Activity Code for the
 Contractor number
4 Click Apply.
Primavera Information
To edit Primavera information:
1 Right-click Project manager information in the Primavera
information folder and click Edit on the pop-up menu.

2 You can specify the following information:
o User name
o Password
o Database name
Name of Primavera database where Aspen IPS data will be
loaded (for example, pmdb).
o Remote or local host server
Indicates mode of operation, remote server (RMT) or local
machine (LCL).
o Enterprise project structure ID
Project structure ID for Primavera Enterprise. If nothing is
entered, the Aspen Capital Cost Estimator project name is
used.
o Enterprise project structure name
Project structure name for Primavera Enterprise. If nothing is
entered, the Aspen Capital Cost Estimator project name is
used.
o Enterprise project manager name
Name of manager (OBS) responsible for Primavera Enterprise.
If nothing is entered, the Aspen Capital Cost Estimator project
name is used.
o Enterprise project WBS name
Work Breakdown structure name for Primavera Enterprise. If
nothing is entered, the Aspen Capital Cost Estimator project
name is used.
3 Click Apply to save changes.

IPS Appendix A: Engineering
and Procurement Activity
Numbers
Numbering Convention
Engineering and Procurement Activity Numbers include both fixed and
variable numbers, as follows:
 Fixed numbers – activities relating to the overall project.
 Numbers that are repeated for each engineering contract, varying the
digits that identify each contractor.
 Numbers that vary for each class of equipment required within each area
(see “Equipment Codes” on page 707).
X X
As illustrated by the table on the following page, the first three characters and
the eighth character in the ten-character ID number are always “0” for all
Engineering and Procurement activities. The rest of the characters – the
fourth through seventh, the ninth, and the tenth – are used to indicated the
engineering phase, area number, contract number, account number,
equipment class, or simply sequential grouping, as described below:
 The fourth character indicates the major engineering phase:
o 0 Basic Engineering
o 1 Detail Engineering
o 2 Procurement
 The fifth and sixth characters indicate the engineering contract number.
For fixed project-level activities, these characters will be “00” (unless
contracts are used). The engineering contract number is determined by
your specifications for contractors in the estimating system input and
must be a number between 01 and 98.
 The seventh character indicates the Code of Account series:
o 0, 1, 2 Either Equipment or General
o 3 Piping
IPS Appendix A: Engineering and Procurement Activity Numbers 675

o 4 Civil
o 5 Steelwork
o 6 Instrumentation
o 7 Electrical
o 8 Insulation
o 9 Paint
 The ninth and tenth characters simply provide sequential grouping within
the major hierarchy of the first eight characters.
Note: There is one exception to the numbering conventions discussed here.

Where applicable, the process equipment class is indicated by the seventh
and ninth characters and can be a number from 01 to 26. See page 705 for X X
Equipment Class definitions.

Engineering and Procurement – Activity Numbering Conventions
Category Range
Basic Engineering:
Fixed, project-level 000-0-CC-0-0-01 through 000-0-CC-7-0-09
Equipment, by contractor and class 000-0-CC-X-0-X1 through 000-0-CC-X-0-X9
Detail Engineering:
Fixed, project-level 000-1-CC-0-0-11 through 000-0-CC-9-0-02
Variable, by contractor 000-1-CC-1-0-21 through 000-1-CC-7-0-97
Procurement:
Variable, by contractor 000-2-CC-0-0-01 through 000-2-CC-9005
Equipment, by contract and class 000-2-CC-X-0-X1 through 000-2-CC-X-0-X5
CC = Contract Number (01-40)
XX = Process Equipment Class (01-26); see page 705. X X
List of Activity Numbers

The Engineering and Procurement Activity Numbers are listed below, divided
by Phase:
 Basic Engineering: page 676 X X
 Detail Engineering: page 686 X X
 Procurement: page 692 X X
Activity
Number Definition
Basic Engineering
Preliminary
0000000001 AUTHORIZATION TO PROCEED

0000000002 START ENGINEERING
0000000003 STAFFING, MOBILIZATION
676 IPS Appendix A: Engineering and Procurement Activity Numbers

0000000004 REVIEW PREVIOUS JOB
0000000005 PROJECT STAFF CONFERENCE
0000000006 CUSTOMER COORDINATION MEETING
0000000007 ANALYZE OUTSTANDING CLIENT INPUT
0000000008 ONGOING CLIENT INPUT
0000000009 RECEIVE ALL CLIENT INPUT
Basic Engineering – Project Level
Materials, Vessels STDS
0000002071 PREP PRELIM MATERIALS OF CONST
0000002072 MATERIALS DEPARTMENT REVIEW
0000002073 PREP & ISSUE VESSEL STANDARDS
0000002074 CLIENT APPROVAL VESSEL STDS
0000002075 REVISE & REISSUE VESSEL STDS
User-Specified Drawings – General
0000002080 DRAFT & CHECK, USER DWG (XX)
0000002081 APPROVAL, USER DWG (XX)
0000002082 REVISE & IFC, USER DWG (XX)
Process Scope Estimating
0000003001 PREPARE PRELIM PROCESS SCOPE
0000003002 PROCESS SCOPE 50% COMPLETE
0000003003 ISSUE PROCESS SCOPE
0000003004 CLIENT APPROVAL PROCESS SCOPE
0000003005 UPDATE PROCESS SCOPE
0000003006 PREPARE BUDGET ESTIMATE
0000003007 CLIENT APPROVAL BUDGET ESTIMATE
0000003008 REVISE PROCESS SCOPE
0000003009 CLASS 2 ESTIMATE WORKSHEETS
0000003010 UPDATE CLASS 2 ESTIMATE
0000003011 COMPLETE 70% CLASS 2 ESTIMATE
0000003012 COMPLETE CLASS 2 ESTIMATE
0000003013 CLIENT APPROVAL - ESTIM & SCHED
User-Specified Drawings – Piping

Project Scope
0000004001 PREP & ISSUE PRELIM SCOPE DOC
0000004002 PREP & REISSUE PROJECT SCOPE
Fire Protection
0000004011 REVIEW FIRE PROTECTION REQMTS
0000004012 PREP & ISSUE FIRE PROTN SPECS
0000004013 CLIENT APPROVAL FIRE PROTECTION
Soils
0000004021 SOILS ANALYSIS
0000004022 PREP & ISSUE SOILS REPORT
Environmental
0000004031 PRELIM ENVIRONMENTAL INVESTIGTN
0000004032 ISSUE ENVIRONMENTAL DATA
Structural
0000004041 PREP & ISSUE STRUCTURAL SPECS
0000004042 CLIENT APPROVAL STRUCTURAL SPECS
0000004043 PRELIM FOUNDATION DESIGN
0000004044 CIVIL,ARCHITECTURAL & HVAC ESTIM
Utilities
0000004051 UTILITY DIAGRAM WORKSHEETS
0000004052 DRAFT & CHECK UTILITY FDS
0000004053 UPDATE & ISSUE UTILITY FDS
0000004054 CLIENT APPROVAL UTILITY FDS
0000004055 REVISE & REISSUE UTILITY FDS
0000004056 DRAFT & CHECK UTILITY P&IDS
0000004057 CLIENT APPROVAL UTILITY P&IDS
0000004058 UPDATE & ISSUE UTILITY P&IDS
Electrical
0000004061 PREP & ISSUE ELEC STANDARDS
0000004062 CLIENT APPROVAL ELEC STANDARDS
0000004063 PREP & ISSUE ONE-LINE DIAGRAM
0000004064 UPDATE ONE-LINE DIAGRAM
0000004065 PREPARE MAJOR ELEC EQPT REQNS
0000004066 APPROVE MAJOR ELEC EQPT REQNS
0000004067 MAJOR ELEC EQUIPMENT QUOTES
0000004068 TAB & SELECT ELEC EQPT VENDOR
0000004069 CLIENT APPROVE ELEC EQPT VENDOR
0000004070 PREPARE AREA CLASSIFCN PLAN
0000004071 DRAFT & CHECK CLASSIFCN PLAN
0000004072 CLIENT APPROVAL,CLASSIFCN PLAN
0000004073 REV & ISSUE CLASSIFICATION PLAN
0000004075 ELECTRICAL COST ESTIMATE

User-specified Drawings – Civil/Building
PFD’s
0000005001 ANALYZE PROCESS REQUIREMENTS
0000005002 HEAT & MATERIAL BALANCE
0000005003 PROCESS FLOWSHEETS
0000005004 DRAFT & CHECK PFDS
0000005005 UPDATE & ISSUE PFDS(1)
0000005011 CLIENT APPROVAL PFDS(1)
0000005012 REVISE & REISSUE PFDS(2)
0000005013 CLIENT APPROVAL PFDS(2)
0000005014 REVISE & REISSUE PFDS(3)
Instrumentation
0000005021 PREPARE INSTRUMENT STANDARDS
0000005022 CLIENT APPROVAL INSTRUMENT STDS
0000005023 REVISE & REISSUE INSTRUMENT
0000005024 PREPARE INSTRUMENT INDEX
Piping
0000005031 PRELIMINARY P&ID WORKSHEETS
0000005032 INTERNAL REVIEW P&IDS
0000005033 DRAFT & CHECK P&IDS
0000005034 UPDATE & ISSUE P&IDS(1)
0000005035 CLIENT APPROVAL P&IDS(1)
0000005036 REVISE & REISSUE P&IDS(2)
0000005037 PREPARE & ISSUE LINE LIST
0000005041 PREP & ISSUE PIPING STANDARDS
0000005042 CLIENT APPROVAL PIPING STDS
0000005043 REVISE & REISSUE PIPING STDS
0000005044 PIPING ARRANGEMENT STUDIES
0000005045 DRAFT INTERCONNG PIPING DWGS
0000005046 REV & ISSUE INTERCONNG PIPING
0000005047 PIPING MATERIAL TAKEOFF
Plot Plans
0000005051 PREPARE SITE PLANNING MODEL
0000005052 GA, PLOT PLAN STUDIES
0000005053 DRAFT & CHECK GA, PLOT PLANS
0000005054 UPDATE & ISSUE GA, PLOT PLANS
0000005055 CLIENT APPROVAL GA, PLOT PLANS

0000005056 REVISE & REISSUE GA, PLOT PLANS
User-Specified Drawings – Steelwork
0000005061 PRELIM SIZING MECHANICAL
0000005062 PREPARE ELECTRICAL LOAD LIST
0000005071 PREPARE & ISSUE MECH STANDARDS
0000005072 CLIENT APPROVAL MECH STANDARDS
0000005073 UPDATE & ISSUE MECH STANDARDS
Process Studies
0000006001 PROCESS STUDIES
Control System
0000006010 PANEL/CONSOLE LAYOUT STUDY
0000006011 DRAFT & CHECK PANEL/CONSOLE DWGS
0000006012 APPROVE PANEL/CONSOLE DWGS
0000006013 REV & ISSUE PANEL/CONSOLE DWGS
0000006020 SCOPE SHARED DISPLAY SYSTEM
0000006021 IFQ DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM
0000006022 APPROVE DIG CONTROL SYSTEM
0000006030 PREPARE CONTROL PANEL SPECS
0000006031 IFQ CONTROL PANEL REQNS
0000006032 APPROVE CONTROL PANEL REQNS
User-Specified Drawings – Instrumentation
Misc, Documentation
0000007001 PREPARE PRELIM EQUIPMENT LIST

0000007002 SCHED & ESTIMATE PROCESS WORK
0000007003 PREPARE EARLY ENGINEERING CPM
0000007004 PREPARE EQUIPMENT STATUS LIST
0000007005 UPDATE & ISSUE EQUIPMENT LIST
0000007006 PREPARE & ISSUE BIDDERS LIST
0000007007 CLIENT APPROVE BIDDERS LIST
0000007008 REVISE & REISSUE BIDDERS LIST
0000007009 PREPARE & ISSUE PROJECT CPM
User-Specified Drawings – Electrical
Basic Engineering – Equipment, Variable by Class and
Contractor
Vessels
0000010011 PROCESS SPECS, PRESS VESSELS-01
0000010012 REV PROC SPECS, PRESS VESSELS-01
0000010013 MECH DESIGN, PRESS VESSELS-01
0000010014 PREPARE REQNS, PRESS VESSELS-01
0000010015 OBTAIN QUOTES, PRESS VESSELS-01
0000010016 SELECT VENDORS, PRESS VESSELS-01
0000010017 APPROVE VENDOR, PRESS VESSELS-01
0000010018 APPROVE REQNS, PRESS VESSELS-01
0000010019 REISSUE REQNS, PRESS VESSELS-01
Towers
0000010021 PROCESS SPECS, TOWERS-01
0000010022 REV PROC SPECS, TOWERS-01
0000010023 MECH DESIGN, TOWERS-01
0000010024 PREPARE REQNS, TOWERS-01
0000010025 OBTAIN QUOTES, TOWERS-01
0000010026 SELECT VENDORS, TOWERS-01
0000010027 APPROVE VENDOR, TOWERS-01
0000010028 APPROVE REQNS, TOWERS-01
0000010029 REISSUE REQNS, TOWERS-01
Storage Tanks
0000010031 PROCESS SPECS, STORAGE TANKS-01
0000010032 REV PROC SPECS, STORAGE TANKS-01
0000010033 MECH DESIGN, STORAGE TANKS-01
0000010034 PREPARE REQNS, STORAGE TANKS-01
0000010035 OBTAIN QUOTES, STORAGE TANKS-01

0000010036 SELECT VENDORS, STORAGE TANKS-01
0000010037 APPROVE VENDOR, STORAGE TANKS-01
0000010038 APPROVE REQNS, STORAGE TANKS-01
0000010039 REISSUE REQNS, STORAGE TANKS-01
Pumps
0000010041 PROCESS SPECS, PUMPS -01
0000010042 REV PROC SPECS, PUMPS -01
0000010043 MECH DESIGN, PUMPS -01
0000010044 PREPARE REQNS, PUMPS -01
0000010045 OBTAIN QUOTES, PUMPS -01
0000010046 SELECT VENDORS, PUMPS -01
0000010047 APPROVE VENDOR, PUMPS -01
0000010048 APPROVE REQNS, PUMPS -01
0000010049 REISSUE REQNS, PUMPS -01
Compressors
0000010051 PROCESS SPECS, COMPRESSORS -01
0000010052 REV PROC SPECS, COMPRESSORS -01
0000010053 MECH DESIGN, COMPRESSORS -01
0000010054 PREPARE REQNS, COMPRESSORS -01
0000010055 OBTAIN QUOTES, COMPRESSORS -01
0000010056 SELECT VENDORS, COMPRESSORS -01
0000010057 APPROVE VENDOR, COMPRESSORS -01
0000010058 APPROVE REQNS, COMPRESSORS -01
0000010059 REISSUE REQNS, COMPRESSORS -01
Turbines
0000010061 PROCESS SPECS, TURBINES -01
0000010062 REV PROC SPECS, TURBINES -01
0000010063 MECH DESIGN, TURBINES -01
0000010064 PREPARE REQNS, TURBINES -01
0000010065 OBTAIN QUOTES, TURBINES -01
0000010066 SELECT VENDORS, TURBINES -01
0000010067 APPROVE VENDOR, TURBINES -01
0000010068 APPROVE REQNS, TURBINES -01
0000010069 REISSUE REQNS, TURBINES -01
Heat Exchangers
0000010071 PROCESS SPECS, EXCHANGERS -01
0000010072 REV PROC SPECS, EXCHANGERS -01
0000010073 MECH DESIGN, EXCHANGERS -01
0000010074 PREPARE REQNS, EXCHANGERS -01
0000010075 OBTAIN QUOTES, EXCHANGERS -01
0000010076 SELECT VENDORS, EXCHANGERS -01
0000010077 APPROVE VENDOR, EXCHANGERS -01
0000010078 APPROVE REQNS, EXCHANGERS -01
0000010079 REISSUE REQNS, EXCHANGERS -01
Boilers
0000010081 PROCESS SPECS, BOILERS -01
0000010082 REV PROC SPECS, BOILERS -01

0000010083 MECH DESIGN, BOILERS -01
0000010084 PREPARE REQNS, BOILERS -01
0000010085 OBTAIN QUOTES, BOILERS -01
0000010086 SELECT VENDORS, BOILERS -01
0000010087 APPROVE VENDOR, BOILERS -01
0000010088 APPROVE REQNS, BOILERS -01
0000010089 REISSUE REQNS, BOILERS -01
Furnaces
0000010091 PROCESS SPECS, FURNACES -01
0000010092 REV PROC SPECS, FURNACES -01
0000010093 MECH DESIGN, FURNACES -01
0000010094 PREPARE REQNS, FURNACES -01
0000010095 OBTAIN QUOTES, FURNACES -01
0000010096 SELECT VENDORS, FURNACES -01
0000010097 APPROVE VENDOR, FURNACES -01
0000010098 APPROVE REQNS, FURNACES -01
0000010099 REISSUE REQNS, FURNACES -01
Air Coolers
0000011001 PROCESS SPECS, AIR COOLERS -01
0000011002 REV PROC SPECS, AIR COOLERS -01
0000011003 MECH DESIGN, AIR COOLERS -01
0000011004 PREPARE REQNS, AIR COOLERS -01
0000011005 OBTAIN QUOTES, AIR COOLERS -01
0000011006 SELECT VENDORS, AIR COOLERS -01
0000011007 APPROVE VENDOR, AIR COOLERS -01
0000011008 APPROVE REQNS, AIR COOLERS -01
0000011009 REISSUE REQNS, AIR COOLERS -01
Pkg Refrigeration
0000011011 PROCESS SPECS, PKG REFRIG -01
0000011012 REV PROC SPECS, PKG REFRIG -01
0000011013 MECH DESIGN, PKG REFRIG -01
0000011014 PREPARE REQNS, PKG REFRIG -01
0000011015 OBTAIN QUOTES, PKG REFRIG -01
0000011016 SELECT VENDORS, PKG REFRIG -01
0000011017 APPROVE VENDOR, PKG REFRIG -01
0000011018 APPROVE REQNS, PKG REFRIG -01
0000011019 REISSUE REQNS, PKG REFRIG -01
Generators
0000011021 PROCESS SPECS, GENERATORS -01
0000011022 REV PROC SPECS, GENERATORS -01
0000011023 MECH DESIGN, GENERATORS -01
0000011024 PREPARE REQNS, GENERATORS -01
0000011025 OBTAIN QUOTES, GENERATORS -01
0000011026 SELECT VENDORS, GENERATORS -01
0000011027 APPROVE VENDOR, GENERATORS -01
0000011028 APPROVE REQNS, GENERATORS -01
0000011029 REISSUE REQNS, GENERATORS -01
Air Dryers
0000011031 PROCESS SPECS, AIR DRYERS -01

0000011032 REV PROC SPECS, AIR DRYERS -01
0000011033 MECH DESIGN, AIR DRYERS -01
0000011034 PREPARE REQNS, AIR DRYERS -01
0000011035 OBTAIN QUOTES, AIR DRYERS -01
0000011036 SELECT VENDORS, AIR DRYERS -01
0000011037 APPROVE VENDOR, AIR DRYERS -01
0000011038 APPROVE REQNS, AIR DRYERS -01
0000011039 REISSUE REQNS, AIR DRYERS -01
Conveyors
0000011041 PROCESS SPECS, CONVEYORS -01
0000011042 REV PROC SPECS, CONVEYORS -01
0000011043 MECH DESIGN, CONVEYORS -01
0000011044 PREPARE REQNS, CONVEYORS -01
0000011045 OBTAIN QUOTES, CONVEYORS -01
0000011046 SELECT VENDORS, CONVEYORS -01
0000011047 APPROVE VENDOR, CONVEYORS -01
0000011048 APPROVE REQNS, CONVEYORS -01
0000011049 REISSUE REQNS, CONVEYORS -01
Mills
0000011051 PROCESS SPECS, MILLS -01
0000011052 REV PROC SPECS, MILLS -01
0000011053 MECH DESIGN, MILLS -01
0000011054 PREPARE REQNS, MILLS -01
0000011055 OBTAIN QUOTES, MILLS -01
0000011056 SELECT VENDORS, MILLS -01
0000011057 APPROVE VENDOR, MILLS -01
0000011058 APPROVE REQNS, MILLS -01
0000011059 REISSUE REQNS, MILLS -01
Fans
0000011061 PROCESS SPECS, FANS -01
0000011062 REV PROC SPECS, FANS -01
0000011063 MECH DESIGN, FANS -01
0000011064 PREPARE REQNS, FANS -01
0000011065 OBTAIN QUOTES, FANS -01
0000011066 SELECT VENDORS, FANS -01
0000011067 APPROVE VENDOR, FANS -01
0000011068 APPROVE REQNS, FANS -01
0000011069 REISSUE REQNS, FANS -01
Elevators
0000011071 PROCESS SPECS, ELEVATORS -01
0000011072 REV PROC SPECS, ELEVATORS -01
0000011073 MECH DESIGN, ELEVATORS -01
0000011074 PREPARE REQNS, ELEVATORS -01
0000011075 OBTAIN QUOTES, ELEVATORS -01
0000011076 SELECT VENDORS, ELEVATORS -01
0000011077 APPROVE VENDOR, ELEVATORS -01
0000011078 APPROVE REQNS, ELEVATORS -01

0000011079 REISSUE REQNS, ELEVATORS -01
Motors
0000011081 PROCESS SPECS, MOTORS -01
0000011082 REV PROC SPECS, MOTORS -01
0000011083 MECH DESIGN, MOTORS -01
0000011084 PREPARE REQNS, MOTORS -01
0000011085 OBTAIN QUOTES, MOTORS -01
0000011086 SELECT VENDORS, MOTORS -01
0000011087 APPROVE VENDOR, MOTORS -01
0000011088 APPROVE REQNS, MOTORS -01
0000011089 REISSUE REQNS, MOTORS -01
Dust Collectors
0000011091 PROCESS SPECS, DUST COLLECTR-01
0000011092 REV PROC SPECS, DUST COLLECTR-01
0000011093 MECH DESIGN, DUST COLLECTR-01
0000011094 PREPARE REQNS, DUST COLLECTR-01
0000011095 OBTAIN QUOTES, DUST COLLECTR-01
0000011096 SELECT VENDORS, DUST COLLECTR-01
0000011097 APPROVE VENDOR, DUST COLLECTR-01
0000011098 APPROVE REQNS, DUST COLLECTR-01
0000011099 REISSUE REQNS, DUST COLLECTR-01
Filters
0000012001 PROCESS SPECS, FILTERS -01
0000012002 REV PROC SPECS, FILTERS -01
0000012003 MECH DESIGN, FILTERS -01
0000012004 PREPARE REQNS, FILTERS -01
0000012005 OBTAIN QUOTES, FILTERS -01
0000012006 SELECT VENDORS, FILTERS -01
0000012007 APPROVE VENDOR, FILTERS -01
0000012008 APPROVE REQNS, FILTERS -01
0000012009 REISSUE REQNS, FILTERS -01
Centrifuges
0000012011 PROCESS SPECS, CENTRIFUGES -01
0000012012 REV PROC SPECS, CENTRIFUGES -01
0000012013 MECH DESIGN, CENTRIFUGES -01
0000012014 PREPARE REQNS, CENTRIFUGES -01
0000012015 OBTAIN QUOTES, CENTRIFUGES -01
0000012016 SELECT VENDORS, CENTRIFUGES -01
0000012017 APPROVE VENDOR, CENTRIFUGES -01
0000012018 APPROVE REQNS, CENTRIFUGES -01
0000012019 REISSUE REQNS, CENTRIFUGES -01
Mixers
0000012021 PROCESS SPECS, MIXERS -01
0000012022 REV PROC SPECS, MIXERS -01
0000012023 MECH DESIGN, MIXERS -01
0000012024 PREPARE REQNS, MIXERS -01
0000012025 OBTAIN QUOTES, MIXERS -01
0000012026 SELECT VENDORS, MIXERS -01
0000012027 APPROVE VENDOR, MIXERS -01

0000012028 APPROVE REQNS, MIXERS -01
0000012029 REISSUE REQNS, MIXERS -01
Cooling Towers
0000012031 PROCESS SPECS, COOLING TOWER-01
0000012032 REV PROC SPECS, COOLING TOWER-01
0000012033 MECH DESIGN, COOLING TOWER-01
0000012034 PREPARE REQNS, COOLING TOWER-01
0000012035 OBTAIN QUOTES, COOLING TOWER-01
0000012036 SELECT VENDORS, COOLING TOWER-01
0000012037 APPROVE VENDOR, COOLING TOWER-01
0000012038 APPROVE REQNS, COOLING TOWER-01
0000012039 REISSUE REQNS, COOLING TOWER-01
Misc. Equipment
0000012041 PROCESS SPECS, MISC EQUIP -01
0000012042 REV PROC SPECS, MISC EQUIP -01
0000012043 MECH DESIGN, MISC EQUIP -01
0000012044 PREPARE REQNS, MISC EQUIP -01
0000012045 OBTAIN QUOTES, MISC EQUIP -01
0000012046 SELECT VENDORS, MISC EQUIP -01
0000012047 APPROVE VENDOR, MISC EQUIP -01
0000012048 APPROVE REQNS, MISC EQUIP -01
0000012049 REISSUE REQNS, MISC EQUIP -01
Package Items
0000012051 PROCESS SPECS, PACKAGE ITEMS-01
0000012052 REV PROC SPECS, PACKAGE ITEMS-01
0000012053 MECH DESIGN, PACKAGE ITEMS-01
0000012054 PREPARE REQNS, PACKAGE ITEMS-01
0000012055 OBTAIN QUOTES, PACKAGE ITEMS-01
0000012056 SELECT VENDORS, PACKAGE ITEMS-01
0000012057 APPROVE VENDOR, PACKAGE ITEMS-01
0000012058 APPROVE REQNS, PACKAGE ITEMS-01
0000012059 REISSUE REQNS, PACKAGE ITEMS-01
Packings and Linings
0000012061 PROCESS SPECS, PACK&LININGS -01
0000012062 REV PROC SPECS, PACK&LININGS -01
0000012063 MECH DESIGN, PACK&LININGS -01
0000012064 PREPARE REQNS, PACK&LININGS -01
0000012065 OBTAIN QUOTES, PACK&LININGS -01
0000012066 SELECT VENDORS, PACK&LININGS -01
0000012067 APPROVE VENDOR, PACK&LININGS -01
0000012068 APPROVE REQNS, PACK&LININGS -01
0000012069 REISSUE REQNS, PACK&LININGS -01
Detail Engineering
Project Level
CPM
0001000011 UPDATE & ISSUE PROJECT CPM

0001000012 FINALIZE CPM FOR CONSTRUCTION
Definitive Estimate
0001000021 DEFINITIVE ESTIMATE MTO
0001000022 PREPARE DEFINITIVE ESTIMATE
0001000023 REVIEW & ISSUE DEFIN ESTIMATE
0001000024 UPDATE DEFINITIVE ESTIMATE
0001000025 FINALIZE CONTROL ESTIMATE
Site Development
0001001011 CIVIL DESIGN,LAYOUT STUDIES
0001001012 PREP SITE GRADING DRAWINGS
0001001013 DRAFT & CHECK SITE GRADING DWGS
0001001014 PREP SITE DEVELOPMENT DETAILS
0001001015 DRAFT & CHECK SITE DEVEL DETAILS
0001001016 CLIENT APPROVE SITE DEVEL DWGS
0001001017 REV & ISSUE SITE DEVELOPMT DWGS
Equipment Layout
0001002001 UPDATE EQUIPMENT LIST
0001002010 EQUIPMENT LAYOUT STUDIES
0001002011 REVIEW EQUIP LAYOUTS & FREEZE
Line List
0001003000 PREPARE & ISSUE LINE LIST
Piping Model (if specified)
0001003010 PREPARE MODEL
0001003011 PROJECT REVIEW,UPDATE MODEL
0001003012 CHECK & IFC MODEL
0001003015 REVISE & REISSUE PFDS
Civil
0001004000 PREP & ISSUE BUILDING SPECS
0001004001 REBAR, CONCRETE BULK MTO
0001004002 PREPARE & ISSUE REBAR REQNS
0001004003 CLIENT APPROVE REBAR REQNS
0001004004 MTO & REQN EARLY UNDERGRND MATL
Structural
0001005002 PRELIM STRUCTURAL MTO
Control System
0001006004 MTO & REQN JUNC BOX, MAJOR CABLE
0001006007 INSTRUMENT CABLE TRAY STUDY
0001006070 PREP CONTROL ROOM/CONSOLE DWGS
0001006071 DRAFT&CHK CONTRL RM/CONSOLE DWGS
0001006072 APPROVE CONTROL RM/CONSOLE DWGS
0001006073 REV CONTROL RM/CONSOLE DWGS
Electrical
0001007000 UPDATE ELECTRICAL LOAD LIST
0001007001 MTO & REQN ELEC BULK MATLS
0001007002 MTO & REQN MINOR ELEC EQUIP
0001007003 MTO & REQN CABLE TRAY, HARDWARE
0001007004 MTO & REQN ELEC TRACING MATL

0001007007 ELEC CABLE TRAY STUDY
0001007008 ELEC HEAT TRACING STUDY
0001007009 LIGHTING STUDY
Insulation
0001008000 PREP & ISSUE INSULATION SPECS
0001008001 CLIENT APPROVE INSULATION SPECS
0001008002 REV & ISSUE INSULATION SPECS
Paint
0001009000 PREP & ISSUE PAINTING SPECS
0001009001 CLIENT APPROVE PAINT SPECS
0001009002 REVISE & ISSUE PAINTING SPECS
Detail Engineering – Variable by Contractor
Equipment Layout (GA’s)
0001011022 REV,IFD EQUIP LAYOUT DWGS -01
User-Specified Drawings – General
Rotating Equipment
0001012012 ROTATING EQP STRESS ANALYSIS -01
Piping
0001013001 BULK PIPING MTO (80%) -01
0001013002 PREP PIPING REQNS (80%) -01
0001013003 PREP REMOTE SHOP REQNS -01
0001013017 REVISE & ISSUE P&IDS -01
0001013021 PREPARE PIPING LAYOUT -01
0001013022 UPDATE PIPING LAYOUT -01
0001013023 PIPING STRESS ANALYSIS -01
0001013031 DRAFT & CHECK PIPE ARNGMNT -01
0001013032 CLIENT APPROVAL PIPE ARNGMNT -01
0001013033 UPDATE,IFC PIPING ARNGMNT -01
0001013041 DRAFT & CHECK ISOMETRICS -01
0001013042 CLIENT APPROVAL ISOS -01
0001013043 REVISE & ISSUE ISOS -01
0001013045 FINALIZE LINE INDEX -01
0001013051 PREPARE PIPE TEST SCHEDS -01
0001013052 CHECK,IFC PIPE TEST SCHEDS -01

0001013055 FINALIZE UTILITY P&IDS -01
0001013060 DESIGN SPECIAL HANGERS -01
0001013061 DRAFT & CHECK ENG HANGERS -01
0001013062 APPROVE HANGER DRAWINGS -01
0001013063 REV & ISSUE HANGER DWGS -01
0001013071 DRAFT & CHECK STM TRACING DWG-01
0001013072 APPROVE STEAM TRACING DWGS -01
0001013073 REV,IFC STEAM TRACING DWGS -01
User-Specified Drawings – Piping
0001013080 DRAFT & CHECK, USER DWG (XX) -01
0001013081 APPROVAL, USER DWG (XX) -01
0001013082 REVISE & IFC, USER DWG (XX) -01
Civil
0001014010 DESIGN EQUIPMENT FOUNDATIONS -01
0001014011 DRAFT & CHECK EQUIP FDN DWGS -01
0001014012 APPROVAL, EQUIP FDN DWGS -01
0001014013 REV & IFC,EQUIP FDN DWGS -01
0001014020 DESIGN STEELWORK FOUNDATIONS -01
0001014021 DRAFT & CHECK STEELWORK FDNS -01
0001014022 APPROVE STEELWORK FDN DWGS -01
0001014023 REV & IFC STEELWORK FDN DWGS -01
0001014030 DESIGN PAVING -01
0001014031 DRAFT & CHECK, PAVING DWGS -01
0001014032 APPROVAL, PAVING DWGS -01
0001014033 REV & IFC PAVING DWGS -01
0001014040 DESIGN MISC. CONCRETE -01
0001014041 DRAFT & CHECK, MISC CONC DWGS-01
0001014042 APPROVAL, MISC CONCRETE DWGS -01
0001014043 REV & IFC MISC CONCRETE DWGS -01
0001014050 PREP UNDERGROUND PIPE LAYOUT -01
0001014051 DRAFT & CHECK U-GRND PIPING -01
0001014052 CLIENT APPROVE U-GRND PIPING -01
0001014053 REV & ISSUE U-GRND PIPING -01
Buildings
0001014060 PREP BUILDING PLANS,ELEVNS -01
0001014061 DRAFT&CHECK BLDG PLANS,ELEVNS-01
0001014062 APPROVE BLDG PLANS,ELEVNS -01
0001014063 REV,IFC BLDG PLANS,ELEVNS -01
0001014071 DRAFT & CHECK ARCH DETAILS -01
0001014072 APPROVE ARCH DETAILS -01
0001014073 REV & ISSUE ARCH DETAILS -01

User-Specified Drawings – Civil/Building
Steelwork
0001015010 STRUCTURAL STEEL DESIGN -01
0001015011 DRAFT & CHECK STRUCT DWGS -01
0001015012 CLIENT APPROVE STRUCT DWGS -01
0001015013 REV & ISSUE STRUCT DWGS -01
0001015021 DRAFT & CHECK MISC STEEL -01
0001015022 APPROVE MISC STEEL DWGS -01
0001015023 REV & ISSUE MISC STEEL -01
0001015031 DRAFT & CHECK GRATING DWGS -01
0001015032 APPROVE GRATING DWGS -01
0001015033 REV & IFP GRATING DWGS -01
0001015034 MT0 & REQN GRATING -01
0001015035 APPROVE GRATING REQNS -01
User-Specified Drawings – Steelwork
Instrumentation
0001016000 PREPARE, IFC INSTR INDEX -01
0001016001 FINALIZE, IFC INSTR INDEX -01
0001016003 MTO & REQN TAGGED ITEMS -01
0001016010 DESIGN LOOP DIAGRAMS -01
0001016011 PREP LOOP DIAGRAMS, IFP -01
0001016012 APPROVE INSTR LOOP DGS -01
0001016013 REVIEW LOOP DIAGRAMS -01

0001016014 REVISE,IFC LOOP DIAGRMS -01
0001016021 DRAFT&CHECK INSTR LOCN PLANS -01
0001016022 CLIENT APPROVAL INSTR LOCN -01
0001016023 REV & IFC INSTR LOCN PLANS -01
0001016031 DRAFT & CHECK 2-WIRE DIAGRAMS-01
0001016032 APPROVE 2-WIRE DIAGRAMS -01
0001016033 REV & IFC 2-WIRE DIAGRAMS -01
0001016041 DRAFT&CHECK INSTR SCHEMATICS -01
0001016042 APPROVE INSTRUM SCHEMATICS -01
0001016043 REV & IFC INSTR SCHEMATICS -01
0001016051 DRAFT&CHK CONN DIAG/JBOX DWGS-01
0001016052 APPROVE CONN DIAG/JBOX DWGS -01
0001016053 REV & IFC CONN DIAG/JBOX DWGS-01
0001016061 PREP,CHECK CABLE SCHEDULES -01
0001016062 APPROVAL, CABLE SCHEDS -01
0001016063 REV & ISSUE CABLE SCHEDS -01
User-Specified Drawings – Instrumentation
Electrical
0001017010 PREPARE LIGHTING DWGS -01
0001017011 DRAFT & CHECK LIGHTING DWGS -01
0001017012 APPROVE LIGHTING DWGS -01
0001017013 REV & IFC LIGHTING DWGS -01
0001017015 PREPARE GROUNDING DWGS -01
0001017016 DRAFT & CHECK GROUNDING DWGS -01
0001017017 APPROVE GROUNDING DWGS -01
0001017018 REV & IFC GROUNDING DWGS -01
0001017020 PREPARE CABLE TRAY DRAWINGS -01
0001017021 DRAFT & CHECK CABLE TRAY DWGS-01
0001017022 APPROVE CABLE TRAY DRAWINGS -01
0001017023 REV & IFC CABLE TRAY DWGS -01
0001017025 REV,IFD ELECTRICAL ONE LINES -01
0001017026 CLIENT APPROVE ELEC ONE LINES-01
0001017027 FINALIZE ELECTRICAL ONE LINES-01
0001017030 PREPARE ELECTRICAL SCHEMATICS-01
0001017031 DRAFT ELECTRICAL SCHEMATICS -01
0001017032 APPROVE ELECTRICAL SCHEMATICS-01
0001017040 PREPARE POWER DISTRIBUTION -01
0001017041 DRAFT POWER DISTRIBUTION DWGS-01

0001017042 APPROVE POWER DISTRIB DWGS -01
0001017050 PREPARE CIRC SCHD & CONN DIAG-01
0001017051 DRAFT CIRC SCHD & CONN DIAG -01
0001017052 APPROVE CIRC SCHD & CONN DIAG-01
0001017060 PREPARE SUBSTATION LAYOUT -01
0001017061 DRAFT SUBSTATION LAYOUT DWGS -01
0001017062 APPROVE SUBSTATN LAYOUT DWGS -01
0001017065 ASSEMBLE,CHECK POWER PKG -01
0001017066 REV & ISSUE ELEC POWER PKG -01
0001017070 PREPARE ELEC TRACING DWGS -01
0001017071 DRAFT&CHECK ELEC TRACING DWGS-01
0001017072 APPROVE ELEC HEAT TRACING -01
0001017073 REV & IFC ELEC TRACING DWGS -01
User-Specified Drawings – Electrical
Procurement
Fixed Activities
0002001000 ASSEMBLE,IFC SITE DEVL DWGS
0002002000 ASSEMBLE,IFC EQUIPMENT DWGS
0002002009 EXPEDITING -EQUIP DELIVERY
0002003000 ASSEMBLE,IFC,PIPING DWGS
0002004000 ASSEMBLE,IFC,CIVIL DRAWINGS
Control System Procurement
0002004011 OBTAIN REBAR QUOTES
0002004012 TAB & RECOMMEND REBAR VENDOR
0002004013 CLIENT APPROVE REBAR VENDOR
0002004014 ISSUE BLANKET P.O., REBAR
0002004016 QUOTE & PURCHASE U-GRND MATL
0002004017 DELIVER EARLY U-GRND PIPING
0002005000 ASSEMBLE,IFC STRUCTURAL DWGS
0002006000 ASSEMBLE,IFC C0NTROL SYSTEM DWGS
0002006011 DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM QUOTES
0002006012 SELECT DIGITAL CONTRL SYSTEM
0002006013 APPROVE DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM
0002006014 PURCHASE DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM
0002006015 RECEIVE VENDOR DATA,DIG CTRL SYS

0002006016 REVIEW VENDOR DATA,DIG CTRL SYS
0002006017 FAB & DELIVER DIG CONTROL SYS
0002006021 CONTROL PANEL QUOTES
0002006022 TAB & RECOMMEND PANEL VENDOR
0002006023 CLIENT APPROVE PANEL VENDOR
0002006024 ISSUE P.O., CONTROL PANEL
0002006025 RECEIVE VENDOR DATA, PANEL
0002006026 REVIEW VENDOR DATA, PANEL
0002006027 FABRICATE CONTROL PANEL
0002006028 INSTALL PANEL INSTRMTS & SHIP
0002006031 PURCHASE JUNC BOX, MAJOR CABLE
0002006032 DELIVER JUNC BOX, MAJOR CABLE
Electrical
0002007000 ASSEMBLE,IFC ELECTRICAL DWGS
0002007011 OBTAIN QUOTES, ELEC BULKS
0002007012 TAB & SELECT VENDOR, ELEC BULKS
0002007013 CLIENT APPROVE ELEC MATL VENDOR
0002007014 PURCHASE ELECTRICAL BULK MATLS
0002007015 DELIVER ELECTRICAL BULK MATLS
0002007021 OBTAIN QUOTES,MINOR ELEC EQUIP
0002007022 TAB&SELECT VENDOR,MINOR ELEC EQ
0002007023 APPROVE VENDOR, MINOR ELEC EQ
0002007024 PURCHASE MINOR ELEC EQUIPMENT
0002007025 DELIVER MINOR ELEC EQUIPMENT
0002007031 ISSUE MAJOR ELEC EQUIP P.O.
0002007032 RECV VENDOR DATA,MAJOR ELEC EQ
0002007033 REVIEW,RETURN MAJOR ELEC EQ DATA
0002007034 FAB,DELIVER MAJOR ELEC EQUIP
0002007041 OBTAIN QUOTES, CABLE TRAY
0002007042 TAB & SELECT VENDR,CABLE TRAY
0002007043 APPROVE VENDOR, CABLE TRAY
0002007044 PURCHASE ELEC CABLE TRAY
0002007045 DELIVER ELEC CABLE TRAY
0002007071 OBTAIN QUOTES, ELEC TRACING
0002007072 TAB & SELECT VENDOR,ELEC TRACING
0002007073 APPROVE VENDOR,ELEC TRACING
0002007074 PURCHASE ELEC TRACING MATERIAL
0002007075 DELIVER ELEC TRACING MATL
Insulation
0002008000 ASSEMBLE,IFC,INSULATION SPECS
Paint
0002009000 ASSEMBLE,IFC,PAINTING SPECS
Procurement – By Contractor
0002010001 PREPARE MECHANICAL BID PACKAGE
0002010002 APPROVE MECHANICAL BID PACKAGE
0002010003 BID CYCLE, MECHANICAL CONTR
0002010004 APPROVE MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR
0002010005 MOBILIZE, MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR
Procurement – By Equipment Class Contract

Vessels
0002010011 ISSUE P.O., PRESS VESSELS-01
0002010012 REC VENDOR DATA,PRESS VESSELS-01
0002010013 REVIEW DESIGN, PRESS VESSELS-01
0002010014 APPROVE DESIGN, PRESS VESSELS-01
0002010015 FAB & SHIP PRESS VESSELS-01
Towers
0002010021 ISSUE P.O., TOWERS -01
0002010022 REC VENDOR DATA,TOWERS -01
0002010023 REVIEW DESIGN, TOWERS -01
0002010024 APPROVE DESIGN, TOWERS -01
0002010025 FAB & SHIP TOWERS -01
Storage Tanks
0002010031 ISSUE P.O., STORAGE TANKS-01
0002010032 VENDOR DATA STORAGE TANKS-01
0002010033 REVIEW DESIGN, STORAGE TANKS-01
0002010034 APPROVE DESIGN, STORAGE TANKS-01
0002010035 FAB & SHIP STORAGE TANKS-01
Pumps
0002010041 ISSUE P.O., PUMPS -01
0002010042 REC VENDOR DATA,PUMPS -01
0002010043 REVIEW DESIGN, PUMPS -01
0002010044 APPROVE DESIGN, PUMPS -01
0002010045 FAB & SHIP PUMPS -01
Compressors
0002010051 ISSUE P.O., COMPRESSORS -01
0002010052 REC VENDOR DATA,COMPRESSORS -01
0002010053 REVIEW DESIGN, COMPRESSORS -01
0002010054 APPROVE DESIGN, COMPRESSORS -01
0002010055 FAB & SHIP COMPRESSORS -01
Turbines
0002010061 ISSUE P.O., TURBINES -01
0002010062 REC VENDOR DATA,TURBINES -01
0002010063 REVIEW DESIGN, TURBINES -01
0002010064 APPROVE DESIGN, TURBINES -01
0002010065 FAB & SHIP TURBINES -01
Heat Exchangers
0002010071 ISSUE P.O., HEAT EXCHNGRS-01
0002010072 REC VENDOR DATA,HEAT EXCHNGRS-01
0002010073 REVIEW DESIGN, HEAT EXCHNGRS-01
0002010074 APPROVE DESIGN, HEAT EXCHNGRS-01
0002010075 FAB & SHIP HEAT EXCHNGRS-01
Boilers
0002010081 ISSUE P.O., BOILERS -01
0002010082 REC VENDOR DATA,BOILERS -01
0002010083 REVIEW DESIGN, BOILERS -01

0002010084 APPROVE DESIGN, BOILERS -01
0002010085 FAB & SHIP BOILERS -01
Furnaces
0002010091 ISSUE P.O., FURNACES -01
0002010092 REC VENDOR DATA,FURNACES -01
0002010093 REVIEW DESIGN, FURNACES -01
0002010094 APPROVE DESIGN, FURNACES -01
0002010095 FAB & SHIP FURNACES -01
Air Coolers
0002011001 ISSUE P.O., AIR COOLERS -01
0002011002 REC VENDOR DATA,AIR COOLERS -01
0002011003 REVIEW DESIGN, AIR COOLERS -01
0002011004 APPROVE DESIGN, AIR COOLERS -01
0002011005 FAB & SHIP AIR COOLERS -01
Pkg Refrigeration
0002011011 ISSUE P.O., PKG REFRIG -01
0002011012 REC VENDOR DATA,PKG REFRIG -01
0002011013 REVIEW DESIGN, PKG REFRIG -01
0002011014 APPROVE DESIGN, PKG REFRIG -01
0002011015 FAB & SHIP PKG REFRIG -01
Generators
0002011021 ISSUE P.O., ELEC GENERATR-01
0002011022 REC VENDOR DATA,ELEC GENERATR-01
0002011023 REVIEW DESIGN, ELEC GENERATR-01
0002011024 APPROVE DESIGN, ELEC GENERATR-01
0002011025 FAB & SHIP ELEC GENERATR-01
Air Dryers
0002011031 ISSUE P.O., AIR DRYERS -01
0002011032 REC VENDOR DATA,AIR DRYERS -01
0002011033 REVIEW DESIGN, AIR DRYERS -01
0002011034 APPROVE DESIGN, AIR DRYERS -01
0002011035 FAB & SHIP AIR DRYERS -01
Conveyors
0002011041 ISSUE P.O., CONVEYORS -01
0002011042 REC VENDOR DATA,CONVEYORS -01
0002011043 REVIEW DESIGN, CONVEYORS -01
0002011044 APPROVE DESIGN, CONVEYORS -01
0002011045 FAB & SHIP CONVEYORS -01
Mills
0002011051 ISSUE P.O., MILLS -01
0002011052 REC VENDOR DATA,MILLS -01
0002011053 REVIEW DESIGN, MILLS -01
0002011054 APPROVE DESIGN, MILLS -01
0002011055 FAB & SHIP MILLS -01
Fans
0002011061 ISSUE P.O., FANS -01
0002011062 REC VENDOR DATA,FANS -01

0002011063 REVIEW DESIGN, FANS -01
0002011064 APPROVE DESIGN, FANS -01
0002011065 FAB & SHIP FANS -01
Elevators
0002011071 ISSUE P.O., ELEVATORS -01
0002011072 REC VENDOR DATA,ELEVATORS -01
0002011073 REVIEW DESIGN, ELEVATORS -01
0002011074 APPROVE DESIGN, ELEVATORS -01
0002011075 FAB & SHIP ELEVATORS -01
Motors
0002011081 ISSUE P.O., MOTORS -01
0002011082 REC VENDOR DATA,MOTORS -01
0002011083 REVIEW DESIGN, MOTORS -01
0002011084 APPROVE DESIGN, MOTORS -01
0002011085 FAB & SHIP MOTORS -01
Dust Collectors
0002011091 ISSUE P.O., DUST COLLECTR-01
0002011092 REC VENDOR DATA,DUST COLLECTR-01
0002011093 REVIEW DESIGN, DUST COLLECTR-01
0002011094 APPROVE DESIGN, DUST COLLECTR-01
0002011095 FAB & SHIP DUST COLLECTR-01
Filters
0002012001 ISSUE P.O., FILTERS -01
0002012002 REC VENDOR DATA,FILTERS -01
0002012003 REVIEW DESIGN, FILTERS -01
0002012004 APPROVE DESIGN, FILTERS -01
0002012005 FAB & SHIP FILTERS -01
Centrifuges
0002012011 ISSUE P.O., CENTRIFUGES -01
0002012012 REC VENDOR DATA,CENTRIFUGES -01
0002012013 REVIEW DESIGN, CENTRIFUGES -01
0002012014 APPROVE DESIGN, CENTRIFUGES -01
0002012015 FAB & SHIP CENTRIFUGES -01
Mixers
0002012021 ISSUE P.O., MIXERS -01
0002012022 REC VENDOR DATA,MIXERS -01
0002012023 REVIEW DESIGN, MIXERS -01
0002012024 APPROVE DESIGN, MIXERS -01
0002012025 FAB & SHIP MIXERS -01
Cooling Towers
0002012031 ISSUE P.O., COOLING TOWER-01
0002012032 REC VENDOR DATA,COOLING TOWER-01
0002012033 REVIEW DESIGN, COOLING TOWER-01
0002012034 APPROVE DESIGN, COOLING TOWER-01
0002012035 FAB & SHIP COOLING TOWER-01
Misc. Equipment

0002012041 ISSUE P.O., MISC EQUIP -01
0002012042 REC VENDOR DATA,MISC EQUIP -01
0002012043 REVIEW DESIGN, MISC EQUIP -01
0002012044 APPROVE DESIGN, MISC EQUIP -01
0002012045 FAB & SHIP MISC EQUIP -01
Package Items
0002012051 ISSUE P.O., PACKAGE ITEMS-01
0002012052 REC VENDOR DATA,PACKAGE ITEMS-01
0002012053 REVIEW DESIGN, PACKAGE ITEMS-01
0002012054 APPROVE DESIGN, PACKAGE ITEMS-01
0002012055 FAB & SHIP PACKAGE ITEMS-01
Packing and Linings
0002012061 ISSUE P.O., PACK&LININGS -01
0002012062 REC VENDOR DATA,PACK&LININGS -01
0002012063 REVIEW DESIGN, PACK&LININGS -01
0002012064 APPROVE DESIGN, PACK&LININGS -01
0002012065 FAB & SHIP PACK&LININGS -01
Activities Variable by Contractor
Piping – Material Vendor
0002013011 PIPING (80%) QUOTES -01
0002013012 TAB & RECOMMEND VENDOR -01
0002013013 APPROVE PIPING VENDOR -01
0002013014 ISSUE P.O., PIPING(80%) -01
0002013015 DELIVER PIPING (80%) -01
0002013016 ISSUE P.O., FINAL PIPING -01
0002013017 DELIVER FINAL PIPING -01
Piping – Remote Shop
0002013021 PIPE FAB SHOP QUOTES -01
0002013022 TAB & RECOMMEND PIPE SHOP -01
0002013023 CLIENT APPROVAL, PIPE SHOP -01
0002013024 ISSUE PO, PIPE FABRICATION -01
0002013025 FAB & SHIP SPOOLS (80%) -01
0002013026 FAB & SHIP FINAL SPOOLS -01
Civil Contract
0002014001 PREP CIVIL&STRUC BID PACKAGE
0002014002 APPROVE CIVIL&STRUC BID PACKAGE
0002014003 BID CYCLE, CIVIL & STRUCTURAL
0002014004 APPROVE CIVIL&STRUC CONTRACTOR
0002014005 MOBILIZE, CIVIL CONTRACTOR
Civil
0002014015 FAB & DELIVER,REBAR,INBEDS -01
0002014021 PREPARE BID PKG,BUILDINGS -01
0002014022 APPROVE BID PKG, BUILDINGS -01
0002014023 OBTAIN BIDS, BUILDINGS -01
0002014024 SELECT CONTRACTOR,BUILDINGS -01
0002014025 APPROVE CONTRACTOR,BUILDINGS -01
0002014026 SIGN CONTRACT,BUILDNGS -01
0002014027 MOBILIZE,BUILDING CONTRACTOR -01

Steel
0002015006 QUOTE,SELECT STEEL FABRICATOR-01
0002015007 RECEIVE SHOP DWGS, STRUCTURAL-01
0002015008 REVIEW SHOP DWGS ,STRUCTURAL -01
0002015009 FAB & SHIP STRUCTURAL STEEL -01
0002015010 MISC STEEL SHOP DRAWINGS -01
0002015011 REVIEW SHOP DWGS, MISC STEEL -01
0002015012 FAB & SHIP MISC STEEL -01
0002015020 QUOTE & PURCHASE GRATING -01
0002015021 DETAIL,FAB & DELIVER GRATING -01
Instrumentation
0002016041 QUOTE INSTR TAGGED ITEMS -01
0002016042 SELECT VENDORS,TAGGED ITEMS -01
0002016043 APPROVE VENDORS,TAGGED ITEMS -01
0002016044 PURCHASE INSTR TAGGED ITEMS -01
0002016045 DELIVER INSTR TAGGED ITEMS -01
Insulation Contract
0002018001 PREPARE BID PACKAGE, INSULATION
0002018002 APPROVE BID PACKAGE, INSULATION
0002018003 BIDS,SUPPLY & INSTALL INSULATION
0002018004 APPROVE INSULATION CONTRACTOR
0002018005 MOBILIZE, INSULATION CONTRACTOR
Painting Contract
0002019001 PREPARE BID PACKAGE, PAINT
0002019002 APPROVE BID PACKAGE, PAINT
0002019003 OBTAIN BIDS, PAINTING
0002019004 APPROVE PAINTING CONTRACTOR
0002019005 MOBILIZE, PAINTING CONTRACT

Appendix B: Site
Development and
Construction Activity
Numbers
Numbering Conventions
The table below illustrates IPS Site Development and Construction activity
ID’s as they are described below. The first seven characters of the ten-
character activity ID indicate the functional source of the activity (for
example, a pipe-rack or a particular item of equipment), and the last three
characters indicate the type of work, with a standard description.
The first seven characters contain variables, as described below:
 The first and second characters indicate the schedule Area number, 01
through 90; and other project-level items, such as substations, control
panel and power transmission lines, which always use 91.
 The third through fifth characters contain the user-specified tag number
(columns 5 - 7) from the estimating system input for equipment items and
plant bulks. For substations, the fourth and fifth characters contain the
specified, the System default reference number of 00.
 The sixth and seventh characters contain an IPS Equipment Code
corresponding to the Equipment Symbol (see Appendix D).
All other activities have a fixed identifier in positions six and seven of the
activity number, as listed in the table on the following page.
 The eighth through tenth characters always refer to the type of work
performed in the activity. These last three characters generate a standard
activity description, as listed in the Activity ID’s list.
Appendix B: Site Development and Construction Activity Numbers 699

Note: For Control Centers or Operations Centers, the fifth and sixth
characters contain the Center reference number (01-99) specified by the
user.
Site Development and Construction – Activity Numbering Conventions
Category Range
Construction – Areas
Equipment Items AA-XXX-YY-2-00-NN through AA-XXX-YY-
2-35
Plant Bulks, Buildings, Area SD items AA-XXX-91-1-00-NN through AA-XXX-91-
9-35
Area Bulks AA-XXX-91-3-00-NN through AA-XXX-91-
9-35
Construction – project-level
Unit Substation 91-OBB-00-4-00-NN through 91-OBB-00-
7-27
Main Substation 91-1BB-00-4-00-NN through 91-1BB-00-
7-27
Control Center 91-20C-C0-6-00-NN through 91-20C-C0-
6-35
Operations Center 91-21C-C0-6-00-NN through 91-21C-C0-
6-35
Transmission Line 91-300-00-7-29-NN through 91-300-00-
7-30
Elec. Hookup and Testing 91-300-00-7-31-NN through 91-300-00-
7-33
Demobilize Project 91-450-00-0-80-NN only
AA – Schedule area number

BB – Substation reference number
CC – Control or operation center reference number
NN – Contractor number
XXX – Component reference number
YY – Equipment type
List of Activity Numbers

The following Site Development and Construction Activity Numbers are listed
by the last three characters only of the 10-character Activity Number. The
first seven characters will be listed according to numbering conventions
discussed above.
700 Appendix B: Site Development and Construction Activity Numbers

Note: A blank description or * indicates no logic provided by Aspen Capital
Cost Estimator.
Site Development 207 SET EXCHANGER IN STRUCTURE
208 PUMP SETTING
100 EARLY SITE DEVELOPMENT 209 DRIVER SETTING
COMPLETE 210
* 101 DELIVER SITE MATERIAL 211 VESSEL SETTING
102 SUBCONTRACT SITE 212 TOWER SETTING
DEVELOPMENT 213 SETTING COOLING TOWER
103 214 SETTING PACKAGE BOILER
104 215 FIELD ERECT EQUIPMENT
105 SOIL BORINGS 216 SETTING STORAGE TANK
106 DEMOLITION 217 FIELD ERECT STORAGE TANK
107 CLEAR SITE 218 TURBINE SETTING
108 DEWATERING 219 FURNACE SETTING
109 PILING 220 REACTOR SETTING
110 221 COMPRESSOR SETTING
111 222 HEAT EXCHANGER SETTING
112 WATER WELLS 223 AIR COOLER SETTING
113 RETAINING WALLS 224 CONVEYOR SETTING
114 SITE FILL AND COMPACTION 225 FAN/BLOWER SETTING
115 HAULING EARTH 226 STACK/FLARE SETTING
116 BULK EXCAVATION 227 MILL/CRUSHER SETTING
117 EMBANKMENTS AND DIKES 228 CRANE/HOIST SETTING
118 SOIL STABILIZATION 229 BLENDER/MIXER SETTNG
119 ROCK EXCAVATION 230 EQUIPMENT SETTING
120 231 INSTALL LININGS
121 DRAINAGE SYSTEMS 232 INSTALL PACKINGS
122 BASE PREPARATION 233
123 SUBPAVING 234 EQUIPMENT USER SUPPLIED
124 ASPHALT PAVING ITEM
125 CONCRETE PAVING 235 MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT
126 CURB, GUTTER, SIDEWALK SETTING
127 TRENCH AND STRUCTURAL
EXCAVATION Piping
128 HAND EXCAVATION 300 PIPING WORK
129 RAILROADS * 301 DELIVER PIPING MATERIAL
130 MASONRY AND CONCRETE WALLS 302 SUBCONTRACT PIPING
131 FENCING * 303 DELIVER PREFABRICATION
132 LANDSCAPING PIPE
133 304
134 SITE DEVL USER SUPPLIED 305
ITEM 306 FIELD SHOP PIPING
135 MISCELLANEOUS SITE FABRICATION
DEVELOPMENT 307 FABRICATE PIPE SUPPORTS
Equipment Setting 308 ERECT PIPE SUPPORTS
309 ERECT PIPING
200 EQUIPMENT SETTING 310
* 201 DELIVER EQUIPMENT 311 FIELD WELD PIPE, FITTINGS
202 SUBCONTRACT EQUIPMNT 312 ERECT VALVES
203 FIELD FABRICATE VESSEL 313 BOLT UP CONNECTIONS
204 FIELD FABRICATE TOWER 314 MAKE THREADED CONNECTION
205 SET VESSEL IN STRUCTURE 315
206 SET TOWER IN STRUCTURE 316

317 UTILITY PIPING 431 CONCRETE STRUCTURES
318 432
319 433 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE
320 BURIED PIPE 434 CIVIL USER SUPPLIED ITEM
321 COAT AND WRAP PIPE 435 MISCELLANEOUS CIVIL WORK
322 PROCESS DUCTWORK Steel
323 STEAM TRACING
324 500 STRUCTURAL STEELWORK
325 * 501 DELIVER STRUCTURAL STEEL
326 502 SUBCONTRACT STEELWORK
327 503
328 504 UNLOAD AND HANDLE STEEL
329 505
330 506 ERECT STEEL STRUCTURE
331 507 ERECT PIPERACK STEEL
332 PIPING SYSTEM TESTNG 508 EQUIPMENT SUPPORT STEEL
333 509
* 334 PIPING USER SUPPLIED ITEM 510 GRATING, STAIRS, AND SO ON
335 MISCELLANEOUS PIPING 511
512
Civil 513
400 CIVIL WORK 514
* 401 DELIVER CIVIL MATERIAL 515
402 SUBCONTRACT CIVIL 516
403 517
404 EXCAVATE FOUNDATION 518
405 519
406 EXCAVATE TRENCH 520
407 521
408 BACKFILL AND COMPACT 522
409 SHORING EXCAVATIONS 523
410 GRADE AND COMPACT BASE 524
411 FIELD FABRICATE FORMWORK 525
412 INSTALL FORMWORK 526
413 STRIP AND CLEAN FORMWORK 527
414 528
415 FIELD FABRICATE REBAR 529
416 INSTALL REBAR 530
417 531
418 FIELD MIX CONCRETE 532
419 POUR AND FINISH CONCRETE 533
420 CONCRETE CURING TIME 534 STEEL USER SUPPLIED ITEM
421 535 MISCELLANEOUS STEELWORK
422 SET ANCHOR BOLTS Instrumentation
423 GROUT BASE PLATE
424 600 INSTRUMENTATION
425 BUILDING STRUCTURAL * 601 DELIVER INSTRUMENTS
426 BUILDING PLUMBING 602 SUBCONTRACT INSTRUMENTS
427 BUILDING ELECTRICAL 603
428 604 INSTALL LOCAL INSTRUMENTS
429 SAND MAT FOUNDATION 605 INSTALL INSTRUMENT PIPING
* 430 INSTALL PRECAST UNIT 606 INSTALL INSTRUMENT WIRING

607 INSTALL JUNCTION BOXES 718 INSTALL SWITCHGEAR
608 INSTALL CONTROL PANEL 719 INSTALL SUBSTATION
609 CONNECT PANEL INSTRUMENTS DISCONNECT
610 720 INSTALL TRANSFORMER
* 611 COMPUTER INSTALLATION 721 INSTALL MOTOR CONTROL
* 612 COMPUTER TEST RUNS CENTER
613 722
614 INSTRUMENT TESTING 723 BUILDING LIGHTING
615 INSTALL TUBE BUNDLES 724
616 PULL MULTICORE RUNS * 725 INSTALL CATHODIC
617 PROTECTION
618 INSTALL TERMINATION 726
CABINETS 727 GROUNDING SYSTEM
619 INSTALL RELAY/PC CABINETS 728
620 729 TRANSMISSION TOWERS
621 INSTALL DATA HIGHWAY 730 TRANSMISSION LINES
622 731 ELECTRICAL POWER HOOK-UP
623 INSTALL CONSOLE/VDU 732 ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT CHECK
624 733 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM TEST
625 734 ELECTRICAL USER SUPPLIED
626 ITEM
627 735 MISCELLANEOUS ELECTRICAL
628 Insulation
629
630 800 INSULATION WORK
631 * 801 DELIVER INSULATION
632 INSTRUMENT CONTINUITY MATERIAL
CHECK 802 SUBCONTRACT INSULATION
633 CONTROL SYSTEM TEST 803
634 INSTRUMENT USER SUPPLIED 804 PIPE INSULATION
ITEM 805 EQUIPMENT INSULATION
635 MISCELLANEOUS 806
INSTRUMENTION 807
808
Electrical 809
700 ELECTRICAL WORK 810 FIREPROOFING
* 701 DELIVER ELECTRICAL 811
MATERIAL 812
702 SUBCONTRACT ELECTRICAL 813
703 814
704 INSTALL BURIED CABLE 815
705 INSTALL CABLE TRAYS 816
706 CABLE IN TRAYS 817
707 INSTALL CONDUIT/FITTINGS 818
708 PULL WIRE IN CONDUIT 819
709 * 820 ACID RESISTANT TILE
710 ELECTRICAL TRACING 821
711 RECEPTACLES AND SWITCHES 822
712 INSTALL PANELBOARDS 823
713 INSTALL LIGHT FITTINGS 824
714 PUSH BUTTON, PILOT LIGHT 825
715 BUS DUCT 826
716 827
717 SUBSTATION STEEL STRUCTURE 828

829
830 
831
832
833
834 INSULATION USER SUPPLIED
ITEM
835 MISCELLANEOUS INSULATION
Paint
900 PAINTING WORK
* 901 DELIVER PAINT MATERIAL
902 SUBCONTRACT PAINTING
903
904 SURFACE PREP - STEELWORK
905 PAINT STEELWORK
906
907 SURFACE PREP - EQUIPMENT
908 PAINT EQUIPMENT
909
910 SURFACE PREP - PIPING
911 PAINT PIPING
912
913
914
915
916
917
918
919
920
921
922
923
924
925
926
927
928
929
930
931
932
933
* 934 PAINT USER SUPPLIED ITEM
935 MISCELLANEOUS PAINTING

Appendix C: Equipment Class
Definitions
Equipment Class Number

Vessels 01
Towers 02
Storage Tanks 03
Pumps 04
Compressors 05
Turbines 06
Heat Exchangers 07
Boilers 08
Furnaces 09
Air Coolers 10
Package Refrigeration 11
Generators 12
Air Dryers 13
Conveyors 14
Mills 15
Fans 16
Elevators 17
Motors 18
Dust Collectors 19
Filters 20
Centrifuges 21
Mixers 22
Cooling Towers 23
Miscellaneous Equipment 24
Package Items 25
IPS Project Schedule Settings 705

Packings and Linings 26
706 Appendix C: Equipment Class Definitions

Appendix D: Equipment
Codes
The Equipment Code identifies the component. In addition, equipment codes

can include non-equipment items. The Equipment Codes are as follows.
Equipment
Item Equipment
Symbol Description Code
AC Air Compressor 01
AD Air Dryer 03
AG Agitator 72
AT Agitated Tanks 04
BL Blender 06
C Condenser 07
CE Crane 09
CO Conveyor 10
CP Centrifugal Pump 11
CR Crusher 12
CRY Crystallizer 13
CT Centrifuge 14
D Dryer 16
DC Dust Collector 17
DD Drum Dryer 18
DDT Double Diameter Tower 15
E Evaporator 19
EG Electric Generator 20
EJ Ejector 21
EL Elevator 22
F Filter 24
FE Feeder 26
FL Flaker 27
FLR Flare 28
FN Fan 29

FU Furnace 70
GC Gas Compressor 32
GP Gear Pump 34
HE Heat Exchanger 36
HO Hoist 37
HT Horizontal Tank 38
HU Heating Unit 39
K Kneader 42
LIN Lining 73
M Mill 43
MOT Motor/Motor Reducer 68
MX Mixer 44
P Pump 45
PAK Packing 74
R Reactor 48
RB Reboiler 69
RD Rotary Drum 49
RU Refrigeration Unit 50
S Scale 52
SE Separation Equipment 54
ST Stock Treatment 53
STK Stack 55
T Thickener 57
TDS Tray Drying System 58
TUR Turbine 71
TW Single Diameter Tower 60
VP Vacuum Pump 62
VS Screen 63
VT Vertical Tank 64
WFE Wiped Film Evaporator 65
WTS Water Treatment 66
System
Other 76
Non-Equipment Codes
Description Code
Open Steel Structure and Mill Building 00
Pipe Rack 01
Pad 02
Shell 03
708 Appendix D: Equipment Codes

None 04
Buildings 11-20
Supplemental Bulks 31-80
Area Bulks
91

710 Appendix D: Equipment Codes
Appendix E: Tutorial
In this appendix, a brief tutorial for modifying and preparing the IPS project
schedule settings is discussed. Under the tree node IPS Project Schedule
Settings | Schedule Appearance Adjustments, the Title of the IPS project
is the first input. The default P3E project title (that is,, IPS project title) is the
same as the scenario name of the Aspen Capital Cost Estimator project.
Typing the IPS project name results in a P3E project with the same name,
and the corresponding P3E Enterprise Project Name has also the same name.
The EPS project name and EPS Id can be modified using the input provided
under Primavera Information | Project Manager Information.
Modification of activity description is performed using the Description
Modification node of the input tree.
As an example, consider a detailed engineering activity, (variable by

contractor) under civil account with an activity id 0001014013 with an internal
description REV & IFC,EQUIP FDN DWGS. You might want to change to a
less detailed description “PREPARE CIVIL DRAWINGS” as shown above. All
the input is entered from the activity number, and the new activity description
is entered. Several similar examples are provided above. Description
modification for construction is very similar.
Adjustments to calculated durations for the generated activities can be
performed using the schedule adjustment by duration node. Duration for
the engineering and procurement activities can be adjusted as shown below.

All three phases can be zeroed out; if the detailed engineering durations are
zeroed out, basic engineering activities are automatically set to zero; and if
procurement activities are set to zero, basic and detailed engineering
activities are zeroed out. In a similar manner, duration of construction
activities may be modified as shown below. The durations of construction
activities are adjusted by account. Duration of procurement activities are
modified by providing the fabrication and ship time of equipment as shown in
the next page.
712 Appendix E: Tutorial

The IPS-generated activities may be replaced or combined to generate
activities as per the user requirements using the activity modifications node.
As an example, the figure below shows engineering activity modification
screen, and item 1 shows the use of * (in the contract number, activity
sequence number and account group number) for the source activity, to
combine all basic engineering activities into one single activity with an id of
000003013. Item 2 shows that all detailed civil engineering activities
(0001014010 through 0001014097) have been combined into one single civil

design activity 0001**4013. Item 3 shows how steel activities are combined
into one.
If activities are modified and combined, it becomes necessary to generate

logic for created activities. In the figure given below, logic modification for
several detailed engineering activities are listed, owing to the fact that all
basic engineering activities have been combined to one. As an instance,
activity 1**2011 (design equipment and piping layout) is assigned a
predecessor 1**6007 (Instrument cable tray study) in item 2 of the figure
shown below. Existing predecessors for 1**6007 are removed in item 1.

The remaining schedule adjustments by crew size and crafts have been
described in the main section; note that craft adjustment is simply used to
replace the system craft code and description by users, and does not serve to
modify the schedule duration.

Index
Adding
2 areas 302, 303
barchart items 161
2/3 rule 199, 364 COA sets 124
contractor sets 151
A contractors 147
custom pipe specs 96
About command drawing types 114
Help menu 48 EML items 446, 447
Absolute Basis Equipment rental items 137–138
streams 297 lines to pipe volumetric model 320
Access Control Systems 99 loop to instrument volumetric
Account allocation model 323
Code of Accounts 126 power distribution items 140
ACCUM, escalation 108 process control items 143
Activate Custom Model option project components 306–308
Preferences 56 project directories 56–61
Activity modification rental days 137
IPS project schedule settings 179, simulation units 187
664 streams 223, 230–232, 342–345
Add a Construction Workforce 121 UCL items 452, 454
Add button Adjusting schedule and barcharts
Engineering Discipline Info form project execution schedule
112 settings 158–159
Pipe Details form 321 Air coolers
Add Contractor command 148 design criteria specifications 199
Add Project Component command Air supply
308 instrumentation loop 324
Add Stream button Allow Docking command 41
toolbar 297 Allow Pipeline Areas
Add Stream command General Project Data dialog box
View menu, PFD 293 23–24
View menu, PFD 297 Alternate project directories 59
Add Trend Data to Database Analyzer
command importing from 24–26
Trend menu, Aspen Icarus Analyzer Scale-Up Module (ASM)
Reporter 573, 595 465–469
adding Anchor bolts
templates 28 civil installation bulk 321

Apply 2/3 Rule for Design Pressure Aspen Plus
Design Criteria 199 link to Aspen Process Economic
Apply button Analyzer 257, 261
Develop Stream specifications map specs 190
form 225, 343 models used in sizing towers 369
Installation Bulks form 314 AspenTech
Interactive Sizing form 350 Aspen Plus simulator program
Mat'l Man-hour Adjustments form 190
318 AspenTech support 16
Preferences dialog box 53 AspenTech Support Center 16
Area Auto Filter 593
icons 30 Automatic Item Evaluation
List view display of items 33 checked command
mapping 273 Tools menu 46
simulator 265, 273, 277, 290 Automatic task backup 55
Area Information dialog box 302
Area Insulation 305 B
Area Networking 98
Area title 305, 306 Backup/Recovery options
Areas Preferences 55
adding 302, 303 Barcharts
deleting 331 custom-designed bars 161–162
dimensions 305, 306 project component activity bars
electrical specifications 305, 306 160
equipment specifications 305, 306 Schedule Adjustments
importing 326 specifications form 158–159
index manhours 305 Base stream 226
index material costs 305 Base Stream
insulation specifications 305, 306 Develop Streams dialog box 297
linking to Consets 152 BaseCase, default scenario name 21
linking to unit substations 141 Basic engineering 110
paint specifications 305, 306 Basis
piping specifications 305, 306 Map dialog box 274
pop-up menu 308 streams 297
re-numbering 331 Basis for Capital Costs
steel specifications 305, 306 Code of Accounts 123–128
title 305, 306 construction workforce 115–120
type definition 303, 305, 306 contingency and miscellaneous
ASM See Analyzer Scale-Up Module project costs 107
(ASM) contracts 146
Aspen Icarus Project Scheduler (IPS) design basis 83
using in Kbase environment 163 equipment rental 137–138
Aspen Icarus Reporter escalation 107–109
Data trending 594 indexing 130
Excel reports 585–93 input units of measure 77
HTML reports 584–85 introduction 76
importing data 597 libraries 233
Management reports 585–89 output (reports) units of measure
menu bar 573 customization 82
report mode 574 systems 139–146
standard reports 574–84 Bend for elbow field 91
718 Index
BFD See Block Flow Diagram (BFD) Trend menu, Aspen Icarus
Block Flow Diagram (BFD) Reporter 594
displaying 267 Close command
Drag & Find feature 268 File menu 44
introduction 267 Closed Circuit TV Systems 98
right-click commands 269 COA See Code of Accounts (COA)
View menu 271 Code of Accounts (COA)
Zoom commands 269–270 adding a COA set 124
Bottom sump height allocating costs to 126
towers, design criteria 200 allocating UCL item costs to 453
Branch for tee field 91 exceptions to account allocations
Buildings 301 127
introduction 123
C Codes of Accounts (COA)
instrumentation field hook-up 247
Cached project information 50 Cold Inlet Stream field 350
Cancel button Cold Insulation Schedule 305
Develop Stream specifications Cold Outlet Stream field 350
form 225 Color coding
Capacity Component Specifications form
changing 465 312
Capacity over-design factor See Communication and Alarm Systems
Pump overdesign factor 325
Capital Cost errors 560 Minimum Area for 99
Capital Costs Component Map Information 276,
depreciation 213–214 278
escalation 214 Component Specifications form
investment parameters 214 accessing 311
reports 54 color coding 312
View command 271, 292 Options button 312, 313
Capital Costs View P&ID button 319, 322
View menu 46 Component Status 277
CARBONST.DAT 92 Components See Project components
Cascade command Components view
Window menu 33, 47 Palette 37, 38
Cash Flow Summary Compressors
reports, Icarus Editor 566 design criteria specifications 196
Cashflow spreadsheet 609–14 sizing 340
CASHFLOW.ICS Configuration options
Cashflow spreadsheet 609–14 mapping 275, 278
CCTV 98 Connectivity, stream
changing the length of pipe per explanation 229
fitting going to Remote Shop. 84 Consets
ChemCAD adding 151
map specs 191 deleting 155
simulator report preparation 258– editing 153–155
259 linking 152
Civil unlinking 153
installation bulk 321 Construction
material costs and man-hours 314 equipment rental 137–138
specs, design basis 96 management 107, 110, 158
Clear All Saved Trends command manpower, escalation 107

schedule 158, 567 deleting 464
workforce 115–120, 148 duplicating 463
Construction workforce number Equipment Model Library (EML)
117 444–449
Contingencies importing 462
Project Summary spreadsheet introduction 443
(PROJSUM.ICS) 607 Unit Cost Library (UCL) 451–460
Contingency and miscellaneous Costs
project costs 107 total direct cost, Equipment
Contract scope Summary (EQUIP.ICS) 601
definitions 150–155 total project cost, Cashflow
Contractor spreadsheet (CASHFLOW.ICS)
adding 147 609
assigning engineering drawings Country Base 23
115 CPM barchart
definition, editing 149 project schedule 158
deleting 150 CPM Schedules 13
linking to workforces 148 Craft code 121
reports 567 Craft names
sets 150–155 modifying 123
unlinking from workforce 148 Craft rates
Contracts construction workforce
Contractors tree diagram 146–150 specifications 119–121
introduction 146 Craft Wage rate 121
Scope tree diagram 150–155 Create New Project dialog box 20,
control cable lengths 80 25, 61
control cable wire type 82 Create New Trend in Excel command
Control center Trend menu, Aspen Icarus
adding 143–145 Reporter 573, 595
instrument volumetric models 323 Create Stream dialog box 230, 231,
introduction, power distribution 343, 344
143 Create tab view
linking to area 145 Develop Streams dialog box 230
linking to Consets 152 Create User Database command
linking to power distribution items File menu, Aspen Icarus Reporter
141 573, 598
Control Center button bar 516 Create User Database dialog box
Control centers Aspen Icarus Reporter 599
instrumentation loop 324 creating
Control signal line sizing equations 413
instrumentation loop 324 Creating
Control valve project scenario 20–24
instrumentation loop 323–324 streams 223, 230–232, 342–345
Conversion factor creating projects by importing
input units of measure 22, 79 templates 28
simulator units of measure 186 Crew mixes
Conversion rate modifying 122–123
currency 23 Crew size
Copy command IPS project schedule settings 169,
project components 328 653
Cost libraries Currency Conversion Rate 23
720 Index
Project Summary spreadsheet cost library items 461
(PROJSUM.ICS) 603 mappings 277
Currency Name 23 power distribution items 142
Currency Symbol 23 process control items 146
Project Summary spreadsheet projects and project scenarios 49
(PROJSUM.ICS) 603 specification files 239
Currency unit for matl cost 325 streams 232
Current Map List Delivery times
Project Component Map equipment classes 160
Specifications dialog box 189 project components 160–161
Custom Model Density
instructions 331–335 Develop Stream specifications
Preferences 56 form 227
Custom P&ID's Depreciation method
attaching to a component 419 Cashflow spreadsheet
setting as component’s default in (CASHFLOW.ICS) 610, 611, 614
active project only 420 Project Summary spreadsheet
setting as component's default 416 (PROJSUM.ICS) 605
Custom piping specs Depreciation Method
design basis 84–96 investment parameters 213
Custom Tasks command Design allowance 305
Tools menu 46 Design basis
Customer External Files editing 106
selecting in project 157 introduction 83
customer support 16 Design Criteria
Customized External Steel Costs specifications, project basis 195–
File 207
Exporting 243 Design deflection 305
customizing Design engineering 158
instrument field hook ups 245 Design pressure
Customizing Steel Costs Using an applying 2/3 rule for 199, 364
External File 239 design criteria specifications 195
Cut command sizing agitators 359
project components 328 sizing heat exchangers 365
Cyclone inlet linear velocity sizing towers 375
design criteria specifications 207 utility specifications 210
Design temperature
D design criteria specifications 195
sizing agitators 359
Data trending sizing heat exchangers 365
Aspen Icarus Reporter 594 sizing towers 375
Decision Analyzer command utility specifications 210
Run menu 45 Desired rate of return
DEFAULT.DAT 92 Cashflow spreadsheet
Delete a Construction Workforce 122 (CASHFLOW.ICS) 609
Delete button Executive Summary spreadsheet
Pipe Details form 321 (EXECSUM.ICS) 615
Delete Mappings command 277 Project Summary (PROJSUM.ICS)
Deleting spreadsheet 605
areas 331 Desired Rate of Return
components 330 investment parameters
contractors 150 specifications 213
cost libraries 464

Detail engineering 110 Durations
Develop Equipment Library Model IPS project schedule settings 170,
form 447 654
Develop Product Specifications dialog
box 221 E
Develop Schedule command
Run menu 45 e-bulletins 16
Develop Stream specifications form Economic Life of Project
225, 343, 345 investment parameters 213
Develop Streams dialog box 230, Economy - local and world,
231, 343, 344 escalation 107
Develop Utiltiy Specifications dialog Edit Connectivity button
box 208 toolbar 294, 295
Diameter option 305 Edit Connectivity command
Dimensions, areas 305, 306 View menu, PFD 293, 294
Direct costs editing
instrument field hook-ups 245 external steel material file 240
Directories EI (escalation indices) 109
project, locations - Preferences Electrical
56–61 installation bulk 325
Disciplines material costs and man-hours 315
engineering 111 specs, areas 305, 306
Disconnect command specs, design basis 98
streams 299 Electricity
Disconnected Streams dialog box operating unit costs specifications
299 217
Discounted Cash-Flow Rate of Return E-mail
See Internal Rate of Return reports 585, 586, 592
(IRR) EML See Equipment Model Library
Display results after evaluation (EML)
Preferences 54 Engineering
Docking 41 assigning responsibility for 154
Documentation 15 disciplines 111
Double-jointed pipe requirement drawings 113
pipeline area specifications 307 management 110
Draw Disconnected Stream button phases 110
toolbar 299 schedule 567
Draw Disconnected Stream workforce 148
command Engineer-Procure-Construct (EPC)
View menu, PFD 299 period
Draw Disconnected Stream Cashflow spreadsheet
command (CASHFLOW.ICS) 609
View menu, PFD 293 investment parameters 214
Drawing count Project Summary spreadsheet
engineering workforce (PROJSUM.ICS) 604
specifications 114 EQUIP.ICS
Drawing number 114, 115 investment analysis spreadsheets
Drawing type 601
engineering workforce Equipment
specifications 113 adding 306–308
Duct installation bulk 321 class delivery times 160
722 Index
item delivery times 160 Executive Summary spreadsheet
number 137, 138 614–16
rental 137–138 Exit command
specifications, areas 305, 306 Kbase File menu 46–48
specs, design basis 84 EXOPEN 303
Equipment Model Library (EML) Export to Excel Trending Report
adding an item to 446 dialog box
adding EML item as a component Aspen Icarus Reporter 596
447 Export to Excel Workbook dialog box
creating 444 Aspen Icarus Reporter 587, 591
definition 443 Export to Icarus SPECS File
Equipment Rental Summary report command
138 File menu 44
Equipment Summary Export Trend Data into Excel dialog
investment analysis spreadsheets box
601 Aspen Icarus Reporter 596
ERROR message 560 Exporting a Customized External
Escalating library costs 461 Steel Costs File 243
Escalation External Simulation Import Tool 47
Cashflow spreadsheet External Steel Costs File
(CASHFLOW.ICS) 610 Exporting customized 243
investment parameters 214 external steel file
Project Summary spreadsheet using 239
(PROJSUM.ICS) 605 external steel material file
specifications 107–109 editing 240
Estimate Class 76
Estimate Date 76 F
EU country base 23–24
Euro Facility Type
currency, General Project Data 23 investment parameters 215
Evaluate button FATAL message 560
Component Specifications form Field
312, 620 instrumentation, process control
Evaluate Item command 620 143
Evaluate Project button supervision, project schedule 158
toolbar 43, 559 Field hook-up assembly and parts
Evaluate Project command 245–252
Run menu 45, 559 Fieldbus system
Evaluation instrumentation specs, design
item 620 basis 97
Preferences 54 short-circuit protection 97
project 559 Fields group 55
Evaluation Engine 367, 598 File menu
Excavation and backfill Aspen Capital Cost Estimator
civil installation bulk 321 menu bar 44
Excel Custom Model files 331–335 Aspen Icarus Reporter menu
Excel reports bar 573
Auto Filter 593 Fireproofing
descriptions 589 insulation specs 100
opening 590 Fit into one page
EXECSUM.ICS 614–16 Zoom dialog box 270
Float in Main Window command 41
FLOOR 303

Flow rate units View menu, PFD 293, 294
product specifications 222 Grids
Fluid classes viewing in Block Flow Diagram
utility streams 209 (BFD) 272
Foaming tendency viewing in Process Flow Diagram
trayed towers, design criteria 202 (PFD) 294
Form work Grids Visible command
civil installation bulk 321 View menu, BFD 272
Fraction basis 227 Grout
Freeze Content button civil installation bulk 321
Properties Window 40
Fuel H
operating unit costs specifications
217 HD 325
Furnace fractional efficiency Heat exchangers
heat exchanger design criteria 199 design criteria specifications 199
sizing 363–366
utility specifications 207
G
help desk 16
G and A expenses Help menu 48
Cashflow spreadsheet HETP (height equivalent of a
(CASHFLOW.ICS) 610 theoretical plate)
Project Summary spreadsheet packed towers, design criteria 201
(PROJSUM.ICS) 604, 606 Historical Data 325
G and A Expenses Hook-ups
investment parameters 215 customizing 245–252
Galvanizing (for steel) extra wire for 97
civil/steel specs, design basis 97 instrumentation 97, 245–252
General and administrative costs Hot Inlet Stream field 347
Cashflow spreadsheet Hot Insulation Schedule 305
(CASHFLOW.ICS) 610 Hot Outlet Stream field 350
investment parameters 215 HTML reports
Project Summary spreadsheet descriptions 584
(PROJSUM.ICS) 604, 606 Item Report 54
General materials, escalation 107 opening 585, 586
General Project Data HYSIM
creating a new project scenario 23 map specs 192
defining the Project Basis 75 models used in sizing towers 369
General rates simulator report preparation 259–
construction workforce 261
specifications 116–119 HYSYS
General Wage Rate/Productivity map specs 193
specifications form 117 models used in sizing towers 369
GRADE 303
Gray borders I
Component Specifications form
312 Icarus Editor
Green borders printing report section 562
Component Specifications form reviewing results 561–69
312 toolbar 562
Grid Settings command Tools menu 46
724 Index
Icarus Evaluation Engine (IEE) 367, Input units of measure customization
598 21–22, 77–79
Icarus interface 29–42 Input Units of Measure Specifications
Icarus Project Component Selection dialog box 21, 79
dialog box 448, 455, 457 INSCLD##.DAT 100
Icarus Project Scheduler (IPS) See INSHOT##.DAT 100
Aspen Icarus Project Scheduler (IPS) Installation bulks
IEE See Icarus Evaluation Engine accessing 313
(IEE) civil 321
Import command duct 321
File menu 44 electrical 325
Libraries view, Palette 236, 462 instrumentation 322
Import Connected Streams option insulation 325
Preferences 56 introduction 313
Import Data command material man-hour additions 318
File menu, Aspen Icarus Reporter paint 325
573 pipe details 319
File menu, Aspen Icarus Reporter pipe spec 318
597 Preferences 54
Import Installation Bulks option steel 321
Preferences 56 Installation Details report 245
Import Selection dialog box Installation guide 15
Aspen Icarus Reporter 598 Installation, assigning responsibility
Importing for 154
areas 326 Instrument air
components 326 operating unit costs specifications
project from previous version 24– 217
26 instrument field hook-ups
scenarios 327 customizing 245
specification files 236 Instrument field hook-ups 245–252
Inasmbly.dat 245 Instrument volumetric model
Inch-Pound (IP), units of measure adding loop to 323
21, 234, 236 deleting loop on 323
Incomplete items 34 instrument bulk items 322–324
Indexing replacing loop on 323
Project Basis specifications 130 Instrumentation
Indicating signal customizing field hook-ups 245–
instrumentation loop 324 252
Indices Fieldbus system 97
escalation (EI) 109 installation bulk 322
system base 108 loop adjustments 323–324
user base 108 material costs and man-hours 315
Indirect costs specs, design basis 97
general wage rates 118 Insulation
Project Summary spreadsheet installation bulk 325
(PROJSUM.ICS) 606 material costs 315
reports 606 specs, design basis 100
Unit Cost Library (UCL) 444 Insulation Equivalent Length
Indirects field library 101
Wage General Info specifications Interactive sizing 339–352
form 118 Interactive Sizing form 274, 276,
INFOmational message 560 346, 350
Inparts.dat 245, 246, 247

Interface layour K
customizing 41
Interface layout Kbase Project Workflow 14
Save Window States option 54 KbaseLog.txt
understanding 29–42 Preferences, Logging 62
Internal Rate of Return (IRR) Known Issues 15
Cashflow spreadsheet K-Yen (KY)
(CASHFLOW.ICS) 609, 613 currency, General Project Data 23
Intrusion Detection Systems 99
Investment Analysis L
project specifications 211–223
Labor cost per unit
Investment Analysis View
Unit Cost Library (UCL) 453
View menu 601
Labor hours per unit
Investment Analysis View command
View menu 601
Labor Unit Costs
Investment Parameters
operating unit costs specifications
project specifications 211
216, 217
IP, units of measure 21, 234, 236
Laboratory charges
IPE 5.0/5.1
Project Summary spreadsheet
importing from 24–26
(PROJSUM.ICS) 604
IPS Also See Aspen Icarus Project
Laboratory Charges
Schedulaer (IPS)
investment parameters 214
IPS project schedule settings
Ladders, steel - installation bulks
activity adjustments 179, 664
321
appearance adjustments 164,
LAN 98
648
Large CCP Reports
displaying Also See Aspen Icarus Project
splitting 599
Schedulaer (IPS)
Length of delivered pipe section
duration adjustments 168, 653
pipeline area specifications 307
logic adjustments 173, 657
Length of Start-up Period
IRR See Internal Rate of Return
(IRR)
Length/fitting to remote shop
Item evaluation
85, 87
running 620
Libraries
sample item report 621
Basis for Capital Costs 77, 233
Item Report
cost libraries 331–464
instructions for running 620
Preferences 54
444
sample 621
moving to another directory 244
Item Report command 620
specification libraries 233–239
J view 36
Japan Licensor Quote 325
country base, General Project Data line sizing equation
23 creating 413
Job Number field 76 Line Sizing Equations 412
JP country base 23–24 Line sizing Tutorial 412
Junction boxes 143 Link Area command
instrumentation loop 324 process control 145
scope definitions 152
Link Control System command
726 Index
power distribution 141 Management reports 585–89
Link to Const. Work Force command Man-hour indexing 130
148 Manpower Productivity Expert
Link to Engg. Work Force command (MPE)
148 Tools menu 46
Linking Map All Items option
contractor sets to areas 152 Map dialog box 273
contractor sets to power Map command
distribution 152 pop-up menu 273
contractor sets to process control Map dialog box 273
152 Map Items button
Liquid entrainment method 204, 382 toolbar 272
List view Map Items command
description 33 Run menu 45, 272
mapped components 277 Map Selected Item(s) option
relationship to Project Explorer 33 Map dialog box 273
simulator file name 265 Mapping simulator models
Status column 277, 309 design criteria 195–207
Load Data button instructions 272–277
toolbar 265 specifications 189
Load Data command units of measure mapping specs
Run menu 265 185–188
Local economy, escalation 107 unsupported models 56
Locations Mass flow
preferences 59 Develop Stream specifications
Logging form 226
Preferences 62 Material adjustments
Logic modification indexing, area level 305
IPS project schedule settings 173, Material and man-hour additions 318
657 Material and man-hour adjustments
Loops 314
instrumentation field hook-ups 246 installation bulks 333
instrumentation installation bulks Material and man-hour indexing 130
322 Material cost per unit
modifications 323–324 Unit Cost Library (UCL) 453
LQ 325 Material costs
code of account allocations 127
M escalation 248
indexing 130
Magnification inparts.dat file 248
Block Flow Diagram (BFD) 269– Material Index Info form 131
270 Material piping specs 92
Main Area Material streams
default report group 302 product specifications 220
Main substations Mean temperature difference (MTD)
adding 140–141 364
Main Window Menu bar
display options 41 Aspen Capital Cost Estimator
interface, default position 30 46–48
printing 44 Aspen Icarus Reporter 573
understanding 32–33 Kbase 30
Make minimum schedule Merging Areas Into Projects 156
mandatory 96

Merging Projects 156 number of terminations 80
Meteorological Monitoring Systems Number of Weeks per Period
99 investment parameters 212
Metric, units of measure 21, 234,
236 O
Microsoft Access Database (.mdb)
file 598 OK button
Mixture button Develop Stream specifications
Develop Stream specifications form 225
form 225 Installation Bulks form 55, 314
Mixture Specs Mat'l Man-hour Adjustments form
developing streams 227 318
Modify command OPEN 303
simulator block 266 Open button
streams 299 toolbar 27, 43
Modify tab view Open command
Develop Streams dialog box 224 File menu 26, 44
MODULE 303 Palette Projects view 27
Monthly Rate field Open Workbook command
equipment rental specifications File menu, Aspen Icarus Reporter
138 573, 593
MTD See Mean temperature Operating and Maintenance Labor
difference (MTD) Escalation
Multi-core runs Cashflow spreadsheet
instrumentation loop 324 (CASHFLOW.ICS) 610
MUSE investment parameters 214
design criteria specifications 198 Project Summary spreadsheet
(PROJSUM.ICS) 605
Operating charges
N
Cashflow spreadsheet
Net Present Value (NPV) (CASHFLOW.ICS) 609
Cashflow spreadsheet investment parameters 214
(CASHFLOW.ICS) 613 Project Summary spreadsheet
Net Rate of Return (NRR) (PROJSUM.ICS) 606
Cashflow spreadsheet Operating costs
(CASHFLOW.ICS) 613 Cashflow spreadsheet
New command (CASHFLOW.ICS) 611
File menu 20, 24, 44 Executive Summary spreadsheet
New Component Information dialog 615
box 309 investment parameters 214
New Mapping button product specifications needed to
Project Component Map evaluate 221
Specifications dialog box 189 Project Summary spreadsheet
New Project button (PROJSUM.ICS) 604, 606
toolbar 20, 43 raw material specifications needed
no. of push buttons 81 to evaluate 218
NPV See Net Present Value (NPV) Operating hours per period
NRR See Net Rate of Return (NRR) Project Summary spreadsheet
Number of Periods for Analysis (PROJSUM.ICS) 604
investment parameters 212 total operating labor cost
Number of shifts 117 calculation 608
728 Index
total product sales calculation 607 PAGA 98
total supervision cost calculation Paging and General Alarm Systems
608 98
Operating Hours per Period Paint
investment parameters 216 material costs 315
Operating labor and maintenance specs, areas 305, 306
costs specs, design basis 106
investment parameters 215, 216 Palette
Operating Mode Components view 37, 38, 308
investment parameters 215 cost libraries 444–464
Operating supplies deleting a project from 50
Project Summary spreadsheet description 35–39
(PROJSUM.ICS) 604 docking and undocking 41
Operating Supplies dragging components from 308
investment parameters 214 floating in Main Window 41
Operating Unit Costs hide/display 38
project specifications 216–217 interface, default position 30
Operator center Libraries view 36, 233–239, 444–
adding 143–145 464
introduction, power distribution opening projects 27
143 Projects view 27, 36, 39, 50, 52,
Options button 59
Component Specifications form Recent Items folder 308
312, 313 specification libraries 233
Options menu unlocking projects from 52
Component Specifications form 55 View menu 46, 292
Options sub-menu Paste command
Tools menu 46 project components 328
Order Number 330 Period Description
Output (reports) units of measure investment parameters 212
customization 82 Phases
Overall column efficiency engineering 109
design criteria specifications 203 Pipe Details installation bulk 319
tower sizing 376 Pipe Spec installation bulk 318
Overdesign factor 351 Pipeline Also see Pipeline area;
heat exchangers 199, 365 Pipeline project; P&ID Editor;
pumps 196 Piping and instrumentation
Overwrite Project Backups option 54, drawings (P&ID’s)
56 fluid type, pipeline area
specifications 307
P internal lining type, pipeline area
specifications 307
P&ID See P&ID button; P&ID title, pipeline area specifications
Libraries; P&ID Editor; Piping 307
and instrumentation drawings Pipeline area
(P&ID’s) adding 307
P&ID button 319, 322, 415 allowing 23–24
P&ID Editor 412 editing 307
P3 setup 62 specifications 307
Packed towers Pipeline project
design criteria specifications 200 creating 23–24
sizing 380 description 23–24
PAD 303

Piping introduction 139
installation bulks 318, 319–321 linking to Consets 152
material costs and man-hours 314 links to areas 141
specs, design basis 84–96 links to control systems 141
volumetric model \r 320 Power supply frequency
Piping and instrumentation drawings electrical specs 98
(P&ID’s) Precooler
Editor 412 suffix for mapping 275
manual 319, 322 tower configurations 279, 371, 373
printing 415 Preferences
sending through electronic mail accessing 53
415 Backup tab view 55
Piping specifications buttons 53
areas 305, 306 description 53
Piping volumetric model General tab view 53
adding lines to 320 introduction 53
changing lines on 321 Locations tab view 56–61
deleting lines on 321 Logging tab view 62
replacing lines on 321 Process tab view 56
Plant bulks 301 prompts 53
Plant capacity saving window states 54
changing 465 Schedule 62
Plant overhead Spreadsheet Views tab 55
Cashflow spreadsheet Tools menu 46
(CASHFLOW.ICS) 609 Prepared By field
Project Summary spreadsheet General Project Data 76
(PROJSUM.ICS) 604, 606 Primary fluid component 225, 227,
Plant Overhead 343
investment parameters 215 Primavera Information 183, 668
Platforms, steel - installation bulks Primavera user name 62
322 Prime contractor 147
PLC (Programmable Logic Control) Print command
center Kbase File menu 44
adding 143–145 Print Preview command
introduction, power distribution File menu 44
143 Print Setup command
Ports Visible button File menu 44
toolbar 294 Printing
Ports Visible command Aspen Icarus Reporter 578
View menu, PFD 293 forms and reports in Main
Potable water Window 44
operating unit costs specifiations Icarus Editor 562
217 Pro/II
utilities costs, Project Summary map specs 193
spreadsheet (PROJSUM.ICS) models used in sizing towers 369
608 R/R minimum 200
Pounds (PS) simulator report preparation 262–
currency, General Project Data 23 264
Power distribution Problem description
adding items 140–141 SimSci report preparation 263
deleting items 142 Process connection
730 Index
intrumentation loop 324 Project Properties 74
Process control specification libraries 233
adding items 143–145 Streams 223–233
deleting items 146 view 30
editing items 144 Project Capital Escalation
introduction 143 Cashflow spreadsheet
linking to a contractor set 152 (CASHFLOW.ICS) 610
linking to contractor sets 152 investment parameters 214
links to areas 145 Project Summary spreadsheet
Process Design specifications 162– (PROJSUM.ICS) 605
210 Project component
Process equipment 301 connecting to stream 295
Process Flow Diagrams (PFD) 290– Project Component Map Preview
299 dialog box 274, 276, 278
Process Fluids Project Component Map
investment parameters 216 Specifications
Process options dialog box 188
Preferences 56 project specifications, Process
Process Stream field Design 188–194
product specifications 222 Project components
raw material specifications 219 adding 308
Process vessel height to diameter component specifications 311
ratio copying 328
design criteria specifications 203 deleting 330
vessel sizing procedure 385, 387 Equipment Model Library (EML)
Procurement items 447
engineering phases 110 importing 326
schedule settings 158 installation bulks 313
Product specifications re-numbering 330
investment analysis specifications scheduling 160–161
220–223 Unit Cost Library (UCL) item 454
Productivity adjustments 118 Project Data Sheet
Products Escalation reports, Icarus Editor 565
Cashflow spreadsheet Project Description
(CASHFLOW.ICS) 610 Project Summary spreadsheet
investment parameters 214 (PROJSUM.ICS) 602
Project Summary spreadsheet Project Description field
(PROJSUM.ICS) 605 Project Properties 21, 75
Profitability Index (PI) 614 Project directories
Programmable Logic Control (PLC) alternate directories 59
centers copying 52
adding 143–145 default, setting 61
introduction, power distribution Project evaluation
143 Preferences 54
Project areas See Areas running 559
Project Basis scan for errors 54, 559
Basis for Capital Costs 76–162 Project execution schedule settings
default specifications 233 project basis specifications 158–
General Project Data 75 162
introduction 73 Project Explorer 30
Investment Analysis 211–223 docking and undocking 41
Process Design 162–210 floating in Main Window 41

interface, default position 30 Preferences 53
relation to Palette 35 Properties Window
View menu 46, 292 description 39
Project in use - message 51 docking and undocking 41
Project Indirect Summary report floating in Main Window 41
equipment rental items 138 Freeze Content button 40
Project menu interface, default position 30
Contracts command 146 relationship to specifications form
Project Name 39, 312
Aspen Plus - Aspen Process View menu 46, 292
Economic Analyzer simulator PROVISION See SimSci's Pro/II with
link 257, 261 PROVISION
Project Summary spreadsheet Pump overdesign factor
(PROJSUM.ICS) 602 design criteria specifications 196,
Project Name field 367
creating a new project 20 sizing procedures 366, 367
Project Properties Pumps
creating a new project 21 design criteria specifications 196
defining the Project Basis 74 sizing 340
Project scenarios
creating new 20–24 Q
deleting 49
importing 327 Question mark in Status column 309,
salvaging 50 311
saving 48 component specifications 277
unlocking 51 Quoted cost item
Project Schedule Data Sheet mapping overhead/bottoms split to
reports, Icarus Editor 567 371
Project Summary mapping unsupported models to
reports, Icarus Editor 564 56
spreadsheet, reviewing investment Quoted cost items
analysis 602–8 mapping unsupported models to
Project Title 603 189
General Project Data 76 Quoted cost per item 325
Project Type Quoted equipment 301, 313
Executive Summary spreadsheet
616 R
(PROJSUM.ICS) 603 Radio Systems 98
Project view 32 Rate field
projects product specifications 222
creating from imported templates raw material specifications 219
28 Rate Units field
Projects product specifications 222
copying 52 raw material specifications 219
creating 20–24 Raw material
deleting 49 costs, project specifications 220
view 36, 39 escalation 214
PROJSUM.ICS spreadsheet project specifications 217–220
description 602–8 Raw Material Costs
Prompts
732 Index
Executive Summary spreadsheet Reporter See Aspen Icarus Reporter
615 Reporting Assistant 616–20
Project Summary spreadsheet Reports
(PROJSUM.ICS) 605, 607 customizing 616–20
Raw Material Escalation data trending 594–96
Cashflow spreadsheet Excel 585–93
(CASHFLOW.ICS) 610 HTML 584–85
investment parameters 214 Item report 620
Project Summary spreadsheet Management reports 585
(PROJSUM.ICS) 605 producing 620
Raw Material Specifications Standard reports 574–84
investment analysis, project basis Reroute All Streams command
217–220 Run menu 291
Rebar Reset button
civil installation bulk 321 Develop Stream specifications
Recent Items folder 308 form 225
Reconnect Sink command Residence time
stream, Process Flow Diagrams design criteria specifications 202,
(PFD) 299 203, 204
Reconnect Source command sizing crystallizers 361
streams, Process Flow Diagram sizing vessels 382, 384, 387
(PFD) 299 Re-Size command
Red borders project component pop-up menu
Component Specifications form 274, 341
312 Rotating equipment spares 305
Refrigerant 348 Run menu 45
Relation attributes 598 Run Report command
Relative Basis File menu, Aspen Icarus Reporter
streams 297 573
Remarks field
project properties 21, 75 S
Rental action code 137, 138
Rental Days Required field Sales
equipment rental specifications Cashflow spreadsheet
137, 138 (CASHFLOW.ICS) 609, 610
Re-number command Project Summary spreadsheet
Run menu 45, 330, 331 (PROJSUM.ICS) 605, 607, 608
Re-numbering Salvage Project As dialog box 50
areas 331 Salvage Value
project components 330 Project Summary (PROJSUM.ICS)
Report Editor 46 605
Report files Salvage Value (Percent of Initial
Reporting Assistant 617 Capital Cost)
Report groups impact on depreciation 213
adding 301 investment parameters 213
deleting 302 Salvaging project scenarios 50
Preferences, deletion prompt 54 Sample_Inasmbly.dat 245, 246
Preferences, display 54 Sample_Inparts.dat 245, 247
renaming 302 Save As command
showing, Preferences option 32 File menu 44, 48
Report templates Save button
Reporting Assistant 617 toolbar 43, 48
Save command

File menu 44, 48 View menu, BFD 272
Save Project As dialog box 49 View menu, PFD 293
Save Window States checkbox Sieve tray design 378
Preferences 54 Signal cabling, instrumentation -
Saving installation bulks 322
cached information 50 SimSci's Pro/II with PROVISION
project scenarios 48 map specs 193
window states 54 models used in sizing towers 369
SBI (System Base Indices), R/R minimum 200, 381
escalation 108 SHORTCUT column operation 381
Scan for Errors before evaluation simulator report preparation 262–
Preferences 54 264
Scan for Errors command Simulation reports
Run menu 45 Aspen Plus 254–256, 369, 371
Scan Messages 560 ChemCAD 258–259
Scenario Description HYSIM 259–261, 369, 371
Project Summary spreadsheet HYSYS 369, 371
(PROJSUM.ICS) 603 loading 32
Scenario Name field Pro/II 262–264, 369
Create New Project dialog box 20, selecting 265
25 Simulation units 187
Save Project As dialog box 49 Simulator data
Scenarios loading 264
creating 20–24 mapping 272–277
deleting 49 mapping specifications 189
importing 24, 327 unsupported models 56
salvaging 50 Simulator File Name
saving 48 project specifications, Process
unlocking 51 Design 264
Schedule Simulator Type
Project Schedule Data Sheet 567 Executive Summary spreadsheet
settings 158–162 616
Schedule Adjustments project specifications, Process
specifications form 158–159 Design 264
Scheduling and cost tracking Project Summary spreadsheet
user name, Preferences 62 (PROJSUM.ICS) 602
Screens Simulator Units of Measure Mapping
design criteria specifications 207 Specs
Seismic data project specifications, Process
civil/steel specs 96 Design 185–188
Select command Single Component Summary Report
Project Basis pop-up menu 244 Preferences 54
Select Import Type dialog box 26 Single Source Quote 325
Sensor Site development 301
instrumentation loop 323–324 Size button 339, 346
Separation factor Size Icarus Project Component(s)
design criteria specifications 204 options
sizing vessels 382 Map dialog box 274
SG 325 Size Item option 296, 339
Shop fab maximum diameter 305 Sizing
Show Page Bounds calculations 356–387
734 Index
ChemCAD items 259 moving to another directory 244
defaults 356–387 specifying
HYSIM items 260 split file size 600
mapped components 274, 276, split file size
339 specifying 600
overview 339 Splitting Very Large CCP Reports 599
parameters 194, 199, 200, 201, SPREAD, escalation 108
202, 204, 205, 207 Spreadsheet Views 55
requirements 356–387 Spreadsheets
Sizing Expert 208, 274, 296, 339– customizing 616–20
352 viewing investment analysis 601
Sizing Method field SQL database
Equipment Model Library (EML) exporting to Microsoft Access 598
447 SS 325
sizing parameter symbols 449 Stairs, steel - installation bulks 322
Slot Template dialog box 129 Standard Basis
Snap to Grid checkbox file, changing location 61
Grid properties 294 file, selecting 244
Snap to Grid command input file, General Project Data
View menu, BFD 272 76
View menu, PFD 293 Standard reports
Solids handling information descriptions 574
design criteria specifications 207 navigating 576
Source opening 575
Map dialog box 273 printing 578
Source of quote 325 searching 578
Spare parts Starting program 17, 634
equipment specs, design basis 84 Start-up period, length
SPC center investment parameters 215
adding 143–145 Startup, commissioning
introduction, power distribution engineering phases 110
143 Status bar 30
Specialty center View menu 46, 292
adding 143–145 Status column
introduction, power distribution List view 277, 309
143 Steam utility 348
Specification basis Steel
product specifications 222 design basis specifications 96
raw material specifications 219 fireproofing - insulation specs 100
Specification files galvanizing cost civil/steel specs,
creating 234 design basis 97
deleting 239 installation bulk 321
duplicating 237 material costs and man-hours 314
importing 236 specifications, areas 305, 306
introduction 233 Streams
modifying 235 absolute basis 231
moving to another directory 244 adding 296
selecting 244 basis mode 231
selecting for use in project 244 connecting to equipment during
Specification libraries sizing 345–352
customizing 234 connectivity, Process Flow Diagram
introduction 233 (PFD) 294

creating 296 Template files
creating from Project Explorer 223, Reporting Assistant 618
230–232, 342–345 templates
deleting 232, 299 adding 28
material 220 creating projects from 28
modifying 224 Templates Tab 41
process 222 terminations
product specifications 220 number of 80
relative basis 231 Tile command
Streams List command Window menu 33, 47
View menu, BFD 272 Timed backup 55
View menu, PFD 293 Timed Recovery 55
Stress relief option 305 Toolbar
structural steel members buttons 43
specifying weight break-down for description 43
242 docking 43
Subcooling interface, default position 30
tower configurations 279 View menu 46, 292
Subtype 128 Tools menu 46
Suffixes Total Manpower Schedule
mapping 275 reports, Icarus Editor 566
Supervision Total pipeline length
costs, Project Summary pipeline area specifications 307
spreadsheet (PROJSUM.ICS) Total project cost
608 Cashflow spreadsheet
number of supervisors per shift, (CASHFLOW.ICS) 609
Project Summary spreadsheet Tower configurations
(PROJSUM.ICS) 608 mapping 275, 280–288, 370–373
wage rate, Project Summary Transducers
spreadsheet (PROJSUM.ICS) instrumentation loop 324
608 Transmission lines
support, technical 16 adding 140–141
System Base Indices (SBI), Transmitters, instrumentation -
escalation 108 installation bulks 322
System cost base data Trayed towers
Project Summary (PROJSUM.ICS) design criteria specifications 201
603 sizing 376, 377, 380
Systems Tree diagrams
power distribution 139–142 Contractors 146–150
process control 143–146 Power Distribution 139–142
Process Control 143–146
T Scope 150–155
Trend menu, Aspen Icarus Reporter
Tax Rate 573, 595
Cashflow spreadsheet Trending database reports 594–96
(CASHFLOW.ICS) 609 Trim cooler
investment parameters 213 suffix for mapping 275
Project Summary spreadsheet tower configurations 279, 371, 373
(PROJSUM.ICS) 604 Type definition, area 305, 306
technical support 16
Telephone Systems 98
736 Index
U costs 608, 615
escalation 605, 610
UBI (User base indices), escalation list of availiable utility resources
108 348
UCL See Unit Cost Library (UCL) usage estimation 228
UK country base 23–24 Utilities Escalation
Unique Project Backup options 56 Cashflow spreadsheet
Unit Cost field (CASHFLOW.ICS) 610
product specifications 223 investment parameters 214
raw material specifications 220 Project Summary spreadsheet
Unit Cost Library (UCL) (PROJSUM.ICS) 605
adding an item to 452 Utility costs
adding UCL item to a project 454 heat-transfer utilities 210
creating 451 non-heat transfer utilities 217
definition 444 Utility Specifications
Unit substations project specifications 207–210
adding 140–141 Utility stream
linking to areas 141 creating 208
United Kingdom modifying 208
country base, General Project Data Utility Unit Costs
23 operating unit costs specifications
United States (non-heat transfer utilities) 217
country base, General Project Data utility specifications (heat-transfer
23 utilities) 210
Units of measure
input customization 21, 77
output (reports) customization 82 V
project properties 21 Valve tray sizing 379
Project Summary spreadsheet Valves
(PROJSUM.ICS) 603 Design Basis instrumentaton specs
Unit Cost Library (UCL) 453 97
Units of Measure group 55 instrumentation installation bulks
Units of Measure Specification dialog 323
box 186 piping installation bulks 320
Unlink command Vapor disengagement height
contractors 148 towers, design criteria 200
power distribution 142 VB 325
Unlock command 51 VBL 325
Unsupported simulator models Vendor Budget Quote 325
Preferences 56 Vendor Budget Quote Long Lead 325
Update button Vendor Firm Quote 325
Develop Stream specifications Vendor Firm Quote Long Lead 325
form 225 Vessel
US country base 23–24 design criteria specifications 205–
USD 207
currency, General Project Data 23 height to diameter ratio 203, 385,
User base indices (UBI), escalation 387
108 sizing 340, 381
User Custom Model 331–335 VF 325
UserData folder 245 VFL 325
using View Existing Trend Data command
external steel file 239 Trend menu, Aspen Icarus
Utilities Reporter 573, 597

View menu 46, 292 Z
Voltage levels
electrical specs 98 Zoom
Volumetric models Aspen Icarus Reporter 576
instrumentation installation bulk Block Flow Diagram (BFD) 269–
322–323 270
introduction, main features 13
piping installation bulk 320–321
W
Wages
construction workforce 115–120
WARNing message 560
web site, technical support 16
Weld efficiency 305
What-You-See-Is-What-You-Get
Zoom dialog box 270
Wind data
civil/steel specs 96
Wind design required 305
Window menu 47
Window states, saving 54
Wire distribution system
electrical specs 98
Workbook mode
understanding 32–33
View menu 46, 292
Workforce reference base
General Wage Rates 118
Workforces
construction 115–120
linking to contractors 148
Working capital
(CASHFLOW.ICS) 611
Working capital percentage
(CASHFLOW.ICS) 609
(PROJSUM.ICS) 604
Working Capital Percentage
World economy, escalation 107
WYSIWYG
Zoom dialog box 270
Y
Yen
currency, General Project Data 23
738 Index

Aspen Capital Cost Estimator Users Guide PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Aspen Capital Cost Estimator Users Guide PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Aspen Capital Cost Estimator

Aspen Technology, Inc.

Introducing Aspen Capital Cost Estimator .............................................................13

2 Defining the Project Basis ..................................................................................73

3 Loading and Mapping Simulation Data .............................................................257

4 Defining Report Groups, Areas, and Project Components .................................305

5 Sizing Project Components...............................................................................343

6 Piping and Instrumentation Models .................................................................393

7 Developing and Using Cost Libraries ................................................................447

8 Changing Plant Capacity and Location..............................................................469

9 Aspen Utility Modules .......................................................................................487

10 Evaluating the Project ....................................................................................563

12 Getting Started With IPS ................................................................................631

13 IPS Project Schedule Settings ........................................................................651

IPS Appendix A: Engineering and Procurement Activity Numbers .......................675

Appendix B: Site Development and Construction Activity Numbers.....................699

Appendix C: Equipment Class Definitions ............................................................705

Appendix D: Equipment Codes.............................................................................707

Appendix E: Tutorial ............................................................................................711

Aspen Capital Cost Estimator, formerly known as Aspen Kbase, is a fully

Introducing Aspen Capital Cost Estimator 13

Aspen Capital Cost Estimator

14 Introducing Aspen Capital Cost Estimator

Known Issues and Workarounds

Introducing Aspen Capital Cost Estimator 15

Piping and Instrumentation Drawings

This Web support site lets you:

16 Introducing Aspen Capital Cost Estimator

Starting Aspen Capital Cost

To start Aspen Capital Cost Estimator:

3 Point to Economic Evaluation 8.0; then click Aspen Capital Cost

Your selection makes certain features of the selected product available in

Creating a New Project Scenario

 Click on the toolbar.

Note: Under Preferences, you can create scenarios in project directories

3 Either select an existing project in which to start a new scenario, or enter

6 Enter a Project Description. The description can be up to 500 characters in

C Click OK to accept the modifications and return to the previous dialog

Most specifications on this form can be entered later by selecting General

Selecting Country Base and Currency

Allowing Pipeline Areas

A pipeline project has no multiple contractors.

Suppressing Default Equipment/Area/Project Bulks

with these and other features now available on the interface.

Importing a Project Scenario

To import a project scenario:

 On the toolbar, click .

2 Either select an existing project in which to start a new scenario, or enter

2 Select the project scenario folder and click OK.

Opening an Existing Project

 On the toolbar, click .

...\AspenTech\Economic Evaluation V8.0\Data\Archives_Aspen Capital Cost

Working with Templates

Creating a Project by Importing a Template

Note: When opening a project from a template, or opening a template itself,

Understanding the Icarus

The Icarus interface includes the following features:

Palette Allows access to libraries, projects, components, and

Status Bar Displays Aspen Capital Cost Estimator system status.

To expand a tree level:

To condense a tree level:

Project Explorer Views

Process View displays simulator data information. In this view, simulator